V730e BT04 PRP - Kti105937 - 3 - 00

P R E L I M I N A R Y (MAY 27, 2008)
E_BT04_COVER.FM
GE Healthcare
Voluson® 730Expert
Proprietary Service Manual
• Voluson® 730Expert systems with Serial number A10001 - A11999

• Voluson® 730Expert systems with Software version SW4.x.x (BT04)
• Voluson® 730Expert systems that were upgraded to BT05 (SW5.x.x)
• Voluson® 730Expert systems that were upgraded to BT08 (SW5.4.0 or higher)
ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

PROPERTY OF GE HEALTHCARE.
USE OF THESE MATERIALS LIMITED TO AGENTS
AND
EMPLOYEES OF GE HEALTHCARE OR OTHER
PARTIES EXPRESSLY LICENSED BY GE HEALTHCARE.
UNLICENSED USE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED
Part Number: KTI105937

Revision: 3
0123
GE HEALTHCARE - KRETZTECHNIK PROPRIETARY TO GE VOLUSON® 730EXPERT (BT04)
DIRECTION KTI105937, REVISION 3 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
WARNING
WARNING • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
(EN)
(EN) MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
AVERTISSEMENT • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
(FR) MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
WARNUNG
• VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
(DE) KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
- i
• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, LA TRADUCCIÓN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE.
AVISO
• NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
(ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM

INGLÊS.
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
ATENÇÃO
(PT) • NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
AVVERTENZA • SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
(IT) AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
• KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
HOIATUS
• ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA
(ET) TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE
VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.
ii -
• TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

• JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELISTÄ MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KÄÄNNÖKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
VAROITUS
• ÄLÄ YRITÄ KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT
(FI) JA YMMÄRTÄNYT TÄMÄN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
• MIKÄLI TÄTÄ VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA
PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON KÄYTTÄJÄN TAI POTILAAN
VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN
VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.
• ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ∆ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.

• ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ, ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ
ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ.
• ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
(EL) ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ.
• ΕΑΝ ∆Ε ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ, ΕΝ∆ΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΝΑ
ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ, ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ Ή
ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ, ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟΥΣ.
• EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHETŐ

EL.
• HA A VEVŐ SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉRŐ NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT,
AKKOR A VEVŐ FELELŐSSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS • NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A
(HU)
KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK.
• EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ,
MŰKÖDTETŐ VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB
VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI.
• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

• EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN
ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU.
• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG
VIÐVÖRUN
(IS) SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK.
• EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.
- iii
• TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.

• V PŘÍPADĚ, ŽE POSKYTOVATEL SLUŽEB ZÁKAZNÍKŮM POTŘEBUJE NÁVOD
V JINÉM JAZYCE, JE ZAJIŠTĚNÍ PŘEKLADU DO ODPOVÍDAJÍCÍHO JAZYKA
ÚKOLEM ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NEPROVÁDĚJTE ÚDRŽBU TOHOTO ZAŘÍZENÍ, ANIŽ BYSTE SI PŘEČETLI
VÝSTRAHA TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
(CS)
• V PŘÍPADĚ NEDODRŽOVÁNÍ TÉTO VÝSTRAHY MŮŽE DOJÍT ÚRAZU
ELEKTRICKÁM PROUDEM PRACOVNÍKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUŽEB,
OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENTŮ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP
PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO
JINÉMU RIZIKU.
• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.

• HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.
ADVARSEL
• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
(DA) DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET.
• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE
PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
• DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

VERKRIJGBAAR.
• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
WAARSCHUWING • PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
(NL) ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
• ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.

• JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZĒJAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORMĀCIJA CITĀ
VALODĀ, NEVIS ANGĻU, KLIENTA PIENĀKUMS IR NODROŠINĀT TULKOŠANU.
BRÎDINÂJUMS • NEVEICIET APRĪKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATAS
(LV) IZLASĪŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS.
• ŠĪ BRĪDINĀJUMA NEIEVĒROŠANA VAR RADĪT ELEKTRISKĀS STRĀVAS
TRIECIENA, MEHĀNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISĪTU TRAUMU APKALPES
SNIEDZĒJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.
iv -
• ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA IŠLEISTAS TIK ANGLŲ KALBA.

• JEI KLIENTO PASLAUGŲ TEIKĖJUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE ANGLŲ,
VERTIMU PASIRŪPINTI TURI KLIENTAS.
ĮSPĖJIMAS
• NEMĖGINKITE ATLIKTI ĮRANGOS TECHNINĖS PRIEŽIŪROS DARBŲ, NEBENT
(LT) VADOVAUTUMĖTĖS ŠIUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR JĮ SUPRASTUMĖTE
• NEPAISANT ŠIO PERSPĖJIMO, PASLAUGŲ TEIKĖJAS, OPERATORIUS AR
PACIENTAS GALI BŪTI SUŽEISTAS DĖL ELEKTROS SMŪGIO, MECHANINIŲ AR
KITŲ PAVOJŲ.
• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.

• HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
ADVARSEL
• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
(NO) SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.
• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
• NINIEJSZY PODRĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĘZYKU

ANGIELSKIM.
• JEŚLI FIRMA ŚWIADCZĄCA KLIENTOWI USłUGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA
UDOSTĘPNIENIA PODRĘCZNIKA W JĘZYKU INNYM NIŻ ANGIELSKI,
OBOWIĄZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO TłUMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA
KLIENCIE.
OSTRZEŻENIE
(PL) • NIE PRÓBOWAĆ SERWISOWAĆ NINIEJSZEGO SPRZĘTU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO
ZAPOZNANIA SIĘ Z PODRĘCZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM.
• NIEZASTOSOWANIE SIĘ DO TEGO OSTRZEŻENIA MOżE GROZIĆ
OBRAŻENIAMI CIAłA SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU
PORAŻENIA PRĄDEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU
ZAGROŻEŃ.
• ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.

• DACĂ UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENŢI NECESITĂ O ALTĂ LIMBĂ
DECÂT CEA ENGLEZĂ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI SĂ FURNIZEZE O
TRADUCERE.
ATENŢIE • NU ÎNCERCAŢI SĂ REPARAŢI ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR
(RO)
CONSULTĂRII ŞI ÎNŢELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.
• IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RĂNIREA
DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA
PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALTĂ NATURĂ.
- v
• ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТСЯ

ТОЛЬКО НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ.
• ЕСЛИ СЕРВИСНОМУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ КЛИЕНТА НЕОБХОДИМО РУКОВОДСТВО
НЕ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ, КЛИЕНТУ СЛЕДУЕТ САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНО
ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ ПЕРЕВОД.
ОСТОРОЖНО! • ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО ОБРАТИТЕСЬ
(RU) К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ.
• НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ УКАЗАННЫХ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ МОЖЕТ ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ,
ЧТО СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ТЕХОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ, ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ
ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЗЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ, МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ
ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ.
• TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRUČKA JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE.

• AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO
ANGLIČTINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE
ZODPOVEDNOSŤOU ZÁKAZNÍKA.
UPOZORNENIE
• NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVAŤ SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI
(SK) NEPREČÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRUČKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ.
• ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIŤ DO ZRANENIA
POSKYTOVATEĽA SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJÚCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA
ELEKTRICKÝM PRÚDOM, PRÍPADNE DO MECHANICKÉHO ALEBO INÉHO
NEBEZPEČENSTVA.
• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.

• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA
ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
VARNING • FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST
(SV) OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
• BU SERVİS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA İNGİLİZCE OLARAK SAĞLANMIŞTIR.

• EĞER MÜŞTERİ TEKNİSYENİ KILAVUZUN İNGİLİZCE DIŞINDAKİ BİR DİLDE
OLMASINI İSTERSE, KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİNİN
SORUMLULUĞUNDADIR.
DİKKAT • SERVİS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA MÜDAHALE
(TR) ETMEYİNİZ.
• BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI EDİLMESİ, ELEKTRİK ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKANİK
VEYA DİĞER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNİSYENİN, OPERATÖRÜN
YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABİLİR.
vi -
(JA)
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
- vii
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual
title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.
Mail the information to:
Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE Healthcare employees should use the iTrak System to report all documentation errors or omissions.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

!! DANGER:
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
!! WARNING:
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
viii -
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE Healthcare.
GE Healthcare - Kretztechnik may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
PROPRIETARY TO GE HEALTHCARE
Permission to use this Advanced Service Software and related documentation (herein called the
material) by persons other than GE Healthcare employees is provided only under an Advanced Service
Package License relating specifically to this Proprietary Material. This is a different agreement from the
one under which operating and basic service software is licensed. A license to use operating or basic
service software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation.
If you are a GE Healthcare employee or a customer who has entered into such a license agreement
with GE Healthcare (resp. GE Medical Systems) to use this proprietary software, you are authorized to
use this Material according to the conditions stated in your license agreement.
However, you do not have the permission of GE Healthcare to alter, decompose or reverse-assemble
the software, and unless you are a GE employee, you may not copy the Material.
The Material is protected by Copyright and Trade Secret laws; the violation of which can result in civil
damages and criminal prosecution.
If you are not party to such a license agreement or a GE Healthcare employee, you must exit this
Material now.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright© 2004 - 2008 by General Electric Inc. All Rights Reserved.
- ix
Revision History
Revision Date Reason for change

1 October 29, 2004 Initial Release (from Software Version 4.0.x onwards)
general update and modification + implementation of service conditions
2 October 14, 2005
for systems that were upgraded to BT05 (SW 5.x.x installed)
general update, implementaion of new parts, release of Software version 4.0.7
3 May 2008
implementation of service conditions for systems that were upgraded to BT08 (SW 5.4.0 or higher)
List of Effected Pages
Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Chapter 2 - Site Preparation Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Title Page 3
pages 2-1 to 2-10 3 pages 7-1 to 7-98 3
Important Precautions
Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures
(incl. Legal Notes)
3 pages 3-1 to 3-68 3 pages 8-1 to 8-178 3
pages i to ix
Rev History/LOEP Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts

page x 3 pages 4-1 to 4-48 3 pages 9-1 to 9-46 3
Chapter 5 - Components and

Table of Contents Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance
3 Functions (Theory) 3 3
pages xi to xIiv pages 10-1 to 10-32
pages 5-1 to 5-110
Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Index

pages 1-1 to 1-12 3 pages 6-1 to 6-18 3 pages I to VIII 3
Back Cover 3
x -
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Voluson® 730Expert Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
System History - Hardware and Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Mechanical Safety .........................................1-7
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
Table of Contents xi
CHAPTER 2
Site Preparation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Voluson® 730Expert Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Main Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Physical Dimensions of Voluson® 730Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Weight without Monitor and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Acoustic Noise Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Mandatory Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Site Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Recommended Ultrasound Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
xii Table of Contents

CHAPTER 3
Setup Instructions
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Moving/Lifting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
System Acclimation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Control Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Preparing for Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connection of Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Monitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Foot Switch Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
ECG-preamplifier Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Global Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
S-VHS Video Recorder Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Sony SVO-9500MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection ............................. 3 - 15
Adjustment of the DVD Recorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Changing TV System (Video Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Change the Region Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
B/W Video Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Line Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Digital Color Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Bluetooth Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Canon Pixma MP600 / MP610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
External USB-Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
External USB-Devices - Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
External USB-Devices - Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Table of Contents xiii

Completing the Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26

Connecting the Unit to a Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
Transducer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29
Printer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Install the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD printer software/driver . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Installing Bluetooth Deskjet Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software . . 3 - 35
Configuration of the Bluetooth Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
Prepare the Printer and connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter . . . . 3 - 40
Canon Printer - Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter . . . . 3 - 40
HP/Olivetti Printer - Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter 3 - 40
Installing the printer software/driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
Install Canon MP600 / MP610 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
Install HP Deskjet series printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44
Printer Installation manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46
Adjustment of Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
HP 990cxi / HP 995c - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 53
Remote Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 55
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56
To invoke the Setup procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56
How to enter Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
How to enter Hospital Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
How to change Language (and/or EUM Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
How to change Touch Panel Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
How to change Video Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59
External I/O Connection Panel (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61
Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62
Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63
xiv Table of Contents

Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63
Network IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64

Map Network Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 65
Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 66
Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67
Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67
Table of Contents xv
CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
2D Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
Additional (optional) Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
B-Flow Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
XTD-View Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Coded Contrast Imaging Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
MCFM Mode Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Spectral Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Color Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Volume Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Pre-Volume Mode Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Functions after the 3D Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Cine-Split Function (Multiple Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating 2D Auto Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Spectral Doppler- or M Cine Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating 3D Rotation Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating Volume Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating Auto Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Generic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements (2D and M Mode) . . . . . 4 - 22
Circumference/Area Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Volume Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Multiplane Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
xvi Table of Contents
Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24

Auto Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Manual Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Heart Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Worksheet (Report) Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Connecting a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Activating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Deactivating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Disconnecting the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Image Management (Sonoview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Using the optional MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Formatting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
Adjusting the Write Speed of the DVD/CD Recorder. . . . . . . 4 - 30
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31

Save User Settings Only (Application Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 32
Load User Settings Only (Application Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . . 4 - 35
Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . . 4 - 37
Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . 4 - 39
Archiving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
ECG Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43

Rotation of the Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43
Brakes and Direction Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44
Site Log - System (Service Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44
To review the Service Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 45
Site Log - Paper Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
Table of Contents xvii

CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Description of Voluson® 730Expert Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
B-Mode or 2D-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
XTD-View (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
B-Flow (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Coded Contrast Imaging (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Color Doppler Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Color Flow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Power Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Tissue Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Bi-Directional Angio (HD-Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Pulsed (PW) Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
3D Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
3D Data Collection and Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
3D Image Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
3D Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Block diagram Voluson® 730Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Data Flow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Special B-Mode Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler) . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
D-Mode Autotrace (draws PC-calculated envelope to D-Spectrum) . 5 - 14
CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
3D-Mode (Freezes after 1 volume sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Real Time 4D-Mode (nonstop volume rendering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging) . . . 5 - 15
VCI-Mode (Volume Contrast Imaging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Extern-Video-Mode (display Video from Video-Recorder) . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Sonoview write mode (store Image to Sonoview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Description of Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Real Time 4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
DICOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Real Time 4D-Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
VOCAL II - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
XTD-View (Extended View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
xviii Table of Contents
XBeam CRI - CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging . . . . . . . 5 - 19

B-Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Coded Contrast Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
SRI or SRI II - Speckle Reduction Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
T.U.I - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
SonoVCAD Heart- Computer Assisted Heart Diagnosis Package . . 5 - 20
Description of Hardware Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
CW - Continuous Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
ECG Preamplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Scan/Freeze Foot switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Global Modem (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
Data Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Main board Chassis GEF Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
FrontEnd Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
FrontEnd - Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
CPU - Probe Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
CPR - Beamformer-Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
CPD - Beamformer Sub-board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
CPZ - Cover Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
CPK - Motherboard of GEF-Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
CRS - Signal Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage . . . . . 5 - 34
Motor Power stage (Motor driver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
BackEnd Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
BackEnd - Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Block diagram CKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
BackEnd - Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
SBC - Single Board Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
PCI VGA Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
CKV - DMA-Controller / Video-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
CPM - PC-Motherboard Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage . . . . . 5 - 40
Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Table of Contents xix

Top Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49
External I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51
General Information - GEM (Disk Drive Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51
ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
DVD/CD+(R)W Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
Magneto-Optical Drive (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
CPN6 - Primary Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Mechanical Concept and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Major Functions of CPN6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Power Distribution Diagram - CPN6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Fuses on Rear Panel (CPN6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56
Fuses inside CPN6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56
CPN80-81 - Primary Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Mechanical Concept and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Major Functions of CPN80-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Power Distribution Diagram - CPN80-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Fuses on Rear Panel (CPN80-81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Fuses inside CPN80-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62
Power Off / Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63
Mechanical Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Rotation of the Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66
Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67

Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Air Flow Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Service Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
xx Table of Contents
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
iLinq Interactive Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70

Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
Proactive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 73
Remote System Shutdown and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 73
File and/or Image Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 73
Service Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Video Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Touch Panel calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Video out VHS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 75
Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 75
Generate NLS Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 75
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Auto Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Service Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Connected probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Service Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Console test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Delete all Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Export System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Maintenance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Hardware Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Beamformer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Front-End Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
BM Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
CRS Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
PW-Doppler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
“Geräte” Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
NLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
EUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Table of Contents xxi
UIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
SSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
(Extended) Access to Windows Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
Description of Sub folder “GE Field Engineer” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Further functions in the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
FACTORY ONLY functions in the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
LINUX - Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Access/Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
General Operation and Selection in LINUX (and BIOS) menu . . . . . 5 - 85
Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Linux “Maintenance System” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
SaveSett . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Format M/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Exit/Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Halt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Advanced Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
SSHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Clone Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90
Initialize Hard disk (C: and D:) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
CD-ROM Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if present) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 98
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 98
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 98
NewDisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
Preparations to setup a “new” Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
BIOS “Boot Priority Order” Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
New Hard Disk Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 107
xxii Table of Contents
After Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 108

Memory Check in LINUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 109
Table of Contents xxiii

CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
Color Temp - Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
Contrast and Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Color temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
B-Mode Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Control Console, Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5

Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Trackball Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Touch Panel Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Modification of Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9

Setup the Voluson® 730Expert Keyboard Language Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
4D Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Disable Windows Messenger Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Hide Windows Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Fax Driver Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17

Fax driver removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
xxiv Table of Contents

CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Collect Vital System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Needed Data - in case of System crash or Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Check Points Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4

How to check power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
Screen Captures and Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Capturing a screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Export Log’s and System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Export Log´s and System Data (via Service Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Dump-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Virtual Console Observation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Use of “Virtual Console Observation” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
CPU Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
Hard Drive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
S.M.A.R.T. HDD Status - Reporting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
Memory Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
CD/DVD Drive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
Video Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
USB Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
PCI Board Configuration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
SCSI Device Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
AGP Video Card Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
Network Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Keyboard Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Audio Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
Table of Contents xxv

How to use the Auto Tester program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
How to repair Databases (*.mdb). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23
How to delete the Service Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Hardware Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Beamformer Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
Summation Bus Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
Asic Select / Apertur Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Check probes for missing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Check probes for missing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Check Transmitter/Receiver Sub boards (CPD) . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Front-End Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
“Geräte” Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
BM Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
Pattern Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
Transmitter Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
TX Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
TX Power voltage Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
CRS Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
RAM Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
Analog Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
PW-Doppler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 39

Booting without using the Utrasound Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 39
Minimum boards and connections necessary to boot up to certain levels . . 7 - 40
Minimum Configuration to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 42
User Interface Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 43

Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 43
Control Console Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 43
Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 45

System does not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 45
No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 48
No Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 49
No Echo visible in Ultrasound field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply . . 7 - 52
Bad B-Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54
Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56
Noise disturbs the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 57
Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 58
xxvi Table of Contents
Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59

Unable to record Volumes (no Volume sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 60
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 61
System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62
No Audio Output on Loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63
No ECG line or ECG signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 64
Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 65
Unable to Record to VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 66
Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67
DVD/CD+(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
MOD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
No Connection to the Network at All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
GE (InSite) remote service connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
Enhanced Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 73
To debug Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 73
Table of Contents xxvii

CHAPTER 8
Replacement Procedures
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Software - Installation Procedure (via LINUX - Restore C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . . 8 - 12

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
EUM - Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Replacement or Activation of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19

Operation for activating Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Operation for installing a “Demo Key” or a “Permanent Key”: . . . . . . 8 - 20
Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
Transfer of Patient Database and Images using cross-over network cable . 8 - 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
xxviii Table of Contents
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Operation ("new" System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Changing the Computer Name ("new" System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25
Operation ("old" System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
After the Transfer of the Database (from “old” to “new” system) . . . 8 - 28
Transfer of Patient Database and Images using “Full Backup” function . . . 8 - 29
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Save “Full Backup” data (including all images) of the “old” system . 8 - 29
Load “Full Backup” data (including all images) into “new” system . . 8 - 30
Restoring various “Full Backup” data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 32
Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34
Backup all Exams of the “old” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34
Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system . . . . . 8 - 35
Replacement of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Replacement of the Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Rear Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Rear Cover - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Replacement of the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Top Cover of Trolley - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Top Cover of Trolley - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Replacement of the Side Panel (left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Side Panel (left) - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Side Panel (left) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Replacement of the Side Panel (right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Side Panel (right) - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Side Panel (right) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Table of Contents xxix
Replacement of the Door for Probe Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Door for Probe Cables - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Door for Probe Cables - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Side Panel Kit- Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Side Panel Kit - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Replacement of the Guide for Probe cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Guide for Probe cables - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Guide for Probe cables - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Connection Panel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Connection Panel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Replacement of the Standby Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Standby Switch - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Standby Switch - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Replacement of the Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52
Monitor - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52
Monitor - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
xxx Table of Contents
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Removal Procedure . . . . 8 - 54
Right Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Top Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Left Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Installation Procedure . . 8 - 55
Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Monitor Front Housing - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Monitor Front Housing - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
Monitor Switch Assembly - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
Monitor Switch Assembly - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Task Lamp - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Task Lamp - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Monitor Mounting Plate - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Monitor Plate - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Replacement of Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO £ A10643) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Rear wheel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Rear wheel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 62
Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO Š A10644) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Table of Contents xxxi
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Rear wheel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Rear wheel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Replacement of the Front Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Front wheel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Front wheel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Replacement of the Foot Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Foot rest - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Foot rest - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Replacement of User Interface (GEU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
User Interface - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
User Interface - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Distance Rod - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Distance Rod - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Bottom Housing - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Bottom Housing - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Replacement of the Probe Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75

Replacement of the Probe Holder (SNO £ A10643) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
xxxii Table of Contents

Probe Holder - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75

Probe Holder - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Replacement of the Probe Holder (SNO Š A10644) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Probe Holder - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Replacement of the Front Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Front Handle - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Front Handle - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Replacement of the Trackball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Trackball - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Trackball Kit - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Trackball top fixation ring - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Cap and/or Spring - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Keyboard - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Keyboard - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81
Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81
Hardkey Board(s) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Table of Contents xxxiii

Replacement of the Hardkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Hardkeys - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Hardkeys - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Loudspeaker - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Loudspeaker - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Replacement of the Gel holder (PHG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Gel holder - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Gel holder - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Disk Drive Module - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Disk Drive Module - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
DVD+(R)W-Drive - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
DVD+(R)W-Drive - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Replacement of the MO-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
MO-Drive - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
MO-Drive - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93

xxxiv Table of Contents
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
CRB - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
CRB - Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
CRB - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Replacement of the Fan (inside module GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Fan - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Fan - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Voltage Modifications at CPN6 (KTZ195905) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Change mains input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Auxiliary voltage output for peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Voltage Modifications at CPN80-81 (KTZ207486) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
Change mains input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
Auxiliary voltage output for peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Exchange Fuse (F3) at CPN80-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Power Supply - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
CPY3.P3 (KTZ195471) Power Switch - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
CPY3.P3 (KTZ195471) Power Switch - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
CPY80.P1 (KTZ209338) Power Switch - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
CPY80.P1 (KTZ209338) Power Switch - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
Replacement of CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80-81 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
CCF-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
CCF-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Table of Contents xxxv

Replacement of the Mains Power Switch (F1 - KTZ207733) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Mains Power Switch - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Mains Power Switch - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Replacement of the Mains Power Input Connector (KTZ207574) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Mains Power Connector - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Mains Power Connector - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Replacement of Mains Switch & Input Connector (KTZ209340) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Power Switch + Input Connector - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Power Switch + Input Connector - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Fan for Primary Power Supply - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Fan for Primary Power Supply - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Removement of the GEF-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
GEF-Box - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
GEF-Box - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 112
Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 114
Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115
CPP - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115
xxxvi Table of Contents

CPP - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115

Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
CRS - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
CRS - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
CPZ - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
CPZ - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
CPR - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
CPR - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Replacement of CPD - Sub-board on CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 119
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 119
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 119
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 119
CPD - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 119
CPD - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 119
Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
CRW - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
CRW - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
Replacement of CPK - Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
CPK-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
CPK-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 122
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 122
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 122
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 122
CPU-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 122
CPU-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 124
Replacement of the BackEnd Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Table of Contents xxxvii

Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125

Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
CKV-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
CKV-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
Serial Number - Re-programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
CPE-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
CPE-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Replacement of the CPM - PC-Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
CPM-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
CPM-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
PC-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . 8 - 132
Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) . . . 8 - 134
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
PC-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) - Install. Proced. . 8 - 135
BIOS Settings for PC-Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137
Replacement of the VGA graphic card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
VGA graphic card - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
VGA graphic card - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Lithium Battery - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Lithium Battery - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
xxxviii Table of Contents
Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Hard disk - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Universal Hard disk - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Configure the Universal Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
Customizing the Universal Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
Fan for GEF (2 fan) - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
Fan for GEF (2 fan) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (single) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Fan for GEF (single) - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Fan for GEF (single) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 150
Hardware Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 151

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 151
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 151
Reassembly the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Key Caps - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Key Caps - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date . . . . . . 8 - 157

Mounting/Replacing the DVR (DVD Recorder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 158
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 158
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 158
Cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 158
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 159
Table of Contents xxxix
Mounting/Replacing of ECG Module (MAN6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
ECG Module - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
ECG Module - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Mounting/Replacing the Global Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Global Modem - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Global Modem - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 163
Functional Checks after FRU replacement (Debrief Guidelines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 165
xl Table of Contents
CHAPTER 9
Renewal Parts
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
Parts List Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
User Interface (GEU Top Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9
Disk Drives (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
Main Power Module (CPN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
Main Board Module (GEF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13

FrontEnd (US-Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
BackEnd Processor (PC-Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Options and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Miscellaneous Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 21
Optional Peripherals and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
2D-Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
Real-Time 4D Volume Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34
CW-Pencil Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36
Biopsy Needle Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 37
Compatibility (Overview). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 39
Table of Contents xli

CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Standard GE Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Functional Checks (see also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Disinfection by means of the RIC-Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14

Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
GEHC Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
xlii Table of Contents

Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Dale 600 - Ground Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Ground Continuity Testing Procedure with Dale 600 Meter . 10 - 18
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Dale 600 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Dale 600 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30

Chassis Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
Probe Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
Peripheral Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
Still Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
New Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
ECG Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
Table of Contents xliii

xliv Table of Contents

DIRECTION KTI105937, REVISION 3 DRAFT (MAY 27, 2008) PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Voluson® 730Expert scanner.
The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before
installing or servicing a unit.
Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1
Section Description Page Number

1-1 Overview 1-1
1-2 Important Conventions 1-3
1-3 Safety Considerations 1-7
1-4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-10
1-5 Customer Assistance 1-11
1-1-2 Purpose of Service Manual

This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the Voluson® 730Expert
Ultrasound Scanning System and contains the following chapters:
1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings.

2.) Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the Voluson® 730Expert.
3.) Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions: Contains installation procedures.
4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.
5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional
explanations of the electronics.
6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to
the Voluson® 730Expert.
7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related
routines for the Voluson® 730Expert.
8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly
procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).
9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the Voluson®
730Expert.
10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the Voluson®
730Expert.
Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-1

1-1-3 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual

• Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.).
• Hospital’s Service Personnel
• Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Site Preparation)
1-1-4 Voluson® 730Expert Models Covered by this Manual

Table 1-2 Voluson® 730Expert Model Designations
Part Number Description

H48651AA Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) Console 230V/50Hz
H48651AB Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) Console 115V USA
H48651AC Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) Console 115V
H48651AD Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) Console 100V JAPAN
H48651AE Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) Console 230V KOREA
H48651AF Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) Console 230V CHINA
1-1-5 System History - Hardware and Software Versions

This manual applies to Voluson® 730Expert systems:
- with Serial number A10001 - A11999

- with Software version 4.x.x (BT04) installed
- that were upgraded to BT04 (SW 4.x.x installed)
- that were upgraded to BT05 (SW 5.x.x installed)
- that were upgraded to BT08 (SW 5.4.0 or higher installed)
BT-Version:
BT Version: Voluson® 730Expert systems with serial number less than < A12000 and software version 5.x.x
(simply called: upgraded to BT05/BT08), do have BT05/BT08 software, but hardware is the same that
BT04 systems have!
1-1-6 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)

The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson® 730Expert
and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
1-2 Section 1-1 - Overview

Section 1-2
Important Conventions
1-2-1 Conventions Used in Book
Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
Safety Precaution Messages
Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
DANGER INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE

!! DANGER:
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
WARNING
WARNING INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL
!! WARNING:
INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property
!! CAUTION:
damage if instructions are ignored.
NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible

!! NOTICE:
Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Example: Disk drive will crash.
BT Version: Is used when options or features are specific for BT-Software versions.
NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure.

Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.

1-2-2 Standard Hazard Icons

Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained
within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several
different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types
of hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER HEAT PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure be Used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
TAG
& EYE
LOCKOUT PROTECTION
Signed Date
1-4 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions

1-2-3 Product Icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Table 1-5 Product Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
Manufacturer's name and address Rear side of the unit

Identification and Rating Plate Model and serial numbers Monitor rear side
Electrical ratings on each probe
Device Listing/Certification Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with industry Rear side of the unit
Labels safety standards such as UL or IEC. Rear side of the monitor
Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices: Rear side of the unit
0123 The CE mark affixed to the equipment testifies compliance to the
on each probe
directive.
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.
IP Code (IPX 1) Indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure per Footswitch
IP Code (IPX 7) IEC 529. IPX 1 and IPX 7 indicates drip proof. Probes
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 Probe connectors
indicates B Type equipment having even more electrical isolation
Front side of the ECG-preamplifier (MAN)
than standard Type B equipment because it is intended for
intimate patient contact. Rear of Power Supply
“CAUTION
This unit weighs...
Special care must be used to
avoid..." This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one Used in the Service and User Manual
person attempt to move the unit considerable distances or on an which should be adjacent to equipment at
incline due to the weight of the unit. all times for quick reference.
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in

Various
combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents " is intended to

alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions Rear side of Power Supply
when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with

arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric Rear side of Monitor
shock hazards.

Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power
Rear of system at mains switch (F1)
switch.
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position of the

power switch. Adjacent to On-Off/Standby switch left
CAUTION below the Control panel.
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power

Rear of system at mains switch (F1)
switch.
Rear of system at the switch for auxiliary

ON switch of the isolation transformer for auxiliary devices.
devices (F2)
Rear of system at the switch for auxiliary

OFF switch of the isolation transformer for auxiliary devices.
devices (F2)
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth (grounding)

Internal, Rear of Power Supply
terminal.
"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting

equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with Rear of Power Supply
other equipment.
DANGEROUS ELECTRIC VOLTAGE. Rear of Power Supply

Pull the mains plug before opening the unit! (if “new” version of CPN80-81 is installed)
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Disposal.

This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic Rear side of the unit
equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste
on the plug of each probe
and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the (availability depends on delivery status)
decommissioning of your equipment.
These symbols indicate that at least one of the six hazardous

substances of the China RoHS Labelling Standard is above the
RoHS limitation.
The number inside the circle is referred to as the Environmental Rear side of the unit
Friendly Use Period (EFUP). It indicates the number of years that on the plug of each probe
the product, under normal use, will remain harmless to health of
(availability depends on delivery status)
humans or the environment.
EFUP = 10 for Short Use Products
EFUP = 20 for Medium Use Products
This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which Rear side of the unit
LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY, must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state,
+J DISPOSE ACCORDING TO on rear side of the Touch Panel
STATE/LOCAL LAW or country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the
KTD100272_2
Touch Panel contain mercury.) (availability depends on delivery status)
1-6 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions

Section 1-3
Safety Considerations
1-3-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-3-2 Human Safety

Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized
personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a Voluson® 730Expert Training are authorized
to service the equipment.
1-3-3 Mechanical Safety

WARNING
WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING THE UNIT, OR IF IT IS RAISED FOR A
!! WARNING:
REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE. IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE WHICH
COULD CAUSE THE UNIT TO TIP OVER.
WARNING
WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
!! WARNING:
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
WARNING
WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK,
!! WARNING:
IT MAY BE DAMAGED.
CAUTION Always lower and center the Operator I/O Panel before moving the scanner.
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION The Voluson® 730Expert weighs 136 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, (300 lbs.,
!! CAUTION:
or more) when ready for use.
Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed
could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.
ALWAYS:
• Use the handle to move the system. • Be sure the pathway is clear.
• Use slow, careful motions. • Do not let the system strike walls or door frames.
Two people are required when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
CAUTION Keep heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.
!! CAUTION:
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:
• Secure the unit in an upright position and lock the caster wheels (brake).
• DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.
• Place the probes in their carrying case.
• Eject any DVD, CD or Magneto Optical disk (MOD) from their drive.
• Ensure that the Voluson® 730Expert system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle.
• Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously.
Avoid unpaved roads, excessive speeds, and erratic stops or starts.
1-3-4 Electrical Safety
1-3-4-1 Safe Practices

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.
The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total
current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
WARNING
WARNING CONNECTING A VOLUSON® 730EXPERT SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE
!! WARNING:
LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
1-3-4-2 Probes
All the probes for the Voluson® 730Expert are designed and manufactured to provide trouble-free,
reliable service. To ensure this, correct handling of probes is important and the following points should
be noted:
• Do not drop a probe or strike it against a hard surface, as this may damage the transducer elements,
acoustic lens, or housing.
• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the Housing, Cable strain relief,
Lens and Seal.
• Do not use a cracked or damaged probe. In this event, call your field service representative
immediately to obtain a replacement.
• Avoid pulling, pinching or kinking the probe cable, since a damaged cable may compromise the
electrical safety of the probe.
• To avoid the risk of a probe accidentally falling, do not allow the probe cables to become entangled,
or to be caught in the machine’s wheels.
• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
NOTE: For detailed information on handling probes, refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual and
the care card supplied with the probe.
1-8 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations

1-3-5 Labels Locations
1 8* 2 3 4 5 6 7*
Figure 1-1 Labeling
1.) Caution Label

2.) CE-Label
3.) UL-Label
4.) Identification “Main” Label
5.) CW-Doppler (only if the CW-Doppler option is installed)
6.) Quality Control Label
7.) *place for additional label (e.g., “Hg Vermont label”, “Homologation label” for Japan or China only)
8.) *place for Disposal Label (WEEE)
* availability depends on delivery status of the Voluson® 730Expert system
1-3-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings

Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT

!! DANGER:
IN THIS EQUIPMENT.
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNING EXPLOSION
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.

OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING DO
WARNING NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT
!! WARNING:
BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT

INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
OF THE EQUIPMENT.

1-3-7 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements to protect service personnel from injuries caused by
unexpected energizing or start-up of equipment during service, repair, or maintenance.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for Voluson® 730Expert.

!! NOTICE:
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
Unplug the system
Maintain control of the system power plug
TAG
&
There are no test points to verify isolation, you must wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to
discharge.
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
Beware that the Power Supply (CPN), Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized
even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.UT
1-3-8 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
and ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items what were saturated and/or dripping
with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient
care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purpose and must be transported as a hazardous
material.
Section 1-4
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1-4-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
For applicable standards refer to Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of the Voluson® 730Expert.
1-10 Section 1-4 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1-4-2 Compliance
The Voluson® 730Expert unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to
immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line
transient requirements.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in
good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-4-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

WARNING
WARNING DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD
!! WARNING:
precautions:
1.) When installing boards, ESD may cause damage to a board.
ALWAYS connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection
point located on the rear of the system (to the right of the power connector).
2.) Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
WARNING
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off.
!! WARNING:
Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components.
Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD
sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged
or isolated before making contact.
Section 1-5
Customer Assistance
1-5-1 Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the Basic User Manual, or if
you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource,
as listed below.
NOTE: Prepare vital system information (see: Section 7-2 on page 7-2) before you call:
• System Type
• System Serial number (also visible on label on back of the system)
• Application Software version
• Backup version
• additional information about installed software

1-5-1 Contact Information (cont’d)
Table 1-6 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location Phone Number
USA Service On-site 1-800–437–1171

GE Medical Systems Service: Parts 1-800-558-2040
Ultrasound Service Engineering
9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123) Applications support 1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698
Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA Fax: 1-414-721-4387
Canada 1-800-668-0732
Service 1-800-321-7937
Latin America
Applications support 1-262-524-5698
Europe
GE Medical Systems Kretztechnik GmbH & Co OHG Phone: +43 (0)7682-3800-26
Service Department - Ultrasound
Tiefenbach 15 Fax: +43 (0)7682-3800-47
A-4871 Zipf (Austria)
Asia Support Center - Singapore

GE Ultrasound Asia
Phone: +65-6291-8528
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06
Fax: +65-6291-7006
Central Plaza
Singapore 169730
Service 81-426-48-2940
Fax: 81-426-48-2905
Japan Support Center
Applications support 81-426-48-2944
1-5-2 System Manufacturer
Table 1-7 System Manufacturer
Manufacturer Telephone Fax
GE Medical Systems - Kretztechnik GmbH & Co OHG

Tiefenbach 15
+43-7682-3800-0 +43-7682-3800-47
A-4871 Zipf
Austria
1-12 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance

Chapter 2
Site Preparation
Section 2-1
Overview
This chapter provides information required to plan and prepare for installation of a Voluson® 730Expert
ultrasound unit. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser.

2-1 Overview 2-1
2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2
2-3 Facility Needs 2-6
Chapter 2 - Site Preparation 2-1

Section 2-2
General Console Requirements
2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements
Operating Operating Storage

Temperature Humidity Heat Dissipation Temperature Storage Humidity
10 to 40oC 30 to 80% rH -10 to 40 oC < 90% rH non-

3446 BTU pr hour
(50 to 104oF) non-condensing (14 to 104oF) condensing
CAUTION If the system has been in storage or has been transported, please see the acclimation requirements
!! CAUTION:
before powering ON and/or using the system (see: Section 3-2-2 "Installation Warnings" on page 3-2).
2-2-1-1 Cooling
The cooling requirement for the Voluson® 730Expert is 3446 BTU/hr. This figure does not include
cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room.
NOTE: Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
2-2-1-2 Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.
2-2-2 Electrical Requirements

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size Ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the Ground from the main
facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

2-2-2-1 Voluson® 730Expert Power Requirements
Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for Voluson® 730Expert
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100 VAC ±10% 10.10 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
110 VAC ±10% 9.20 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
115 VAC ±10% 8.80 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
130 VAC ±10% 7.80 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
230 VAC ±10% 4.40 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
240 VAC ±10% 4.20 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
Power Consumption nominal 1010 VA including all options.
Mains outlets: Mains socket ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 for accessories.
All mains outlets are co-switched by the unit’s mains switch via built-in isolation transformer.
Output voltage for: ST1 - ST5: 115V or 230V.
CAUTION Modification of voltage setting only by an authorized service person!

!! CAUTION:
The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color video monitor) connected to
these outlets must not exceed 350VA!
2-2-2-2 Inrush Current

Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power
supplies.
2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

!! CAUTION:
The Voluson® 730Expert requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload
and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment
operating on the same circuit.
2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate
outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also
be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and
national electrical codes.
2-2-2-5 Main Power Plug

The Voluson® 730Expert is supplied with a main power plug, as standard.
In the event that the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, contact your GE dealer.
When necessary, the installation engineer will supply the appropriate power plug to meet the applicable
local regulations.

2-2-3 EMI Limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
Voluson® 730Expert complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
NOTICE Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
!! NOTICE:
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect.
Sources of EMI include the following:
• medical lasers
• scanners
• cauterizing guns
• computers
• monitors
• fans
• gel warmers
• microwave oven
• light dimmers
• portable phones
• broadcast stations and mobile broadcasting machines
Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement
EMI Rule Details
Keep the unit at least 5 meters (16.4 feet) away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be
Be aware of RF sources. required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video
broadcast signals.
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images.
Ground the unit.
Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws.
Replace and/or reassemble
Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
all screws, RF gaskets,
Install the shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio
covers and cores.
frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.
If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket.
Replace broken RF gaskets.
Do not turn ON the unit until any loose metallic part is removed and replaced, if required.
Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF
Do not place labels where
leakage. In case a label has been found in such a location, move the label to a different,
RF gaskets touch metal.
appropriate location.
The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding.
Use GE- specified
Cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not make any changes that do not meet
harnesses and peripherals.
all specifications.
Take care with cellular

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal that causes image artifacts.
phones.
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays.
Properly dress peripheral
Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays.
cables.
Attach the monitor cables to the frame.
2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

2-2-4 Probe Environmental Requirements

Operation: Ambient temperature 18° to 30° C
Storage: -10° to 50°C
NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to degrees F = °C (9/5) + 32).
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF
!! NOTICE:
-10 TO + 50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE
PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
2-2-5 Time and Manpower Requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six
weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
CAUTION Have two people available to deliver and unpack the Voluson® 730Expert.
!! CAUTION:
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.
2-2-6 System Specifications
2-2-6-1 Physical Dimensions of Voluson® 730Expert

The physical dimensions of the Voluson® 730Expert unit are summarized in Table 2-5.
Table 2-6 lists the size of Voluson® 730Expert, with monitor and without on-board peripherals.
Table 2-5 Physical Dimensions of Voluson® 730Expert
Height Width Depth

142 cm / 55.9 inches 68 cm / 26.8 inches 100 cm / 39.4 inches
2-2-6-2 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals
Table 2-6 Weight of Voluson® 730Expert with Monitor and without other Peripherals
Model Weight [kg] Weight [lbs.]

Voluson® 730Expert 136 300
2-2-6-3 Acoustic Noise Output

max. 57dB(A)
2-2-6-4 Electrical Specifications

Please refer to Section 2-2-2-1 "Voluson® 730Expert Power Requirements" on page 2-3.

Section 2-3
Facility Needs
2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery.
Use the Pre-installation checklist (provided in Table 2-7) to verify that all needed steps have been taken.
Table 2-7 Voluson® 730Expert Pre-Installation Check List
Action Yes No
Schedule at least 3 hours for installation of the system.
Notify installation team of the existence of any variances from the basic installation.
Make sure system and probes have been subject to acclimation period.
Environmental cooling is sufficient.
Lighting is adjustable to adapt to varying operational conditions of the scanner.
Electrical facilities meet system requirements.
EMI precautions have been taken and all possible sources of interference have been removed.
Mandatory site requirements have been met.
If a network is used, IP address has been set for the system and a dedicated network outlet is available.
Purchaser responsibility includes:
• Procuring the materials required.

• Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for
the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces
of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The
products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special
engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the
requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified
personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2-6 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

2-3-2 Mandatory Site Requirements

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please note that image artifacts
can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to
the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
The following are mandatory site requirements. Additional (optional) recommendations, as well as a
recommended ultrasound room layout, are provided in Section 2-3-3 "Site Recommendations" .
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.

• Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling
• Clean and protected space for storage of probes (either in their case or on a rack).
• Material to safely clean probes (performed using a plastic container, never metal).
• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE: The Voluson® 730Expert has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on board
peripherals.
In case of network option:
• An active network outlet in the vicinity of the ultrasound unit.

• A network cable of appropriate length (regular Pin-to-Pin network cable).
• An IT administrator who will assist in configuring the unit to work with your local network.
A fixed IP address is required. Refer to the form provided at page 3-66 for network details that are
required.
NOTE: All relevant preliminary network port installations at the prepared site must be performed by authorized
contractors. The purchaser of GE equipment must utilize only qualified personnel to perform servicing
of the equipment.
2-3-3 Site Recommendations

The following are (optional) site recommendations. Mandatory site requirements are provided in the
Mandatory Site Requirements section, above.
• Door is at least 90 cm (3 ft.) wide

• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
• Sink with hot and cold water
• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
• Emergency oxygen supply
• Storage for linens and equipment
• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
• Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals

2-3-3-1 Recommended Ultrasound Room Layout

Figure 2-1 below shows a floor plan illustrating the recommended layout of the Ultrasound Room and
depicting the minimal room layout requirements.
Dedicated Power Outlets

VOLUSON
Hospital Network
Cabinet for
Software and Manuals
(optional)
35.5 IN.
(92 CM)
Figure 2-1 Recommended Floor Plan 4.3m x 5.2m (14ft x 17ft)

2-3-4 Networking Pre-installation Requirements
2-3-4-1 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function

DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) services provide the operator with clinically
useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network.
Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring
images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-
board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues.
With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
2-3-4-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements

To configure the Voluson® 730Expert to work with other network connections, the site’s network
administrator must provide some necessary information.
To configure the Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound unit to work with other network connections, the
network administrator must provide some necessary information.
Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on page 3-66 to record required information that must include:
• Voluson® 730Expert Details: DICOM network details for the Voluson® 730Expert unit,
incl. the host name, local port, IP address, AE title and net mask.
• Routing Information: IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers in use at
the site.
• DICOM Application Information: Details of DICOM devices in use at the site, including the DICOM
host name, AE title, DICOM port number and IP addresses.
Installation see: Section 3-11 "Network IP Address Configuration" on page 3-64.

This page was intentionally left blank.

Chapter 3
Setup Instructions
Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter contains information needed to setup the Voluson® 730Expert unit. Included are
procedures to receive, unpack and configure the equipment. A worksheet is provided (see: page 3-66)
to help ensure that all the required information is available, prior to setup the system.

3-1 Overview 3-1
3-2 Set Up Reminders 3-1
3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4
3-4 Preparing for Set Up 3-6
3-5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices 3-8
3-6 Completing the Set Up 3-26
3-7 Printer Installation 3-30
3-8 System Configuration 3-56
3-9 Available Probes 3-63
3-10 Software/Option Configuration 3-63
3-12 Connectivity Setup Worksheet 3-66
3-11 Network IP Address Configuration 3-64
3-13 Paperwork 3-67
Section 3-2
Set Up Reminders
3-2-1 Average Installation Time
Table 3-2 Average Installation Time
Description Average Installation Time Comments

Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hours
Scanner /options / printers 0.5 to 1.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration
DICOM Option 0.5 - 1.5 hours Dependant on the configuration amount
Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions 3-1

3-2-2 Installation Warnings

1.) Since the Voluson® 730Expert weighs approximately 136 kg (300 lbs.) without options, two people
are required to unpack it. Two people are also required for installing any additional items in excess
of 16 kg / 35 pounds.(e.g., Monitor).
2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or
panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord.
Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
3-2-2-1 Moving/Lifting the System
When pulling, moving or lifting the system,

grasp it only at the rear handle of the trolley and
the handle underneath the foot rest.
WARNING
Do NOT pull or lift the system with the front handle

of the user interface (operator panel).
Figure 3-1 moving or lifting the system
3-2-2-2 System Acclimation Time

After being transported, the Voluson® 730Expert system may be very cold or hot.
It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment it's temperature is below 10°C or above 40°C.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site
!! CAUTION:
may cause the system to be damaged.
Table 3-3 Acclimation Time
°C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
°F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
3-2-2-3 Control Panel Position

If weight is placed on the Control Panel (UI) in it’s extended position the console could tip over.
WARNING
WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Control Panel (UI) extended. Move the
!! WARNING:
Control Panel to it’s centered and locked position. Refer to Section 6-4 on page 6-5.
WARNING
WARNING Monitor mounting mechanism may break if not properly supported (e.g., with packing
!! WARNING:
foam) during transportation.
3-2 Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders

3-2-2-4 Brake Pedal Operation
WARNING
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front wheels are engaged for transportation, pressing the release
!! WARNING:
brake pedals (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest) once disengages the lock.
3-2-3 Safety Reminders
DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
!! DANGER:
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH
THE UNIT!
CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight.
!! CAUTION:
Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted.
CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do NOT turn on its power until it has had sufficient time to
!! CAUTION:
acclimate to its operating environment.
CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use
!! CAUTION:
a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is
!! CAUTION:
present.
CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord.
!! CAUTION:
This unit requires a dedicated 16 A circuit.
CAUTION DO NOT operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place, to
!! CAUTION:
ensure optimal system performance and cooling.
(When covers are removed, EMI may be present).
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

!! CAUTION:
The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the
Voluson® 730Expert and kept near the unit for quick reference.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

!! CAUTION:
Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the Voluson® 730Expert probe is within
FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and
mechanical damage.
Figure 3-2 Environmental Labels

Section 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION
Transport only with forklift or stracker truck.
!! CAUTION:
During transport pay attention to the point of gravity (“tilt and drop” indicator)!
Have two people available to unpack the Voluson® 730Expert.

Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.
The envelope with delivery address, packing list and

invoice is located on the front panel of the crate.
Check whether delivery is complete (according to

packing list) and check visual damage!
Figure 3-3 envelope at front panel of the crate
NOTICE The device must only be transported in the original packaging!

!! NOTICE:
Unpack the devices such a way that packaging can be reused.
A drill with size 20 torx bit and/or a Philips 2 screwdriver will be needed to open the crate.
Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure
Step Task
1. Loosen the screws and remove top panel from crate; top panel is used for the ramp.
tilt and drop

indicator
center
of
gravity
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure
Step Task
2. Open front panel by removing the screws from the side panels. Remove probes and accessories from the wooden box.
probes and accessories
WARNING
WARNING
!! WARNING:
Do not open side panels prior to

screws screws removing the front panel!
Accessories could drop down
and DAMAGE the user interface!
packing
3. Loosen all screws to remove the wooden rack for accessories as well as the left, right and back panel.
wooden rack
for accessories
4. Carefully remove foam packing material and plastic bag from the ultrasound unit and monitor.
Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment.
5. Disengage the brakes and slowly move unit down the ramp (top panel).
brakes
Brakes
top panel
is used for ramp
Note: Packing crate and material should be stored for future use.

Section 3-4
Preparing for Set Up
3-4-1 Verify Customer Order
1.) After unpacking the equipment, it is important to verify that all items ordered by the customer have
been received. Compare all items listed on the packing slip (delivery note) with those received.
NOTICE It is recommended to keep and store the shipping carton and all other packing materials (including the
!! NOTICE:
support foams, anti-static plastic cover, etc.), in case the unit has to be moved to a different location.
Unpack the devices such a way that packaging can be reused.
For warranty purposes, storage of the above is required for one year from date of purchase.
2.) Visually inspect the system components using the following checklist.
Table 3-5 Damage Inspection Checklist - Voluson® 730Expert System
b Step Item Recommended Procedure

1 Main label Enter Serial Number: __________________________ (printed on main label on back of the system)
2 Console Verify that the system is switched OFF and unplugged. Clean the console and control panel.
Physically inspect the control console for missing or damaged items.

3 Control Console
After switching on the system, verify the proper illumination of all the control panel buttons.
Check all probes for wear and tear on the lens, cable, and connector. Look for bent or damaged pins on the
4 Probes connector and in the connector socket on the unit. Verify that the EMI fingers around the probe connector
socket housing are intact. Check the probe locking mechanism and probe switch.
Clean the LCD display by gently wiping with a dry, soft, lint-free non-abrasive folded cloth. Inspect the monitor
5 LCD Display
for scratches and raster burn.
6 Fans Verify that the system’s cooling fans and peripheral fans are operating.
7 Check the rear panel connectors for bent pins, loose connections and loose or missing hardware. Screw all
Rear Panel
the cable connectors tightly to the connector sockets on the panel. Verify that the labeling is in good condition.
Check that all screws are tightly secured in place, that there are no dents or scratches and that no internal
8 Covers
parts are exposed.
Check and clean the peripherals in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
9 Peripherals
To prevent EMI or system overheating, dress the peripheral cables inside the peripheral cover.
10 Check the power cord for cuts, loose hardware, tire marks, exposed insulation, or any deterioration.
Power Cord
Verify continuity. Replace the power cord, as required.
System Voltage Verify that the Voluson® 730Expert is set to the correct voltage.
11
setting see: Section 3-4-2 "System Voltage Settings" on page 3-7
NOTE: Report any items that are missing, back-ordered, or damaged, to your GE Healthcare - Kretztechnik
sales representative. The contact address is shown in Contact Information on page 1-11.
3-6 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Set Up

3-4-2 System Voltage Settings

Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the Voluson® 730Expert
Scanner is found on the identification plate, on the rear of the system.
Figure 3-4 Identification Plate
WARNING
WARNING CONNECTING A Voluson® 730Expert SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL
!! WARNING:
WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
3-4-3 EMI Protection

This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by
this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured
before the unit is put into operation.
Ensure that the system is protected from electromagnetic interference (EMI), as follows:
• Operate the system at least 15 feet away from equipment that emits strong electromagnetic
radiation.
• Operate the system in an area enclosed by walls, floors and ceilings comprised of wood, plaster or
concrete, which help prevent EMI.
• Shield the system when operating it in the vicinity of radio broadcast equipment, if necessary.
• Do not operate mobile phones or other EMI emitting devices in the ultrasound room.
• Verify that all EMI rules listed in the following table are followed:
The Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound unit is approved for use in hospitals, clinics and other
environmentally qualified facilities, in terms of the prevention of radio wave interference. Operation of
the ultrasound unit in an inappropriate environment can cause electronic interference to radios and
television sets situated near the medical equipment.
For further details and EMI Prevention/Abatement refer to Section 2-2-3 "EMI Limitations" on page 2-4.

Section 3-5
Connection of Auxiliary Devices
3-5-1 Preparations
NOTE: Normally the auxiliary devices and peripherals come already installed with the system.
1.) Carefully remove plastic caps using a knife and loosen screws and washers (see Figure 3-5).
2.) When the cover is loose on top, pull the rear cover out and move upwards.
plastic caps; screws and washers
Figure 3-5 Remove rear cover plate
NOTE: The System DVD can be found on the rear cover plate, inside the Voluson® 730Expert.
cover of System DVD

on the back of the
rear cover plate
Figure 3-6 System DVD on the back of the rear cover plate
3.) Disconnect the GND ground-cable from the back of the rear cover plate.
GND ground cable
Figure 3-7 GND ground-cable
4.) Connect Peripherals according to correct connection scheme described in the following sub-
sections (refer to Table 3-6 on page 3-9).
5.) Connect the GND ground-cable at the rear cover plate.
6.) Mount rear cover plate, reattach screw and washers and plug-in the caps.
3-8 Section 3-5 - Connection of Auxiliary Devices

3-5-1 Preparations (cont’d)

Table 3-6 below outlines Voluson® 730Expert hardware installation procedures described in the sub-
sections.
Table 3-6 Connection Procedures
Sub-section Description Page Number

3-5-2 Monitor Connection 3-10
3-5-3 Foot Switch Connection 3-10
3-5-4 ECG-preamplifier Connection 3-11
3-5-5 Global Modem Connection 3-12
3-5-6 S-VHS Video Recorder Connection 3-13
3-5-7 DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection 3-15
3-5-8 B/W Video Printer Connection 3-19
3-5-9 Line Printer Connection 3-20
3-5-10 Digital Color Printer Connection 3-21
3-5-11 Bluetooth Printer Connection 3-22
3-5-12 External USB-Devices 3-24
WARNING
WARNING After each installation, the leakage currents have to be measured according to
!! WARNING:
IEC 60601-1 respectively UL 60601-1.
CAUTION Please observe that some printers may not be medical devices! If the Bluetooth Printer and/or
!! CAUTION:
Line Printers are not medical devices, they have to be located outside of the patient
environment (according to IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).
1,5 m
2,5 m
1,5 m 1,5 m

3-5-2 Monitor Connection

NOTE: The monitor comes already installed with the system.
3-5-3 Foot Switch Connection
Figure 3-8 Foot Switch Connection Scheme
NOTE: After physical connection, adjust the Footswitch (Left/Right) as described in

Section 3-7-6 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-55.

3-5-4 ECG-preamplifier Connection
Figure 3-9 ECG Connection Scheme

3-5-5 Global Modem Connection
Figure 3-10 Global Modem Connection Scheme
WARNING
WARNING Never install the telephone wiring, or use the modem during an electric storm;
!! WARNING:
there may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
CAUTION Use only the power adapter supplied with the modem and connect it as shown.
!! CAUTION:
Use of any other power adapter will void the warranty and could damage the modem.

3-5-6 S-VHS Video Recorder Connection

NOTE: Please refer to connection scheme belonging to the used VCR type:
• Section 3-5-6-1 "Mitsubishi HS-MD3000" on page 3-13
• Section 3-5-6-2 "Sony SVO-9500MD" on page 3-14
3-5-6-1 Mitsubishi HS-MD3000
NOTE: There are two types of Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 VCR (PAL and NTSC) approved by GE Healthcare -
Kretztechnik. Use the standard VCR type (PAL or NTSC) that is suited to your region.
CAUTION ONLY the specific GE - Kretztechnik Version of this video recorder type may be used in
!! CAUTION:
connection with the system!
Figure 3-11 Mitsubishi - Video Recorder Connection Scheme
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set and remote cable.
!! NOTICE:
see: Section 9-12 "Optional Peripherals and Accessories" on page 9-28.

3-5-6-2 Sony SVO-9500MD
Figure 3-12 Sony - Video Recorder Connection Scheme
Set DIP Switches on back of the VCR as shown:

Switch 1: OFF-Audio is muted during fast playback
Switch 2: OFF-FF/REW mode is used during searches.
Switch 3: ON-VCR counter is reset upon cassette ejection.
Switch 4: OFF-The VCR can be controlled by the system.
Switch 5 + 6: ON-The Baud rate is set to 19200 bit/sec.
(must be the same as Voluson® 730Expert)
Figure 3-13 DIP Switches
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set and remote cable.
!! NOTICE:

3-5-7 DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection

BT Version: The DVD Recorder (Sony DVO-1000MD) is only applicable if the system is upgraded to BT05/BT08
(SW 5.x.x installed).
NOTICE Regardless of what other peripherals are installed, the DVD Recorder needs to be put on the lower shelf
!! NOTICE:
for easy access to the DVD tray.
NOTICE For more detailed description, how to replace/mount the DVD Recorder, refer to:
!! NOTICE:
Chapter 8 - Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date.
NOTICE The Sony DVO-1000MD DVD recorder is only able to read and write on DVD+RW (ReWriteable)
!! NOTICE:
media! Please check on your DVD case before using.
Figure 3-14 DVD Recorder - Connection Scheme
When all power and signal cables are connected to the system and DVD recorder, proceed as follows:
• Adjust the DVD Recorder settings as described in Section 3-5-7-1 on page 3-16.
• Check and if necessary change the Video Norm, see: Section 3-8-1-6 on page 3-58.
• Check and if necessary change the Record Type + VCR Source, see: Section 3-7-6 on page 3-55.

3-5-7-1 Adjustment of the DVD Recorder Settings
3-5-7-1-1 Changing TV System (Video Format)
NOTE: To check Video format needed, see: Table 3-7, “TV-System and Region Code,” on page 3-18.
1.) If not already done, switch ON the Sony DVO-1000MD DVD recorder.
2.) Turn ON the power of the Voluson® 730Expert system.
3.) Press the MENU button (A) located on the front of the DVD recorder see Figure 3-15 below.
Up
Left Right
Down
Figure 3-15 Keys on the front of the recorder
4.) The “Main Menu” appears on the LCD screen of the DVD recorder, see: Figure 3-16 below.
select [SETUP MENU]
Figure 3-16 “Main Menu” - [SETUP MENU] highlighted
5.) Press the ↓ (down) button on the front of the recorder repeatedly until the [SETUP MENU] item
is highlighted.
NOTE: Each time you press the ↑ (up) or ↓ (down) button, the highlight cursor moves up/down item by item.
6.) Press the → (right) button. The “Setup Menu” appears, see Figure 3-17 on page 3-17.

7.) Press the ↓ (down) button repeatedly, until [MENU GRADE] is highlighted.
change MENU GRADE

to ENHANCED
Figure 3-17 “Setup Menu” - [MENU GRADE] highlighted
8.) Press the → (right) button and select [ENHANCED].

9.) Press the ← (left) button, to exit the “Menu Grade” menu.
NOTE: Now additional items (see: Figure 3-18 on page 3-17) are displayed in the “Setup Menu”.
10.)Select [TV SYSTEM] by pressing the ↓ (down) button.
Menu Grade: ENHANCED

REGION CODE
TV SYSTEM
Figure 3-18 “Setup Menu” - [TV SYSTEM] highlighted
11.)Press the → (right) button. The “TV System” Sub menu appears.
12.)Select the appropriate video signal by pressing the ↑ (up) or ↓ (down) button respectively.
To check the video signal, see: Table 3-7, “TV-System and Region Code,” on page 3-18.
13.)Press the SET button (C).
The message “Now loading...” appears and the unit starts to save the settings.
14.)When “Power off” appears on the display, press the POWER switch on the front of the DVD
recorder to turn power off.
15.)Press the POWER switch again to turn power on.

3-5-7-1-2 Change the Region Code
NOTE: To specify the correct region code, see: Table 3-7, “TV-System and Region Code,” on page 3-18.
1.) If not already done, switch on the Sony DVO-1000MD DVD recorder.
2.) Press the MENU button (A) located on the front of the DVR, see: Figure 3-15 on page 3-16.
3.) The “Main Menu” appears on the LCD screen of the DVD recorder, see: Figure 3-19 below.
select [SETUP MENU]
Figure 3-19 “Main Menu” - [SETUP MENU] highlighted
4.) Press the ↓ (down) button on the front of the recorder repeatedly until the [SETUP MENU] item
is highlighted.
5.) Press the → (right) button. The “Setup Menu” appears, see Figure 3-18 on page 3-17.
6.) Press the ↓ (down) button repeatedly, until [REGION CODE] is highlighted.
7.) Press the → (right) button. The “Region Code Menu” appears.
8.) Select the appropriate region code by pressing the ↑ (up) or ↓ (down) button respectively.
To check the region code, see: Table 3-7, “TV-System and Region Code,” on page 3-18.
9.) Press the SET button (C).
The message “Now loading...” appears and the unit starts to save the settings.
10.)When “Power off” appears on the display, press the POWER switch on the front of the DVD
recorder to turn power off.
11.)Press the POWER switch again to turn power on.
Table 3-7 TV-System and Region Code
Country Region Code TV-System
USA and Canada 1 NTSC
Western Europe, Middle East, South Africa 2 PAL
Japan 2 NTSC
Southeast Asia, incl. Hong Kong 3 PAL/NTSC
Central and South America, Australia 4 PAL
Africa 5 NTSC
Eastern Europe, Russia, Central Asia incl. India 5 PAL
China 6 PAL

3-5-8 B/W Video Printer Connection
Figure 3-20 B/W Video Printer Connection Scheme
Set DIP Switches on back of the Black/White printer as shown in the image (all DOWN).
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set.

!! NOTICE:

3-5-9 Line Printer Connection
Figure 3-21 Line Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Please observe that the Line Printer has to be located outside of the patient environment
!! CAUTION:
(acc. IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).
NOTICE The switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system.
!! NOTICE:
Leave printer switch always in the ON position.

!! NOTICE:
NOTE: For further installation instructions see:

Section 3-7-1 "Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c" on page 3-31.

3-5-10 Digital Color Printer Connection
Figure 3-22 Digital Color Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Pay attention to lateral distances. See Instruction Manual of the printer!
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION The Printer Supply Voltage must be the same as the Output Voltage of the Voluson® 730Expert
!! CAUTION:
Power Out Connectors (Power Supply)!
!! NOTICE:

!! NOTICE:
CAUTION The Sony UP-D23MD printer must never be connected to USB-ports on the SBC backplane.
!! CAUTION:
Please use one of the two outlets on the back of the GEM (Disk Drive Module) only.
NOTE: For further installation instructions see:

Section 3-7-2 "Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD" on page 3-33.

3-5-11 Bluetooth Printer Connection

NOTE: Please refer to connection scheme belonging to the used B/W Printer type:
• Section "HP 5600/5900 Series" on page 3-22
• Section 3-5-11-1 "Canon Pixma MP600 / MP610" on page 3-23
HP 5600/5900 Series
Figure 3-23 HP Bluetooth Printer - Connection Scheme
CAUTION Please observe that the complete Bluetooth Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the
!! CAUTION:
patient environment (acc. IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).
CAUTION The used printer may not be a medical device. The Bluetooth Printer Set and the Power Supply
!! CAUTION:
of the Bluetooth Printer Adapter is also not a medical device.
The equipment meets the requirements of the EN60950 Standard.
!! NOTICE:
NOTICE Please use the proper Bluetooth Printer Connection set.

!! NOTICE:
NOTE: For installation instructions see: Section 3-7-3 "Installing Bluetooth Deskjet Printer" on page 3-35.

3-5-11-1 Canon Pixma MP600 / MP610
Canon Bluetooth
Printer Adapter
Figure 3-24 Canon Bluetooth Printer - Connection Scheme
CAUTION Please observe that the complete Bluetooth Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the
!! CAUTION:
patient environment (acc. IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).
CAUTION The Printer and the Bluetooth Printer Adapter used may not be a medical device.
!! CAUTION:
The equipment meets the requirements of the EN60950 Standard.
!! NOTICE:
NOTE: For installation instructions see: Section 3-7-3 "Installing Bluetooth Deskjet Printer" on page 3-35.

3-5-12 External USB-Devices

WARNING
WARNING Do not connect or disconnect any external USB-devices to or from the system while
!! WARNING:
scanning a patient! The appearing dialogs could distract you from the scan!
3-5-12-1 External USB-Devices - Connection

When an external USB-storage device (such as a USB-memory stick or external hard disk) is connected
to the Voluson® 730Expert system, Windows detects the device and automatically installs a driver.
During this process, several dialogs may pop up, starting with the „Found New Hardware“ dialog.
Figure 3-25 Found New Hardware - USB Device
The device is then accessible using the drive letter the system assigned to it.
NOTICE When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in Chapter 2 of the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual.
3-5-12-2 External USB-Devices - Disconnection

Before an external USB-device (e.g., USB-memory stick) can be disconnected, the system has to be
informed about the removal of the device! For this purpose the System Setup - BACKUP page
(see: Figure 4-24 on page 4-31) has a STOP USB DEVICES button.
CAUTION Unplugging or ejecting USB devices without first stopping them can often cause the system to
!! CAUTION:
crash and possibly result in loss of valuable data.
By clicking the STOP USB DEVICES button, the „Unplug or Eject Hardware“ dialog is started.
Using this dialog, the USB-devices can be stopped before they are physically disconnected.
Figure 3-26 Unplug or Eject Hardware

3-5-12-2 External USB-Devices - Disconnection (cont’d)

The „Unplug or Eject Hardware“ dialog shows all USB-devices that are connected to the system.
On every system is an USB mass storage device, the DVD/CD writer, which has the drive letter (F:).
If the system has an optional MO-drive installed as well, it is listed too, and has the drive letter (E:).
To stop the external device, select it and click the STOP button.
A dialog shows which components will be stopped. To finish the process, click [OK].
Figure 3-27 Stop a Hardware device
Finally, a dialog shows that the device was stopped successfully.

The device can now be safely disconnected from the system.
Figure 3-28 Safe to Remove Hardware
By clicking OK, the „Unplug or Eject Hardware“ dialog is active again.
Close this dialog by clicking CLOSE.
Afterwards select OK to reboot the system.
CAUTION If the system’s DVD/CD writer or (optional) MO-drive was stopped by accident, simply stop the
!! CAUTION:
external device as well and reboot the system.
During reboot, the DVD/CD writer and the MO-drive will be installed again.

Section 3-6
Completing the Set Up
3-6-1 Connecting the Unit to a Power Source
The connection of the Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound unit to a power source should be performed by
a qualified person who has completed basic Voluson® 730Expert System User Training.
Use only the power cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare - Kretztechnik
to connect the unit to the power source.
CAUTION Prior to connect the Voluson® 730Expert unit to a power source, verify compliance with all
!! CAUTION: Prior to
electrical and safety requirements. Check the power cord to verify that it is intact and of
hospital-grade. Products equipped with a power source (wall outlet) plug should be connected
to the fixed power socket that has a protective grounding conductor. Never use an adapter or
converter to connect with a power source plug (e.g., a three-prong to two-prong converter).
WARNING
WARNING The unit’s power must be supplied from a separate, properly rated outlet to avoid risk
!! WARNING:
of fire. See Section 2-2-2-1 "Voluson® 730Expert Power Requirements" on page 2-3 for
rating information. The power cord should not, under any circumstances, be altered to
a configuration rated less than that specified for the current.
CAUTION Whenever disconnecting the Voluson® 730Expert system from the electrical outlet, always
!! CAUTION:
observe the safety precautions. First unplug the main power cable from the wall outlet socket,
then from the unit itself. Remove by pulling on the cable connector - DO NOT pull on the cable.
CAUTION The Voluson® 730Expert requires all covers!

!! CAUTION:
Operate this system only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
3-6-2 Power On / Boot Up
3-6-2-1 Scanner Power On

1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
2.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.
Never use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground.
3.) CPN6 only - Switch ON the Circuit Breaker (F1) and the Power Switch of peripherals (F2).
4.) CPN80-81 only - Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Circuit Breaker
Connector for
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-29 Circuit Breaker at rear of system with CPN80 installed
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the control panel is illuminated,
!! NOTICE:
indicating that the System (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.
3-26 Section 3-6 - Completing the Set Up

3-6-2-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up

Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel.
ON/OFF Standby switch
Figure 3-30 ON/OFF Standby Switch
NOTE: The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with the
Standby switch. The switch of printers has to be in ON position before starting the system.
However, be aware some auxiliary equipment may switch itself to standby mode when
Standby power is on (e.g., Color video printer) and must therefore be switched on separately.
(CPN6 only - Auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately if the F2 power switch
on the rear of the system is always ON.)
When the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel is pressed, the System (including the
Back-end Processor) starts and the operating system is loaded which then leads the application
software to activate the scanner.
The system automatically performs an initialization sequence which includes the following:
- Loading the operating system.

- Running a quick diagnostic check of the system.
- Detecting connected probes
As soon as the software has been loaded, the system enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application
that were used before the system was shut down.
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is about 2 minutes.

3-6-3 Power Off / Shutdown

NOTICE After turning off a system, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
!! NOTICE:
The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-6-3-1 Back-end Processor Power Down

1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel. see: Figure 3-30.
3-6-3-2 Scanner Shutdown

1.) If not already in read mode, freeze the image.
2.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel.
3.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Standby switch. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately.
WARNING
WARNING Disconnection of the Main Power Cable is necessary!
!! WARNING:
For Example: When repairing the system.
4.) After complete power down, unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect
the main power cable from the system or unplug it from the AC wall outlet socket.
Circuit Breaker 2 screws
Mains Power Cable

pull-out Protection
Figure 3-31 Circuit Breaker, Protection and Power Cable on back of Voluson® 730Expert
5.) Press once on the brakes to block the front wheels (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest).
6.) Disconnect probes. (Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise and then pull the connector
straight out of the probe port.)
7.) If required, open the right-hand side door, remove the probe cable from the cable holder and then
close the door.
CAUTION DO NOT disconnect a probe while running (Live Scan “Write” mode)!
!! CAUTION:
A software error may occur. In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).
3-28 Section 3-6 - Completing the Set Up

3-6-4 Transducer Connection

Connect a transducer to one of the three rightmost transducer receptacle as follows:
1.) Inspect the probe and probe socket to verify that it is free of debris.
2.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is at horizontal position.
3.) Insert the connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface.
4.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place.
Twist the lever to the horizontal position to disconnect the transducer.
5.) Open the right-hand side door, lay the cable into the intended cable holder and close the door.
Figure 3-32 Transducer Connection
CAUTION If the cable spout on the right-hand door is missing, don’t pull the probe cable.
!! CAUTION:
Please insert the spout in the designated place to avoid damage of the probe cable.
CAUTION Do not bend the probe cable acutely. Fault conditions can result in electric shock hazard.
!! CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of probe connectors which are exposed when the probe is removed.
Do not touch the patient when connecting or disconnecting a probe.
NOTE: Prior to connecting or disconnecting a probe, freeze the image.

It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.

Section 3-7
Printer Installation
NOTE: For Connection schemes refer to Section 3-5 "Connection of Auxiliary Devices" on page 3-8.
For further installation instructions see:
• Section 3-7-1 "Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c" on page 3-31

• Section 3-7-2 "Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD" on page 3-33
• Section 3-7-3 "Installing Bluetooth Deskjet Printer" on page 3-35
• Section 3-7-4 "Printer Installation manually" on page 3-46
• Section 3-7-5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-51
CAUTION The Bluetooth Printer Connection set as well as the Color Deskjet printer MUST NOT be installed
!! CAUTION:
by the user!
For installation please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.
3-30 Section 3-7 - Printer Installation

3-7-1 Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c

1.) Power off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-3 on page 3-28.
2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-8 and reinstall the rear cover plate.
NOTE: For connection schemes refer to Section 3-5-9 on page 3-20.
NOTICE Do not connect the USB-cable to the printer!

!! NOTICE:
NOTE: “Mouse functions” can be performed by using the trackball for moving the cursor.
“Normal select” (Click) = left/right trackball key; “Opening a context menu” = upper trackball key
3.) Turn ON the printer, then switch ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted.
NOTE: The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system!
3-7-1-1 Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver

Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson® 730Expert!
1.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows ‘Searching for Drivers …’,
‘Found new Hardware …’ and finally the following windows appear.
select “Search for a suitable driver for my

device (recommended)”
Click on “Specify a location”
Figure 3-33 Found New Hardware Wizard

3-7-1-1 Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver (cont’d)

2.) Click the NEXT buttons to start the Hardware Wizard and to locate the driver files.
3.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path on the hard disk (see: Figure 3-34)
- C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HPDeskjet990c for HP 990cxi
- C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HPDeskjet995c for HP 995c, and then click OK.
Figure 3-34 Search for Network path on hard disk
4.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied.
5.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard.
Figure 3-35 Confirm correct path and finish the Installation
6.) Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE After boot up of the system, verify the correct settings in the printer “Properties”, see: Section 3-7-5
!! NOTICE:Ver
"Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-51.

3-7-2 Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD

1.) Power off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-3 on page 3-28.
2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-8 and reinstall the rear cover plate.
NOTE: For connection schemes refer to Section 3-5-10 on page 3-21.
NOTICE Do not connect the USB-cable to the printer!

!! NOTICE:
3.) Turn ON the printer, then switch ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted.
NOTE: The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system!
3-7-2-1 Install the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD printer software/driver

Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson® 730Expert!
1.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows ‘Searching for Drivers …’,
‘Found new Hardware …’ and finally the following windows appear.
select “Search for a suitable driver for my

device (recommended)”
Click on “Specify a location”
Figure 3-36 Found New Hardware Wizard
2.) Click the NEXT buttons to start the Hardware Wizard and to locate the driver files.

3-7-2-1 Install the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD printer software/driver (cont’d)
3.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path (see: Figure 3-34)
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\SonyUP-D21MD or
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\SonyUP-D23MD and then click OK.
Figure 3-37 Search for Network path
4.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied.
5.) The Message: Digital Signature Not Found appears. Click YES.
6.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard.
Figure 3-38 Confirm correct path and finish the Installation
7.) Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
!! NOTICE:Ver

3-7-3 Installing Bluetooth Deskjet Printer

NOTICE Before installing a Bluetooth color printer:
!! NOTICE:
• the Bluetooth Printer Set (see: Section 3-7-3-1 on page 3-35) MUST be installed,
• the Bluetooth Software has to be configured (see: Section 3-7-3-2 on page 3-38) and
• the Bluetooth Printer Adapter has to be connected (see: Section 3-7-3-3 on page 3-40).
3-7-3-1 Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software
1.) Turn ON the system and wait till the system has booted.
2.) Connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle to the USB connector(s) on the rear of the system.
As soon as the dongle is detected the login window pops up. Remove the dongle.
3.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password (password changes all six month) and click ENABLE.
4.) Press the ALT + F4 key simultaneously to close the “GEMS Service Home Page”.
5.) Press the ALT + F4 key again to close the Ultrasound Application.
6.) Insert the USB Bluetooth Adapter CD into the system´s DVD drive.
7.) Open the Windows Start menu by pressing CTRL + ESC on the keyboard and click on “Run”.
Figure 3-39 select “Run” and enter F:autorun in “Run” window
8.) Enter F:autorun into the “Run window and click OK. The following window appears:
Install Driver
Figure 3-40 Install Bluetooth Software (e.g.: DBT-122 adapter)
9.) Click on “Install Driver” (when installing DBT-122 Bluetooth adapter) respectively
click on “Install Bluetooth Software” (when installing “obsolete” DBT-120)

3-7-3-1 Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software (cont’d)
10.)Confirm the following dialog window with NEXT. The “License Agreement” window appears:
Figure 3-41 Welcome to Install... and License Agreement
11.)Select “I accept the terms in the license agreement” and then click on NEXT.
12.)Confirm the following dialog with NEXT. The “Ready to Install the Program” window appears.
Figure 3-42 Ready to Install the Program
13.)Click on INSTALL.
14.)If dialog “Driver Signature Notice” appears, confirm it with OK.
The Bluetooth software is being installed.

3-7-3-1 Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software (cont’d)
15.)When the dialog “Bluetooth device not found” appears, DO NOT click any button.
connected
Bluetooth
Adapter
Figure 3-43 Bluetooth Adapter connected to USB port on rear of the system
16.)Connect the Bluetooth Adapter (DBT-122 or “obsolete” DBT-120) on an available USB port on the
rear of the system.
17.)After plugging in the Bluetooth Adapter, wait (~ 3 minutes) until the “Found New Hardware Wizard”
has installed the Bluetooth Dongle.
NOTICE ONLY when using “obsolete” DBT-120 Bluetooth adapter:

!! NOTICE:
If prompted, enter the 32-digit security code (8 digits per field), which is located on the back flap of the
driver CD-cover and then click OK.
18.)When the “InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog appears, click on FINISH.
Figure 3-44 Finish installation and restart the system
19.)Finally click on YES to restart the system.

20.)Remove the CD, close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).

3-7-3-2 Configuration of the Bluetooth Software

1.) After the system has restarted, connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle to the USB
connector(s) on the rear of the system.
2.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password, click ENABLE.
4.) Press the ALT + F4 key again to close the Ultrasound Application.
5.) Press CTRL + ESC to open the Windows Start menu and open “My Bluetooth Places”.
Figure 3-45 select “My Bluetooth Places” and click on Next
6.) In the “Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard” dialog click on NEXT.

7.) In the following window, enter an unique computer name (e.g., A10187 = Serial number of the
system) and then click NEXT.
enter an unique
computer name
Figure 3-46 Device Name and Type
8.) Confirm the following dialog with NEXT.

The “Bluetooth Service Selection” window (see: Figure 3-47) appears.

3-7-3-2 Configuration of the Bluetooth Software (cont’d)
9.) In the displayed “Bluetooth Service Selection” window deselect all services (i.e., remove all check
marks) and then click NEXT.
NOTE: Display of this window might be different. It depends on installed Bluetooth Adapter.
deselect ALL services move the scroll bar

in this window downwards to
view all services
Figure 3-47 Bluetooth Service Selection
10.)In the “Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard” window click on SKIP.
Figure 3-48 Click on Skip and then Finish configuration
11.)In the following window select FINISH to complete configuration.

3-7-3-3 Prepare the Printer and connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter
NOTICE Preparations as well as Printer Adapter connection depend on the used Bluetooth Line Printer.
!! NOTICE:
• in case of Canon Pixma MP600 / MP610, proceed with Section 3-7-3-3-1 on page 3-40
• in case of HP or Olivetti printer, proceed with Section 3-7-3-3-2 on page 3-40
3-7-3-3-1 Canon Printer - Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter

1.) Prepare the Color Printer:
* Connect the power cord to a wall outlet socket and then turn on the printer.
* Load paper in the auto sheet feeder (A) or paper cassette (B).
* Install ink tanks in the correct order (from left to right).
2.) Connect the Canon Bluetooth Printer Adapter to the direct USB print port of the printer.
NOTE: When the Bluetooth adapter is properly attached to the printer, the Power lamp will flash twice.
Figure 3-49 Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter (Canon printer)
3.) Proceed with Section 3-7-3-4 "Installing the printer software/driver" on page 3-41.
3-7-3-3-2 HP/Olivetti Printer - Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter

- Prepare the Color Printer according to steps illustrated on the HP quick-start poster:
* Connect the power cord to a wall outlet socket.
* Load white paper.
* Turn on the printer and install print cartridges.
1.) Power off the printer.
2.) Connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter to the USB port of the printer using the enclosed cable.
3.) Power on the printer.
4.) Connect the included Power Adapter to the Bluetooth Printer Adapter and to the power socket.
Figure 3-50 Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter (HP / Olivetti printer)
5.) The test page is printed after approx. 10 seconds.

The Bluetooth Printer Adapter can now be used for Bluetooth printing.
If no Test page is printed, refer to the Bluetooth Printer Adapter Quick Guide for troubleshooting.

3-7-3-4 Installing the printer software/driver
NOTICE Be sure that during installation process only the ultrasound system dedicated Bluetooth printer is
!! NOTICE:
powered on!
1.) Press CTRL + ESC to open the Start menu and open “My Bluetooth Places” (see: Figure 3-45).
2.) Double-click “Bluetooth Setup Wizard”. The Bluetooth Setup” window appears:
Figure 3-51 Bluetooth Setup
3.) Select “I want to find a specific Bluetooth device...” and then click on NEXT.
NOTICE Installation procedure depends on the used Bluetooth Line Printer.

!! NOTICE:
• in case of Canon Pixma MP600 / MP610, proceed with Section 3-7-3-4-1 on page 3-42
• in case of HP or Olivetti printer, proceed with Section 3-7-3-4-2 on page 3-44

3-7-3-4-1 Install Canon MP600 / MP610 printer

1.) In the following “Bluetooth Device Selection “dialog window select “Canon MP600”
(or “Canon MP610”) and then click NEXT.
2.) In the “Bluetooth Security Setup” window click on SKIP PAIRING.
Figure 3-52 Bluetooth Security Setup and Service Selection
3.) Finally, select “Hardcopy Cable Replacement” and then click FINISH.
4.) Insert the Driver CD provided with the Printer into the system’s DVD drive.
5.) Wait until the “Add Printer Wizard” window appears, then select the HAVE DISK button.
[Browse] for Printer Driver on F:\

(while F stands for the system´s DVD drive)
Figure 3-53 Have Disk... / Browse for path on DVD drive
6.) Either enter the path F:\Driver\x86\Driver directly, or use the BROWSE button to search for
the Printer Driver file1 on F:\ (while F stands for the system´s DVD drive) and then click OK.
7.) Verify the selected Printer Driver path (see: Figure 3-53 above) and confirm with OK.
8.) Select the manufacturer and model of your printer (e.g., Canon MP600) and confirm with OK.
1. For example: Driver for Canon MP600 => “F:\Driver\x86\Driver\MP600PR.inf”

3-7-3-4-1 Install Canon MP600 / MP610 printer (cont´d)
After driver installation, the Canon Printer Properties page appears.
9.) In the GENERAL page click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button.

10.)Select the PAGE SETUP page, choose adequate paper size and confirm with APPLY.
Figure 3-54 GENERAL and PAGE SETUP page
11.)Select the MAINTENANCE page and click the VIEW PRINTER STATUS... button.
12.)Click on [Option] and deselect “Enable Status Monitor” (remove check mark).
close window
remove this check mark
Figure 3-55 MAINTENANCE page / deselect Enable Status Monitor
13.)Close all open windows by clicking on the [x] sign in the corner, APPLY and/or OK.
14.)Remove the CD and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
15.)Assign the printer as Report Printer; see: "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-55.

3-7-3-4-2 Install HP Deskjet series printer

1.) In the following “Bluetooth Device Selection“ dialog window select deskjet 5600 respectively
Deskjet 5900 series, Bluetooth Printer Adapter and then click NEXT.
2.) In the “Bluetooth Security Setup” window click on SKIP PAIRING.
Figure 3-56 Bluetooth Security Setup and Service Selection
3.) Finally, select “Hardcopy Cable Replacement” and then click FINISH.
4.) Wait until the “Add Printer Wizard” window appears.
In this window click on HAVE DISK....
Figure 3-57 Install Printer Driver from Disk

3-7-4-4-2 Install HP Deskjet series printer (cont´d)
5.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path (see: Figure 3-57)
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HpDeskjet5600 or
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\Olivetti P210 and then click OK.
6.) Click OPEN, select the “xxx.inf” file and click OPEN again.
7.) Verify the selected Printer Driver path and confirm with OK.
The HP Deskjet Properties page appears.
8.) In the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button.
9.) Select the PAPER/QUALITY page and select the adequate paper size.
Figure 3-58 General and Paper/Quality page
10.)For saving the adjusted paper size settings click APPLY and then OK.
11.)In the next window, click OK again and then close all open windows.
12.)Start the Ultrasound Application (Start menu -> Programs -> Kretz V730 -> Kretz V730).
13.)Assign the printer as Report Printer; see: "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-55.
14.)Print report page(s) containing measurements.
For operation see Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Expert.
15.)Turn off the system!

3-7-4 Printer Installation manually

1.) On the Touch Panel, press UTILITIES.
2.) In the Utilities menu, touch SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the setup desktop on the screen.
3.) If not already done, connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle to the USB connector(s) on the
rear of the system. As soon as the dongle is detected the login window pops up.
5.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard simultaneously to switch from “GEMS Service Home
Page - Netscape” to “Kretz UISApp” ( = Ultrasound Application); see: Figure 5-52 on page 5-68).
6.) Select the SERVICE page.
“Printer” button
Figure 3-59 Service window
7.) Click on the SERVICE TOOLS... button.

8.) Click on the PRINTER button.

3-7-4 Printer Installation manually (cont’d)

9.) Click the ADD PRINTER button.
A warning message appears:
Please read this message carefully and click YES if you have skills to do this.
Figure 3-60 Add Printer and Printer Installation/Properties
10.)Click the NEXT button to start the Add Printer Wizard.

11.)Select the ‘Local Printer‘, deselect “Automatically install Plug and Play printer” and then click NEXT.
Figure 3-61 Add Printer Wizard


12.)Select the corresponding Printer Port (e.g., Figure 3-62 = USB001) and click NEXT.
Figure 3-62 Select Printer Port
13.)In the following window select the HAVE DISK button.
Figure 3-63 Have Disk...
14.)Use the BROWSE button to search the Printer Driver path (C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\xxxx).

Figure 3-64 Select Printer Driver path (C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\....)
15.)Click OPEN, select the “xxx.inf” file and click OPEN again.
16.)Verify the selected Printer Driver path and confirm with OK.
Figure 3-65 verify selected Printer Driver path
17.)Select the manufacturer and model of your printer and confirm with the NEXT button.


18.)Assign a name, decide if the printer should be used as default printer and confirm with NEXT.
see: Figure 3-66.
Figure 3-66 Assign name and select Printer Sharing - no
19.)Select “Do not share this printer” and confirm the “Printer Sharing” window (Figure 3-66) by clicking
NEXT.
20.)The “Complete the Add Printer Wizard” window appears on the screen.
Figure 3-67 Complete manual Printer Installation
21.)Complete the manual Printer Installation with the FINISH button.

22.)Close all open windows, close the “System Setup” with SAVE & EXIT and restart the system
(turn off and on the system).
!! NOTICE:Ver

3-7-5 Adjustment of Printer Settings

1.) After system restart, touch the UTILITIES key, and then SYSTEM SETUP on the Touch Panel.
6.) Click on the SERVICE TOOLS... button.
7.) Click on the PRINTER button.
8.) Select the desired printer from the pull-down menu and click the EDIT SETTINGS button.
9.) Confirm the warning message with the YES button. The “Printer Properties” appear.
select the desired printer

from the pull-down menu
Figure 3-68 Select the desired printer
To adjust the Line printer see: Section 3-7-5-1 "HP 990cxi / HP 995c - Printer Settings" .
To adjust the Color printer see: Section 3-7-5-2 "UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings" .
WARNING
WARNING After each printer installation, the leakage currents have to be measured
!! WARNING:
acc. IEC 60601-1 resp. UL60601-1.

3-7-5-1 HP 990cxi / HP 995c - Printer Settings

1.) Call up the ‘Printer Properties’; operation see: Section 3-7-5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" .
2.) Select the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button.
3.) Select the SETUP page for adjusting print quality and paper size.
“Paper type” should be set to ‘Automatic’. See left Figure 3-69.
4.) Select the FEATURES page for adjusting ‘Two-Side Printing’ if desired.
“Orientation” must be set to ‘Portrait’. See right Figure 3-69.
Figure 3-69 HP Printer - Settings
5.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK.
6.) Select the PORTS page and select/verify the correct USB printer port.
Finally close the ‘Printers’ -window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT.
8.) Assign the HP 990cxi / HP 995c printer as Report Printer;
see: Section 3-7-6 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-55.
9.) Print report page(s) containing measurements.
For operation see Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Expert.
10.)Turn off the system!

3-7-5-2 UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings

1.) Call up the ‘Printer Properties’; operation see: Section 3-7-5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" .
NOTICE Settings for Paper Size MUST match with the used Paper (large/small) and also the right color ink
!! NOTICE:
cartridge has to be used. Otherwise you will get an error message at printing.
2.) Select the PAPER page and select:

- Paper Size: UPC-21L (large) / UPC-21S (small)
- Orientation: Landscape (recommended when using large paper size)
- High Speed (check mark on)
Figure 3-70 Paper page

3-7-5-2 UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings (cont’d)

3.) Select the GRAPHICS page. From the “Color Adjust” pop-up menu select:
a.) Color Balance: Cyan = 0; Magenta = 0; Yellow = 0
b.) Gamma Select: Gamma 1
Figure 3-71 Graphics page (Color Balance + Gamma Select)
c.) Color Correction: set Printer Hardware Color Correction

d.) Lightness: Sharpness = 7 or 8; Dark = 0; Gamma = -12; Light = 8
Figure 3-72 Graphics page (Color Correction + Lightness)
Finally close the ‘Printers’-window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT.
5.) Assign the Printer to remote keys PRINT A and/or PRINT B; see: Section 3-7-6 on page 3-55.
3-7-6 Remote Control Selection

To assign an auxiliary device (e.g., printer) to the remote keys PRINT A and/or PRINT B, or to adjust
Foot switch, etc.:
1.) On the Touch Panel, touch UTILITIES.

3.) Select the PERIPHERALS page.
VCR Source
Foot Switch
Remote
Control
Report Printer
Print B
Print A
Figure 3-73 Peripherals page
• Remote Print A: Select the desired Printer for the remote control PRINT A key.
• Remote Print B: Select the desired Printer for the remote control PRINT B key.
NOTE: Optionally the Remote Control can be done by Foot switches.

Therefore select “Print A” or “Print B” in “Foot Switch Left” or “Foot Switch Right” - section.
• Report Printer: Select the desired Report Printer from the pull-down menu.
NOTICE The selected Report Printer is usually used for printing reports and images from Sonoview.
!! NOTICE:
• Foot Switch Left/Right: Select desired function of the Foot switch Left and Right.
After adjustment, click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup.

Section 3-8
System Configuration
3-8-1 System Setup
Modifications of system parameters are supported by diverse dialog pages and windows on the system
setup desktop:
• General - Date, Time, Clinic Name, Language, Screen saver, etc.

• User Settings - to save User programs, 3D/4D programs, Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc.
• Peripherals - to adjust assignment of PRINT keys, Foot Switch, selection of Save Destination, etc.
• Option - shows which options are installed in the system
• Service - connect the USB “standard GE” dongle and enter the “standard GE revolving” password
(changes every six month) to get access to the Service Tools functions
• Backup - Save/Load User Settings Only, Save/Load/Delete Full Backup
• Network - to set up all DICOM, Sonoview and Network configuration nodes
• System Info - shows which Software/Hardware version is installed in the system
NOTICE More detailed information pertaining System Setup adjustments is found in the Voluson® 730Expert
!! NOTICE:
Basic User Manual; see: Table 9-17, “System Manuals,” on page 9-31.
3-8-1-1 To invoke the Setup procedure:

1.) Touch the UTILITIES key on the Touch Panel.
2.) Touch the SYSTEM SETUP key in the “Utilities” menu to activate the setup desktop screen.
In general operations are done with the trackball and the trackball keys (mouse emulation).
Trackball (mouse position):

positions the pointing device (arrow) on the desktop
left trackball key (left mouse button):

sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
upper trackball key (right mouse button):

no function in system desktop
right trackball key (left mouse button):

sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
3-56 Section 3-8 - System Configuration

3-8-1-2 How to enter Date and Time

Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup see: Figure 3-74.
1.) Select the “Date Format” (only one can be active).

2.) Click the DATE/TIME button to activate a sub dialog window to enter date, time and time zone.
3.) Click the TIME FORMAT button to activate a sub dialog window to choose the preferred time
format.
4.) Click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup.
select Date Format
Display options
select Time Format
select Date/Time
and Time Zone
enter Clinic Name change Language
Exit without saving Save Settings & Exit
Figure 3-74 System Setup - General page
3-8-1-3 How to enter Hospital Name

1.) Select the text box to enter a new “Clinic Name” with the keyboard.
The clinic name will be copied into the Hospital ID in the information header.
3-8-1-4 How to change Language (and/or EUM Language)

1.) Select the desired language from the pop-up menu.

BT-Version:
BT Version: Changing the EUM Language is only possible at systems upgraded to BT05/ BT08 (SW5.x.x).
NOTE: After changing the language the system has to reboot.
3-8-1-5 How to change Touch Panel Scheme

Select the USER SETTING page in the System Setup.
1.) Select the desired color scheme display of the Touch Panel from the pop-up menu.
3-8-1-6 How to change Video Norm
BT-Version:
BT Version: at BT04 systems:
As soon as the dongle is detected the login window pops up.
2.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password (changes every six month) and click ENABLE.
4.) Touch the UTILITIES key on the Touch Panel.
5.) Touch the SYSTEM SETUP key in the “Utilities” menu to activate the setup desktop screen.
6.) Select the SERVICE page in the System Setup.
select
Video Norm
Exit without Save Settings &

saving Exit
Figure 3-75 Service Functions window
7.) If not currently selected, click the desired field PAL (50Hz) or NTSC (60Hz).
NOTE: The Adjustment of the Video Norm will take about 3 minutes!
8.) Click SAVE&EXIT to exit System Setup. The system will reboot.
BT-Version:
BT Version: at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x):
1.) Touch the UTILITIES key and then the SYSTEM SETUP key on the Touch Panel.
2.) In the System Setup desktop, select the SERVICE page, enter the password SHE and click ACCEPT.
3.) If not currently selected, click the desired “Video Norm” field PAL (50Hz) or NTSC (60Hz).
NOTE: The Adjustment of the Video Norm will take about 3 minutes!
4.) Click SAVE&EXIT to exit System Setup. The system will reboot.

3-8-2 On-Board Optional Peripherals

Mains outlets: Mains socket ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 for accessories.
All mains outlets are co-switched by the unit’s mains switch via built-in isolation transformer.
Output voltage for: ST1 - ST5: 115V or 230V.
CAUTION Modification of voltage setting only by an authorized service person!

!! CAUTION:
The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color video monitor) connected to
these outlets must not exceed 350VA!
Table 3-8 Approved Peripherals
Device Manufacturer Model Connection Table Number

B/W Video Printer SONY UP-895MD NTSC/PAL Table 9-15
Digital Color Video Printer SONY UP-D21MD USB-Port Table 9-15
Digital Color Video Printer SONY UP-D23MD USB-Port Table 9-15
SVO-9500MD NTSC
SONY Table 9-15
SVO-9500-MDP PAL
Video Cassette Recorder
HS-MD3000U NTSC
Mitsubishi Table 9-15
HS-MD3000E PAL
DVD Recorder NTSC

SONY DVO-1000MD (PAL/NTSC) Table 9-15
(SW5.x.x = BT05/BT08 only) PAL
Line Printer Hewlett Packard hp deskjet 990cxi USB-Port Table 9-15
Line Printer Hewlett Packard hp deskjet 995c USB-Port Table 9-15

Hewlett Packard HP 5600 Series USB-Port (Bluetooth) Table 9-15
Olivetti Olivetti Job Jet 210 USB-Port (Bluetooth) Table 9-15

Bluetooth Printer
Hewlett Packard HP 5940 USB-Port (Bluetooth) Table 9-15
Canon Pixma MP600 / MP610 USB-Port (Bluetooth) Table 9-15
Global Modem Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA Table 9-16
ECG Preamplifier MAN6 Table 9-16
Footswitch MFT7 Table 9-16
Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) Fujitsu MCM3130AP Table 9-7

3-8-3 External I/O Connection Panel (GES)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 3-76 External I/O Panel Connectors
Table 3-9 External I/O Connector Descriptions
Item Connector Name Table Number Description
1 VGA OUT Table 3-10 print out VGA signal with monitor/printer
2 MODEM Table 3-11 RJ-11 with global adapter kit for modem connection
DICOM input/output
3 NETWORK Table 3-12
twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
4 USB-1 Table 3-13 USB-2.0 port
5 USB-2 Table 3-13 USB-2.0 port
6 COMP VIDEO OUT Table 3-14 BNC Connector, Color Video Output

3-8-3-1 External I/O Pin Outs
Table 3-10 VGA OUT Connector, Sub-D 15 Pin
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 VGA OUT1 R Red
2 VGA OUT1 G Green
3 VGA OUT1 B Blue
4, 9,11,12,15 N/C N/C
5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND
13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync
14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync
Table 3-11 Modem, RJ-11 Modular 6 Pin
2 TEL L4 Telephone L4
Others NC Non-connection
Table 3-12 Network Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin
1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD+
2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD-
3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD+
6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD-
Others NC Non-connection
Table 3-13 USB 1, 2 Connectors
1 VCC USB Power Supply
2 - Data USB Data (-)
3 + Data USB Data (+)
4 GND USB Power Ground

Table 3-14 COMP VIDEO OUT Connector
Pin No Signal Description
1 (Center Pin) Signal
2 (Coax Pin) Signal GND
Table 3-15 Footswitch Connector (located at Power Supply Module CPN - rear side)
Pin No Input Signal Description

1 Signal GND
2 right switch normally open
3 left switch normally open
4 not connected not connected
3-8-4 Video Specification

Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the
Voluson® 730Expert.
Table 3-16 Video Specifications VGA Connector
Timing Parameter Value
Visible Resolution 800 x 600
Horizontal Rate [kHz] 47.20
H Total cycle time [µs] 21.20
H Sync width [µs] 1.50
H Back Porch [µs] 2.94
H Active Video Time [µs] 16.15
H Front Porch [µs] 0.616
Horizontal +/- pos
Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.00
Vertical Total cycle time [ms] 13.30
V Sync Width [ms] 0.170
V Back Porch [ms] 0.276
V Active Video Time [ms] 12.68
V Front Porch [ms] 0.174
Dot Clock [MHz] 49.54

Electrical Specifications on VGA Connector
• Signal Level: 700 mV at 75 Ohm

• H/V Sync: TTL Level
Table 3-17 Video Specifications for Composite, Video Connector
S-Video Output set to: PAL NTSC

Timing Parameter 50Hz 60Hz
Visible Resolution 800 x 600 800 x 600
Pixel Clock 17.734475 MHz = 4* ft 14.318 MHz = 4* ft
Horizontal Total Line 64µs / 1135 Pixel 63.56µs / 910 Pixel
Horizontal Active Display 50.50µs / 902 Pixel 52.50µs / 752 Pixel
Horizontal Front Porch 1.96µs / 35 Pixel 1.62µs / 23 Pixel
Horizontal Sync Width 4.62µs / 82 Pixel 4.68µs / 67 Pixel
Horizontal Back Porch 6.52µs / 116 Pixel 4.76µs / 68 Pixel
Vertical Total Lines 20ms / 312.50 Lines 16.68ms / 262.50 Lines
Vertical Active Lines 18.18ms / 284 Lines 15.22ms / 239.50 Lines
Vertical Front Porch 256us 4 Lines 381us / 6 Lines
Vertical Sync 160us / 2.50 Lines 190us 7 3 Lines
Vertical Back Porch 1408us / 22 Lines 890us / 14 Lines
Serration Pulses 5 6
Interlaced yes yes
Aspect Ratio pixel size 14.75 (H) : 17.734475 (V) 14.75 (H) : 14.318 (V)
Video levels on 75 Ohm:
white level 1020mV 1020mV
black level 370mV 370mV
blanking level 320mV 320mV
sync level* 20mV 20mV
Section 3-9
Available Probes
See Chapter 9 - Probes, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement service probes.
Section 3-10
Software/Option Configuration
For description refer to:
• Section 3-8-1 "System Setup" on page 3-56
NOTICE More detailed information pertaining System Setup and Measure Setup adjustments is found in the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, which is available in different languages.

Section 3-11
Network IP Address Configuration
NOTE: Following Information must be provided by customer or hospital engineer before you can start:
A Station name, AE Title, IP address and Port Number for the Voluson® 730Expert.
The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION.
Only if necessary (e.g. for Internet access).
1.) Touch the UTILITIES key on the Touch Panel once to display the Utilities menu.
2.) Select SYSTEM SETUP and open the NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen.
3.) Click the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button, read the message and confirm with YES.
click Network Configuration button, read

message and afterwards confirm with Yes
Figure 3-77 Network Configuration
4.) The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page appears.
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if

your network supports this capability.
You need to ask your network administrator for
the appropriate settings.
Type in:
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
NOTE: This example shows fictional numbers!
Figure 3-78 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
To specify a DICOM Address, follow the instructions of described in the Basic User Manual,
Chapter 17 of the Voluson® 730Expert.
3-64 Section 3-11 - Network IP Address Configuration

3-11-1 Map Network Drive
1.) Select the MAP NETWORK DRIVE button (in the System Setup - Network page, see: Figure 3-77)
to open a dialog where the system can be connected to a shared network drive of another server.
Figure 3-79 Map Network Drive window
2.) Enter the name of the shared network folder in the „Network Folder Name“ field.
3.) Supply a valid user name and a password for this folder.
NOTE: If you check the „Automatic Reconnect“ box, the system tries to establish the connection
again when starting up.
Otherwise, the connection must be re-established manually after a shutdown or reboot.
4.) Select the CONNECT button to establish the connection to the remote machine.
If successful, the DISCONNECT button becomes active.
NOTICE If there is an error during the connection, a warning message appears inside the dialog.
!! NOTICE:
In this case, please verify the data in the dialog.
NOTICE If there already is a connection to the remote server, the CONNECT button is grayed.
!! NOTICE:
To change the existing connection, first click on DISCONNECT and then enter the new settings.
WARNING
WARNING Please make sure that the server you are connecting to is trustworthy and reliable.
!! WARNING:
For details, contact your local system administrator.
If you backup Sonoview data to this server, all the patients’ demographic data will be
copied to this server!

Section 3-12
Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Site System Information
Floor: Comments:
Site:
Dept: Room:
Serial #: Type: REV:
CONTACT INFORMATION
Name Title Phone E-Mail Address
TCP/IP Settings
Name - AE Title:
IP Settings Remote Archive Setup
IP Address: Remote Archive IP:

Subnet Mask: Remote Archive Name:
Default Gateway:
Services (Destination Devices)

Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3-66 Section 3-12 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet

Section 3-13
Paperwork
NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manual, Installation Manual,...) for the
peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all
relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete
system.
3-13-1 Product Locator Installation

NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card.
Figure 3-1 Product Locator Installation Card
3-13-2 User Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the
installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available.
Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.

3-68 Section 3-13 - Paperwork

Chapter 4
Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the Voluson® 730Expert
scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments.

4-1 Overview 4-1
4-2 Required Equipment 4-1
4-3 General Procedure 4-2
4-4 Functional Checks 4-7
4-5 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images 4-31
4-6 Software Configuration Checks 4-41
4-7 Peripheral Checks 4-42
4-8 Mechanical Function Checks 4-43
4-9 Site Log 4-44
NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the Voluson® 730Expert
!! NOTICE:
Basic User Manual; see: Table 9-17, “System Manuals,” on page 9-31.
Section 4-2
Required Equipment
• An empty (blank) DVD/CD+(R)W or MO Disk.
• At least one transducer. See ”Probes” on page 9-32 for an overview.
(normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks 4-1

Section 4-3
General Procedure
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

!! CAUTION:
Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only)

!! NOTICE:
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable
on the system.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again.
4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On

1.) Connect the Power cable to the back of the system.
2.) Screw on the pull-out protection of the mains power cable with the 2 screws.
3.) Connect the Power cable to an appropriate mains power outlet.
4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Circuit Breaker 2 screws
Mains Power Cable

pull-out Protection
Figure 4-1 Circuit Breaker, Protection and Power Cable on back of Voluson® 730Expert
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the control panel illuminates amber,
!! NOTICE:
indicating the System (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.
4-2 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On (cont’d)
ON/OFF Standby switch
Figure 4-2 ON/OFF Standby Switch
When the ON/OFF Stand-By switch left below the Control Panel is pressed, the System (including the
Back-end Processor) starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
As soon as the software has been loaded, the system enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application
that were used before the system was shut down. Depending on the BIOS-Version no status messages
are displayed during this process. Boot up time is about 2 minutes.

NOTICE After turning off a system, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
!! NOTICE:
4-3-2-1 Scanner Shutdown

2.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
WARNING
WARNING Disconnection of the Main Power Cable is necessary!
!! WARNING:
For Example: When repairing the system.
3.) After complete power down, unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect
the main power cable from the system or unplug it from the AC wall outlet socket.
Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-2.
4.) Press once on the brakes to block the front wheels (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest).
5.) Disconnect probes. (Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise and then pull the connector
straight out of the probe port.)
CAUTION DO NOT disconnect a probe while running (Live Scan “Write” mode)!
!! CAUTION:
A software error may occur. In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).

4-3-3 System Features
4-3-3-1 Control Panel
1 2
19
18
3
17
4
16
15
5
14 6
7
8
13 12 11 10 9
Figure 4-3 Control Panel Tour
1.) Touch Panel screen

2.) Touch Panel digipot and toggle switch controls
3.) Power-, Audio Volume- toggle switch controls
4.) TGC - Slider Controls
5.) Mode/Gain keys
6.) 3D/4D Volume Mode key
7.) Depth-, Focus- toggle switch controls
8.) Print A-, Print B-Trigger key
9.) Freeze / Run key
10.)Inter memory key to save to Sonoview or send to DICOM server
11.)Trackball and Trackball keys
12.)Exit key
13.)Annotation and Measurement keys
14.)Keyboard and F1 key to invoke the Electronic User Manual (EUM)
15.)Screen Format keys
16.)Patient Data Entry key
17.)Probe key
18.)Sonoview (Image Management) key
19.)VCR Remote Control key

4-3-3-2 Touch Panel
1 2 3
Figure 4-4 Touch Panel - Main Menu
1.) Main menu key: to change from one Sub menu to another.
2.) Sub menu key: to adjust settings of the selected Scan mode.
3.) Utilities key: activates the configuration system. The UTILITIES key is available in each Main menu.
4.) Setting window: shows all settings for the active application. The active one is highlighted.
5.) Additional functions which are supported by the selected Mode.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel menu is selected.
At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are combination rotary dials/push buttons and flip switch
controls. The functionality of these controls changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu.
Press the button to switch between controls (as with ß-View/Zoom), or rotate the dial to adjust the value.

4-3-3-3 Monitor Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
User program
7.5-5.0
21 Pwr 85%
Gn -8
C6 / M7 12
P4 / E2
20
13
14
19
18
15
17
STATUS BAR AREA 16
Figure 4-5 Monitor Display Tour
Table 4-2 Monitor Display Features

1. Logo 12. Image Info
2. Patient Name (Last-, First-, Middle Name) 13. TGC curve
3. Patient ID-number ; GA (Gestational Age) 14. Image area
4. Probe / Application 15. Measurement results
5. Depth / Frame rate 16. Status bar area
6. Mechanical Index 17. Body marker
7. Thermal Index 18. Depth scale marker
8. Sonographers Name 19. Gray scale wedge
9. Hospital Name (Identification) 20. Focal zone marker(s)
10. Date 21. Orientation marker
11. Time

Section 4-4
Functional Checks
For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, following pages will familiarize you with
image optimization for:
• 2D Mode (B Mode), see: Section 4-4-1 on page 4-8

• Additional (optional) Operating Modes, see: Section 4-4-2 on page 4-10
- B-Flow
- XTD-View
- Coded Contrast Imaging
• M Mode, see: Section 4-4-3 on page 4-12
- MCFM Mode
• Spectral Doppler Modes, see: Section 4-4-4 on page 4-14
- PW - Pulsed Wave Doppler
- CW - Continuous Wave Doppler
• Color Doppler Modes, see: Section 4-4-5 on page 4-15
- CFM - Color Flow Mode
- PD - Power Doppler
- TD - Tissue Doppler
- HD-Flow - Bi-Directional Angio (at systems upgraded to BT05/BT08 only)
• Volume Modes, see: Section 4-4-6 on page 4-17
- 3D Static
- 4D Real Time
- 4D Biopsy
- VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging (A-Plane, C-Plane and VCI Static)
- STIC - Fetal Cardio
- TUI (at systems upgraded to BT05/BT08 only)
- VOCAL II
- VCAD Heart (at systems upgraded to BT08 software only)
BT-Version:
BT Version: Some Modes or Options are only available at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).
NOTE: Some software may be considered standard depending upon system configuration.
If any Modes or Options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu and which Mode is selected.
Some function keys only appear on the Touch Panel if they are available for the selected probe.

4-4-1 2D Mode Checks
Figure 4-6 2D Main and 2D Sub Menu
Table 4-3 2D Mode Functions
Step Task Expected Results
Rotate the 2D MODE key to adjust the sensitivity (brightness) of the entire
1 2D Mode Gain
image.
Transmit Power
2 Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity.
Focus Depth
To select the depth position of the actual focus zone(s). Arrows at the left
3
edge of the 2D-Image mark the active focal zone(s) by their depth position.
Depth
Adjusts the depth range of the ultrasound image for the region of interest.
4
The number of image lines and the frame rate are automatically optimized.
Screen Format (Dual, Quad) Press this keys to change the display Mode from Single to DUAL or QUAD
display mode.
5
Press the SINGLE format key or the 2D MODE key to change from Dual or
Quad to Single display.
FFC combines a low frequency to increase the penetration and higher

6 FFC (Focus and Frequency Composite) frequency to keep a high resolution.
It reduces speckle and artifacts in the 2D image.
Pulses are transmitted not only perpendicularly to the acoustic window, but
7 XBEAM CRI (CrossBeam
also in oblique directions. The advantages of XBeam CRI are enhanced
Compound Resolution Imaging)
contrast resolution with better tissue differentiation and clear organ borders.
8 Coded Excitation improves image resolution and penetration in the far field.
CE (Coded Excitation)
This allows to use a higher frequency on technically difficult patients.
Speckle Reduction Imaging is a smoothing type filter to reduce speckle in the

9 SRI (Speckle Reduction Imaging)
ultrasound image.
4-8 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks

Table 4-3 2D Mode Functions
Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left
10 2D+2D/SRI frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode
image with SRI information.
Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left
11 2D+2D/SRI CRI frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode
image with SRI and XBEAM CRI information.
Advantage of the Trapezoid Mode: The scan area is very increased in

12 LINEAR / TRAPEZ relation to the linear display by steering the ultrasound lines in the border of
the probe.
13 Use the LEFT/RIGHT respectively the UP/DOWN keys on the Touch Panel
Image Orientation
to alternate the image orientation.
Use this control to select a part of interest of the 2D image. The advantage
14 ANGLE of the decreased field-of-view is an increased 2D frame rate due to the
smaller sector width.
This function allows the adjustment of the Volume O-Axis position of 3D

15 ß-VIEW probes in 2D Mode. The green line in the displayed symbol indicates the
position of the acoustic block.
16 ZOOM Image magnification (Pan Zoom) in read-/ and write mode.
Increases the number of transmit focal zone, so that you can tighten up the
17 FOC. ZONES
beam for a specific area.
18 OTI (Otimized Tissue Imaging) OTI™ allows to “fine tune” the system for scanning different kinds of tissue.
To adjust the range of the receive frequency.

19 FREQUENCY high resolution / lower penetration, mid resolution / mid penetration, or
lower resolution / high penetration
A gray map determines the displayed Brightness of an echo in relationship

20 GRAY CHROMA MAP
to its amplitude.
Persistence is a temporal filter that averages frames together.

21 PERSIST. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
This function is only available if XBEAM CRI is switched off.
If this filter is set to “high”, the XBeam CRI-image is smoothed.

22 CRI FILTER CRI Filter setting “off” leads to a sharper impression of the XBeam CRI-
image. This function is only available if XBEAM CRI is switched on.
The signals of the neighboring pulses are less weighted for the display of the
actual pulse which considerably improves the detail lateral resolution and
23 LINE FILTER
signal-to-noise ratio.
This function is only available if XBEAM CRI is switched off.
Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of

24 DYN.CONTR.
gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.
Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by

25 ENHANCE enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of
structures.
26 Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have
REJECT
a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).
Control to improve the resolution by reducing the frame rate.

27 QUALITY
Respectively reducing the resolution by increasing the image frame rate.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, 2D Mode.

4-4-2 Additional (optional) Operating Modes
4-4-2-1 B-Flow Check
B-Flow On/Off switch
Press the BF key to activate/deactivate the B-Flow mode.
Figure 4-7 B-Flow Main and B-Flow Sub Menu
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.5.
4-4-2-2 XTD-View Check
XTD-View On/Off switch

Press the XTD key to activate/deactivate the XTD-View mode.
A blue box is displayed at the border of the 2D image.
Start and Stop the XTD-image acquisition with the right trackball key.
Figure 4-8 XTD-View Main Menu

4-4-2 Additional (optional) Operating Modes (cont’d)
4-4-2-3 Coded Contrast Imaging Check
Coded Contrast Imaging On/Off switch
Press the CONTRAST key to activate/deactivate the Coded Contrast Imaging mode.
Figure 4-9 Contrast Main and Contrast Sub Menu

4-4-3 M Mode Checks
Figure 4-10 M Main and M Sub Menu
Table 4-4 M Mode Functions

1 Cursor Position Adjust the M Cursor position with the TRACKBALL in the 2D Single image.
2 Activation of M Mode Press the right or left trackball key to activate both Modes (2D/M).
3 M Mode Gain Rotate the M MODE key to adjust the sensitivity (brightness) of the entire M image.
4 M Mode Depth Common with 2D Mode Depth.
5 SPEED By touching up or down, four different sweep speeds can be selected.
6 INVERT Invert of the M Mode image. (Function is only available with endovaginal probes.)
7 FREQUENCY Common with 2D Mode Frequency.
8 FORMAT For selection of three different rations of display format.
9 DYN.CONTR. Dynamic Range enhances a part of the grayscale to make it easier to display pathology.
10 ENHANCE Due to this function a finer, sharper impression of the image is produced.
11 REJECT It determines the amplitude-level below which echoes are suppressed (rejected).
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 6, M Mode.

4-4-3-1 MCFM Mode Check
By pressing the M control and the C control, the MCFM mode is switched on in the preparation mode.
The M-cursor with M-Color window appears on the active 2D image.
Figure 4-11 MCFM Main and MCFM Sub Menu

4-4-4 Spectral Doppler Mode Checks

NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Spectral Doppler Mode (PW or CW) is selected.
NOTE: The Continuous Wave Doppler Mode is an Option. The CW key is only illuminated if the option is
installed and the selected probe is capable for the Continuous Wave Doppler Mode.
Figure 4-12 PW Main and PW Sub Menu
Table 4-5 Spectral Doppler Mode (PW, CW) Functions
Adjust the Gate- Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2DSingle image.
1 Gate Position and Gate Size
The upper trackball key changes from Gate position to Gate size.
2 Press the right trackball key to activate the motion display.

Activation of Doppler Mode
Press the left trackball key to activate both Modes (B/D).
3 Doppler Gain Rotate the PW MODE key to adjust the amplification of the entire spectrum.
4 STEERING The steering function is only available with linear probes.
5 SPEED By touching up or down, four different sweep speeds can be selected.
The envelope curve of the Doppler spectrum (maximum velocities) and the
6 RT TRACE (Real Time Auto-Trace)
corresponding evaluations are automatically displayed on the monitor.
7 INVERT To invert the Doppler spectrum display in relation to the direction of the flow.
The angle cursor can be turned in both directions without stop. By pressing the
8 ANGLE
angle knob repeatedly the angle correction switches from +60° to 0° and to -60°.
9 BASELINE Adjusting the baseline is possible in read- and write Mode (up/down in 8 steps).
10 WMF (Wall Motion Filter) Used to eliminate Doppler “noise” that is caused by vessel wall motion.
The Velocity Range display is governed by the pulse repetition frequency (PRF)
11 PRF
Exceeding the maximum PRF, the HPRF-Mode is automatically switched on.
12 DYN. Dynamic Range adjusts the display cutoff of the Doppler analysis waveform.
13 CENTER FREQUENCY It serves for selection of the required transmit frequency.
14 SCALE To select the displayed measuring unit (in relation to the zero-line).
15 FORMAT For selection of either one of three formats.
For further details see: Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 7, Spectral Doppler Mode.
4-4-5 Color Doppler Mode Checks
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, HD-Flow or TD)
is selected.
BT-Version:
BT Version: The HD-Flow Mode is only available at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).
Figure 4-13 CFM Main and CFM Sub Menu
Table 4-6 Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, HD-Flow, TD) Functions
Color Box Position and Adjust the Box- Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2DSingle image.
1
Color Box Size The upper trackball key changes from Box position to Box size.
CFM Gain Rotate the C MODE key to ensure that continuous flow is displayed, where appropriate.
PD Gain Rotate the PD MODE key to adjust the Power Doppler Gain.
2
HD-Flow Gain Rotate the PD MODE key to adjust the Bi-Directional Angio Gain.
TD Gain Rotate the C MODE key to adjust the Tissue Doppler Gain.
3 STEERING Beam Steering is only possible with linear probes in CFM, PD and HD-Flow Mode.
2D+2D/C Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left frame shows only
4
(PD, HD-Flow or TD) the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode image with color information.
5 INVERT The color of the color wedge inverts around the baseline. (impossible in PD Mode)
6 ZOOM Image magnification (PAN-Zoom) in read- and write mode.
7 QUALITY Improves the Color Resolution by reducing the image frame rate, respectively vice versa.
Used to eliminate Doppler “noise” that is caused by vessel wall or cardiac wall motion.
8 WMF (Wall Motion Filter)
(CFM, PD, HD-Flow)
9 PRF By touching toward up the PRF increases. By touching toward the PRF decreases.
10 After FREEZE you can adjust the Color Threshold. It eliminates small color noise or motion
THRESHOLD
artifact signals in the color image. (small number cuts off less signals than a higher setting)
11 DISPL. M To select the CFM- Display Mode (V; V-T; V-Pow; Pow-T; or T).

Table 4-6 Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, HD-Flow, TD) Functions
To select different filter periods for rising velocity and falling velocity.
12 SMOOTH RISE Filtering of the rise velocity leads to noise suppression.
FALL This filter leads for “prolongation” of the display flow.
13 FREQU. It serves for selection of the Transmit Frequency which also depends on the Color Box position.
Controls the number of pulses to constitute one Color- or Power-Doppler or HD-Flow line in the
14 ENSEMBLE
display.
This function controls the axial resolution of color in the display.

15 FLOW RES.
It adjusts the axial sample depth of color pixels.
16 Determines the line density within the Color-Box.

LINE DEN
The lower the line density, the larger the line distance and the size of the color pixels.
SCALE
17 The maximum velocities are displayed above and under the color scale in kHz, cm/s or m/s.
(CFM, HD-Flow, TD)
Provides selectability of the color coding for an optimization of the display of blood flow (similar
CFM-MAP
18 to the post-processing curves with grayscale 2D scans).
(PD, HD-Flow, TD)
After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.
Gently means the transition between color and gray scale information.
The embedding of the color into 2D Mode is performed smoothly with less colored splashes.
19 GENTLY COLOR
To activate the “Gently Color” function, touch the CFM MAP (PD, HD-Flow, TD) key in the
Submenu.
The Balance controls the amount of Color display over bright echoes and helps to confine color
20 BALANCE
within the vessel walls.
21 ARTEFACT (on/off) Switch on/off the artifact suppression.
The baseline shift can be used to prevent aliasing in one flow direction similar to the Doppler
22 BASELINE
baseline shift. There are 8 steps in each direction. (impossible in PD Mode)
23 With “Line Filter” the signals of the neighboring pulses are less weighted for the display of the
LINE F.
actual pulse which considerably improves the detail lateral resolution and signal-to-noise ratio.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual:
• Chapter 8, CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode)

• Chapter 9, PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode)
• Chapter 9, HD-Flow Mode (Bi-Directional Angio Mode)
• Chapter 10, TD Mode (Tissue Doppler Mode)

4-4-6 Volume Mode Checks

NOTICE Real Time 4D, RT_4D_Biopsy, STIC, VCI, TUI, VOCAL II and VCAD Heart are Options.
!! NOTICE:
If these options are not part of the system configuration, the appendant checks can be omitted.
BT-Version:
BT Version: “VCI” is optional at BT04 and BT05 systems.
However, at systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.x), this feature is standard.
BT-Version:
BT Version: The option “TUI” is only available at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).
BT-Version:
BT Version: The option “VCAD Heart” is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.x).
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel menu and which Volume Mode
is selected.
Some function keys only appear on the Touch Panel if they are available for the selected Probe.
4-4-6-1 Pre-Volume Mode Functions
1. Touch this key to select desired Acquisition- and

Visualization Mode.
2. Select Acquisition Mode
3. Select Visualization Mode
4. Select User Setting
5. Start the Volume Acquisition with the Freeze key resp. the right trackball key.
Figure 4-14 Pre-Volume Mode menus (e.g., Static 3D Render)

Table 4-7 Pre-Volume Mode Functions

1 AQUISITION:
• 3D STATIC 3D Volume Mode - Static volume acquisition (also in combination with PD or CFM Mode)
• 4D REAL TIME Real Time 4D - continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D rendered images
Volume Contrast Imaging - improves the contrast resolution and the signal / noise ratio and
• VCI A-PLANE
therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs
Volume Contrast Imaging (coronal plane) - improves the contrast resolution and the signal / noise
• VCI C-PLANE
ratio and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs
• STIC The fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D (also in combination with PD, HD-Flow or CFM)
• 4D BIOPSY Real Time 4D Biopsy - continuous volume acquisition + parallel calculation of 3D rendered images
2 VISUALIZATION:
The basic idea behind VOCAL II is the combination of 3D ultrasound tissue (presented as voxels)
• VOCAL and the geometric information of surfaces in a 3D dataset. After definition of contour in 3D space
(semi-automatically, manually or spherical) a wide range of functionality is given.
Parts of the orthogonal sections A, B and C are compiled to a 3D-section aspect. The name
• NICHE
“Niche” has been chosen because the aspect shows a quasi spatial cut into the reference image.
After the 3D acquisition the system switches automatically to the read menu. The selected format
• RENDER
will be present on the monitor (e.g., 3D ROI Mode: sectional planes A,B,C + rendered 3D image).
After the 3D Sectional Planes acquisition the system switches automatically to the read menu.
• SECTIONAL PL.
The selected format will be present on the monitor (e.g., A,B,C - Sectional Plane mode).
This method of visualization is consistent with the way other medical systems such CT or MRI
• TUI
present the data to the user (slices through the data set, which are parallel to each other).
The data set is represented such as in Static 3D - Sectional Planes. However, the three planes
• VCI STATIC
are VCI renderings (tissue information of a thick slice), computed from the 3D dataset.
• VCAD HEART VCAD is a technology that automatically generates a number of views of the fetal heart to make
diagnosis easier. It can help to find the right and left outflow tract of the heart and fetal stomach.
BT-Version:
BT Version: This feature is only available at Voluson® 730Expert systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.x).
- Quarter size display of Sectional Planes without 3D image or

3 - Quarter size display of Sectional Planes + rendered 3D image
(Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!)
Dual size display of Sectional Planes + rendered 3D image.

4 (Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!
This format is not possible for Static 3D Acquisition)
- Full size display of a the reference image or

5 - Full size display of the rendered 3D image.
(Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!)
Volume Box Position Adjust the Volume Box (ROI) Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2D Single image.
6
and Volume Box Size The upper trackball key to change the Trackball function from Box Position to Box Size.
7 QUALITY Changes the line density against the acquisition speed (low, mid1, mid2, high1, high2).
8 VOL. ANGLE To select the Volume Sweep Angle.
9 Start Acquisition Press the FREEZE key resp. the right trackball key to start the Volume acquisition.

4-4-6-2 Functions after the 3D Acquisition
Figure 4-15 3D Static - Sectional Planes and Image Rendering
Table 4-8 Functions after the 3D Acquisition
PW MODE rotary control: Rotation about X-axis of the reference image.

1 M MODE rotary control: Rotation about the Y-axis of the reference image.
PD MODE rotary control: Rotation about the Z-axis of the reference image.
C MODE rotary control: Movement along Z-axis of the reference image.

2
TRACKBALL: Movement along X- and Y-axis of the reference image.
Parts of the orthogonal sections A, B and C are complied to a 3D section aspect.

3 NICHE
The aspect shows quasi a spatial cut into the reference image.
4 ORIENT. HELP Display of orientation help image figure.
5 REF. IMAGE SELECT To select the Reference image among A, B or C.
Resets the rotations and translations of a volume section to the initial (start)
6 INIT
position.
7 3D ORIENTATION To change the image orientation of the 3D image.
8 ZOOM The 3D image as well as the sectional planes can be varied by their aspect ratio.
9 MIX To adjust the mix ratio between two calculated modes.
10 TH. LOW All color values below the level will be disregarded for calculation of the surface.
11 MAGI CUT Ability to electronically manipulate the images and cut way “3D artifacts”.
12 RENDER MODE To select the Render Mode (Image Type and Render Algorithm)
13 RESET CURVE Resets the curvature of render start to the default position.

4-4-6-3 Sub Menus
Figure 4-16 3D/4D Sub Menu
Table 4-9 Sub Menus
To select the desired Render View Direction.

RENDER VIEW
1 The green line symbolizes the direction of the view.
DIRECTION
Note: The Render View Direction keys are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes.
2 GRAY CHROMA MAP Depending on individual requirements a “harder” or “softer” image can be obtained.
To set the start point of the gamma curve bending. (Graphic display on screen)
3 CONTR. POS
Note: This key is not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode.
To set the contrast of the bending. (Graphic display on screen)

4 CONTRAST
Adjusts the contrast of the screen background from dark to bright.

5 BACKGROUND
Only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.

6 BALANCE
Note: This key is only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.
Only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.

7 POWER TRESH.
Note: This key is only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.
8 3D/4D INFO On/Off switch to show full or reduced Image Info parameter on screen.
On/Off switch to show an acquired 3D+CFM or 3D+PD image with or without the color
9 3D COLOR OFF
information.
Speckle Reduction Imaging (SRI) can be activated in all 3D/4D modes (except Full size
10 SRI display) to reduce speckle which interferes with the sectional planes (A, B and C).
Note: The rendered 3D image is not affect.
Adjust and activate the display of direction markers at border of the image.
11 PROBE ORIENTATION
(at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 only)
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 11.

4-4-7 Using Cine
4-4-7-1 Activating Cine

Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to display the images of the stored sequence one by one.
4-4-7-2 Cine-Split Function (Multiple Format)

After FREEZE of a sequence in 2D Mode two or four different images of the sequence can be displayed
simultaneously in Dual respectively Quad Display Mode.
Move the TRACKBALL to display the images of the stored sequence. Use the FORMAT keys to
change to the next (part of) frozen 2D image sequence to play back the cine memory.
NOTE: The Cine-Split function (multiple format) is also possible in 2D Auto Cine mode.
4-4-7-3 Activating 2D Auto Cine

1.) After Freeze touch the 2D CINE key on the Touch Panel.
2.) Select the START IMAGE of the sequence.The selected image is simultaneously displayed.
3.) Turn the END IMAGE digipot to the end of the sequence. The selected image is displayed.
4.) Select the review SPEED and the read ZOOM factor.
5.) Select the Cine Mode review direction.
6.) To start/stop the Cine Loop playback touch 2D CINE START/STOP.
After stopping the sequence, move the TRACKBALL to display the images one by one.
4-4-7-4 Spectral Doppler- or M Cine Loop

Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to display the Cine / Loop one by one.
The UPPER TRACKBALL KEY changes from the 2D Cine to the D Loop (respectively M Loop).
NOTE: The active Cine is displayed on the monitor screen: 2D/D(M)-image or 2D/D(M)-image.
4-4-7-5 Activating 3D Rotation Cine

1.) After 3D Volume acquisition touch the 3D ROT. CINE key on the Touch Panel.
2.) Select the Rotation angle with the touch keys or select it manually with the START IMAGE and
END IMAGE rotary controls.
3.) Select the Step angle and the Rotation axis.
4.) Touch the CALCULATE CINE SEQUENCE key to start the calculation.
5.) To start/stop the 3D Rotation Cine sequence touch START/STOP.
4-4-7-6 Activating Volume Cine

1.) After Real Time 4D acquisition move the TRACKBALL horizontally to display the Volumes of the
stored sequence one by one. (Alternative use the VOL CINE # control to select the desired volume.)
4-4-7-7 Activating Auto Cine

1.) After Real Time 4D acquisition touch the AUTO CINE key on the Touch Panel.
2.) Select the START VOLUME and the END VOLUME of the sequence with the rotary controls.
3.) Select the Cine Mode direction and the review SPEED.
4.) To start/stop the Cine sequence touch the START/STOP key.
NOTE: After stopping a sequence, move the TRACKBALL to display the images / volumes one by one.

4-4-8 Generic Measurements

NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on:
• the currently selected Application and Display Mode,
• the selected “Study”,
• and the settings in the Measure Setup - MEASURE & CALC page.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 13.
General remarks to perform Generic Measurements:

• By pressing the CALIPER key on the control panel the Generic Measurement function is switched on.
• Positioning of measurement marks is done with the TRACKBALL.
• Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with SET (right or left trackball key).
• To change measuring marks before completion press CHANGE (upper trackball key).
• Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup, also the FREEZE key can be used for confirming the
last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement.
• The status bar area shows the current function of the trackball.
• To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item, touch CANCEL on the Touch Panel.
• To delete the results of the last measured item, touch DELETE on the Touch Panel.
• To delete all measurement results of the selected “Study” from the monitor as well as from the
corresponding Worksheet, touch the CLEAR STUDY key on the Touch Panel.
• All measurement results will be automatically included in the “Generic” patient worksheet.
• To erase measurement results, touch the DELETE key on the Touch Panel, press the CLEAR ALL
key on the control panel or the DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard.
• To exit from Generic measurements touch the EXIT key on the Touch Panel, press the CALIPER key
or the EXIT key on the control panel.
NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press FREEZE.
4-4-8-1 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements (2D and M Mode)

1.) Press the CALIPER key and then touch GENERIC DIST. on the Touch Panel.
2.) Touch the appropriate item on the Touch Panel. An active cursor appears.
3.) To position the active cursor at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue
depth), move the TRACKBALL.
4.) To fix the start point, press SET (the right or left trackball key).
The system fixes the first cursor and displays a second active caliper.
5.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point
(tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL.
6.) To complete the measurement, press SET.
The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
Before you complete a measurement:
To toggle between active calipers, or to re-adjust the traced line, press the upper trackball key.
To erase results, touch the DELETE key on the Touch Panel, press the CLEAR ALL key on the
control panel or the DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard.
NOTE: To alternate the control from one cursor to the other, press CHANGE (the upper trackball key).
To re-adjust a traced line, press UNDO (the upper trackball key) repeatedly.
NOTE: To exit Generic measurements, touch the EXIT key on the Touch Panel, press the CALIPER key or the
EXIT key on the control panel.

4-4-8 Generic Measurements (cont’d)
4-4-8-2 Circumference/Area Measurements

1.) Press the CALIPER key and then touch GENERIC AREA on the Touch Panel.
2.) Touch the corresponding item on the Touch Panel. An active cursor displays.
3.) To position the active cursor, move the TRACKBALL.
4.) To fix the start point, press SET (the right or left trackball key). The system fixes the first cursor
and displays a second active caliper.
5.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL and press SET (Rt./Lt. trackball key).
NOTE: If you have selected a “trace” item, the measurement is finished and the area and circumference results
appear on the screen.
6.) An ellipse appears the axis of which is defined by these two points.
To adjust the width of the ellipse, move the TRACKBALL.
7.) To toggle between calipers, or to readjust a traced line, press the upper trackball key.
8.) To complete the measurement, press SET (right or left trackball key). The system displays the
circumference and area in the measurement results area.
Before you complete a measurement:
- To erase the ellipse resp. trace and the current data measured, touch DELETE once.
The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement.
- To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, touch EXIT on the
Touch Panel, press the CALIPER key again or press EXIT on the control panel.
4-4-8-3 Volume Measurements

1.) Press the CALIPER key and then touch GENERIC VOLUME on the Touch Panel.
2.) Select the appropriate item.
3.) Perform the measurement(s) using the TRACKBALL and SET (right or left trackball key).
For further details: see 4-4-8-1 and 4-4-8-2.
4-4-8-3-1 Multiplane Measurements
NOTE: This volume measurement is only possible in 3D Mode.
1.) Select the reference image in which the measurement is to be performed (A, B or C).
2.) Press the CALIPER key once and then touch MULTIPLANE on the Touch Panel.
3.) Select the first section through the body by rotating the REF.SLICE digipot below the Touch
Panel or by rotating the C MODE digipot. (first section should be set at the edge of the object)
4.) Position the start dot of the area which should be surrounded and store it with SET.
5.) Surround the area with the trackball, then press SET (right or left trackball key). The area is
calculated and displayed. It may even be “zero”. Press the SET key twice.
6.) Select the next parallel section with the REF. SLICE digipot or the C MODE digipot, and
measure the area.
7.) Repeat 5. and 6. until the edge of the measured object is reached.
NOTE: The contour of the measured area is not erased if a new section is adjusted. To call back the measured
areas touch the PREV. respectively the NEXT key on the Touch Panel.
NOTE: To erase the results, touch the INIT key on the Touch Panel.

4-4-8 Generic Measurements (cont’d)
4-4-8-4 Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode
NOTE: The Spectral Doppler image is displayed based on time (X-axis) and velocity (Y-axis).
4-4-8-4-1 Auto Trace

1.) Press the CALIPER key.
2.) Touch AUTO TRACE on the Touch Panel. It traces the Spectral Doppler image automatically
and displays the results (according to the Measure Setup).
3.) Select the SENSITIVITY of the envelope curve (to eliminate artifacts).
4.) Select the TRACE MODE channel of the envelope curve (upper, both, lower).
5.) If necessary, select the Angle and the Baseline.
6.) Press the right or left trackball key SET to finish the measurement.
Before you complete the measurement:
- To readjust the start cycle (vertical yellow line), press CHANGE (upper trackball key).
Press SET (right or left trackball key) to fix the line.
- Press the CHANGE key again to readjust the end cycle (vertical green line).
Press SET to fix the line.
NOTE: The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low-noise record of the Doppler
spectrum. Otherwise the reliability of the displayed measurement results may not be ensured!
4-4-8-4-2 Manual Trace

2.) Touch MANUAL TRACE on the Touch Panel. A cursor appears on the screen.
3.) Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL to the start point of the measurement and press SET
(right or left trackball key) to fix the marker.
4.) Trace to the end of the period and press the SET key again to fix the mark.
The measurement results appear on the screen.
Before you complete the measurement:
To readjust the traced line, press UNDO (upper trackball key) repeatedly.
4-4-8-4-3 Heart Rate

2.) Touch HR on the Touch Panel. A line appears on the screen.
3.) Move the line with the TRACKBALL to the start point of the period and press SET (right or left
trackball key). A second line appears.
4.) Move the second line to the end point of the period.
5.) Select the number of “HR cycles” for the measurement with the digipot below the Touch Panel.
6.) Press the SET (right or left trackball key) again to fix the line. The Heart Rate is displayed.
NOTE: For further Doppler Measurements and other details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User
Manual, Chapter 13.

4-4-9 Calculations
The Voluson® 730Expert system supports calculation packages and application-oriented patient
Worksheets (Reports) for following applications:
• Abdomen Calculations
• Small Parts Calculations
• Obstetric Calculations
• Cardiology Calculations
• Urology Calculations
• Vascular Calculations
• Gynecology Calculations
• Pediatric Calculations
• Neurology Calculations
• Orthopedics Calculations
NOTE: Confirm that the patient information is correct and the probe and application are selected properly.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on:

• the currently chosen Application
• the selected Display Mode,
• the selected “Study”,
• and the settings in the Measure Setup - MEASURE & CALC page.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual, Chapter 14
General remarks to perform Calculations:
• By pressing the CALC key on the control panel the Calculation function is switched on.
• Positioning of measurement marks is done with the TRACKBALL.
• Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with SET (right or left trackball key).
• To change measuring marks before completion press CHANGE (upper trackball key).
• Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup, also the FREEZE key can be used for confirming
the last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement.
• The status bar area shows the current function of the trackball.
• To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item, touch CANCEL on the Touch Panel.
• To delete the results of the last measured item, touch DELETE on the Touch Panel.
• To delete all measurement results of the selected “Study” from the monitor as well as from the
corresponding Worksheet, touch the CLEAR STUDY key on the Touch Panel.
• All measurement results will be automatically included in the corresponding patient worksheet.
• To erase results, press the DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard or press the CLEAR ALL key on
the control panel.
• To exit from Calculations touch the EXIT key on the Touch Panel, press the CALC key or press the
EXIT key on the control panel.
4-4-9-1 Worksheet (Report) Pages
Press the WORKSHEET key on the control panel to view the “application dependent” patient worksheet
pages that contain the results of calculations and measurements. Any stored patient worksheet can be
edited, printed, transferred, saved to Sonoview or sent to DICOM server.

4-4-10 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-4-10-1 Connecting a probe

1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Open the right-hand side door, lay the cable into the intended cable holders and close the door.
So it is free to move, but not resting on the floor.
4-4-10-2 Activating the probe

1.) Press the PROBE key to activate the “Probe Select” menu.
2.) Select the appropriate probe by touching the corresponding key.
3.) Upon selection of an “Application”, the programmed user presets appear.
4.) Touching a “Setting” key causes loading of the preset.
The probe activates in the 2D Mode, the Touch Panel shows the main menu and the ultrasound image
appears on the monitor in write mode (real time display).
4-4-10-3 Deactivating the probe

When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode (read mode).
1.) Press the FREEZE key.

2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Expert for complete cleaning instructions.)
3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.
Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-4-10-4 Disconnecting the probe

Prior to disconnect a probe freeze the image. It is unnecessary to switch the unit off.
CAUTION If a probe is disconnected while running (write mode) a software error may occur.
!! CAUTION:
In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).
1.) Open the right-hand side door, remove the cable from the cable holder and close the door.
2.) Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of
the probe port.
3.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of
the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.

4-4-11 Image Management (Sonoview)

For Sonoview - Image Management functionality refer to Chapter 15 in the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Expert. It talks about several topics:
• Clipboard
• Sending Exams
• Printing Exams / Images
• Export Exams / Images
• Backup Exams
• Restore the Backup Exams
• DICOM Print / Send
• Verifying and Pinging a Device
• Sending Images via e-mail
• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s stored Image
• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation
• Configuring Connectivity
• Services (Destinations)
• Input of comments and voice annotations
• Measure Distance and Ellipse
• Buttons
• Views
• DVD/CD+(R)W and MO Erasing/Formatting
• Changing Backup Folder on mapped Network Drive
• etc.
Figure 4-17 Sonoview

4-4-12 Using the optional MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)
NOTICE The MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) is an Option.

!! NOTICE:
The optional 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical disk drive supports the following medias:
1.3GB; 640MB; 540MB; 230MB and 128MB
Eject Button
Magneto-Optical Drive
(MOD)
Figure 4-18 Magneto-Optical Drive
1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels
which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set
so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).
2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and
!! NOTICE:
the MOD could break.
3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. Manual ejection methods are listed below
in preferred order from best (1) to worst (3).
a.) Press the EJECT switch on the MOD while system is ON.
b.) Press and hold the EJECT switch while the system is booting.
c.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the EJECT switch while
system power is OFF.
NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator
!! NOTICE:
unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot
the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection
methods.

4-4-12-1 Formatting Media
To erase/format the backup media, DVD/CD+(R)W or MOD, press the SONOVIEW key on the Control
panel.
The Sonoview screen appears on the monitor; see: Figure 4-17 on page 4-27.
a.) Select the “DVD/CD+(R)W and MO Formatting” tool on the left side of the Sonoview screen.
b.) Insert the medium and select the DVD/CD+(R)W or the MO icon.
By selecting MO cartridge the unit displays the “MO Disk Formatter” window as shown in Figure 4-19.
1.) Select a Format Type from the drop down menu. If desired, mark the Low Level Format icon.
2.) Click the START button to start the formatting process.
MO and DVD/CD+(R)W Formatting tool
MO icon
DVD/CD+(R)W icon
Format Type Selection
Low Level Format Selection
Start Formatting Process
Figure 4-19 MO Disk Formatter Window
3.) A message box appears on the screen. Confirm with OK.

4.) When the formatting has been completed, click OK to continue.
Figure 4-20 MO Disk Formatter messages
5.) Select the CLOSE key and touch the EXIT key on the Touch Panel to return to the Scan Mode.

4-4-12-1 Formatting Media (cont’d)
By selecting DVD/CD the unit displays the “Erase DVD/CD” window as shown in Figure 4-21.
1.) Select the “Erase Mode” and click the [OK] button to start the process.
NOTICE It is highly recommended to use the complete erase mode, to avoid problems with the CD+(R)W!
!! NOTICE:
When using a DVD+(R)W, the complete erase mode is not possible.
Figure 4-21 Erase DVD/CD Window
2.) During erasing the Ultrasound system displays following message.
Figure 4-22 Erasing disk
3.) Touch the EXIT key on the Touch Panel to return to the Scan Mode.
4-4-12-1-1 Adjusting the Write Speed of the DVD/CD Recorder.

1.) Click the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the Sonoview screen.
2.) Select DVD/CD RECORDER from the tool bar.
Settings
icon
Figure 4-23 Settings of the DVD/CD Recorder
3.) Choose the “Write Speed” from the corresponding pop-up menu.

Section 4-5
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
3.) Select the BACKUP page.
“User Settings Only” “Full Backup” group

group
Stop USB Devices
Figure 4-24 System Setup - Backup page
The “Backup” page is subdivided in two main groups:
A.) User Settings Only

• Section 4-5-1 "Save User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-32
• Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
B.) Full Backup
• Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-35
• Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-37
• Section 4-5-5 "Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-39
The User Settings and/or Full Backup can be saved to the following destinations:
• D: partition of internal hard disk

• DVD/CD+(R)W
• MOD (if present)
• Mapped Network Drive Z:
see: Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-65
• Any other drive connected to the system (e.g.; USB-stick)
Note: This function is only available in the Full Backup utility.
For further details review: Section 3-5-12 "External USB-Devices" on page 3-24.
NOTICE When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in Chapter 2 of the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson® 730Expert Basic User Manual.

4-5-1 Save User Settings Only (Application Settings)
The User Settings contains:
• Application Settings
• User Programs
• Auto Text
• 3D/4D Programs
1.) Insert a DVD/CD+(R)W or MO (Magneto-Optical Disk) into the drive.
4.) Select the BACKUP page.
5.) Click the SAVE button of the “User Settings Only” group.
Choose the media

and
then click [Save]
Figure 4-25 User Settings Only - Save window
6.) Choose the media (e.g., DVD/CD+RW) and click the SAVE button.
7.) Select the NEW FILE... key and enter a file name (without extension).
8.) Click the OK key to start the process. When the saving has been completed, click OK.
4-32 Section 4-5 - Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
4-5-2 Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)
CAUTION The loading procedure overwrites the existing application settings on the local hard drive. Make sure to
!! CAUTION:
insert the correct DVD/CD or MO. Additionally you can load the backup from D:\UserSettings.
1.) Insert the DVD/CD+(R)W or MO (Magneto-Optical Disk) into the drive.

4.) Select the BACKUP page and click the LOAD button of the “User Settings Only” group.
Choose the media

and
then click [Load]
Figure 4-26 User Settings Only - Load window
5.) Choose the media (e.g., DVD/CD+RW) and click the LOAD key.
6.) Select the appropriate file and click OK. The “Load Backup Data” window appears.
NOTICE It is highly recommend to use Application settings which are adapted for the systems software version!
!! NOTICE:
Complete Backup
[>>] button
[Load] button
Figure 4-27 Load Backup Data

4-5-2 Load User Settings Only (Application Settings) (cont’d)
7.) Select the Complete Backup (marked blue; see: Figure 4-27) and click the >> button to copy the
Complete Backup into the Load Data field.
8.) Click the LOAD button to start the loading procedure of the complete backup into the system.
NOTE: Also only parts of a User Settings Only “Backup” can be loaded into the database to overwrite, restore,
copy, etc.... the database in the system.
1.) Click the + sign to open the content tree.
sign to open the

content tree
[>>] button
[<<] button
[Load] button
Figure 4-28 Load only parts of the Backup
2.) Click the >> button to copy the selected item into the Load Data field.
NOTE: To return selected items from the Load Data field to Backup Data field select the << button.
3.) Click the LOAD button to start loading procedure of the selected Backup item into the system.
4-5-3 Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)
A full backup always contains the following data
• Patient demographic and exam data (database containing the patient data and measurements)
• SonoView image data (NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk, DVD/CD or MOD)
• User Settings (databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings.)
• Image transfer settings (DICOM settings e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.)
• Measure Setup Settings (user specific measure settings)
• V730 settings (general settings such as language, time/date format and the enabled options)
• Windows Network Settings (network settings including the computer name)
• Service Platform (state of the service platform)
• VP (additional system data)
CAUTION It is recommended to create a full backup of the settings once a week.

!! CAUTION:
NOTE: Always “Full Backup” any presets, configurations and application settings to HDD and/or DVD or MO-
disk before upgrading the software and/or application settings. This ensures that if the presets need to
be reloaded, will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service.

3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the SAVE button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
enter description
click [Next]
Figure 4-29 Full Backup Save
4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., Network Drive).

5.) Enter the description of the full backup.
6.) If desired and possible (Network Drive and Other drive only), activate “Include Images.
NOTE: The “Include Images” option may result in a large amount of data: up to 70 Gigabytes!
7.) Select the NEXT button to start the backup process.

After copying the data, the Voluson® 730Expert reboots and the application starts again.

4-5-3 Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (cont’d)
When the Full Backup is stored on a network drive (to map a network drive see: Section 3-11-1 "Map
Network Drive" on page 3-65), it may be desirable to move the data (e.g., for backup or maintenance).
The backups reside in sub folders of the main “fullbackup” -folder found at the root of the drive.
For Example: Backups on the mapped Network Drive are below path Z:\fullbackup.
The directory structure of the full backup data is as follows:
The sub folders have the names fbX where X is a number

(e.g., Z:\fullbackup\fb1).
The data resides within a directory structure within these sub folders.
It is possible to move the fbX sub folders, even leaving gaps in the
numeration sequence.
However, NO change MUST be made to the contents of the fbX folders
itself, otherwise the backup data cannot be restored!
Figure 4-30 directory structure of full backup data
If the destination „Other drive“ is selected, the available drives

(e.g., external USB-memory stick) can be chosen from the drop down menu.
Figure 4-31 “Other drive” drop down menu
NOTICE When the backup is saved to an external USB-device, the system has to be informed about the removal
!! NOTICE:
of the hardware. For this purpose every last dialog of "Full Backup Save" and "Full Backup Delete" has
a STOP USB DEVICES button (see: Figure 4-32).
Figure 4-32 Please stop USB Devices before unplugging!
For further details review: Section 3-5-12 "External USB-Devices" on page 3-24.
4-5-4 Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)
WARNING
WARNING Always backup any data before an upgrade; see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35.
!! WARNING:
The “Full Backup” loading procedure replaces (overwrites) ALL the existing data on the
local hard drive of the Voluson® 730Expert system!
CAUTION There are circumstances where it is not possible to load (restore) all the data.
!! CAUTION:
The following rules specify these restrictions:
1.) Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible.
Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was
created on is prohibited.
2.) Options can only be restored on the same Voluson® 730Expert system within the same major
software version.
3.) When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x), the following items will not be restored:
A.) User Settings
B.) Options
C.) State of the Service Platform (new model type necessary for VOLC)
4.) The user is only allowed to restore data to a different system if and only if the software version on
this system is the same as in the backup.
5.) The user is only allowed to restore data onto the same system if and only if the software version
on this system is equal or higher than the version in the backup.
6.) The user is not allowed to restore the following items to a different system:
A.) Windows Network Settings
B.) Options
C.) DICOM AE Title
D.) DICOM Station Name
E.) State of the Service Platform
7.) The field engineer (service mode, e.g. activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore data to a
different machine, if and only if the software version on this system is equal or higher than the
version in the backup.
Operation see: Section 8-9-3-7 "Restoring various “Full Backup” data" on page 8-32.
8.) The field engineer (service mode, e.g. activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore all data
with respect to the rules to 1.) to 3.).
Operation see: Section 8-9-3-7 "Restoring various “Full Backup” data" on page 8-32.

4-5-4 Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (cont’d)
3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the LOAD button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
select backup
click [Next]
Figure 4-33 Full Backup Load
4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., Network Drive).

5.) Click on the backup to be restored (additional information is displayed in the table).
6.) Select the NEXT button. The following window will be displayed.
click [Next]
Figure 4-34 Select Data to be restored
7.) Select the data to be restored to the Voluson® 730Expert system.
NOTE: For description of the check box names review: A full backup always contains the following data
4-5-4 Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (cont’d)
8.) Click the NEXT button and then select YES to start, or NO to cancel the restore procedure.
Figure 4-35 Start Restore Backup now?
WARNING
WARNING When clicking “YES”, the current data on the system will be permanently replaced by
!! WARNING:
the data of the backup and can not be restored!
After restoring the data, the Voluson® 730Expert reboots and the application starts again.
4-5-5 Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)

3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the DELETE button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
select backup
select [Delete]
Figure 4-36 Full Backup Delete
4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., HDD = Hard disk).

5.) Click on the backup to be deleted (additional information is displayed in the table).
6.) Select the DELETE button.
WARNING
WARNING There is no “ UNDO” function for this action!
!! WARNING:

4-5-6 Archiving Images

1.) Press the SONOVIEW key on the control panel.
2.) Insert the DVD/CD+(R)W or MOD into drive.
If required, format/erase the media, see Section 4-4-12-1 "Formatting Media" on page 4-29.
3.) When you click the OPEN button on the upper left side of the screen, a list of all the exams is
displayed see Figure 4-37.
capacity
of selected
exams
Open button
Backup
button
Figure 4-37 Sonoview Screen
4.) Select the exam(s) using the TRACKBALL, the CTRL or SHIFT key on the alphanumeric keyboard
and the right trackball key SET.
The number of all exams, the number of currently selected exams, the number of images and the
capacity of selected images are displayed automatically at the right and upper corner of the exams list.
5.) Click the BACKUP button.

6.) Select the destination for the backup.
NOTE: For destination NET perform Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-65 first.
7.) After finishing the backup, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
Figure 4-38 Backup windows
NOTICE If you select to delete the exam after finishing the backup, it will be absolutely deleted from the hard
!! NOTICE:
disk of the ultrasound scanner Voluson® 730Expert!
For further information refer to Chapter 15 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Expert.
Section 4-6
Software Configuration Checks
Touch the UTILITIES key, then touch SYSTEM SETUP.
The System Setup desktop offers different pages to check:
Table 4-10 System Setup Checks
Step Task Expected Result(s)

1 General: Check Date and Time setting Date and Time are correct
2 General: Check that Location (Clinic Name) is correct Location Name is correct
3 General: Check Language settings desired Language is displayed
4 User Setting: Check all the User Settings settings assigned as desired by the customer
5 User Settings: Check settings of the “Patient ID” field settings assigned as desired by the customer
color scheme display of the Touch Panel assigned as

6 User Setting: Check Touch Panel Scheme
desired by the customer
Print A and Print B keys are assigned as desired by the

7 Peripherals: Check assignment of Printer Keys
customer
8 Foot Switch left and right are assigned as desired by the

Peripherals: Check assignment of Foot Switch
customer
9 Peripherals: Check Save Destination assignment setting assigned as desired by the customer
10 Peripherals: Check 2D Save key assignment setting assigned as desired by the customer
Peripherals: Check Remote Print A, Remote Print B,

11 settings assigned as desired by the customer
Report Printer and DICOM Print Job assignment
12 Option: Check that all options are set up correct D = Demo , I = Inactive , P = Permanent
Service: Check the Video Norm standard as described in

13 settings assigned as required for the country
Section 3-8-1-6 on page 3-58
14 Network:
setting assigned as desired by the customer
Check DICOM, Sonoview and Network configuration
Touch the UTILITIES key, then touch MEASURE SETUP.

The Measure Setup desktop offers three different pages to check.
NOTICE Parameters and possible adjustments depend on the selected Application.

!! NOTICE:
To view, add, delete, reorder, edit or when creating a new parameter (in the MEASURE & CALC page), it
is very important that all items are chosen correctly and that the relevant item is highlighted.
For further information refer to Chapter 18 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Expert.
Table 4-11 Measurement Setup Checks
Measure & Calc:

11 setting assigned as desired by the customer
Check all settings for all applications
Application Parameters:
2 setting assigned as desired by the customer
Check all settings for all applications
3 Global Parameters: Check all settings setting assigned as desired by the customer

Section 4-7
Peripheral Checks
Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-12 Peripheral Checks
Step Task to do Expected Result(s)

1 Press the FREEZE key. Stop image acquisition.
Press the PRINT A or PRINT B key on the The image displayed on the screen is printed on printer, depending on
2
Control Panel. the key assignment configuration
3 Press the VCR key on the Control Panel twice. VCR starts recording (REC - will be displayed on the screen)
4 Press the VCR key twice again. VCR stops recording
5 Press the VCR key on the Control Panel once. The VCR Remote Control menu is displayed on the Touch Panel.
to start recording
6 Press RECORD on the Touch Panel. A red dot is displayed in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate
that recording has begun
To Stop recording
7 Press STOP on the Touch Panel.
The video status icon is changed to (Pause)
8 Press PLAY on the Touch Panel. To start, Play back an examination
9 Press EXIT on the Touch Panel to return to the scanning mode
to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause,

10 Use the assignable keys on the Touch Panel rewind or fast forward.
The video status icon in updated accordingly.
4-7-1 ECG Check Out

Connect the ECG preamplifier MAN and check:
Table 4-13 ECG preamplifier Check
Connect the ECG at the Connector on the rear panel of the

It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the image
1 scanner. Press the ECG key on the control panel to
sector
display the “ECG” menu on the Touch Panel.
4-7-2 Power Supply Adjustment

There are no adjustments on the power supplies. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside
the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a
component connected to that specific power outlet.
4-42 Section 4-7 - Peripheral Checks

Section 4-8
Mechanical Function Checks
4-8-1 Rotation of the Control Console
locking lever
for locking and unlocking
the control console
Figure 4-39 locking lever under Control Console
Table 4-14 Rotation of the Control Console
1 Pull the locking lever under the Control Console forward, grasp it It is possible to rotate the Control Console up to
at the front grip of the user interface and rotate the console. 30° to the right.
WARNING
WARNING Do not put your hand between the control console and the main unit when moving the
!! WARNING:
console to the 0° position: Danger of injuries!
4-8-2 Brakes and Direction Locks
steer able
Brake Front Wheel
pedal
Figure 4-40 Front Wheel with Brake
Table 4-15 Brakes and Direction Lock
Flap the foot rest up and press the release brake pedals on The front wheels are engaged / disengaged for
1
the front wheels. transportation.

Section 4-9
Site Log
4-9-1 Site Log - System (Service Database)
3.) Select the SERVICE page. The “password window” appears automatically.
4.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Figure 4-41 System Setup Service page and Service Tools window
5.) Click the MAINTENANCE REPORT button. The following message box will be displayed.
Figure 4-42 Maintenance Report
6.) Fill in the requested information and click OK.

7.) Click the EXIT button on the Service Tools window and the SAVE & EXIT button on the System
Setup Service page.
NOTE: After Hardware or Software modifications normally the “Maintenance Report” message box
(Figure 4-42) appears automatically on the screen.
4-44 Section 4-9 - Site Log

4-9-1-1 To review the Service Database

4.) On the Touch Panel touch UTILITIES and then SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the setup desktop.
Figure 4-43 System Setup Service page and Service Functions window
6.) Click the SERVICE TOOLS... button. The Service Tools window will be displayed.
Figure 4-44 Service Tools Window

4-9-1-1 To review the Service Database (cont’d)
7.) Select the SERVICE VIEWER... button to get access to the E-Service page. Figure 4-45
Figure 4-45 Kretztechnik E-Service
8.) After selecting “Service Operations” from the links on the left side of the screen, the V730 Service
Database will be displayed; see: Figure 4-46.
Figure 4-46 E-Service V730 Service Database

4-9-2 Site Log - Paper Documentation
Table 4-16 Site Log
Date Service person Problem Comments


Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
This chapter explains Voluson® 730Expert’s system concepts, component arrangement, and
subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.

5-1 Overview 5-1
5-2 General Information 5-2
5-3 Main board Chassis GEF Module 5-25
5-4 FrontEnd Processor 5-26
5-5 BackEnd Processor 5-36
5-6 Internal I/O 5-41
5-7 Top Console 5-44
5-8 Monitor 5-49
5-9 External I/O 5-50
5-10 Peripherals 5-51
5-11 Power Distribution 5-53
5-12 Mechanical Descriptions 5-64
5-13 Air Flow Control 5-67
5-14 Service Platform 5-68
5-15 Service Home Page 5-70
5-16 Service Page 5-74
5-17 Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY) 5-83
5-18 LINUX - Maintenance System 5-85
Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

Section 5-2
General Information
Voluson® 730Expert is a digital beamforming curved-, linear- and phased array ultrasound imaging
system. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono.
A CW-Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
• 2D Mode Imaging and additional Operating Modes (B-Flow, XTD-View, Coded Contrast Imaging)
• Color Doppler Imaging (CFM, PD, TD and HD-Flow [only at systems upgraded to BT05/BT08])
• M Mode + MCFM Imaging
• Doppler (PW, CW)
• 3D Mode and Real Time 4D Imaging
• Different combinations of the above modes
Monitor
Monitor Controls
Touch Panel/Display
Name Plate
TGC - Slider Controls
Place for ECG Module
Control Console
Stand By switch
Gel Holder
DVD/CD+(R)W Drive
Front Grip
3.5” MOD Drive (optional) Lever to rotate and lock

the Control Console
(mounted at the front
CW Connector below the Console)
Color Printer
Probe storage Connector
(not active for scanning) Probe Connectors
Foot rest
Brakes to block the

front wheels
(under the foot rest)
Figure 5-1 Voluson® 730Expert Major Components
5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information

Section 5-2 General Information (cont’d)
Monitor
GEU
GES
GEM
GW
without GEU GEF
CPN
Figure 5-2 Major System Components
Major System Components:
• GEF: Main Board Chassis: Section 5-3 on page 5-25

- Front-End processor Section 5-4 on page 5-26
- Back-End processor Section 5-5 on page 5-36
• GEU: Top Console User interface (System I/O with hard keys, Touch-screen and EL-Display)
Section 5-7 on page 5-44
• MONITOR: Section 5-8 on page 5-49
• GES: External I/O Connection Module Section 5-8 on page 5-49
• GEM: Removable Disk drive module (MO-Drive and ECG-preamplifier - optional)
• CPN: Primary Power supply and Isolation transformer for the peripherals Section 5-11 on page 5-53
• GW: System mechanical chassis, stand alone trolley to keep all major components

Monitor
GEU User-Interface-Module
GW Trolley
(housing, mechanical
framework).
GEM-
ECG+Diskdrive GES External IO
The following components
Module are part of GW:
- shaft for GEU,
- GES External IO,
- GEM Diskdrive module,
GEF Main board Chassis - framework,
- cover-panels,
- CPN MainPowerS.
- wheels.
CPM PC-Motherboard. Subboards: Slot-CPU,
several PC-Cards, CKV(Video-Card, DMA-
Controller-Card) , CPE(Backplane-Card)
CPP Powersupply- Secondaryboard
CRS RFI-Board:
MID Proc/SysCtrl/MotCtrl/PW Doppler
CRW CW-Dopplerboard (Optional)
Subboards: 32xCPD
CPR Beamformer-Motherboard
CPU Probeboard
CPN MainPowerSupply Module
Figure 5-3 Basic Block diagram of Voluson® 730Expert


The Voluson® 730Expert used digital beamforming technology which provides high resolution and high
penetration performance. It is a general purpose, mobile, software controlled diagnostic ultrasound
scanner. Its function is to acquire ultrasound data and to display the data of different modes.
Voluson® 730Expert gives the operator the ability to measure anatomical structures and offers analysis
packages that provide information that is used to make a diagnosis by competent health care
professionals.
The Calculation and Report function supports following application packages:
• Abdomen (ABD)
• Obstetrics (OB)
• Gynecology (GYN)
• Cardiology (CARD)
• Urology (URO)
• Vascular (VAS)
• Neurology (NEURO)
• Small Parts (SM P)
• Pediatrics (PED)
• Orthopedics (ORTHO)
The Voluson® 730Expert supports a variety of linear-, curved-, phased array and pencil probes for
various clinical applications. Any 3 probes may be connected at the same time (+ 1 pencil CW-probe).
Medical application fields include:
• Obstetrics
• Gynecology and Fertility
• Radiology
• Internal Medicine
• Neurology
• Cardiology
• Oncology
• Urology
• Orthopedics
• Pediatrics
The system is designed for follow-up expansion.
In addition to the initial operational settings for each transducer pre-programmed in the system, user-
customized parameter settings for each transducer may be inserted by the operator and stored for recall
as needed via the system control panel. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all
necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
Biopsy guidelines are provided on screen to assist in the collection of tissue samples, using biopsy
guide adapters offered as an optional accessory.
The system provides the ability to perform remote viewing of images without compression, via DICOM
3.0 compatible output. Management of patient history is possible by “Sonoview” image-filing function.
High-resolution images are provided by utilizing a technology called digital dynamic receive focusing.

Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End
Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals.
For more detailed explanations of functions and controls refer to the Voluson® 730Expert Basic User
Manual.
5-2-1 Description of Voluson® 730Expert Operating Modes
5-2-1-1 B-Mode or 2D-Mode

B-Mode or 2D-mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for
location and measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other
modes. In 2D-mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such
as the heart is displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different
gray scale or color values in the display. The outline of the 2D cross-section may be a rectangle,
parallelogram, sector or 360-degree circle, depending on the particular transducer used.
2D-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.
5-2-1-1-1 Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI)

In Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue are minimized by receiving and processing
the second harmonic signal that is generated within the insonified tissue. Voluson® 730Expert´s
high performance HI provides superb detail resolution and penetration, outstanding contrast
resolution, excellent acoustic clutter rejection and an easy to operate user interface.
Coded Harmonics enhances near field resolution for improved small parts imaging as well as far
field penetration. It diminishes low frequency amplitude noise and improves imaging technically
difficult patients. It may be especially beneficial when imaging isoechoic lesions in shallow-depth
anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-visualize fetal anatomy.
Coded Harmonics may improve the B-Mode image quality without introducing a contrast agent.
5-2-1-1-2 XTD-View (optional)

For details review: Section 5-2-4-5 "XTD-View (Extended View)" on page 5-18
5-2-1-1-3 B-Flow (optional)

For details review: Section 5-2-4-8 "B-Flow" on page 5-19
5-2-1-1-4 Coded Contrast Imaging (optional)

For details review: Section 5-2-4-10 "Coded Contrast Imaging" on page 5-20
5-2-1-2 M-Mode
In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on
the X-axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness
when accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode.
Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display.
M-mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam.
Depth is arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used
in conjunction with a 2D image for spatial reference. The 2D image has a graphical line (M-line)
superimposed on the 2D image indicating where the M-mode beam is located.
5-2-1-2-1 MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode)

Color Flow Mode and Color M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color-coded qualitative
information concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid motion within the 2D mode or M
mode image. Color Flow overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color
maps. The Color Flow wedge overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline.

5-2-1-3 Color Doppler Modes

Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display.
There are three applications of this technique:
• Color Flow Mode (C) - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction
• Power Doppler (PD) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood
• Tissue Doppler (TD) - used to visualize tissue motion direction and velocity
• Bi-Directional Angio (HD-Flow) - used to visualize flow direction with spatial resolution and low
artifact visibility
BT-Version:
BT Version: The HD-Flow Mode is only available at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).
5-2-1-3-1 Color Flow Mode

A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is
presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow (velocity,
variance, power and/or direction). Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-
section is overlaid on top of the grayscale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel
in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo) information or a
blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft tissue structures
and from the red blood cells. Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine the display
colors, but power and variance may also used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the
signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by
assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may
also be used to enhance the discrimination. Color flow can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral
Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode.
5-2-1-3-2 Power Doppler

A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is presented
as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in blood flow echoes. Often,
to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid on top of the gray scale
cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether
to display color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is based on
the relative strength of return echoes from the soft-tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high
pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures.
Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the
surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination.
The power in the remaining signal after wall filtering is then averaged over time (persistence) to present
a steady state image of blood flow distribution. Power Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and
Spectral Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode.
5-2-1-3-3 Tissue Doppler

The Tissue Color Doppler Imaging is used for color encoded evaluation of heart movements.
The TD image provides information about tissue motion direction and velocity.
5-2-1-3-4 Bi-Directional Angio (HD-Flow Mode)

Directional Power Doppler is a Power Doppler mode incorporating the flow direction (much like Color
Doppler) into the displayed image. The focus of the settings for Directional Power Doppler is for high
spatial resolution and low artifact visibility, allowing vessels to be seen with less blooming and finer
detail.

5-2-1-4 Pulsed (PW) Doppler

PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In
spectral Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time
on the X-axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of
spectral broadening indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed
Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the
sample volume. PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D image
with an M-line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating the position of the
Doppler sample volume. The sample volume size and location are specified by the operator. Sample
volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator, with the direction of
flow in the vessel, thus determining the Doppler angle. This allows the spectral display to be calibrated
in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency (Hz). PW Doppler also provides the capability of
performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and sample volume size. PW Doppler can be used
in combination with 2D and Color Flow modes.

5-2-1-5 3D Imaging
The Voluson® 730Expert Ultrasound System will be used to acquire multiple, sequential 2D images
which can be combined to reconstruct a three dimensional image. These 3D images are useful in
visualizing three-dimensional structures, and in understanding the spatial or temporal relationships
between the images in the 2D sequence. The 3D image is presented using standard visualization
techniques, such as surface or volume rendering.
5-2-1-5-1 3D Data Collection and Reconstruction

2D gray scale images including Color Flow or Power Doppler information may be reconstructed.
The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by sweeping 2D-scans with special transducers
(called 3D-transducers) designed for the 2D-scans and the 3D-sweep.
2D ultrasound imaging modes are used to view two dimensional cross-sections of parts of the body.
For example in 2D gray scale imaging, a 2 dimensional cross-section of a 3-dimensional soft-tissue
structure such as the heart is displayed in real time. Typically, the user of an ultrasound system
manipulates position and orientation of this 2D cross-section in real time during an exam.
By changing the position of the cross-section, a variety of views of the underlying structure are
obtained, and these views can be used to understand a 3-dimensional structure in the body.
To complete survey a 3-dimensional structure in the body, it is necessary to collect 2D images

which span a volume containing the structure. One way is to sweep the imaging cross-section by
translating it in a direction perpendicular to the cross-section. Another method is to rotate the cross
section about a line contained in the cross section. The Voluson® 730Expert uses the automated
so called C-Scan for the motion perpendicular to automated B-scan. Once a representative set of
2D cross-sections are obtained, standard reconstruction techniques can be used to construct other
2D cross-sections, or to view the collection of cross-sections as a 3D images.
5-2-1-5-2 3D Image Presentation

Several techniques can be used to aid the human observer in understanding the resulting 2D image
as a representation of a three-dimensional object. One is to rotate the volume of data, and present
the resulting sequence of 2D projections to the observer. The changing direction of observation
helps the observer to separate the features in the volume according to their distance from the
observer.
5-2-1-5-3 3D Rendering
3D (volume) rendering is a calculation process to visualize certain 3D-structures of a scanned
volume by means of a 2D-image. The gray value for each pixel of the 2D-image is calculated from
voxels along the corresponding projection path (analyzing beam) through the volume. The render
(calculation) algorithm, surface or transparent mode, determines how 3D-structures are visualized.
VOXEL
X
X PROJECTION WAY
PIXEL
Z
Y
VOLU
ME -
BLOC
K
Y
- DISPLA
2 D
Figure 5-4 Principle: Volume Rendering

5-10
5-2-2
Front End Board CKV

Board CRS
RFI
Probe
PCI to Video
MUX
GE HEALTHCARE - KRETZTECHNIK
Local I/F Mgmt

DIRECTION KTI105937, REVISION 3
and Beamformer
DMA
Connectors Board CPR
Board
CPU CRT
Monitor
15”
System Control User

Control Dig. VGA I/F
PCI 32 Bit /
Out
33 MHz
Block diagram Voluson® 730Expert
Motor Control Aux. VGA

PROPRIETARY TO GE
DRAFT (MAY 27, 2008)
IPC–Pentium 4 AGP
3.06 GHz VGA RS232
Section 5-2 - General Information

Figure 5-5 Top Level Architecture
768 MB
HDD LAN 10/100
HVPS LVPS USB 2.0
80 GB MBit
Motor
Power DVD MO
Drive +RW Drv
PS Unit
PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
VOLUSON® 730EXPERT (BT04)
5-2-2
Harddisk
5V,12V Data
CPM PC-Motherboard
Monitor LineOut
SBC-Single Board Computer eg. for Sonoview-
Components:Network, USB, Sound Sound Records
LINE OUT
CW-Channels selected by Relais MajorTasks:
SystemControl PS2
3D-Rendering
CPZ Coverboard ImageProcessing (CRI, StrainImage,etc)

CPU CPR CWD(CRW) RS232
TMDS PC-Keyboard,
USB Trackball
T/R(192) CWTX(16)
UI-Disp-
KVS 1
FlatCable10pol Matrox or Bayview Graphic
CPU CPR CRW CRS CPP Ser.Comm to UI for GEU (separate PCB)
Probeboard Beamformer-Motherboard CW-Dopplerboard MID-Prozessor Powersupply-
Transmitter-Receiver (Optional) for B,C,D modes: System Control: Secondaryboard
1 CW-PrbConnector - Multi Beam-DeInterleave Clock Oscillator (60MHz)
-Separate - Subtraction Filter (for THI) - PRF-Generator
3 Prb-Connectors - BeamformerConfiguration Powersupply: TMDS cable
32 x CPD ClkOsc.+Clockgenerator - Digital TGC, DC-Cancelling
260pol - TX/ RX Focus timing DC-DC-Converter: (SBC to CKV)
PRF,FN - Mixer with NCO
1 Dummy-PrbConn. -TxDelayMatrix - FIR-Low Pass - Line number (lateral Position) 59VDC to:
260pol -Transmitter, B-Mode: - contains TX-Power +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V,
+FAN(17...24VDC)
CKV-Video-Card
-RxAmp, - Magnitude Calculator Doppler + CFM: S-VHS-IN
DMA-Controller f. HighSpeed DataTransfer into
-RxDelayMatrix - Logarithmic Amplifier - CFM-processing: +-TX_POW(+-90V)
Slot-CPU-Mem. VHS-IN
-Analog: Mixer, Amps, - Resample -Color-Doppler shot lines
Video-Converter TMDS-VGA,RGB-VHS, etc
-Probe Select Relais Filter(WMF,AntiAliasing) - Edge Enhance transfer to CKV Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp
-Probe Recognition
CPD Beamformer-Subboard - Doppler-Processing:
-PRF-SampADC16Bit, - Line Filter
(Signals to CPC) 1x : Beamformer-ASIC
- Blending -DSP, Audio DAC VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS1 S-VHS2 VHS1 O VHS2 O
generates TX-Pulses+
- Frame Filter Motor Control:
TxFocus+TxApodisation,
- Master of Control of 3D-Sweep
RxFocusDelay+Summation.
- Drives Motor via SIN-COS
16x : TX-PowerAmplifier
- Triggers Frame-start on
4x : TGC+AntiAliasingFilter+ADC
Beamformer Additional CPE-Connectors:
- Triggers Write-Logic on CKV CPE-Backplane-Card - Lamp, - ECG, - RS232-3
Each CPD capable of (DMA-Controller) - Remote B/W Printer
Multiplexer+Amp for PC-Sound<>DopplerAudio
16 TX-Channels US-Data - Audio VTR OUT, ...VTR IN
Feedthrough f. Power, Stdby, etc.
4 RX-Channels
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Block diagram Voluson® 730Expert (cont’d)
Aux_Supply CPN Console Sound IN

SIN-COS
CPU-Control
Mot-Strobes Beamformer-
"MCPU_A"(12) "EBF_D"(18) CW-Data serial,
SIN-COS Configuration-Data:
"MCPU_D"(8) D,Q,16Bit each
Powered "EH_DATA"(16)
"EH_ADR"(8)
CPK Motherboard of GEF-Module:

CPU CPR PCW CRS CCM CPP CPM
VGA-Signal to V730EXPERT-
Touchscreen. (Signal is in fact
analog, but is re-sampled and
Figure 5-6 Voluson® 730Expert - Block diagram

digitalized in Touchscreen.)
Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory)

Cable does not exist at V730PRO
GEM-
ECG+Diskdrive-Module: USB-Cable
KVN
External Diskdrives
(59VDC,
ECG-Module Power-OFF-Signals)
PowerSupply-Cable 5V,12V GEU-User-Interface-
CPN-MainPowerSupply-Module Module
CPH StdbySwitch PC-Keyboard,

(User Power Trackball
Trafo
ON/OFF)
CCF CPY
Powersupply- Powerswitch-
Primaryboard Plugboard FootSwitch
5-11
5-2-3 Data Flow Control Description

This section describes the functions of the Voluson® 730Expert Boards vs different Operation Modes.
• CPR - Beam former Board

• CRS - Mid-Processor, System Control and Spectral Doppler Board
• CKV - DMA Controller / Video Management Board
(CKV-Block diagram) see Figure 5-21 on page 5-38
5-2-3-1 B-Mode
1.) CRS
The CRS contains the Clock-Oszillator(60MHz) and PRF-Generator.
It generates(drives) BF(=Beamformer)-ASIC-Clock(60MHz) and Shot-Trigger for the CPR.
Configures CPU (Probe board) and Beamformer (CPD-Subboards on CPR) with TX-Frequ, TX-
Focus, RX-Focus, LineNo (lateral Position), TX- Apodisation, RX-Apodisation, Multibeam, etc.
CRS also contains the TX-Power-Reference-DAC.
Furthermore it contains Multibeam-DeInterleave, Subtraction Filter (for HI-Mode, see: Section 5-2-
3-1-1 "Special B-Mode Techniques" on page 5-13, DigitalTGC, DC-Canceler, Mixer (Part of
Demodulator), LowPassFilter, Decimation (Pixel rate Conversion), Magnitude Calculator (Part of
Demodulator), Logarithmic Amplifier, Re-Sample, Edge Enhance (Contrast Enhancement through
differentiation), LineFilter, Blending (adapting Brightness in order to perfectly combine Nearfield-
Frame with Farfield-Frame in FFC-Mode, see: Section 5-2-3-1-1 "Special B-Mode Techniques" on
page 5-13, FrameFilter.
Multibeam-DeInterleave means: Incoming Pixel order

shot1pix1-shot2pix1-shot3pix1-shot4pix1 -
shot1pix2-shot2pix2-shot3pix2-shot4pix2...
is converted to the new order:
shot1pix1-shot1pix2-shot1pix3..... - shot2pix1-shot2pix2-shot2pix3.....
After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the
LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation, and
Logarithmic Amplifier arrange the conversion from High-Dynamic LinearSignal to the Low-
Dynamik(e.g.8Bit) Log-Signal. Several Postprocessing steps (LineFilter, FrameFilter, ReSample,
Edge Enhance) enable smooth image quality while keeping contrast high.
2.) CPR
Contains 32 CPD (Beamformer-Subboards).
The CPD consists of Beamformer-ASIC, TX-Amplifier, RX-TGC-Amplifier, Signal-ADC.
Each CPD can support 8 TX-Channels and 4 RX-Channels.
- TX-Channel: ASIC generates TX-Freq through dividing 60MHz by 2,3,4,5,... and TX-Focus.
- RX-Channel: ASIC generates Sample-Clocks for the ADC, manages RX-Focus (Delay and
Chain-Adder) and Apodization.
3.) CKV - Direct Memory Access (DMA) section
B-mode-Data from CRS is written via Signal Processor (SP) Channel 0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer
memory. DMA Controller 0 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is
performed per software.
Cine Mode: Reserved area in PC main memory is used.
4.) CKV - Video section

The result is transferred to VGA memory via AGP bus. DVI (Digital Visual Interface) video output
signal is connected to CKV, where the analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video
timing outputs are generated.

5-2-3-1-1 Special B-Mode Techniques

a.) HI (Coded Harmonic Imaging):
In one method of HI the RX-Frequency is doubled, so that the radial resolution is increased
due to the higher RX-Frequency.
The second method of HI is pulse-inversion: 2 TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location,
one with positive, one with negative polarity. The subtraction of both shots (Subtraction Filter)
brings to bear the nonlinear-echo-reflection-properties of the tissue (especially in usage of
Contrast-medias), which is very useful with extremely difficult-to-image patients.
b.) FFC (Frequency and Focus Composite):
2 or more TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location. The Beams have different TX-foci.
By means of Blending (adaption of Brightnesses) they are composed to one whole RX-Line.
c.) XBEAM CRI (CrossBeam - Compound Resolution Imaging):
Does not need any special functions of CRS.
Image is composed of more than one different-direction-steered images. PC-calculated.
d.) VCI (Volume Contrast Imaging): Does not need any special functions of CRS.
Image is composed of more than 2 small angle neighbored images. PC-calculated.
(Only possible with 4D-Probes).
5-2-3-2 M-Mode
1.) CRS
see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
3.) CKV - DMA section

B-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory.
DMA Controller 1 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is performed per
software, i.e. the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between lines).
CineMode: CineMode-Memory is the PC main memory.
CineMode with ECG: CineMode-Memory for the ECG-Curve is inside PC-Memory.
Software has to take care that M-Mode-Image and ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the
other, means: have the same Cine-Shift.

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode

5-2-3-3 D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler)

1.) CRS
- PRF-generator; see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
- After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum,
where the LowPassFilter cuts HF.
Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation.
- Arranges the FFT. D-Mode Data uses the dedicated 8-bit Bus SP1 to the CKV.
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode

D-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP1 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory.
DMA Controller 1 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is performed per
software, i.e. the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between lines).
CineMode: CineMode-Memory is the PC main memory.
CineMode with ECG: CineMode-Memory for the ECG-Curve is inside PC-Memory.
Software has to take care that D-Mode-Image and ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the
other, means: have the same Cine-Shift.

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
5-2-3-4 D-Mode Autotrace (draws PC-calculated envelope to D-Spectrum)

(ECG-Curve is similar to Autotrace-Curve)
1.) CRS
- Arranges the FFT. D-Mode Data use the dedicated 8-bit Bus SP1 to the CKV.
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode

D-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP1 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory.
PC calculates Autotrace-Curve from D-Mode data.
Cine Mode with Autotrace/ECG: Cine Mode-Memory for the Autotrace/ECG-Curve is inside PC-
Memory.
Software has to take care that D-Spectrum and Autotrace/ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon
the other, means: have the same Cine-Shift.

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode

5-2-3-5 CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode)

1.) CRS
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
5-2-3-6 3D-Mode (Freezes after 1 volume sweep)

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
5-2-3-7 Real Time 4D-Mode (nonstop volume rendering)

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
5-2-3-8 XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging)

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
5-2-3-9 VCI-Mode (Volume Contrast Imaging)

see: 5-2-3-1 B-Mode
5-2-3-10 Extern-Video-Mode (display Video from Video-Recorder)

1.) CRS
Not used for Signal-Processing
2.) CPR


Analog input from an external video source (YC or CVBS) is converted to a digital RGB data stream
by a video decoder. It is mixed with the AGP DVI video output from PC in an overlay unit (Chroma
keying mechanism).
Generation of analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video timing outputs follows this
block.

5-2-3-11 Sonoview write mode (store Image to Sonoview)

1.) CRS
Not used
2.) CPR
Not used

Not used

Not used

5-2-4 Description of Software Options

To activate the software options, see Section 8-8 "Replacement or Activation of Options" on page 8-19.
BT-Version:
BT Version: Some Software Options may be considered standard (freeware), or are only available at systems that
were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x).
BT-Version:
BT Version: Application Packages are only available for systems upgraded to BT08 software (SW5.4.0 or higher).
Table 5-2 Software Options & Application Packages
Fetal Echo Package
Breast Package
Gyn Package
individual
SW-Options Description
Real Time 4D 5-2-4-1 Real Time 4D X X X
DICOM 5-2-4-2 DICOM
RT_4D_Biopsy 5-2-4-3 Real Time 4D-Biopsy X
VOCAL II 5-2-4-4 VOCAL II - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis X X
XTD-View 5-2-4-5 XTD-View (Extended View) X
STIC 5-2-4-6 STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) X
CrossBeam-CRI 5-2-4-7 XBeam CRI - CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging

B-Flow 5-2-4-8 B-Flow
VCI 5-2-4-9 VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging
Contrast 5-2-4-10 Coded Contrast Imaging
SRI or SRI II 5-2-4-11 SRI or SRI II - Speckle Reduction Imaging

TUI 5-2-4-12 T.U.I - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging X
Inversion 5-2-4-13 Inversion
SonoVCAD Heart 5-2-4-14 SonoVCAD Heart- Computer Assisted Heart Diagnosis Package X
NOTE: Additional options are not yet implemented.
BT-Version:
BT Version: "CrossBeam-CRI" and "Inversion" are optional at Voluson® 730Expert BT04 systems.
However, at BT05 or BT08 systems (SW5.x.x installed), or systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08
via upgrade kit, these features are standard.
BT-Version:Th
BT Version: BT05 and BT08 provide an enhanced SRI II option. This option is not activated by the SRI option for
BT04, although the system is upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x).
Upgraded systems which have the SRI option continue to use the feature as it was in BT04.
BT-Version:
BT Version: The option “TUI” is only applicable at systems with BT05/BT08 software (SW5.x.x installed).
BT-Version:
BT Version: "B-Flow" and "VCI" are optional at Voluson® 730Expert BT04 and BT05 systems. However, at systems
that were upgraded to BT08 (SW5.4.0 or higher) via upgrade kit, these features are standard.
A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate these features.
They remain optional and can be obtained via sales order.
BT-Version:
BT Version: The option “SonoVCAD Heart” is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.0 or higher).

5-2-4-1 Real Time 4D

Real Time 4D mode is obtained through continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D
rendered images. In Real Time 4D mode the volume acquisition box is at the same time the render box.
All information in the volume box is used for the render process. In Real Time 4D mode a “frame rate”
of up 25 volumes/second is possible. By freezing the acquired volumes, size can be adjusted,
manipulated manually as known from the Voluson 3D Mode.
5-2-4-2 DICOM
Voluson® 730Expert software package providing following DICOM functionality:
• Storage Service Class

• Print Management Service Class
• Modality Worklist Management Service Class
• Structured Reporting Service Class
• Storage Commit Service Class
• Modality Performed Procedure Step Service Class
Sending of reports - Additionally all OB/Gyn measurements can be sent to a PC*.

Receiving of these reports is supported by ViewPoint workstation “PIA” only. All other workstations can
be adapted individually.
* Without using structured reporting.
5-2-4-3 Real Time 4D-Biopsy

For minimal invasive procedures like biopsies, ultrasound is a widely used method to visualize and
guide the needle during puncture. The advantage in comparison with other imaging methods is the real-
time display, quick availability and easy access to any desired region of the patient. The 4D biopsy
allows for real time control of the biopsy needle in 3D multi-planar display during the puncture. The user
is able to see the region of interest in three perpendicular planes (longitudinal, transversal and frontal
section) and can guide the biopsy needle accurately into the centre of the lesion.
5-2-4-4 VOCAL II - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis

Diagnosis and therapy of cancer is one of the most important issues in medical care.
The VOCAL II - Imaging program allows completely new possibilities in cancer diagnosis, therapy
planning and follow-up therapy control.
VOCAL II offers additional functions:
• Manual or Semi automatic Contour detection of structures (such as tumor lesion, cyst, prostate,
etc.) and subsequent volume calculation.
The accuracy of the process can be visually controlled by the examiner in multi-planar display.
• Construction of a virtual shell around the contour of the lesion. The wall thickness of the shell can
be defined. The shell can be imagined as a layer of tissue around the lesion, where the tumor
vascularization takes place.
• Automatic calculation of the vascularization within the shell by 3D color histogram by comparing the
number of color voxels to the number of grayscale voxels.
5-2-4-5 XTD-View (Extended View)

XTD-View provides the ability to construct and view a static 2D image which is wider than the field of
view of a given transducer. This feature allows viewing and measurement of anatomy that is larger than
what would fit in a single image. XTD-View constructs the extended image from individual image frames
as the operator slides the transducer along the surface of the skin in direction of the scan plane.
Examples include scanning of vascular structures and connective tissues in the arms and legs.

5-2-4-6 STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)

With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D.
It is not a Real Time 4D technique, but a post processed 3D acquisition.
In order to archive a good result, try to adjust the size of the volume box and the sweep angle to be as
small as possible. The longer the acquisition time, the better the spatial resolution will be.
A good STIC, STIC CFM (2D+CFM), STIC PD (2D+PD) or STIC HD (2D+HD-Flow) data set shows a
regular and synchronous pumping of the fetal heart or of an artery.
The user must be sure that there is minimal movement of the participating persons (e.g., mother and
fetus), and that the probe is held absolutely still throughout the acquisition period. Movement will cause
a failure of the acquisition. The acquired images are post processed to calculate a 4D Volume Cine
sequence. Please make sure that the borders of the fetal heart or the artery are smooth and there are
no sudden discontinuities. If the user (trained operator) clearly recognizes a disturbance during the
acquisition period, the acquisition has to be cancelled.
• STIC - Fetal Cardio is only available on RAB & RIC probes in the OB/GYN application.
• STIC - Vascular is only available on the RSP probe in the Peripheral Vascular application.
5-2-4-7 XBeam CRI - CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging

In this special B-mode, beams are transmitted not only perpendicularly to the acoustic window, but also
in oblique directions. Between three and nine beams are correlated to form one image line.
The advantages of CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging are enhanced contrast resolution with
better tissue differentiation and clear organ borders. Also vessel walls and tissue layers are emphasized
for easier recognition.
BT-Version:
BT Version: At systems upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x), this Mode is standard.
5-2-4-8 B-Flow
B-Flow is especially intuitive when viewing blood flow, for acute thrombosis, parenchymal flow and jets.
It helps to visualize complex hemodynamics and highlights moving blood in tissue.
B-Flow is less angle-independent, no velocity aliasing artifacts, displays a full field of view and provides
better resolution when compared with Color-Doppler Mode. It is therefore a more realistic (intuitive)
representation of flow information, allowing to view both high and low velocity flow at the same time.
BT-Version:
BT Version: "B-Flow" is optional at BT04 and BT05 systems. However, at BT08 systems (SW5.4.0 or higher
installed), or systems that were upgraded to BT08 via upgrade kit, this feature is standard.
A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate this feature.
It remain optional and can be obtained via sales order.
5-2-4-9 VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging

Volume Contrast Imaging utilizes 4D transducers to automatically scan multiple adjacent slices and
delivers a real-time display of the ROI.
This image results from a special rendering mode consisting of texture and transparency information.
VCI improves the contrast resolution and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs.
VCI has more information (from multiple slices) and is of advantage in gaining contrast due to improved
signal/noise ratio.
Static VCI is a part of the VCI option, which allow to apply the contrast enhancing VCI method to 3D
data sets after the acquisition.
BT-Version:
BT Version: "VCI" is optional at BT04 and BT05 systems. However, at BT08 systems (SW5.4.0 installed), or
systems that were upgraded to BT08 via upgrade kit, this feature is standard.
A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate this feature.
It remain optional and can be obtained via sales order.
5-2-4-10 Coded Contrast Imaging

Injected contrast agents re-emit incident acoustic energy at a harmonic frequency much more efficiently
than the surrounding tissue. Blood containing the contrast agent stands out brightly against a dark
background of normal tissue.
Possible clinical uses are to detect and characterize tumors of the liver, kidney and pancreas and to
enhance flow signals in the determination of stenosis or thrombus.
5-2-4-11 SRI or SRI II - Speckle Reduction Imaging

A type of image noise or interference is generally considered undesirable and can obscure the quality
or interpretation of B-mode images. Although somewhat associated with the underlying echogenicity of
tissue scatters, image speckle characteristics such as brightness, density or size have no apparent
value in determining tissue structure or related properties. The elimination of or significant reduction in
speckle improves the quality or diagnostic potential of the image.
The method applied in the subject modification utilizes a nonlinear diffusion filtering technique that
permits effective speckle reduction in real time. The speckle reduction filter is available to the user in all
B-mode imaging, independent of the transducer used.
BT-Version:Th
5-2-4-12 T.U.I - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging

TUI is a new visualisation mode for 3D and 4D data sets. The data is presented as slices through the
data set which are parallel to each other. An overview image, which is orthogonal to the parallel slices,
shows which parts of the volume are displayed in the parallel planes. This method of visualisation is
consistent with the way other medical systems such as CT or MRI, present the data to the user.
The distance between the different planes can be adjusted to the requirements of the given data set.
In addition it is possible to set the number of planes. The planes and the overview image can also be
printed to a DICOM printer, for easier comparison of the ultrasound data with CT and/or MRI data.
BT-Version:
5-2-4-13 Inversion
Inversion render mode is used to display anechoic structures such as vessels.
It is a simple gray render mode but inverts the gray values of the rendered image
(e.g., image information that was black becomes white and vice versa).
BT-Version:
BT Version: At systems upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x), this Mode is standard.
5-2-4-14 SonoVCAD Heart- Computer Assisted Heart Diagnosis Package

VCAD is a technology that automatically generates a number of views of the fetal heart to make
diagnosis easier. At this time it can help to find the right and left outflow tract of the heart and the fetal
stomach.
BT-Version:

5-2-5 Description of Hardware Options

Table 5-3 Hardware Options
HW-Options Description
1 CW-Doppler 5-2-5-1 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler
2 ECG Digital Module 5-2-5-2 ECG Preamplifier
3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) 5-2-5-3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)
4 Scan/Freeze Foot switch 5-2-5-4 Scan/Freeze Foot switch
5 Global Modem 5-2-5-5 Global Modem (optional)
5-2-5-1 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler

CW Doppler mode provides real time spectral analysis of CW Doppler signals. This information
describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the CW Doppler beam. CW Doppler
can be referenced through a small pencil probe or phased array scan head, but it can also be used in
conjunction with a 2D image which has an M-line superimposed on the 2D image indicating the position
of the Doppler sample volume. For through-the-beamformer CW, this beam is steerable by the operator,
and is done by adjusting the location of the M-line. The CW Doppler beam, or M-mode line, can be
steered allowing interrogation along an operator-selected line within the image.
This option can be upgraded by implementing the CW-Dopplerboard (CRW).
5-2-5-2 ECG Preamplifier

MAN6 (internal, digital version)
For details see: Section 5-10-1-1 "ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional)" on page 5-52.
5-2-5-3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)

For details see: Section 5-10-1-3 "Magneto-Optical Drive (optional)" on page 5-52.
5-2-5-4 Scan/Freeze Foot switch
Footswitch connected to Power Supply-Box (below Main Electronic-Box)

Figure 5-7 Foot-switch Connector (e.g., CPN80-81)
5-2-5-5 Global Modem (optional)

The Multi-Tech global modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line.
It provides high-speed data transfers and fax capabilities. Features like remote configuration, callback
security, and 2-wire leased line support set it apart from basic desktop modems.
In addition, it is approved for use in many countries around the world.

5-2-5-5-1 Location in the Unit
Figure 5-8 Modem (placed on the GEF-box)
5-2-5-5-2 LEDs
The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.
TD RD CD 56 33 14 OH TR EC FX
Figure 5-9 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel
Table 5-4 LEDs on Modem
LED Color Description Normally State
- Red TD (Transmit Data) Flashes during use.
- Red RD (Receive Data) Flashes during use.
ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during communication.

- Red CD (Carrier Detect)
OFF indicates no or broken connection.
- Red 56 (56K Mode) During Power On: Briefly Flashing

These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs
- Red 33 (V.34 Mode) are ON during communication, it will stay ON until the modem is reset or
connected the next time.
- Red 14 (V.32bis Mode) At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.
ON when dialing, online, or answering a call

- Red OH (Off hook) Flashes if puls dialing
Off when modem not in use
ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready
for an outgoing or incoming call.
- Red TR (Terminal Ready)
OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken.
The connected (remote) modem will disconnect.
ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON

EC (Error Correction
- Red Blinking: Compression turned ON
(V.42))
OFF: Normal operation.
- Red FX (Fax) Always OFF

5-2-6
User Interface and Application Software

Application Layer
User Interface Applications

Measure+ 3D/4D HRS

archiving engine DFE Controls
OCP
Server Real-Time(Driver) Layer
AUX port
Software Architecture
DSC Driver VGA Driver

Driver
Win32 Other System

GDI USER
Service Services
I/O Manager
NT Kernel
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Operating System : Windows 2000

Figure 5-10 Software Architecture - Overview

COM
USB KeyBoad DSC / VGA CD-ROM MO Modem
Port Ether Net I/F
Port Mouse Port FD HD (DICOM I/F)
Storage Devices Printer
PC Hardware .
Touch
Panel
Other Video
VCR
Ultrasound Hardware with probes Peripheral Printer
KeyBoard
OCB (S)VGA Monitor Peripheral Devices
800/600
5-23
5-2-7 Data Location

The Voluson® 730Expert has a 80 GB Hard disk divided into 5 partitions:
C: System partition:
- Operating System (Windows 2000), including all Windows settings (IP-address, Network
Name, installed Printers, Printer Settings, …)
- US-Application Software (UISAPP)
- Global Service Platform Software
- Software Options
D: User partition:
- User Presets (Backup) database

- Images (Sonoview), Patient-ID´s and Reports database
- Service database
- System settings database
R: Rescue partition:
- Factory Images of C:Partition for System recovery after HDD (Windows) crash
2x LINUX partitions: (not visible in Windows)
- Linux operating system for rescue functionality
System USER Linux Rescue

(~ 7 GB) (~70 GB) (~ 1 GB) (~2 GB)
Figure 5-11 Data Location

Section 5-3
Main board Chassis GEF Module
The GEF Module contains the Front End processor and the Back End processor and the Secondary
Power supply for the full GEF Chassis.
Additionally GEF Module is the connection point of the internal I/O wiring.
Front Rear with Internal I/O (Audio Video)
View from Right

with Internal I/O (PC-part) Top View
Front End
Secondary Power
Board - CPP
Back End
Figure 5-12 Mechanic of GEF Module

5-26
Section 5-4
CW-Channels selected by Relais
CPZ Coverboard
FrontEnd Processor
CPU CPR CWD(CRW)

T/R(192) CWTX(16)
CPU CPR CRW CRS CPP

Probeboard Beamformer-Motherboard CW-Dopplerboard MID-Prozessor Powersupply-
Transmitter-Receiver (Optional) for B,C,D modes: System Control: Secondaryboard
1 CW-PrbConnector - Multi Beam-DeInterleave Clock Oscillator (60MHz)
-Separate - Subtraction Filter (for THI) - PRF-Generator
3 Prb-Connectors ClkOsc.+Clockgenerator - Digital TGC, DC-Cancelling - BeamformerConfiguration Powersupply:
260pol
32 x CPD PRF,FN - Mixer with NCO - TX/ RX Focus timing DC-DC-Converter:
1 Dummy-PrbConn. -TxDelayMatrix - FIR-Low Pass - Line number (lateral Position) 59VDC to:
260pol -Transmitter, B-Mode: - contains TX-Power +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V,
-RxAmp, - Magnitude Calculator Doppler + CFM: +FAN(17...24VDC)
-RxDelayMatrix - Logarithmic Amplifier - CFM-processing: +-TX_POW(+-90V)
-Analog: Mixer, Amps, - Resample -Color-Doppler shot lines
-Probe Select Relais Filter(WMF,AntiAliasing) - Edge Enhance transfer to CKV Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp
-Probe Recognition
CPD Beamformer-Subboard - Doppler-Processing:
-PRF-SampADC16Bit, - Line Filter
(Signals to CPC) 1x : Beamformer-ASIC
- Blending -DSP, Audio DAC
generates TX-Pulses+
- Frame Filter Motor Control:
TxFocus+TxApodisation,
RxFocusDelay+Summation.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
16x : TX-PowerAmplifier
- Triggers Frame-start on
4x : TGC+AntiAliasingFilter+ADC
Beamformer
- Triggers Write-Logic on CKV
Each CPD capable of (DMA-Controller)
16 TX-Channels US-Data
Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor

4 RX-Channels
SIN-COS
CPU-Control
Mot-Strobes Beamformer-
Figure 5-13 Front End Processor - Block diagram

"MCPU_A"(12) "EBF_D"(18) CW-Data serial,
SIN-COS Configuration-Data:
"MCPU_D"(8) D,Q,16Bit each
Powered "EH_DATA"(16)
"EH_ADR"(8)
CPK Motherboard of GEF-Module:

CPU CPR PCW CRS CCM CPP
5-4-1 FrontEnd - Board Descriptions
5-4-1-1 CPU - Probe Connector Board

• 1 CW-Probe Connector
• 3 Probe-Connectors 260pin
• 1 Dummy-Probe Connector 260pin
• Probe Select Relays
• Probe Recognition
32 * Tx/Rx Channels
to CRW
CPU Probe Board CPZ CPR Beamformer Motherboard

CW Probe
Cover Board Transmitter/Receiver

TX / RX
Power
Probe 1
192 TX / RX 32 * CPD Beamformer Subboard

MOT_signals
CTRL-signals
192 * Tx/Rx Channels
Power
192 * Tx/Rx Channels
Probe 2
192 TX / RX
MOT_signals
CTRL-signals
Power
Probe 3
192 TX / RX
MOT_signals
CTRL-signals
MCPU_A [0..12]
SIN-COS, Mot-Strobes
CTRL-signals EBF_D(18) to CRS
PowerSupply
MCPU_D [0..7]
CPK Motherboard
Figure 5-14 CPU + Beamformer (CPR)
5-4-1-2 CPR - Beamformer-Motherboard

Transmitter-Receiver (192 transmitter channel used, 128 Receiver channels)
CPR contains 32 pieces of CPD (see: Section 5-4-1-3 "CPD - Beamformer Sub-board" on page 5-28)

5-4-1-3 CPD - Beamformer Sub-board

1x : Beamformer-ASIC
generates TX-Pulses + TX-Focus +TX-Apodization, Rx Focus Delay and Summation
16x : TX-Power Amplifier
4x : TGC + Anti Aliasing Filter + Analogue Digital Conversion (ADC)
Each CPD is capable of 16 TX-Channels and 4 RX-Channels
From ASIC(n-1)
+TX_POW1/ +TX_POW2/
-TX POW1 -TX POW2
El_0 Driver EN_A Tx_0p

Tx_0
Sep. Driver
EN_B
Driver EN_A Tx_0n
Driver
EN_B
Driver EN_A Tx_1p
El_128
Tx_1 Driver
EN_B
Sep. Driver EN_A Tx_1n
Driver
EN_B
8*2*
8* Pushpull 8*
Output stage
Driver EN_A Tx_6p
El_3 Driver
Tx_6 EN_B
Sep. Driver EN_A Tx_6n
Driver
EN_B
Driver EN_A Tx_7p
Driver
El_131 EN_B
Tx_7 ASIC
Driver Tx_7n
Sep. EN_A
Driver BFIC
EN_B
2:1 Antialiasing- ADC Rx_0

Mux
TGC Filter 10 Bit
El_1
Antialiasing- Rx_1
2:1 TGC ADC
El_129 Mux Filter 10 Bit
El_2
Antialiasing- ADC Rx_2
2:1 TGC
El_130 Mux Filter 10 Bit
2:1 Antialiasing- ADC Rx_3

TGC Filter
Mux 10 Bit
to ASIC(n+1)
Figure 5-15 Block diagram CPD
5-28 Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor

5-4-1-4 CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional)

• Separate Clock Oscillator + Clock generator PRF, FN
• TxDelayMatrix
• Transmitter,
• Receiver Amplifiers (RxAmp),
• Receiver Delay matrix (RxDelayMatrix)
• Analogue: Mixer, Amplifier, Filter (WMF, Anti Aliasing)
• PRF-SampADC16Bit,
5-4-1-5 CPZ - Cover Board

Transfers the analogue transmitting / receiving signals between the following boards:
• CPU
• CPR
• CRW
192 Transmitter-, 128 Receiver channels, 16 CW-Doppler channels - switched by relays at CPZ
5-4-1-6 CPK - Motherboard of GEF-Module

Following boards are direct connected to the CPK:
• CPU - Probe connector Board

• CPR - Beam former Board
• CRW - CW-Doppler Board
• CRS - Signal Processing Board
• CPP - Power Supply Board
• CPM - Motherboard (electrical Signal- and Supply connection between all PC-Plug-In Boards)

5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board

A.) MID-Processor:
1.) For B, C, D modes:
- Multi Beam-DeInterleave
- Subtraction Filter (for HI)
- Digital TGC, DC-Cancelling
- Mixer with NCO
- FIR-Low Pass
2.) For B mode only:
- Magnitude Calculator
- Logarithmic Amplifier
- Resample
- Edge Enhance
- Line Filter
- Blending
- Frame Filter
B.) System Control:
- Clock Oscillator (60MHz)
- PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) Generator
- Beamformer Configuration:
- Tx (transmitting Frequency, TxRx (transmitting/receiving) Focus timing
- TxRx (transmitting/receiving) Apodization
- Line number (lateral Position)
- contains TX-Power-DAC
C.) Doppler + CFM:
1.) CFM-processing:
- Color-Doppler shot lines transfer to CKV
2.) Doppler-Processing:
- DSP, Audio DAC
3.) Beamformer- Configuration-Data:
- "EH_DATA"(16)
- "EH_ADR"(8)
- B-Mode-Data
D.) Motor Control:
- Triggers Frame-start on CPR (Beamformer)
- Triggers Write-Logic on CKV (DMA-Controller)

5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board (cont’d)
Beam-
Golay Multi Beam Digital TGC Limiter DC-Canceller
former
Filter DeInterleave a
Board
CPR Synt Aperture
FIR Shift Decim. I Data

+ C or MC
a Lim
Mixer
d
Q Data
FIR Shift Decim.
C or MC
+
Lim
NCO Mag. Log

Calculator b
Re-Sample Edge En- Line Filter Blending Persistence

b B
hance (obsolete) (obsolete)
M-Mode
M
To Doppler Audio
Pre-WMF NF-Gain INT&SH WMF
c
FFT PW
CW
Pre-WMF NF-Gain INT&SH WMF
d
To Doppler Audio
ECG
DMA Controller
B Signal Proc. Host EAD
Board CKV
Output I/F
I Channel 0
Q (B,M, IQ)
PCI Bus
SP0 DMA0 B, C-IQ
Demand (and not
M
Mux used Block) Mode
PW Output DMA1
Channel 1 SP1 PW/CW,M,MC-IQ
CW (PW,CW) Block Mode only
Figure 5-16 Block diagram - Data Flow of RFI board CRS

5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board (cont’d)

Color Doppler processor
CDP input data IQ is transferred to PC for processing of Power, Velocity and Variance data.
MC for display of Color M-Mode takes the same way.
Line filter / Persistence filter

These functions are done in software. Design ensures, that omitting these blocks in hardware produces
no delay problems etc.
PW/CW Doppler
Processing of FFT data is done in hardware (incl. Audio output). FFT output is asynchronous to PRF
generator operation. Due to this, FFT data is transferred via a separate channel from Signal Processor
board to DMA controller on CKV. For display purposes, FFT output data is transferred to PC via DMA
channel 1.
ECG
Is read by PC via host bus I/F. An index (timestamp) is added by signal processor hardware. ECG index
and Spectral Doppler index start are synchronized in hardware to improve current software solution.
Signal Processor (SP) Channel 0

Width: 16 Bit
Clock rate: 30 MHz
Synchronization signal: Frame, Line, Data Enable
Line length is a multiple of 4 bytes
Used for transfer of PRF generator synchronous

B
C-IQ (Color B-Image IQ data, also referred as C data)
M
MC-IQ (Color M – Mode IQ data, also referred as MC data)
i.e. all but FFT data and ECG at the moment from Signal Processor to CKV.
Signal Processor Channel 1

Width: 8 Bit
Clock rate: 30 MHz (Same Clk as Channel 0)
Synchronization signal: Line
Line length is a multiple of 4 bytes
Used for transfer of FFT (PW,CW) data from Signal Processor to CKV.
DMA0
Transfers B and C-IQ data from DMA Controller board CKV to PC memory via PCI bus.
The two data types are buffered in a single FIFO and transferred on a line-by-line basis (B or C), i.e. a
line is not fragmented in PC memory.
The data is transferred in the same temporal sequence as the PRF generator triggers them, i.e. if the
B frame preceding the C frame is transferred first into PC memory.
DMA1
Depending on the current mode, one or more of the following motion data types has to be transferred
from DMA Controller board CKV to PC memory via PCI bus:
FFT (PW,CW)
M
MC

5-4-1-7
P LL C lock D river SR A M SR AM C KV (via C PM M otherbd.)

á 133M H z 64Kx16 256Kx36
s0 _data
&
s0-ctrl-
signals
hdctrl header_en
C R S /R FI- header control tstm p_cnt
SRAM
SRAM
comm.
comm.
signals
signals
hd gen
oe_mclk
FPG A
hdctrl_strb
s1_dat
d_d_in_d CP G 2 d_out_bm _d CP G 3
d_in
s1_ctrl
CP G 1 d_q_in_q
(D anube) d_out_bm _q (Y angste)

(Am azon) C PM com m . FIF O
bm -data & linetype_ sign als

bf_prf bm ctrl- (fifo ctlr
M ultibeam DeInterleaving; Log-function & s0_ data &s0 -ctrl-
signals generator sign als _ic_ v2)
Digital TG C auxiliary auxiliary Decim ation
m cw _ser_clk_in control FIR-Filtering & Decim ation control
(Tim e G ain C ontrol); signals signals
Q uadrature Dem odulation
s1_dat CP E
cfm -data & dop_dat_ hd gen
cfm ctrl-signals
handler
s1_ctrl
line_valid
D opp ler sp ectral lin e A udio
D S P2
control
signals
auxiliary
D oppler
d_out_cfm_q
d_out_cfm_d
P rocess (H P-
cw _data, FIR ) FFT
CPR (Beam-former)
cw _q_id
cw _rfs trigger (fft_trans)
CRS - Signal Processor Board (cont’d)
CRW CP F D S P1
(CW - cw _dop_latch Spectral D oppler Processing M issing
CPM
D opp ler) Signal
sy_ctr and sy_strobes

Estim ator
R FI-P C-In terfa ce a d_b us an d co ntro l sign als be lon ging to it
SBC (PC board) via

adbus_dir
D SP
com m . M otCtrl
CP R com m . signals signals
C PC DS P
auxiliary
CC M
PROPRIETARY TO GE
control D SP_eclk0
AD C com m . signals
ADC signals
dspa and dspd
C PE com m .
signals P RF-G enerator;
ceiver
Trans-
System Control M otor Control 2x S R AM
S R AM com m . 256K x18
C P E com m . signals
signal
CPE
audio_ctr_pw 2x Transceiver
pli-
fier
Am-

sct_tx
sct_rx AD C com m .
signals AD C
pow er
cpp_sync
fan
not connected
D AC
SIN /
signals
signals
signals
signals
Trigger
signals
6x
mots
COS
BYM comm.
A m pli-
tgc_clk
FF-comm.
PCW comm.
D AC com m .
Transceiver
SRAM comm.
SRAM comm.
Transceiver &
comm. signals
Signal
id_scl2
D AC
comm. signals
id_scd2
board
fier signals
mcpu_a and mcpu_d

CPP
d_da
2x D /A-
CPP Mot. Power
S R AM E² P LL 6x Transceiver & 3x D - 2x
C PU CRW SR A M C onver Transceiver
32Kx8 PR O M D evice Schm itt Trigger FF Transceiver
64Kx16 ter
SRAM & D/A-Conv. comm. signals

B YM -CC M -co m m . signa ls
5-33
5-4-1-8 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage

used for Supply of both FrontEnd and BackEnd DC-DC-Converter:
59VDC to following output voltages:
+ 3.3V, +/-5V, +12V, +/-15V,
+ FAN (10 -24V / 15 Watt; adjustable by software)
• +TX_POW (+/-90V)
• -TX_POW (+/-90V)
• +TX_POW2
• -TX_POW2
Figure 5-17 Block diagram CPP

5-4-1-8-1 Motor Power stage (Motor driver)

Safety control against temperature rise, short-circuit, output current and faulty operation.
DC-DC Converter for internal power supply of the power stage amplifiers:
• Motor Sinus2 Powerstage Amplifier

• Motor Cosinus2 Powerstage Amplifier
Appropriated Motors:
• 2-phase stepper motors
• electronically commuted DC-motors (3-phases)
In each case only one motor can be operated. Depending on the motor type the power stages amplifiers
are used as power sources or voltage supplies. The change-over is accomplished by an external signal.
Figure 5-18 Block diagram - Motor driver on CPP

5-36
Harddisk
5V,12V Data
CPM PC-Motherboard
Monitor LineOut
SBC-Single Board Computer eg. for Sonoview-
Components:Network, USB, Sound Sound Records Section 5-5
LINE OUT
MajorTasks:
SystemControl PS2
3D-Rendering
ImageProcessing (CRI, StrainImage,etc)
RS232
PC-Keyboard,
TMDS
USB Trackball
BackEnd Processor
UI-Disp-
KVS 1
Matrox or Bayview Graphic
FlatCable10pol
CPP Ser.Comm to UI for GEU (separate PCB)

Powersupply-
Secondaryboard
TMDS cable
Powersupply: (SBC to CKV)
DC-DC-Converter:
59VDC to:
+3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V,
+FAN(17...24VDC)
CKV-Video-Card
S-VHS-IN
DMA-Controller f. HighSpeed DataTransfer into
+-TX_POW(+-90V)
Slot-CPU-Mem. VHS-IN
Video-Converter TMDS-VGA,RGB-VHS, etc
Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp
VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS1 S-VHS2 VHS1 O VHS2 O
Additional CPE-Connectors:
CPE-Backplane-Card - Lamp, - ECG, - RS232-3
Multiplexer+Amp for PC-Sound<>DopplerAudio - Remote B/W Printer
US-Data Feedthrough f. Power, Stdby, etc. - Audio VTR OUT, ...VTR IN
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Aux_Supply CPN Console Sound IN

Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor

CPP CPM
VGA-Signal to V730EXPERT-
Touchscreen. (Signal is in fact
Figure 5-19 BackEnd Processor - Block diagram

analog, but is re-sampled and
digitalized in Touchscreen.)
Cable does not exist at V730PRO
GEM- USB-Cable
ECG+Diskdrive-Module:
External Diskdrives KVN
PowerSupply-Cable 5V,12V (59VDC,
ECG-Module
Power-OFF-Signals) GEU-User-Interface-
CPN-MainPowerSupply-Module Module
CPH StdbySwitch PC-Keyboard,

(User Power Trackball
Trafo
ON/OFF)
CCF CPY
Powersupply- Powerswitch-
Primaryboard Plugboard FootSwitch
5-5-1 BackEnd - Data Flow
AGP VGA Video

Controller Out
PC Main Memory
Pentium 4 PC
768 MB
CPU Controller
(also used for Cine)
PCI Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz
PLX
DMA 0 DMA 1
PCI 9054
Local Bus
32 Bit / 33MHz
DMA 0 I/F DMA 1 I/F

(2D/3D/4D) (Motion Data)
SP0 Data
(from CRS)
16 Bit / 30 MHz 1 us SP0
2 us
SP0 Write slot
Read slot
I/F FIFO
Counters
Doppler Data 64 Meg deep
(from CRS) 1 us SP1
8 Bit / 30 MHz SP1 Write slot SP0 Read/Write
I/F Address generator
SP1 Read/Write
Address generator
Data 32 Bit
FIFO Buffer Memory

128 MB / 66 MHz
Figure 5-20 Ultrasound - BackEnd Data Flow

5-5-2 Block diagram CKV
DMA Controller
PCI Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz

PLX PCI 9054
DMA 0 DMA 1 Host PC

(Demand (Block Access
Signal Proc. No. 0 Mode) Mode)
data
16 Bit / 30 MHz 1 us
(B/MB/C/MC) SP0 Write slot 0 Local Bus
I/F 32 Bit /
33MHz
Signal Proc.
Channel No.1
data
1 us DMA 0 DMA 1 Ext. UART
8 Bit / 30 MHz SP1 Write slot 1 I/F I/F Bus 16C550
(PW/CW) I/F B/C MB/MC/ I/F
PW/CW
2 us
B / MB / C-IQ / MC -IQ / Read slot VCR
PW / CW VGA Remote
Read/Write Retrace
Address generator Interrupt
To/From
Fifo Buffer Memory
U/S Front-
SDRAM 32 Bit / 66 MHz
end H/W
32 Bit /
16.7 MHz
Video I/O
Local Bus
32 Bit / Boot
33MHz FLASH
FPGA
DVI TMDS I/F Overlay VGA

DAC
(ext. Video)
VGA
Scaler + RGB
YC Video
Decoder Scaler Deflicker CVBS
CVBS Video
Encoder (C)VBS
YC
YC
RAM RAM
Figure 5-21 Block diagram CKV
5-38 Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor

5-5-3 BackEnd - Board Descriptions
5-5-3-1 SBC - Single Board Computer

Built in or external Components:
- AGP VGA
- 100 Mbit LAN
- USB 2.0
- Sound
Major Tasks:
- System Control
- 2D / 3D-Image processing and Rendering
- RS232 (User Interface)
- PS2 (User Interface PC-Keyboard, Mouse as Trackball)
- Control GEM drives (USB)
5-5-3-2 PCI VGA Card

Generates Video signal for LCD in User Interface GEU
5-5-3-3 CKV - DMA-Controller / Video-Card

• DMA-Controller f. High Speed Data Transfer into Slot-CPU-Memory
• VGA- Output (2 Channels) for the System Main Monitor and external device
• Video-Converter VGA RGB to: VHS, S-VHS, RGB.
• Display External Playback Video and adding Overlay graphics to it.
see also: Figure 5-21: Block diagram CKV on page 5-38
5-5-3-4 Hard Disk Drive

Minimum 80GB; IDE
Stores the system programs and Image filing (patient data, Report files)
5-5-3-5 CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card

Multiplexer +Amplifier for PC-Sound<>Doppler Audio
Feed through for DC- Power and signals and for built in Peripherals (User Interface, Disk drive module,
ECG, etc.)
5-5-3-6 CPM - PC-Motherboard Card

Industrial Standard compatible (PCI) Motherboard
For interfacing between Front End and Back End Processor.
CPE is connected at CPM too.

5-5-3-7 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage

used for Supply of both FrontEnd and BackEnd
DC-DC-Converter:
59VDC to following output voltages:
+ 3.3V, +/-5V, +12V, +/-15V,
+ FAN (10 -24V / 15 Watt; adjustable by software)
• +TX_POW (+/-90V)
• -TX_POW (+/-90V)
• Motor Sinus2 Powerstage Amplifier
• Motor Cosinus2 Powerstage Amplifier
• +TX_POW2
• -TX_POW2
see also: Section 5-4-1-8 on page 5-34 and Section 5-4-1-8-1 on page 5-35
5-40 Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor

Section 5-6
Internal I/O
StdbySwitch
(User PowerON/OFF)
GES - External IO Board

GEM - Disk Drive Module
SUPPLY USB
VGA MODEM NET USB COMP VIDEO
cable OUT IN OUT OUT
ECG
DVD +
(R)W
MOD
PC
USB-GEM USB
Parallel Port RS-232
Line Out MIC Line In
USB USB
Monitor
LAN1 PS2 VGA
CKV PS2-
S-VHS1 VHS1 Adaptercable
VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS2 VHS2 VHS S-VHS
CPE AUX SUPPLY R
L
AUDIO IN REMOTE AUDIO
UI Disp.
CONSOLE CPN LAMP RS232 ECG
SOUND BW PRINTER OUT IN
CPN -
Primary Power Supply
GEU - User
FootSwitch Interface-Module
Figure 5-22 Internal I/O

Section 5-6 Internal I/O (cont’d)
Figure 5-23 Connectors on the Main Module of the GEF
Item Connector Name Description
1 VGA1 Connector for the internal color video monitor
2 VGA2 Connector for an external color monitor
3 RGB Output for color video printer
4 S-VHS 1 S-VHS 1 OUT
6 VHS 1 Video 1 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC
7 VHS 2 Video 2 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, FCC
8 VHS Video IN: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL / CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC / FCC
9 S-VHS S-VHS IN
10 Audio IN Sound Audio IN R/L Sound
11 Remote BW Printer Remote control for BW Printer
12 AUX Supply Power Supply for Module GEM
13 Console Connector for Console
14 CPN Connector for Power Supply (CPN) input
15 Lamp Connector for external lamp
16 RS232-3 Remote control for Video Recorder
17 ECG Connector for MAN (ECG-preamplifier)
Diagnostic LED´s (for voltage check; see: Section 7-3-1 on page 7-4)
18 ---------------
1 = +15V ; 2 = -15V ; 3 = Fan ; 4 = +12V ; 5 = +5V ; 6 = +3.3V
19 Audio OUT / VTR Audio OUT / R/L Video Recorder
20 Audio IN / VTR Audio IN / R/L Video Recorder
5-42 Section 5-6 - Internal I/O

Section 5-6 Internal I/O (cont’d)
Figure 5-24 Connectors on PC-part of the GEF
1 USB-GEM Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM
2 Parallel Port Parallel port for PC-Line Printer
MIC = Connector for Microphone

3 Audio
Line-OUT = Connector for Sound card
4 USB USB port connectors
5 LAN1 Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
6 UI Disp. Connector for User Interface Display
7 USB USB port connector
8 RS-232 Connector for Global Modem
9 VGA no function
10 PS2 Connector for Mouse / Keyboard
*** --------- no function

Section 5-7
Top Console
The Voluson® 730Expert Operator Control Panel (OCP) consists of the following electronic
subassemblies and/or functional components:
• Display/Touch screen module:

- VGA display – 640x480 pixels
- Resistive 5-wire analog touch screen
- Integrated display graphics controller
• Console module:
- C515 micro controller
- Atmel micro controller
- Slide pots TGC with zero raster position)
- Rotary Encoders with integrated push buttons
- PS/2 compatible Trackball (2”) with standard PC interface
- PS/2 compatible Qwerty Keyboard with standard PC interface
- LED indicators with 3 intensity levels (off, 50%,100%)
- 2 Speaker, used for Doppler and voice replay
• DC/DC Converter:
- Converts 12V DC input voltage to 5V DC output voltage for supplying UI components
S-VGA
Display
S-VGA Display
Controller
25 pol. Connector
12V
DC/DC Touch
Converter 5V
RS232
C515 Beeper
PS2
LED's and Hardkeys
TGC- Slider
Speaker
Atmel
Trackball
Keyboard
Figure 5-25 Top Console
5-44 Section 5-7 - Top Console

Section 5-7 Top Console (cont’d)
Host IO - DB25 Male (pins)

Host Pin Console Notes
Chassis 1 Chassis Gnd Tied to mounting holes & DB25
Headshell
TXD ---> 2 Rx ---> From host to console
RXD <--- 3 Tx <--- From console to host
RTS ---> 4 RS ---> From host to console
CTS <--- 5 CS <--- From console to host
GND 6 GND Common Ground (DTR signal – if
needed)
GND 7 GND Common Ground
Speaker Left 10 Speaker Left
+ +
- -
Speaker 12 Speaker
Right + Right +
Speaker 13 Speaker
Right - Right -
+12VDC 14 +12VDC +12V
+12VDC 15 +12VDC +12V
+12VDC 16 +12VDC +12V
+12VDC 17 +12VDC +12V
+5VDC 18 This Pins a reserved
+ +
- -
Speaker 24 Speaker
Right + Right +
Speaker 25 Speaker
Right - Right -
Figure 5-26 HOST IO - DB25 Male (pins)

5-46
Section 5-7
156 138
102 107 106
157 148
104 325/405
151 153
MIC
112 114 116
ECG 140
118 119 115 117 125
101 113
Contrast 110
159
Top Console (cont’d)
152 171 155

120 121
109 111 123 144 145
Y Z
122 158
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Delete Delete Delete Delete PrtSc Pause
Line Abc Arrow Meas.
X
124
<--- M PD
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
Back-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = BF 540
space
PW CW C 2D
|<--
{ } |
PROPRIETARY TO GE
-->| Q W E R T Y U I O P
[ ] \ 137
Tab 103 Abc
162
3D/4D
Section 5-7 - Top Console

Caps : " HI
A S D F G H J K L Enter auto
Lock ; ´ 147
Calc
< > ?
127
Shift Z X C V B N M Shift 131
, . /
Abc
~ Del 128 129 136
Ctrl Fn Alt Ins
`
B A 146
Figure 5-27 Voluson® 730Expert - Control Console

Exit
163 Freeze
126 105 141
161
135 132 142

133 134
Table 5-5 Voluson® 730Expert - key codes
key code Description Voluson® 730Expert - Functionality X X X
101 PID (patient identification) call-up of the patient data entry menu
102 Probe call-up of the probe program menu
103 Indicator displays a pointer arrow or hand
104 End Exam Patient and measurement data are stored in the “Data manager”
105 Print_b Remote printer trigger key B
106 Sonoview to shift from scan mode to Sonoview
107 Report call-up of the Patient report page
109 Quad Format Quad-Screen format
110 Dual Format (V) Dual-Screen format (vertical distribution)
111 Dual Format (H) Dual-Screen format (horizontal distribution) - not yet implemented
112 Soft3 (Toggle) UP - Toggle switch function
113 Soft3 (Toggle) DOWN - Toggle switch function
118 Soft_Switch1 Soft_Switch1
119 Soft_Switch2 Soft_Switch2
120 Mode_Switch1 M-Mode (Motion mode)
121 Mode_Switch2 PD-Mode (Power Doppler) and HD-Flow Mode (Bi-Directional Angio)
122 Mode_Switch3 PW-Mode (Pulsed Wave Doppler)
123 CW Continuous Wave Doppler
124 HAR Harmonic Imaging
125 3D/4D Volume Mode
126 Text Image documentation - to write onto the screen
127 Bodymark Bodymark display - to enter Bodymark symbols
128 ClrScreen to clear graphics, measurements and annotations on the screen
129 Meas_mm Basic measurements
131 MeasCalcs Calculation tables
132 HR_Zoom High Resolution Zoom

Table 5-5 Voluson® 730Expert - key codes
key code Description Voluson® 730Expert - Functionality X X X
133 Trball_b left trackball key
134 Trball_a upper trackball key
135 Trball_c right trackball key
136 B_Depth UP - penetration depth of the B-image
137 B_FocDepth UP - position of the transmitter focus
138 AcousticPWr UP - acoustic output (Power)
140 VtrRec call-up of the VCR Remote control menu
141 Print_a Remote printer trigger key A
142 Freeze Read/Write (Freeze/Run)
144 Mode_Switch4 C-Mode (Color Flow mode)
145 Mode_Switch5 2D-Mode (B mode)
146 B_Depth DOWN - penetration depth of the B-image
147 B_FocDepth DOWN - position of the transmitter focus
148 AcousticPWr DOWN - acoustic output (Power)
151 ECG ECG line ON/OFF
152 Contrast Coded Contrast Imaging
153 MIC Microphone
155 Single Format Single-Screen format
156 Speaker Volume UP - speaker volume
157 Speaker Volume DOWN - speaker volume
158 SieScape XTD-View (Extended View)
159 BiFlow B-Flow
161 Save Menu Save Menu - to save/send images (volumes)
162 OTO Automatic Optimization
163 Exit Exit
171 UNKNOWN NOT USED
NOTICE Key codes which are not listed in the table are not available at Voluson® 730Expert.
!! NOTICE:
5-48 Section 5-7 - Top Console

Section 5-8
Monitor
GG
LEFTG G RIGHTG G
KEY FUNCTION
a. MENU KEY
This button will enable the On Screen Display.
This button is also used to select the function in the Main Menu or to save the setting in the Sub
Menu. (Push for 3sec)
b. DECREASE ᇪ [LEFT]
Use this button to move down the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while
in OSD mode. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to decrease the level of
contrast of the display screen.
c. INCREASE ᇬ [RIGHT]
Use this button to move up the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while in
OSD mode. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to increase the level of contrast of
the display screen.
d. LAMP ON/OFF
Lamp ON/OFF S/W
e. MICROPHONE
Allows to record voice
G NOTE: There is no function of microphone.
Figure 5-28 Monitor Adjustment buttons
For further details refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.

Section 5-9
External I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 5-29 External I/O Panel Connectors
Table 5-6 External I/O Connector Description

1 VGA OUT print out VGA signal with monitor/printer
2 Modem RJ-11 with global adapter kit for modem connection
DICOM input/output
3 NETWORK
twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
4 USB-1 USB-2.0 port
5 USB-2 USB-2.0 port
6 COMP VIDEO OUT BNC Connector, Color Video Output
5-50 Section 5-9 - External I/O

Section 5-10
Peripherals
5-10-1 General Information - GEM (Disk Drive Module)
The GEM Module contains the DVD/CD+(R)W Drive.
Additionally the Magneto Optical Drive and the ECG-preamplifier (MAN6) can be installed as an Option.
Function of the GEM Module:

• USB2.0 Interface, Box is connected to PC(SBC board) via USB cable
• USB-IDE converter (CRB board; see: Figure 5-32):
- USB hub to split USB-IN into 4x USB, 2 are used internal for the Drives, 2 are free and
connected to the rear side of the GEM box.
- The two internal USB inputs are converted to IDE and are connected to the MOD and DVD.
• MOD 1.3 GB IDE (not installed at GEM 20)
• DVD+R+RW/CD-R drive (IDE)
• ECG Pre-Amplifier (MAN 6 - optional)
CRB-Board
(USB to IDE
Converter board)
Figure 5-30 GEM-Module (open)
optional ECG (MAN6)
DVD+(R)W Drive
optional
Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD)
Figure 5-31 GEM incl. optional MOD and ECG

5-10-1 General Information - GEM (Disk Drive Module) (cont’d)
Power-IN 3,3V
LM-317
+ 5V
EE-
Prom
US
B to IDE
IDE
(U1)
DD1
USB2.0 DD2
USB-IN DD3 EE-
HUB DD4 Prom
US
B to
IDE IDE
(U4)
USB-OUT
(P6)
USB-OUT
(P5)
Figure 5-32 Block diagram - CRB (USB to IDE Converter Board)
5-10-1-1 ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional)

The ECG-preamplifier is used for acquiring an ECG-signal to be displayed with the ultrasound image.
This optional peripheral serves for gaining an ECG-signal to mark the systolic and end diastolic
moments in M-Mode and Doppler evaluations.
The ECG-preamplifier must not be used for ECG-diagnostics. It is not intended for use as a cardiac
monitor and must not be used for an intraoperative application on the heart.
5-10-1-2 DVD/CD+(R)W Drive

The DVD/CD+(R)W Drive (Writer) is used to backup images and reports. In addition, it is used as the
main source of software upgrades and other service utility operations. The DVD/CD+(R)W Drive can
read/write CD´s and DVD´s.
5-10-1-3 Magneto-Optical Drive (optional)

Storage capacity by disk: 1.3GB, 640MB, 540MB, 230MB, 128MB
The MO-Drive allows to read and write any GIGAMO standard 1.3GB disk at twice the liner bit density.
Additionally it retains full read/write compatibility with ISO/IEC 3.5 - inch disks ranging from original
128MB to current 640MB.
MO disks are nearly indestructible and immune from the problems that plague magnetic media.
MO disks can be rewritten an unlimited number of times.
5-52 Section 5-10 - Peripherals

Section 5-11
Power Distribution
NOTICE Power Distribution depends on the currently installed CPN - Primary Power Module.
!! NOTICE:
• Section 5-11-1 "CPN6 - Primary Power Module" on page 5-53
• Section 5-11-2 "CPN80-81 - Primary Power Module" on page 5-57
5-11-1 CPN6 - Primary Power Module
Figure 5-33 Primary Power Module - CPN6
5-11-1-1 Mechanical Concept and Overview

The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to
galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an
inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter is implemented.
Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC.
The mains cord has plugs on both ends.

A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site.
The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system.
The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will
automatically break the power.
From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter to a internal outlet
connector for the Mains Transformer.
5-11-1-2 Major Functions of CPN6

• Inrush Current limiter
• Power factor correction transformer for Sinus load for the mains voltage
• Power down Circuitry + Standby-Switch
• The CPN6 module generates 57VDC (+/-2V) as an input voltage for the Secondary Power supply
of the GEF module.
• The CPN6 module contains also the isolation transformer for the peripherals.
(Maximum load: 350VA)
NOTE: All DC-supply voltages for built in peripherals are generated in GEF-module not inside CPN6.
NOTE: The system mains supply input voltage can be set to: 110V, 130V, 230V, 240V.
The output voltages may be set to 115V or 230VAC (independent from the input voltages)

5-54
5-11-1-3
8
CPN Prim.Power Module 3 F2 7 GEF Main Electronic Module

4 5 6 CPY Powerswitch-Plug Board
F1 10 FANs 2x
2 H25 240V 230V 2,5A 230V Card section
Input filter H7 CPP Power
H5 H8
H20 KL1
H21
115V 5A KL1 (Netz Isol)
Secondary Board
H23 230V 5 x Ext.
L H4 H9 Power out
115V Fan Regulation
H24 H22 130V 0V
PE Mains Power KL1 9
Aux. Ext. Devices +5V
Switch H19
110V Voltage FAN
(Fused) Power Selector +3,3V PC section

Mains
N Inrush current RL1

voltage Switch +15V
Limiter
Selector (fused 2x)
-15V
1
+12V DC voltages to all
CCF Power CPH
Transformer (Part 1)
-5V boards
Prim. Board
Tx_POW_1 +80V +SBC (Backend PC)
CPE
11 Rear
Power Factor Correction Part H14...59V Switch
F7 H11(59V) H12...59V GND 59V TX_MUX +100V
H14 H16 H2 59V
H10(GND)
6 H4 CPR Beamformer
Power Distribution Diagram - CPN6
F5 12 Motor Control Board

H18 H7 H9
13 Driver
39V
H1 CPC Control Board
TX,RX
H11 Fuses on
PFC H6
CPN
Control Standby
H5 Rearpanel FPGA
Standby S2(6) _Req
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Shutdown Control
39V
F4 19A,B „Kretz shutdown“

H12 H8 H10 Program starts to
LM317 LT1076 close Win 2000
F6
Section 5-11 - Power Distribution

H13 H15 S2(2) PS-ON
S1(1,2)
PLX
24V KL1(1,2) WIN 2000 shut down
CPH
S4(3,4) S3(1) S3(2) was successful
Transformer
(Part 2) CPS DMA Controller SBC- PC Board
Figure 5-34 Power Distribution Diagram - CPN6

FAN Board
15
14 Standby Switch
(Frontpanel)
5-11-1-3 Power Distribution Diagram - CPN6 (cont’d)
CCF (Power Primary Board) (Power Switch Board) CPY
Output Aux. Voltages

CPH Trafo
KL1 Ext. Devices
6 Voltage Selector
59V
24V 4(230V)
(Fan)
5(115V)
H10 H11 6(0V)
Output Mains Supply

2 x 39V H7(230V)
H3 H4 (115V)
5
8
H2 S4 (Fan)
12 H5
H24
H16
PFC H15
9
H14 S2
H18 H13
H20 S3
H12 Relay 1
4 H11
H5 H10 H12 H14 H9
Inrush H9
H8 H8
current H7
Limiter
Netz-
H4 isolation
59V OUT
H6 (59V)
2
Filter 10 5x
Power Out
115V/230V
15
3 11
switch F1 input F4 - F7 F2 aux. Fan

1 Power switch 13 14
Standby
switch
Cable to GEF 59V + Standby control + Foot Switch signal
Figure 5-35 Power Distribution Diagram Description - CPN6

Table 5-7 Power Distribution Diagram Description - CPN6
# Item Description X X X
1 Input Mains Input Connector (110V - 240V selectable)
2 Input Filter Universal Line Filter 250V/20A
3 F1 - Mains Power Switch (Fused) Mains switch module fused 16A
4 Inrush current Limiter delays approx. 100ms
5 Mains voltage Selector Wire Bridge Jumper (110V, 130V, 230V, 240V)
6 CPH Transformer including thermal protection
7 F2 - Auxiliary Power Switch (fused 2x) magnetic circuit breaker 5A (230V), 2.5A (115V)
8 External voltage Selector wire bridge, located on CPY Power switch-Plug Board 115V/230V
9 Relay 1 for external devices
10 5x External Power OUT connectors 115V or 230V isolated Outputs
11 Fuses F4 - F7 on rear panel, 4x 10A for 39V PFC (Power Factor Correction Part) input
12 PFC (Power Factor Correction Part) Input 2x 39VAC; Output 59V DC
13 Cable to GEF (59V) Cable to GEF 59V + Standby control + Foot Switch signal
14 Standby switch Standby switch (located on Front panel) NO main voltage switch!
15 Fan 24V
5-11-1-4 Fuses on Rear Panel (CPN6)

F1: The main Input voltage is fused by a magnetic Circuit breaker (Rated current 16A) built in the Main
Power switch labelled F1
F2:The AC Output voltage (115/230V) is fused by F2 (magnetic Circuit breaker 2.5/5A)
F3, F4, F5, F6: are the fuses for the input voltage for the switching power supplies generating the DC-
Supply voltage for the Secondary power supply inside GEF-Module
Figure 5-36 Fuses of CPN6
5-11-1-5 Fuses inside CPN6

F1 on CCF board: fuses the surge current limiter circuit.
NOTE: If this fuse is blown, the NTC (limiting the surge current will remain hot during system operation and if
the system is switched off/on within a few seconds the surge current could be to high.
Because of this reason Fuse F1 on CPN Rear Panel or the Hospital circuit fuse could be blown.
5-56 Section 5-11 - Power Distribution
5-11-2 CPN80-81 - Primary Power Module
Figure 5-37 Primary Power Module - CPN80-81 (old version)
Note: The new version of CPN80-81 has different print layout!

It shows an electrical hazard icon on the right side (instead of the “Caution” section), indicating:
DANGEROUS ELECTRIC VOLTAGE. Pull the mains plug before opening the unit!
5-11-2-1 Mechanical Concept and Overview

The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to
galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an
inrush current limiter is implemented.
Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC.
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
mains outlet on site.
From the Mains Power Input module, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter to a internal
outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
5-11-2-2 Major Functions of CPN80-81

• Inrush Current limiter
• Power factor correction transformer for Sinus load for the mains voltage
• Power down Circuitry + Standby-Switch
• The CPN module generates 57VDC (+/-2V) as an input voltage for the Secondary Power supply of
the GEF module.
• The CPN80-81 module contains also the isolation transformer for the peripherals.
(Maximum load: 350VA) see: Basic User Manual Chapter 23 Technical Data/Information
NOTE: All DC-supply voltages for built in peripherals are generated in GEF-module not inside CPN80-81.
NOTE: The system mains supply input voltage can be set to: 110V, 130V, 230V, 240V.
The output voltages may be set to 115V or 230VAC (independent from the input voltages).

5-58
5-11-2-3
Mains CPY Powerswitch-Plug Board
CPN Prim.Power Module 3 4 voltage
GEF Main Electronic Module
Selector
5 Ext. Devices Aux. Fuse F3
9
2 Voltage 7 FANs 2x
6 X20, Mounted on
X7 240V 115V Selector Card section
X18 Rear Panel CPP Power
F1 X22 X25 X24
X1 SEL Secondary Board
X6 230V 0V 5 x Ext.
L for 115V Aux. 230V 1,6A
X3 for 230V 115V 3,2A
Power out
16A X2 115V Fan Regulation
X5 130V Aux. X23
PE X21 8 +5V
Mains Power X4 0V FAN

F2 Switch 110V
+3,3V PC section
N Inrush current K1
1 Limiter +15V
16A
CPH -15V
Transformer +12V
CCF Primary X13 (Part 1) DC voltages to all
Power Board -5V boards
Tx_POW_1 +80V +SBC (Backend PC)
10 CPE
Power Factor Correction Part (TX_POW_2 +80V)
L1
VOUT
Rear Only BT03
F4 59V
X14 11 X16 59V X1 (X5) TX_MUX +100V
5 16A CPR Beamformer
Motor Control Board
35,9V X8
Power Distribution Diagram - CPN80-81
LT1676i 12 Driver
Common
Mode Coke 24V
CRS Signal Processing Board
TX,RX
PFC MC7815
V23
Control
15V Standby FPGA
Standby _Req
PROPRIETARY TO GE
X5 (4)
MC7805 Shutdown
5V Control SBC- PC Board

X18 X4
CPH X15 „Kretz shutdown“
GND
Transformer X17 X2 (X5) Program starts to
Section 5-11 - Power Distribution

(Part 2) close Win 2000
GND X5 (2) PS-ON
PLX
WIN 2000 shut down
X3 X3
was successful
CKV Video
Figure 5-38 Power Distribution Diagram - CPN80-81

FAN 24V Management Board
14
13 Standby Switch
(Frontpanel)
5-11-2-3 Power Distribution Diagram - CPN80-81 (cont’d)
CCF Power CPY Power

Primary Board Switch Board
3 11
Inrush PFC
current
Limiter
Mains voltage
selector
SEL
4
15V (PFC 59V GND
110V 130V 230V 240V 36VAC control)
ext. devices
voltage
6 selector
240, 230,
130 or 36V 7 Relay 1
110V (PFC)
input X5 (DC Out)
2x 115V
out Aux. X3 (Std.By)
Foot
36V
to F4 LED
5
CPH 59V OUT
X8 (Fan)
Trafo
9 5x
primary Power Out
fuses 115V/230V
F1
+ 2
F2
14 8 10
Mains Power Fan (24V) fuse F4 for 13

Input Module 1 Control 36V input Standby
(incl. Mains Switch) LED (59V) to PFC 12 switch
fuse F3 for
Auxiliary Devices Cable to GEF 59V + Standby control + Foot Switch signal
Figure 5-39 Power Distribution Diagram Description - CPN80-81

Table 5-8 Power Distribution Diagram Description - CPN80-81
# Item Description X X X
Mains Input Connector (110V - 240V selectable; see: Item No.: 6)

1 Mains Power Input Module
incl. Mains Power Switch
2 Fuse F1 and F2 primary fuses 16A (on rear panel)
3 Inrush current Limiter delays approx. 100ms
4 Mains voltage Selector Wire Bridge Jumper (110V, 130V, 230V, 240V)
5 CPH Transformer including thermal protection
6 External voltage Selector wire bridge, located on CPY Power switch-Plug Board 115V/230V
7 Relay 1 activation of 115V/230V for external devices
8 F3 - Auxiliary fuse fuse protection for 230V = 1.6 Ampere ; for 115V = 3.2 Ampere
9 5x External Power OUT connectors 115V or 230V isolated Outputs
10 Fuse F4 on rear panel, 16A for 36V PFC (Power Factor Correction Part) input
11 PFC (Power Factor Correction Part) Input 2x 36VAC; Output 59V DC
12 Cable to GEF (59V) Cable to GEF 59V + Standby control + Foot Switch signal
13 Standby switch Standby switch (located on Front panel), NO mains voltage switch!
14 Fan 24V

5-11-2-4 Fuses on Rear Panel (CPN80-81)
F1 + F2: The main Input voltage is fused by two 16 Ampere fuses (rated current 16A) labeled F1 and F2.
F3: The AC Output voltage (115/230V) is fused by either:

• a 1.6 Ampere / 250V fuse for auxiliary output voltage 230 VAC
• a 3.2 Ampere / 250V fuse for auxiliary output voltage 115 VAC
F4: 16 Ampere fuse for the input voltage for the switching power supply generating the DC-Supply
voltage for the Secondary power supply inside GEF-Module
Figure 5-40 Fuses of CPN80-81
5-11-2-5 Fuses inside CPN80-81

F1 on CCF board: fuses the surge current limiter circuit.
NOTE: If this fuse is blown, the NTC (limiting the surge current will remain hot during system operation and if
the system is switched off/on within a few seconds the surge current could be to high.
Because of this reason Fuse F1 on CPN Rear Panel or the Hospital circuit fuse could be blown.
5-11-3 Disk Drive Module (GEM)

The check points for the drives voltages can be found at the AUX Supply connector (= GEM Power
connector) on Backpanel of GEF-Box; see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-4.
• MO drive is supplied by +5V only

• DVD/CD drive is supplied by both +5V and +12 V
• Fan on the GEM module needs only 12 V power.
5-11-3-1 Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM)

Description of fuses: 5A / 250V / slow-blow fuse / 5 x 20 mm
F1 F2
+12V +5V
Figure 5-41 fuses for disk drives

GEM
USB
(Drives DVD/ MOD)
PC
IDE Harddisk
If the system starts to load the Kretz US-Application
it checks if the CKV80 Board (PLX) is present.
PCI-Bus
In case that the PLX is not present or can not be

detected from Windows there appears a Message
Box (Message can’t detect PCI 9054).
CKV80 If the PLX is present the application can start

loading of the FGPA on the CKV80 board.
Next step is loading of the CRS FPGA.

Kretz-Bus
At last the controller for Motor Control (on CRS) is

loaded.
Kretz-Bus CWD
Kretz-Bus Beamformer
CRS
Kretz-Bus Front End
Bios Check
Power ON Starting of Windows 2000 Load of Kretz US-Application
(Harddisk, Extern Drives)
Figure 5-42 Voluson® 730Expert Power On/Boot Up

5-11-5 Power Off / Shutdown Procedure
System Standby switch

(at Standby Æ High)
Primary Power Supplay

(CPY, Standby_Red) If Standby switch is pressed (deactivated), the signal will be
transferred to CPY board (located in the primary Power Supply).
From there via Flat cable (inside the KVN-Cable) to the CPE
board (Rear panel at GEF = main electronic box).
CPE CPE is plugged into motherboard which connects to CRS board,

(into GEF) the Signal will be written into FPGA (Field Programmable Gate
Array) on the CRS Board.
From CRS board it is connected to the CKV80 board, where the

PC (SBC) can read the signal status.
CRS
into FPGA If program (Kretz-shutdown) recognizes the signal (in CKV) it
(Field Programmable Gate activates the PC to close all applications and shut down.
Array)
After this it transmits a signal to the CKV to switch Power off.
If the PC is not responding (hang-up etc.) the power supply (CPY

board) runs in an automatic timer mode, which will shut power off
CKV80
in any case after (approx.) 3 minutes.
(over CKV to PC)
Figure 5-43 Voluson® 730Expert Power Off/Shutdown
CRS Signal Processing Board

GEF-box
Standby FPGA
Standby S2(6) _Req
Shutdown Control SBC- PC Board
„Kretz shutdown“
Program starts to
S2(2) PS-ON close Win 2000
PLX
CPN S3(1) S3(2)
WIN 2000 shut down
was successful
power CKV Video
supply Management Board
Standby Switch
(Frontpanel)
Figure 5-44 Block diagram - Power Off/Shutdown

Section 5-12
Mechanical Descriptions
5-12-1 Physical Dimensions
678,3
1415
1041,1
851,5
560,5 668
607,6
Figure 5-45 Physical Dimensions
5-64 Section 5-12 - Mechanical Descriptions

5-12-2 Monitor
• Tilt: 11° forwards and backwards
• Swivel: +/-90° rotation.
5-12-3 Top Console Positioning
30°
Figure 5-46 Top Console Positioning
5-12-4 Rotation of the Control Console
Locking Lever
the control console
Figure 5-47 Locking lever under Control Console
• Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 30° of horizontal adjustment to the right.

5-12-5 Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor
Figure 5-48 Assembly Drawing Voluson® 730Expert
5-66 Section 5-12 - Mechanical Descriptions

Section 5-13
Air Flow Control
5-13-1 Air Flow Distribution
The fans at the right side of the Main Board Chassis draw air into the scanner, through the filter grid,
and pushes it through the card rack.
Air holes in the left and right side of the rack allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits
the scanner through holes the Main Air Outlet at the left side panel.
5-13-1-1 Air Flow Distribution Overview
Main Air
Outlet Main Air
Inlet (Filter grid)
CPN Air Outlet
Figure 5-49 Console Views
Main
Main
Air Inlet Air Outlet
PC-Rack fan
PC-Air In
Figure 5-50 Air Flow Control

Section 5-14
Service Platform
5-14-1 Introduction
The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making
GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever.
The Service Platform contains:
• a set of web based modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing
a PC backend; see: Section 5-15 "Service Home Page" on page 5-70.
• specific software/hardware test modules, system setup, troubleshooting, update, etc. for Voluson
systems; see: Section 5-16 "Service Page" on page 5-74.
5-14-2 Access / Security

The Service Platform has different access and security user levels.
Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
NOTE: A Service Dongle is necessary for use by GE Service when performing proprietary level diagnostics.
OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have ‘Disruptive’
permission and customer input to run diagnostics.
The password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password is tied to the service key.
5-14-3 Service Login

Figure 5-51 Extended Access (for GE field engineers only)
As soon as you have entered the password, the “GEMS Service Home Page” is displayed.
3.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard simultaneously to switch between “GEMS Service Home
Page - Netscape” and “Kretz UISApp” ( = Ultrasound Application).
Kretz GEMS
Ultrasound Application Service Home Page
Figure 5-52 press ALT + TAB to switch between Service Home Page and Ultrasound Application
5-68 Section 5-14 - Service Platform

5-14-4 iLinq Interactive Platform

Many of the services of the Service Platform come from its integration with iLinq.
If an iLinq checkout was performed on the Voluson® 730Expert, the ILINQ button is available in the
“Utilities” menu on the Touch Panel.
By selecting this button, the Netscape® browser starts the “iLinq Home Page”.
Figure 5-53 iLinq Home Page

Section 5-15
Service Home Page
5-15-1 Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in
English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
NOTICE Extended Access (for GE field engineers only) see: Section 5-14-3 "Service Login" on page 5-68.
!! NOTICE:Ex
When the Global Service User Interface (GSUI) is started, the Service Home Page appears.
It contains the software revision along with the hardware inventory and the results of the latest System
Health Information.
Figure 5-54 GEMS Ultrasound Service Home Page - Home
The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows to select from following tools:
• Diagnostics on page 5-71

• Utilities on page 5-72
5-70 Section 5-15 - Service Home Page

5-15-2 Diagnostics
Detailed information about “Common Diagnostics” is found in Chapter 7;
Section 7-6 "Common Diagnostics" on page 7-13.
Figure 5-55 GEMS Ultrasound Service Home Page - Diagnostics
5-15-2-1 Diagnostics Execution

Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level
diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require
disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.
5-15-2-2 Diagnostic Reports

Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for
future viewing of the diagnostic logs.
5-15-2-3 Proactive Diagnostics

A system of self-monitoring is largely supported with the integration of iLinq. The scheduler, executive,
user interfaces, and some of the proactive diagnostic functions are provided by iLinq.
Other tasks should be provided by the product team.

5-15-3 Utilities
The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools.
Detailed informations about “Virtual Console Observation” and “Disruptive Mode” is found in Chapter 7;
Section 7-5 "Virtual Console Observation" on page 7-10.
Figure 5-56 GEMS Service Home Page - Utilities
5-72 Section 5-15 - Service Home Page

5-15-4 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates

The Service Platform provides for remote software downloads. Any file transferred to the scanner will
be in the form of an installation package. The actual content of the installation package is dependent on
each product. The Service Platform downloads the software module into an appropriate directory and
executes the product-specific installer executive.
Software installation is simple and automated, where applicable.
Supports software upload via remote transmission
Supports software upload via Service Platform
Supports partial upgrades
Supports de-installs of the latest partial upgrade
Supports remote activation/installation of software options
Options can be activated permanently
Options can be activated for a timed period
5-15-4-1 Remote System Shutdown and Restart

The Service Platform provides the ability to restart the system as per standard shutdown/startup
procedures. Remote shutdown will only be provided if a software-controlled shutdown exists on the
scanner. Scanner system restart is always accessible from the OLC.
5-15-4-2 File and/or Image Transfer

The Service Platform supports file transfers and archived image transfers to the OnLine Center.
The Service Platform provides interfaces of the displayed images for transfer to the OLC.

Section 5-16
Service Page
5-16-1 Introduction
The Service Page contains specific software/hardware test modules, system setup, troubleshooting,
update, etc. for Voluson systems only.
5-16-2 Access / Security

The service page has different access and security user levels.
Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
5-16-3 Service Login
NOTICE Extended Access (for GE field engineers only) see: Section 5-14-3 "Service Login" on page 5-68.
!! NOTICE:Ex

Debug
select Video Norm
Touch Panel
Calibration
Video out VHS2 Keyboard Layout

Service Tools
Save Settings &

Exit without Saving Exit
5-16-3-1 Video Norm

To change to Video Norm from PAL(50Hz) to NTSC(60Hz) or vice versa.
Operation see: Section 3-8-1-6 "How to change Video Norm" on page 3-58.
5-16-3-2 Touch Panel calibration

If the Touch Panelkeys doesn’t respond exactly, click the START PROGRAM button.
Operation see: Section 6-6 "Touch Panel Calibration" on page 6-7.
5-16-3-3 Video out VHS2

Factory setting is B/W. Only VHS2 output can be modified (Color – B/W)
5-74 Section 5-16 - Service Page

5-16-3-4 Debug
• Mode State Display - Feature is not designed for external use.
• Image Boundary - Bounds the ultrasound sector.
• 4D Shift Control - For adjusting the probe in 4D applications.
If the 4D image is wobbling too much, the adjustment can be performed with this function.
Operation see: Section 6-9 "4D Shift Control" on page 6-12.
5-16-3-5 Keyboard Layout

To change the keyboard layout to different languages.
Operation see: Section 6-7 "Modification of Keyboard Layout" on page 6-9.
NOTE: Reconfigure the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also.
5-16-3-6 Generate NLS Keys

This function is not ready for use in the field.
BT-Version:
BT Version: Only available at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).

5-16-4 Service Tools

Click the SERVICE TOOLS button on the Service window (see: Figure 5-57 on page 5-74) to get access
to the “Service Tools” page.
In the Service Tools page many functions for troubleshooting will be present.
After selecting the corresponding button, following data can be requested by the Service Engineers:
Auto
Tester
Monitor Test
Printer
Service Viewer
Update
Delect all patients
Export System Data
Console Test
Connected probes
Service
Actions
Hardware Test
Figure 5-58 Service Tools page
5-16-4-1 Auto Tester

Autotest is a log function of customer activities. It records all user actions (scanning, Touch Panel
entries, performing Calculations, review of Patient Reports, etc.…). It is possible to safe (record) as file
on HDD. But also export to DVD/CD or MOD can be done to allow replay of the records on other units.
NOTICE For intermittent problems this file can be requested from the Service Engineer or customer.
!! NOTICE:
It is possible to burn this file on DVD/CD+(R)W or to store it on MO-disk.
Operation see: Section 7-7 "How to use the Auto Tester program" on page 7-20.

5-16-4-2 Service Viewer

Provides common information about System Temperature, Probes, Working hours of system
components and probes, etc.
1.) Select the SERVICE VIEWER button to get access to the E-Service page.
Figure 5-59 Kretztechnik E-Service
5-16-4-3 Connected probes

Supplies information about: type and serial number of connected probe and which position is used for it.
There is no edit function included.
1.) Click on the CONNECTED PROBES button on the “Service Tools” page.
Figure 5-60 Probe Status
5-16-4-4 Service Actions

1.) Click on the SERVICE ACTIONS button on the “Service Tools” page.

The history of “Service Actions” like maintenance, repair, upgrade will be displayed.
Figure 5-61 Service action
5-16-4-5 Console test

To perform the Control Console test, click on the CONSOLE TEST button on the “Service Tools” page.
Operation see: Section 7-12-2 "Control Console Test" on page 7-43.
5-16-4-6 Delete all Patients

1.) Click the DELETE ALL PATIENTS button. Following WARNING message appears on the screen.
Figure 5-62 Warning message
WARNING
WARNING If you select the YES button, all patients data, studies, images and measure report data
!! WARNING:
will be deleted permanently from the hard disk and cannot be recovered!
5-16-4-7 Export System Data

Select the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA button on the “Service Tools” page to export dump-files and text
files, the full Service Database informations about probes, boards, Software, Options, Service Actions
and the Event Log File to the DVD/CD Drive (or the optional MO Drive).
Operation see: Section 7-4-2 "Export Log’s and System Data" on page 7-5.
5-16-4-8 Maintenance Report

Any modification upgrade and maintenance action should be entered in this report to get a history of all
service actions.

1.) Click the MAINTENANCE REPORT button. The following message box will be displayed.
Figure 5-63 Maintenance Report
2.) Fill in the requested information and click OK.

3.) Click the EXIT button on the Service Tools window and the EXIT button on the System Setup
Service page.
NOTE: After Hardware or Software modifications normally the “Maintenance Report” message box
(see: Figure 5-63) appears automatically on the screen.

5-16-4-9 Hardware Test

Beamformer (BF) -, Front-End-, BM-, CRS-, PW Doppler-, and BF-SelfDiagnostic tests for diagnostic
and troubleshooting procedures are included.
1.) Click the HARDWARE TEST... button. The “Hardware Test Dialog” appears on the screen.
Beamformer Test
Front-End Test current
BM Test system device
Temperature
CRS Test
PW-Doppler Test
BF-SelfDiagnostic
Figure 5-64 Hardware Test Dialog
NOTE: For detailed description and operation refer to Chapter 7 - Hardware Tests on page 7-26.
WARNING
WARNING It doesn’t matter if there is an error message after a test application – these are special
!! WARNING:
test conditions – Restart the system.
5-16-4-10 Beamformer Test

Test of the whole Beamformer board inclusive sub boards can be performed.
Operation see: Section 7-10 "Hardware Tests" on page 7-26.
5-16-4-11 Front-End Test

Not ready for use in the field.
5-16-4-12 BM Test
This page contains “Pattern Generator Test” and “Transmitter Power Test”
5-16-4-13 CRS Test

This page contains “RAM Test” and “Analog Test”
5-16-4-14 PW-Doppler Test

These tests are no more functional on (BT04) systems, since hardware parts were transferred and
handled via SBC (PC) software.
5-16-4-15 “Geräte” Temperature

Shows temperature of the CPP-board.
To display the current system device temperature, select the UPDATE button.
5-16-4-16 Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic

This test is out of date, and no longer useful on Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) systems.

5-16-4-17 Monitor Test

1.) To perform the Monitor test, select the MONITOR TEST button.
The following message appears on the screen.
Figure 5-65 Monitor Test - Instructions
2.) Read the displayed instructions. Afterwards confirm with YES.

The Monitor Test main menu appears on the screen.
EXIT
Figure 5-66 Monitor Test - Main menu
3.) Open the desired test page: select the respective icon and press the right/left trackball key.
4.) To return to the Main menu, press the upper trackball key.
5.) To exit the Monitor Test program, click the “Exit” icon.

5-16-4-18 Printer
Printer installation is possible without entering the Windows Desktop.
Operation see: 3-7-4 "Printer Installation manually" on page 3-46.
WARNING
WARNING Only accessories explicitly recognized and released by the system manufacturer
!! WARNING:
GE Healthcare - Kretztechnik may be used in connection with the system.
5-16-4-19 Update
5-16-4-19-1 NLS
Reserved for loading Native Language Support. Not for use in the field.
5-16-4-19-2 EUM
is for updating the Electronic User Manual
Operation see: Section 8-6 "Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-15.
5-16-4-19-3 UIS
is for updating the Ultrasound Application Software
Operation see: Section 8-2-5 "Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page)" on page 8-9.
5-16-4-19-4 SSW
is for updating the Service Software
Operation see: Section 8-5 "Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-13.
5-16-4-20 Console
This function is not ready for use.

Section 5-17
Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY)
5-17-1 Introduction
GE Field Engineers can find commonly used tools within a well organized sub folder of the Windows
Start menu.
5-17-2 (Extended) Access to Windows Start Menu

1.) Turn power on (let system start up completely).
As soon as the dongle is detected, the login window pops up.
Figure 5-67 Extended Access (for GE field engineers only)
4.) Press CTRL and ESC keys simultaneously and open the Windows Start Menu.
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
Factory use ONLY!
Figure 5-68 Windows Start Menu
5.) Using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard, select Programs - GE Field Engineer.

5-17-3 Description of Sub folder “GE Field Engineer”

Table 5-9 Sub folder “GE Field Engineer”
Windows Tool Description
Network and Dial-up Displays network and dial-up connections on the computer and helps to create new ones.
Connections Connects to other computers, networks and the Internet.
Printers Adds, removes and configures local and network printers
Command Prompt Performs text-based (command-line) functions.
Computer Management Manages disks and provides access to other tools to manage local and remote computers.
Event Viewer Displays monitoring and troubleshooting messages from Windows and other programs.
iLinq Shell DOS- and GSP - shell, convenient for iLinq.
The Distinct Network Monitor captures network traffic and translates the protocol negotiation
Network Monitor
of that traffic into simple English.
Notepad Creates and edits text files using basic text formatting.
Paint Creates and edits drawings and displays and edits scanned photos.
PC Doctor A comprehensive hardware diagnostic and system information tool.
Service Browser Access to the “GEMS Service Home Page”.
CD Wizard Access to the built-in CD writing program.
Provides information about programs and processes running on the computer.

Taskmanager
It also displays the most commonly used performance measures for processes.
Windows Explorer Displays the files and folders on the computer.
WordPad Creates and edits text documents with complex information.
Remap Drive Letters Automatically reassigns drive letters: C: System, D: User, E: Removable Disk (only visible if
the optional MOD-drive is installed), F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive), R: Rescue
5-17-3-1 Further functions in the Start Menu
Table 5-10 further functions
Activare UISAPP Used after initializing with Linux.
Kretz V730 Shortcut to start the Ultrasound Application.

If activated when application is already running,it kills this application.
5-17-3-2 FACTORY ONLY functions in the Start Menu
Table 5-11 Factory ONLY functions
Prepare Master Script used to prepare master image for SystemDVD. Disconnects all network drives, empties Startup.
Harddisk DOS-box appears at next reboot. Application will not start until the DOS-box procedure is complete.
Reboot_Make Password protected script that reboots into Linux and dumps an image of the C: drive onto R:.
Image Very dangerous if used, since the original factory images will be overwritten by the state.
Remedy: SystemDVD, Initialize.
5-84 Section 5-17 - Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY)
Section 5-18
LINUX - Maintenance System
5-18-1 Overview
Voluson® 730Expert systems contain updated Linux “Maintenance system” with improved functionality
(e.g., restore software/recover partitions, hard disk copy function); see: Section 5-18-4 on page 5-88.
Furthermore it is possible to perform extended PC memtest; see: Section 5-18-9 on page 5-109.
NOTICE In any event, it is highly recommended to use the appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-13),
!! NOTICE:
which contains:
• updated Linux rescue partition
• System ”C:” image (Windows 2000 with latest patches)
• Ultrasound Application Software [UIS], Application Settings [Backup], Electronic User Manual [EUM],
Service Platform, Drivers for Peripherals (e.g., printer), etc.
• Utility for repairing databases on “D:” (see also: Section 7-8 on page 7-23)
5-18-2 Access/Security
Functions are secured by service password (class C).
1.) Turn system OFF and then back ON.

2.) After “boot” message appears on screen, press SHIFT + L and then ENTER on the keyboard.
3.) Enter the password Rudi (case sensitive). The system will boot with LINUX.
NOTICE After 3 sec. without pressing any key, the system will boot-up in windows.
!! NOTICE:
If you missed step 2, retry again with CTRL + ALT + DEL.
NOTICE If system is NOT responsive, booting from System DVD is required!

!! NOTICE:
5-18-2-1 General Operation and Selection in LINUX (and BIOS) menu
General operation and selection is done with:

• the alphanumeric keyboard
• the “Arrow” keys [← left] , [→ right] , [↑ up] , [↓ down] and
• the “Enter” key on the keyboard

5-18-3 Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk
CAUTION If the system is still responsive (system starts up without problems and the application software
!! CAUTION:
is running as usual, try to print out or write down System Setup and Measure Setup settings;
because they could be lost. Even if most of these settings can be restored after the installation,
it is strongly recommend to record them before starting the procedure.
Disconnecting all external USB devices (e.g., USB printer) is necessary.
Re-adjusting those settings and re-installation of any previously attached printer has to be done
after the recovery procedure.
CAUTION If the system is suspected to be infected with a virus, it is highly recommended to disconnect
!! CAUTION:
the network cable before starting the system.
1.) Verify that the GEM - Disk Drive Module is properly connected to the USB GEM connector on the
PC-part of the GEF-box (otherwise automatically drive letter allocation could fail).
Figure 5-69 Connection of the Disk Drive Module (GEM)
2.) Boot up the system, connect a probe and start any user program.
4.) In the Utilities menu, touch SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the “System Setup” desktop.
5.) Select SYSTEM INFO page and check the Software Version and the date of the “Factory Settings”
(see: Figure 7-1: System Setup - System Info page on page 7-2).
6.) Select the NETWORK page:
- Click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button and print out the “DICOM
Configuration” dialog page or write down the DICOM parameters (AE Title, Station Name,
Retry Count and Retry Interval).
- Click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button and print out the “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page or write down the IP settings.
5-86 Section 5-18 - LINUX - Maintenance System

5-18-3 Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk (cont’d)
7.) Select the BACKUP page and click on the SAVE button of the “Full Backup” group.
Select destination, enter the description and then click on NEXT.
For more details about “Full Backup” see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35.
choose destination
enter description
click Next
Figure 5-70 Full Backup Save
Confirm the following messages with YES and OK.

After copying the data the system reboots and the application starts again.
8.) Print out the GENERAL page (Clinic Name, Screen saver, etc.) or write down the settings of this
dialog page.
9.) Print out the USER SETTINGS page (Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc.) or write down the settings
of this dialog page.
10.)Print out the PERIPHERALS page (to adjust the assignment of the Remote PRINT keys, etc.) or write
down the settings of this dialog page.
11.)Open the OPTION page to see which options are currently installed in the system.
Print out this page or write down the codes in the “Key” fields.
If this was not possible, contact to OLC will be necessary.
12.)Invoke the “Measure Setup” desktop:

13.)Touch the UTILITIES key on the Touch Panel once to display the Utilities menu.
14.)In the Utilities menu, touch MEASURE SETUP to invoke the “Measure Setup” desktop.
15.)Print out the MEASURE & CALC page or write down the settings of this dialog page.
Ask the customer if he is using special programmed tables or equations.
16.)Print out the APPLICATION PARAMETERS page or write down the settings of this dialog page.
17.)Print out the GLOBAL PARAMETERS page or write down the settings of this dialog page.
18.)Disconnect all external USB devices (e.g. USB printer).
NOTE: Do NOT disconnect the Disk Drive Module (GEM); see: Figure 5-69.

5-18-4 Linux “Maintenance System”

1.) Enter Linux as described in Section 5-18-2 "Access/Security" on page 5-85.
The Linux “Maintenance system” main menu with following functions appear:
CD-ROM Menu
SaveSettings
Advanced Functions Menu
Exit/Reboot
Figure 5-71 Linux - Main menu
5-18-4-1 CD-ROM
This item switches to the CD-ROM Functions Menu (see: Section 5-18-6 on page 5-92).
It is required that the correct System DVD is in the drive.
However, if it is necessary to create a “New Hard disk”, which contains factory default partition images
(Linux, C:, D: and R:), booting from System DVD is required.
To change “Boot Priority order” in BIOS and setup new HDD, see: "NewDisk" on page 5-99.
5-18-4-2 SaveSett
NOTE: Using this function is NOT recommended; since the “Full Backup” function covers most of the system
settings. (Contents are described on page 4-35.)
5-18-4-3 Format M/O

After confirming a warning dialog, formatting of a MO-Disk is started.
5-18-4-4 Advanced
This item switches to the Advanced Functions Menu (see: Section 5-18-5 on page 5-89).
5-18-4-5 About
This item displays various version strings from the Linux system.
5-18-4-6 Exit/Reboot
This item exits the maintenance system and reboots the system.
5-18-4-7 Halt
This item exits the maintenance system. Afterwards the power may safely be turned off.

5-18-5 Advanced Functions Menu

1.) If system functionality allows it, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3
"Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk" on page 5-86.
3.) In the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu (Figure 5-71) select [Advanced].
The “Advanced Functions Menu” with following functions appear:
Exit
Restore
Clone
Initialize
Figure 5-72 Advanced Functions Menu
5-18-5-1 Exit
Return to the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu.
5-18-5-2 Network
This item provides an easy interface for network setup.
The [Network] function is not for use in the field.
5-18-5-3 SSHD
By selecting this item, a SSH-daemon is started on the system.
The [SSHD] function is reserved for extended troubleshooting. Not for use in the field.
5-18-5-4 Shell
By selecting this item, a Bash-shell is opened. Enter “exit” to return to the main menu.
The [Shell] function is not for use in the field.
5-18-5-5 Restore
This function takes the image stored on the Rescue (R:) partition to replace the existing image of the
“C” partition.
NOTE: Data on the D: [User] partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient Data and
Reports) will NOT be modified!
NOTICE The [Restore] function should only be performed if NO System DVD (see: Table 9-13) is available!
!! NOTICE:Th
If you have an appropriate System DVD, please select the [Restore] function that is available in the
CD-ROM Functions Menu; see: Section 5-18-6-2 on page 5-92.

5-18-5-6 Clone Hard Disk
BT-Version:
BT Version: The [Clone] item has no function at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x).
NOTE: This function does not do what its name suggests!

The “Clone” function does not copy any user data or settings from the initial hard disk (initial hard
disk is just used to boot up). It simply sets up a new hard disk with the factory default which is stored on
the R:\ partition of the internal hard disk.
This function creates a hard disk that is identically to a factory-new hard disk, which contains factory
default partition images (Linux, C:, D: and R:); independent of previous hard disk contents:
• C:\ [System]: Windows 2000 with patches, Ultrasound Application Software [UIS], Application
Settings [Backup] and Electronic User Manual [EUM]
• D:\ [User]: Initialized Databases for Sonoview Images, Measurements, Patient Data and Reports
• R:\ [Rescue]: Rescue image of C:
1.) Connect the second hard disk as “master” (see: Figure 8-163 on page 8-141) to the second IDE-
port of the system´s SBC-board (see: Figure 5-73).
power
connection
second hard disk
IDE connector
for second HDD IDE connector
for initial HDD
Figure 5-73 second hard disk (connected to second IDE-port of SBC)
NOTE: It is highly recommended to use a hard disk of at least equal size.

4.) In the “Advanced Functions Menu” (Figure 5-72) select [Clone].
5.) To confirm Warning message “The contents of the second hard disk will be overwritten!...” ,
select YES and then press ENTER.
6.) After set up of the second HDD, confirm the “Harddisk Copy finished” dialog by pressing ENTER.
7.) In the displayed menus select [Exit] –> [Halt].
8.) Turn system OFF and disconnect the second Hard disk.
9.) Reassembly the system.
NOTICE After installation of this “new” hard disk (into a different system), assign User Interface, Computer Name
!! NOTICE:
and Drive Letters and activate the Ultrasound Application Software (as described in Section 5-18-6-2
"Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if present)" on page 5-92 ; step 9.) to step 22.)
5-18-5-7 Initialize Hard disk (C: and D:)

This function performs operations which result in complete data loss of all files on C:\ and D:\
partition. The image on the on the Rescue (R:) partition of the hard disk is used for restoring C:\.
WARNING
WARNING All data on D:\ (User) partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient
!! WARNING:
Data and Reports) will be deleted and re-initialized.
NOTICE The [Initialize] function should only be performed if NO System DVD (see: Table 9-13) is available!
!! NOTICE:
If you have an appropriate System DVD, it is highly recommended to use the [New Disk] function
(see: "NewDisk" on page 5-99) , which is only available when booting from the System DVD.
The resulting “initialized” hard disk contains factory default partition images (Linux, C:, D: and R:);
independent of previous hard disk contents:
• C:\ [System]: Windows 2000 with latest patches, Ultrasound Application Software [UIS], Application
Settings [Backup] and Electronic User Manual [EUM]
• D:\ [User]: Initialized Databases for Sonoview Images, Measurements, Patient Data and Reports
• R:\ [Rescue]: Rescue image of C:
1.) If not already done, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3 on page 5-86.
4.) In the “Advanced Functions Menu” (Figure 5-72) select [Initialize].
NOTE: The following operation steps are the same as for Restoring C:.
5.) Perform step 5.) to step 22.) of the Section 5-18-6-2 "Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if
present)" on page 5-92.
5-18-5-8 Clear
This function fills the file C:\pagefile.sys (Windows swap file) with 0, thus reducing the space needed for
the C: image. This function is not intended for use in the field.

5-18-6 CD-ROM Functions Menu

NOTICE The “CD-ROM Functions-Menu” is only accessible if an appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-13) is
!! NOTICE:
inserted into the system´s DVD drive.
2.) Insert the appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-13) into the drive.
3.) In the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu (Figure 5-71) select [CD-ROM].
The “CD-ROM Functions Menu” with following functions appear:
Exit
Restore
Advanced
incl. “New Disk”
function
Figure 5-74 CD-ROM Functions Menu
5-18-6-1 Exit
5-18-6-2 Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if present)

This function takes the image stored on the “System DVD” to replace the existing image of the “C”
partition. Additionally the (R:) Rescue image of (C:) is replaced by the “DVD image”.
The System “C:” image contains:
Windows 2000 with latest Patches, Ultrasound Application Software [UIS],

Application Settings [Backup] and Electronic User Manual [EUM]
NOTICE Data on the D: (User) partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient Data and
!! NOTICE:
Operation:
1.) If not already done, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3 on page 5-86.
NOTE: Please make sure that you have saved a “Full Backup”.

3.) In the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu (Figure 5-71) select [CD-ROM].
4.) Select [Restore] in the displayed “CD ROM” menu (see: Figure 5-74 on page 5-92).
NOTE: If the message: “Recovery system (Linux) needs to be updated ...” appears, confirm with Yes.

5-18-6-2 Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if present) (cont’d)
NOTICE If the following message concerning “Incorrect DVD/CD” appears, select NO, press ENTER and
!! NOTICE:
change the DVD. WARNING!!! Never select Yes; the system will become unusable.
Figure 5-75 incorrect DVD/CD
5.) Only if you are sure to have saved the settings via “Full Backup”, select YES in the
“Do you really want to....” dialog box and confirm with ENTER.
Figure 5-76 Confirm with Yes
NOTE: If the message: “Found obsolete image files on R: .... ” appears, select YES and confirm with ENTER.
NOTE: Confirm dialog messages concerning upgrade differences and/or software UISApp version mismatch
with YES and ENTER.
6.) Recovering will take some time. Please wait....
Figure 5-77 copying C: image
7.) In the displayed menus select [Exit] –> [Exit/Reboot] to restart the system.
Figure 5-78 Exit -> Exit/Reboot


8.) Remove the System DVD from the DVD drive.
The system boots with windows and check disk will be performed automatically.
NOTICE An automated process was developed to choose the right GEU user interface console, assigning an
!! NOTICE:
unique computer name (Hardware ID) and matching the drive letters.
9.) Wait until “check disk” is finished and the “DOS” box (Figure 5-79) and the “System Settings
Change” message box (Figure 5-81) appear.
NOTE: Detection of new devices may take some time (up to 5 minutes).
Please wait until the message box “System Settings Change” (see: Figure 5-81) is displayed.
If the “System Settings Change” message box obstructs the view to the “DOS” box, move it away.
10.)Click onto the “DOS” box. The “DOS” window becomes active
click onto the

“DOS” window
Figure 5-79 Press “S” to set the name of the computer
11.)Press the S key on the keyboard to set the name of the computer. The “DOS” box proceeds:
Figure 5-80 Press the “C” key to continue the setup
12.)Press the C key on the keyboard to continue without activating the UIS.


13.)Confirm the “System Settings Change” message with YES.
Figure 5-81 confirm “System Settings Change” message
14.)After restart, press the CTRL and ESC key simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
15.)Open Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys, select “My Computer” and check the drive letters.
Figure 5-82 Check the drive letters
The drive letters SHOULD be:
C: System , D: User , E: Removable Disk (only visible if the optional MOD-drive is installed),
F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive) , R: Rescue
NOTE: If they are not assigned this way, reboot the system. If they are still not assigned this way after the
reboot, invoke Windows Start Menu (refer to: Section 5-17 on page 5-83).
Select: Programs -> GE Field Engineer and execute Remap Drive Letters.
16.)Close the Windows Explorer.

17.)If the “DOS” box is not still open, press the CTRL + ESC keys simultaneously to open the Windows
Start menu and then select “Activate UISApp”.


18.)When the “DOS” box is open, press the A key to activate the Ultrasound Application Software [UIS].
Figure 5-83 When the “DOS” box is active, press the “A” key to start UlSApp
BT-Version:
BT Version: At systems upgraded to BT05/BT08: Set Video Norm PAL (50Hz) or NTSC (60Hz) and confirm with OK.
Figure 5-84 Set Video Norm PAL or NTSC
19.)Skip the “BT warning” with CONTINUE.
Figure 5-85 Skip the BT warning with CONTINUE
NOTE: Options will be recovered at a later step using “Full Backup” process.


20.)Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box:
• choose “Repair”,
• enter “Name of Technician” (your name) and
• enter “Description”: Linux Repair and HDD Recovery
Linux Repair and HDD Recovery
Figure 5-86 System Status Messenger
21.)Confirm with OK
NOTE: If the following message appears, select REMOVE.
Figure 5-87 Remove Masterkey
22.)Customize the system as described in Section 5-18-8 on page 5-108.
5-18-6-3 Advanced
This item switches to the “Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu”.
This menu does not provide any useful functions when booting from HDD. However, it is not disabled.
NOTICE DO NOT use this menu when booting from HDD. For description of menu structure and appropriate
!! NOTICE:Th
functions, see: Installation Manual KTI105954 (BT04) or KTI105994 (BT05/BT08).
5-18-6-4 About
This item displays various version strings from the Linux system and the software on the System DVD.

5-18-7 Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu

This menu does not provide any useful functions when booting from HDD. However, it is not disabled.
NOTICE DO NOT use this menu when booting from HDD.

!! NOTICE:Th
3.) In the Linux “Main” menu (Figure 5-71) select [CD-ROM].
4.) In the “CD-ROM Functions Menu” (Figure 5-74) select [Advanced].
The “Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu” with following functions appear:
Exit
Install
NewDisk
Only available when
booting from DVD
Initialize
Figure 5-88 Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu
5-18-7-1 Exit
5-18-7-2 Install
This function overwrites the Rescue [R:] and the System [C:] partition on the hard disk with the
corresponding items on the System DVD. All data on the Linux- and on the C- partition will be lost.
NOTICE The “Install” function is actually not useful on Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) systems.
!! NOTICE:

5-18-7-3 NewDisk
NOTE: This function is ONLY available when booting from System DVD.
This function performs operations which result in complete data loss of all files on the entire hard
disk. It re-initializes the hard disk using partition images on the System DVD (setup to factory default).
WARNING
WARNING COMPLETE DATA LOSS ON THE ENTIRE HARD DISK.
!! WARNING:
Also data on D:\ [User] partition (e.g., Sonoview Images, Service Database,
Measurement results, Patient data and Reports) will be lost and can not be carried over
to the new hard disk.
NOTICE However, if system functionality allows it:

!! NOTICE:
• save the patient images and corresponding patient data
via Sonoview, as described in Section 4-5-6 on page 4-40
• gather full system configuration by saving a “Full Backup”
via System Setup - Backup, as described in Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35
Backed-up data can be restored after new hard disk setup.
The resulting hard disk contains factory default partition images (Linux, C:, D: and R:); independent of
previous hard disk contents.
• C:\ [System]: Windows 2000 with latest patches, Ultrasound Application Software [UIS], Application
Settings [Backup], Service Software [SSW] and Electronic User Manual [EUM], Printer Driver, etc.
• D:\ [User]: Initialized Databases for Measurements, Patient Archive Images, Data and Reports
• R:\ [Rescue]: Rescue image of C:\, Printer Driver
NOTICE Disconnect all external USB devices (e.g. USB printer, memory stick, etc.) - except the Disk Drive
!! NOTICE:
Module (GEM, see: Figure 5-69) before proceeding with the recovery.
NOTICE The BIOS “Boot Priority Order” Setting has to be changed before the New Hard Disk Setup.
!! NOTICE:
5-18-7-3-1 Preparations to setup a “new” Hard disk

1.) If it is necessary, and system functionality allows it, backup any patient data and images.
For details about backup procedure see: Service Manual or Basic User manual of the system.
2.) If still possible, collect vital system informations as described in Section 5-18-3 on page 5-86.
3.) Boot up (and change the BIOS settings) as described in Section 5-18-7-3-2 on page 5-100.
4.) Finally start New Hard Disk Setup as described in Section 5-18-7-3-3 on page 5-102.

5-18-7-3-2 BIOS “Boot Priority Order” Setting
NOTE: General operation and selection is done with the “Arrow” keys (right, left, up, down) and the
“Enter” key on the keyboard.
1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel to restart the system
(turn system off and then back on).
2.) During startup, press the DEL key immediately, to enter the BIOS.
3.) If a password is required, enter Rudi (case sensitive) and then press ENTER.
Advanced BIOS Features
Figure 5-89 BIOS - main menu
BT Version: In case that your system is upgraded to BT05/BT08, it might be possible that you have 2 System DVD´s:
• Disk 1 - DVD (SW5.x.x) for BT05/BT08 Hardware • Disk 2 - for BT03/BT04 Hardware (use this one)
5.) Select Advanced BIOS Features and press ENTER.

6.) In the “Advanced BIOS Features” menu, select First Boot Device.
7.) Write down the readout (e.g., HDD-0; see: left image of Figure 5-90) and then press ENTER.
change setting of “First Boot Device”
Figure 5-90 Advanced BIOS Feature

5-18-7-3-2 BIOS “Boot Priority Order” Setting (cont’d)
8.) Using the “Arrow” keys UP and DOWN on the alphanumeric keyboard, move the scrollbar (on
the right side of the displayed window) completely downwards.
9.) Select USB-CDROM and then confirm with ENTER.
10.)Press ESC to return to the “BIOS main menu”.
11.)Press the DELETE ARROW key (= F10) on the alphanumeric keyboard.
Figure 5-91 Save to CMOS and Exit
12.)Now press Y and then ENTER.
NOTE: Verify that the system boots from DVD after leaving the BIOS setup.

5-18-7-3-3 New Hard Disk Setup
NOTE: • If not already done, change BIOS “Boot Priority Order” as described in Section 5-18-7-3-2.
1.) Wait for automatic boot into the “Maintenance System”.

2.) In the displayed menus select [CD-ROM] -> [Advanced] and then press ENTER.
NOTE: If the message: “Recovery System (Linux) needs to be updated...” appears, confirm with Yes.
NOTICE If the following message concerning “Incorrect DVD/CD” appears, select NO, press ENTER and
!! NOTICE:
change the DVD. WARNING!!! Never select Yes; the system will become unusable.
Figure 5-92 incorrect DVD/CD
3.) In the “Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu” select [NewDisk].
NewDisk
Figure 5-93 Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu
4.) The following warning message will be displayed.
Figure 5-94 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!
5.) ONLY if you are absolutely sure, select YES and then confirm with ENTER.
WARNING
WARNING If you select YES, all data on the entire hard disk will be lost and can not be recovered!
!! WARNING:
This includes all stored images and patient data!

5-18-7-3-3 New Hard Disk Setup (cont’d)
6.) New Disk setup will take some time. Please wait......
Figure 5-95 New Disk setup
CAUTION In case of file copy error messages, remove DVD, check if dirty or scratched and try again.
!! CAUTION:
7.) After completing the setup, following message appears. Confirm with ENTER.
Figure 5-96 Confirm Harddisk Setup
8.) In the displayed menu select [Exit/Reboot] to restart the system.
Figure 5-97 Exit “Service Menu”
9.) Remove the System DVD from the DVD drive.

10.)During startup, press the DEL key immediately, to enter the BIOS Setup.

11.)Using the keyboard set “Boot priority order” back to “First Boot Device” => HDD-0
12.)Exit & Save BIOS Settings: Confirm message “Save to CMOS and EXIT?” with Y and ENTER.
!! NOTICE:
13.)Wait until “check disk” is finished and the “DOS” box (Figure 5-98) and the “System Settings
14.)Click onto the “DOS” box. The “DOS” window becomes active
click onto the

“DOS” window
15.)Press the S key on the keyboard to set the name of the computer. The “DOS” box proceeds:
16.)Press the C key on the keyboard to continue without activating the UIS.

18.)After restart, press CTRL and ESC simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
19.)Open Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys, select “My Computer” and check drive letters.
C: System , D: User , E: Removable Disk (only visible if the optional MOD-drive is installed),
F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive) , R: Rescue
20.)Close the Windows Explorer.

21.)If the “DOS” box is not still open, press the CTRL + ESC keys simultaneously to open the
Windows Start menu and then select “Activate UISApp”.

22.)When the “DOS” box is open, press the A key to activate the Ultrasound Application Software.
BT-Version:
23.)Skip the “BT warning” with CONTINUE.
Figure 5-104 Skip the BT warning with CONTINUE

24.)Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box:
• choose “Repair”,
• enter “Name of Technician” (your name) and
• enter “Description”: New Disk.
New Disk
25.)Confirm with OK
NOTE: If the following message appears, select REMOVE.
Figure 5-106 Remove Masterkey
5-18-7-4 Initialize
NOTICE It is recommended to use the “New Disk” option (Section 5-18-7-3 on page 5-99) instead.
!! NOTICE:
This function performs operations which result in complete data loss of all files on C:\ and D:\
partition. The image on the System DVD is used for restoring C:\ . The rescue image stored on R:\ is
replaced by the image from the DVD. Data on D:\ will be deleted (and re-initialized).
WARNING
WARNING ALL data on D:\ [User] partition (e.g., Sonoview images, measurement results, Patient
!! WARNING:
data and Reports) will be lost!

5-18-8 After Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk

NOTICE In case that “Full Backup” is NOT available, contact to OLC will be necessary to get “Permanent key”.
!! NOTICE:
Before calling OLC, please prepare the following data:
• SNO of Voluson® 730Expert
• Needed option
1.) If not currently done, restart the system and boot up completely.
4.) Press the ALT and F4 key simultaneously to close the “GEMS Service Home Page”.
5.) Connect a probe and start any user program.
6.) Touch UTILITIES -> SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the System Setup desktop.
7.) Select the BACKUP page to load the appropriate User Settings.
NOTE: Reloading the User Settings only (Application Settings) from “D:\User Settings\FactoryDefault” should
ONLY be performed, if:
• no “Full Backup” available (for the same system)
see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)"
NOTE: Reloading a “Full Backup” into the Voluson® 730Expert system is ONLY possible, if:
• “Full Backup” was saved (on the same system) before recovering the hard disk
see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)"
NOTE: If you have reloaded the “Full Backup”, step 8.) to step 12.) as well as step 15.) to step 17.)
in this section can be omitted.
8.) Select the OPTION page and enter the “Permanent Key” (from OLC) as described in Section 8-8
"Replacement or Activation of Options" on page 8-19.
9.) Select the GENERAL page and check and match the settings (e.g. Clinic Name) according to printout.
10.)Select the USER SETTINGS page and check and match the settings (Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh,
etc.) according to printout.
11.)Select the SERVICE page and match the Video Norm Standard (PAL/NTSC) and Video out (VHS2).
12.)Select the NETWORK page.
a.) click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button and check and match the DICOM
parameters according to the printout.
b.) click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button and adjust the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties according to the printout.
13.)Click the SAVE&EXIT button to store settings and exit the System Setup desktop screen.
14.)Reconnect the external devices, install all the printers and adjust the printer settings as described
in Section 3-7 "Printer Installation" on page 3-30. Afterwards check and match system settings in
the PERIPHERALS page (assignment of Remote PRINT keys, etc.).
15.)Touch UTILITIES -> MEASURE SETUP to invoke the Measure Setup desktop.
16.)Check and match settings of the MEASURE & CALC, the APPLICATION PARAMETERS and the
GLOBAL PARAMETERS page.
17.)Click the CLOSE button to store settings and exit the Measure Setup desktop screen.
NOTICE Save any presets, configurations and application settings via the “Full Backup” function to HDD and/or
!! NOTICE:
DVD or MO disk, to have it available for next time.
Operation see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" .

5-18-9 Memory Check in LINUX

1.) After “boot” message appears on screen, press SHIFT + M and then ENTER on the keyboard.
NOTICE After 3 sec. without pressing any key, the system will boot-up in windows.
!! NOTICE:
If you missed step 1, retry again with CTRL + ALT + DEL.
Memory Test will start automatically and will take about 2 hours.
If there are errors they will be listed.
elapsed test time
list of errors
Figure 5-107 Memory check in LINUX
NOTICE After one cycle (~ 2 hours) the memory check starts again. To interrupt the test, press the ESC key.
!! NOTICE:
If you don’t interrupt the memory test by pressing the ESC key, it will perform never ending cycles of
memory checks.


Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out
of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified
personnel.
Table 6-1 Chapter 6 Contents

6-1 Overview 6-1
6-2 Regulatory 6-1
6-3 Monitor Adjustment 6-2
6-4 Control Console, Transport Lock 6-5
6-5 Trackball Adjustment 6-6
6-6 Touch Panel Calibration 6-7
6-7 Modification of Keyboard Layout 6-9
6-8 Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates 6-11
6-9 4D Shift Control 6-12
6-10 Disable Windows Messenger Service 6-13
6-11 Hide Windows Taskbar 6-15
6-12 Fax Driver Removal 6-17
Section 6-2
Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present
and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-1

Section 6-3
Monitor Adjustment
The Monitor can be tilted or rotated.
• Tilt angle: up/down 11°

• Rotation angle: right/left 90°
The digital control panel is located at the front of the color monitor. If you are not satisfied with the factory
settings, use these controls to program those you prefer in each resolution. Then, these adjusted
settings are kept in memory even if you change the resolution or turn off the monitor.
Decrease Increase
(Left) Menu (Right)
Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment buttons
• Menu key:
This button will enable the On Screen Display (OSD-instructions). This button is also used to select
the function in the Main Menu or to save the settings in the Sub Menu. (Push for approx. 4 sec.)
• Left (Decrease):
in OSD menu. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to decrease the level of
contrast and brightness of the display screen.
• Right (Increase):
in OSD menu. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to increase the level of contrast
and brightness of the display screen.
6-3-1 Monitor Calibration

NOTE: Please warm up the monitor for 5-10 minutes before starting calibration.
This procedure consists of 7 parts:
1.) Degauss
2.) Color Temp - Calibration
3.) Contrast and Brightness
4.) Geometry
5.) Convergence
6.) Color temperature
7.) B-Mode Quality
6-2 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustment

6-3-1-1 Degauss
Degaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the
monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct the
problem.
NOTICE The monitor should automatically degauss itself each time power is applied if you wait at least 10
!! NOTICE:
seconds before you turn power back ON.
1.) Press and hold the MENU (middle) key (see: Figure 6-1) on the monitor controls for approximately
4 seconds till the OSD menu appears on the screen.
2.) Press the RIGHT button 2 times to the DEGAUSS and then press the MENU key again to select it.
3.) Wait till DEGAUSS is completed.
6-3-1-2 Color Temp - Calibration

1.) On the Touch Panel, touch UTILITIES and then SYSTEM SETUP.
2.) Select the SERVICE page, enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button.
3.) Select the MONITOR TEST button in the “Service Tools” menu.
4.) Confirm the “Monitor Test” message with YES.
The Monitor Test main menu appears on the screen.
raster lines
color bars
color bars
gray scale
Color calibration icon
EXIT
Figure 6-2 Monitor Test - Main menu
5.) Select the “Color calibration” icon and press the right/left trackball key once (monitor is white).
6.) Press and hold the MENU (middle) key on the monitor controls for approximately 4 seconds till the
OSD menu appears on the screen.
7.) Press the RIGHT button 3 times to the COLOR TEMP and then press the MENU key to select it.
8.) Press the RIGHT button until CALIBRATION is highlighted and then press the MENU key again.
NOTE: The calibration cycle will immediately start for Red, Green and Blue. Wait till it´s completion message
“It has completed...” appears. During the Calibration process do not touch any key.
9.) To return to the Main menu, press the upper trackball key 2 times.
NOTE: Contrast and Brightness (see: Section 6-3-1-3) has to be adjusted after color calibration.

6-3-1-3 Contrast and Brightness

Adjusting the monitor´s contrast and brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image
quality. If these controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range and even Acoustic Output
may have to be changed more often than necessary to compensate.
The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest level of black should just disappear into
the background and the highest white should be bright, but not saturated.
NOTE: Brightness and Contrast should be adjusted at examination room light conditions.
Typically values for Contrast and Brightness are 70 to 75, depending on the operator!
1.) Press the MENU (middle) key (see: Figure 6-1) on the monitor controls
(= toggle button for contrast and brightness).
2.) Adjust the CONTRAST by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button to decrease/increase the value.
3.) Press the MENU key again to toggle to brightness.
4.) Adjust the BRIGHTNESS by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button to decrease/increase the value.
6-3-1-4 Geometry
Check the raster lines of the test pattern by referring to Figure 6-2.
Expected results:
1.) Squares are not distorted.

2.) Raster lines are straight.
3.) No keystone and pincushion distortion.
4.) Horizontal and vertical width is correct.
6-3-1-5 Convergence
Check the color of the raster lines (see: Figure 6-2).
Expected result:
Raster lines have only one color.
6-3-1-6 Color temperature

Check the grey scale and the color bars of the test pattern (see: Figure 6-2).
Expected results:
1.) “White“ is displayed without a tint (discolor).

2.) Colors are displayed correctly.
3.) To exit the Monitor Test program, touch EXIT.
6-3-1-7 B-Mode Quality

Connect an abdominal probe (AB or RAB), press the PROBE key, select the “Abdomen“ application
and start the “Default“ program. Record a B-Image of the liver.
If there is no abdominal probe, record a B-Image of the Thyroid by using a small parts probe
(SP6-12 or SP4-10) and the corresponding program.
Expected result:
Regular and homogenous B-Image without tint.
6-4 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustment

Section 6-4
Control Console, Transport Lock
6-4-1 Control Console
The control console can be rotated 30° to the right.
When rotating the control console grasp it only the front grip.
locking lever
the control console
Figure 6-3 Locking Lever under Control Console
1.) Push the lever under the control console forward.

2.) Rotate the console to wanted position.
6-4-2 Transport Lock

There is a locking lever for locking and unlocking the control console, mounted at the front below the
control console. When preparing the system for transport, the lock has to be engaged in order to secure
the console against uncontrolled rotation. The lock catches in when the console is rotated to its center
0° position.
WARNING
WARNING Do not put your hand between the control console and the Main unit when moving the
!! WARNING:Do no
console to the 0 position: Danger of injuries!

Section 6-5
Trackball Adjustment
Adjustment of the mechanical movement may be necessary to ensure smooth running of the trackball.
1.) Remove the outer fixing ring by turning it counterclockwise.
rotate clockwise to rotate counterclockwise

mount the fixing ring to remove the fixing ring
Figure 6-4 Trackball with fixing ring
2.) Adjust the trackball for smooth running by rotating the black securing ring.
• CCW: smooth run
• CW: tighten run
tighten run smooth run
Securing ring
Figure 6-5 Trackball - Securing Ring
NOTICE Avoid tightening of thread caused by improper mounting of securing ring!

!! NOTICE:
3.) Mount the outer fixing ring by turning it clockwise. see Figure 6-4.
6-6 Section 6-5 - Trackball Adjustment

Section 6-6
Touch Panel Calibration
If the Touch Panel keys doesn’t respond exactly, following steps has to be performed.
There are 2 possibilities to calibrate the Touch Panel:
1. If Touch Panel is responding:

4.) Touch UTILITIES, SYSTEM SETUP on the touchscreen and select the SERVICE page.
4D Shift
Control
Touch Panel
calibration
Keyboard
Layout
Save&Exit
Figure 6-6 Service Page
5.) Click the START PROGRAM button. The following screen appears.
Figure 6-7 TP calibration
NOTE: Use ballpoint pen to touch the calibration marks.

After calibration procedure is started, you MUST complete it!

6.) Click the START button.

7.) Now you have to start with the calibration; 4 crosses will be shown on the touch screen.
8.) Set the ballpoint pen to cross-positions (4 x).
9.) After completion you have to click OK; see Figure below
Figure 6-8 TP calibration1
NOTE: If you made a wrong calibration you can re-calibrate with the following step:
2. If Touch Panel does not respond:

1.) Press CTRL + ALT + T on the keyboard. The following screen appears.
Figure 6-9 TP calibration
NOTE: Use ballpoint pen to touch the calibration marks. After calibration procedure is started, you MUST
complete it!
2.) Press the START button.

3.) Now you have to start with the calibration; 4 crosses will be shown on the touchscreen.
4.) After completion you have to press OK. see Figure below
Figure 6-10 TP calibration1
6-8 Section 6-6 - Touch Panel Calibration

Section 6-7
Modification of Keyboard Layout
NOTE: Configuring the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also.
see: Section 8-56 "Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)" on page 8-156.
6-7-1 Setup the Voluson® 730Expert Keyboard Language Layout

Page - Netscape” to “Kretz UISApp” (= Ultrasound Application); see: Figure 5-52 on page 5-68).
4.) Touch UTILITIES, SYSTEM SETUP on the touchscreen and select the SERVICE page.
5.) Click the KEYBOARD LAYOUT button on the service window; see Figure 6-6 on page 6-7.
6.) In the INPUT LOCALES tab select the default input language.
default input language
[Add] button
[Remove] button [Set as Default] button

to remove unused
language(s)
Figure 6-11 default input language
NOTE: If the desired language is not listed, click the ADD button, choose the desired input language from the
drop down menu, as shown in Figure 6-12 on page 6-10, and then confirm with OK.

6-7-1 Setup the Voluson® 730Expert Keyboard Language Layout (cont’d)
default input language

(drop down menu)
Figure 6-12 Add Input Locale
7.) Click the SET AS DEFAULT button.

8.) Click on APPLY and then close the window with OK.
9.) Close the Service page with the SAVE&EXIT button and restart the system.
10.)Reenter “Keyboard Layout” by repeating step 1.) to step 6.). This time remove unused language(s).
11.)Test the Keyboard function:
- Press the ABC key on the control panel.
- Press some keys on the keyboard and verify the entered text.
6-10 Section 6-7 - Modification of Keyboard Layout

Section 6-8
Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates
Issue: The automatic Daylight Saving Time feature in Microsoft Windows products may no longer run on the
correct date, causing the system’s time to be incorrect.
Cause: Some countries have changed their start and end dates for Daylight Saving Time (DST).
Access Microsoft website http://support.microsoft.com/kb/928388 to determine if the system’s location
site is affected.
Solution: If the Voluson® 730Expert relies on the automatic DST feature in Microsoft Windows, turn off the
feature and then set the correct system time manually at the start of DST and again at the conclusion
of DST.
Procedure:

3.) Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup.
4.) Click the DATE/TIME button.
5.) In the displayed “Date/Time Properties” window select the TIME ZONE tab.
6.) Uncheck “Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes” check box and then click APPLY
(see: left image of Figure 6-13 below).
Figure 6-13 Uncheck check box / adjust time
7.) Select the DATE / TIME tab in the “Date/Time Properties” window.
8.) Set the proper time for the system’s location and then click OK (right image of Figure 6-13 above).
9.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button to save your changes and exit the System Setup page.
The System is shutting down automatically and restarts again.

Section 6-9
4D Shift Control
This tool is used to adjust the Real Time 4D image to avoid “jumping” volume information caused by
mech. tolerances.
1.) Select the “4D Shift Control” field on the service window, and “hook” it; see Figure 6-6 on page 6-7.
2.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button.
3.) Start a Real Time 4D probe and press the 3D/4D digipot on the control panel.
4.) Touch the 3D/4D MODE key and select the 4D REAL TIME key on the Touch Panel.
5.) To start the 4D acquisition, press the FREEZE key on the control panel.
6.) During Real Time 4D touch the SUB MENUS key on the Touch Panel.
7.) SHIFT appears in the right lower corner.
Shift key
Figure 6-14 3D/4D Sub Menu
8.) Contact the 4D-probe to a phantom and observe the center of the volume.
9.) Change SHIFT with the flip switch below the Touch Panel (during wobbling 4D Image).
Try to get stable volume.
10.)Press the FREEZE key.
11.)After this procedure touch UTILITIES and SYSTEM SETUP to enter the SERVICE page again.
12.)Deselect the “4D Shift Control” check mark.
13.)Exit with SAVE&EXIT.
6-12 Section 6-9 - 4D Shift Control

Section 6-10
Disable Windows Messenger Service
While the pop-up message window indicates MESSENGER SERVICE: ...., it can be closed and
scanning resumed without error.
Engineering has purposed the following procedure to disable the Windows Messenger Service.
1.) Turn power on and let the system start up completely.

4.) Press CTRL and ESC simultaneously to make the Windows Start menu visible.
5.) Open "Run" using the "Arrow" keys on the keyboard. Enter: services.msc and then click OK.
Figure 6-15 Open "Run" Dialog
6.) Scroll down to "Messenger" and double click with the left trackball key.
Figure 6-16 Services

Section 6-10 Disable Windows Messenger Service (cont’d)

7.) For "Startup type" select DISABLED, stop Messenger Service by selecting STOP and then
select OK to save your changes.
select "Startup type" Disabled
Stop Messenger Service
confirm changes with OK
Figure 6-17 Messenger Properties
8.) Shut down the system by pressing the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel.
9.) Repeat step 1 through 5 to display the "Services" - Window again.
10.)Scroll down to "Messenger" and verify that:
- Status column is blank
- Startup type is "Disabled"
Figure 6-18 Messenger stopped and disabled
11.)Restart the system (turn OFF and ON the system using the Standby switch).
6-14 Section 6-10 - Disable Windows Messenger Service

Section 6-11
Hide Windows Taskbar
When calling up the EUM (Electronic User Manual) "Help" - function by pressing the F1 key on the
keyboard, the Windows taskbar might appear when moving the arrow to the bottom of the screen.
The customer can reach the desktop without entering the password.
Figure 6-19 Taskbar visible on the bottom of the screen
2.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password (password changes every six month) and click
ENABLE.
3.) Press CTRL and ESC simultaneously to make the Windows Start menu visible.
4.) Click on the Windows START button.
5.) Select "Settings" -> "Taskbar & Start Menu..." using the "Arrow" keys on the keyboard.
Taskbar & Start Menu...
Figure 6-20 Windows Start menu

Section 6-11 Hide Windows Taskbar (cont’d)

6.) On the General page check the function "Auto hide"; see: Figure 6-21.
NOTE: This function must not be selected (no check mark visible) !!!
Figure 6-21 Taskbar and Start Menu Properties
7.) Deselect the "Auto hide" function if necessary.

8.) Set all the other check marks according to Figure 6-21 and confirm with APPLY and OK.
9.) Reboot the system (turn OFF and ON the system).
10.)After the restart call-up the "Help" function with the F1 key on the keyboard and move the cursor
down to the bottom of the screen. Now the taskbar should not appear anymore.
6-16 Section 6-11 - Hide Windows Taskbar

Section 6-12
Fax Driver Removal
On some Voluson® 730Expert systems, intermittently, directly after boot up, it is not possible to enter
Patient data. The reason for this problem is that the Windows operating system is focussed to a hidden
"fax monitoring" window in the background.
Short term To get system back to normal operation (to get the focus back to the PID entry screen) it is necessary
solution: to press the left trackball key once.
Long term Remove the (unused) fax driver as described in Section 6-12-1 "Fax driver removal procedure" .
solution: In factory serial production, the fax driver removal will be done from SNo.: A09616 onwards
6-12-1 Fax driver removal procedure

1.) Connect the USB "standard GE" service dongle to the USB connector(s) on the rear of the system.
2.) Enter the "Standard GE Revolving" password (changes every six month), click ENABLE and then
remove the dongle.
3.) Press CTRL + ESC simultaneously to make the Windows start menu accessible.
4.) Using the "Arrow" keys on the alphanumeric keyboard, select [Settings] -> [Printers].
Figure 6-22 step 4.) and step 5.)
5.) Move the cursor to the [Fax] entry, press the upper trackball key and select [Delete] to remove it.

6-12-1 Fax driver removal procedure (cont’d)

The "Fax" entry is no longer in the list.
Figure 6-23 "Fax" entry deleted
6.) Open the Windows start menu ( CTRL + ESC ) again and select [Settings] -> [Control Panel].
7.) Double-click the [Fax] icon.
Status
Monitor
[Fax]
icon
deselect all
check boxes
OK
Figure 6-24 deselect all check boxes in Status Monitor
8.) Click on the STATUS MONITOR tab (this may take some time to show).
9.) Deselect all check boxes.
10.)Click on OK.
11.)Close all open Windows.
12.)Reboot the system.
6-18 Section 6-12 - Fax Driver Removal

Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
Overview
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.
7-1-2 Overview
There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs)
for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis.
There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.

7-1 Overview 7-1
7-2 Collect Vital System Information 7-2
7-3 Check Points Voltages 7-4
7-4 Screen Captures and Logs 7-5
7-5 Virtual Console Observation 7-10
7-6 Common Diagnostics 7-13
7-7 How to use the Auto Tester program 7-20
7-8 How to repair Databases (*.mdb) 7-23
7-9 How to delete the Service Database 7-25
7-10 Hardware Tests 7-26
7-11 Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan 7-39
7-12 User Interface Troubleshooting 7-43
7-13 Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions 7-45
7-14 Error Messages 7-73
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

Section 7-2
Collect Vital System Information
The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
Touch UTILITIES, then SYSTEM SETUP and select the SYSTEM INFO page.
• System Type
• System Serial number (also visible on label on the back of the system)
• Application Software version
• Backup Version (File Name)
• additional information (e.g., Hardware ID, SLOT_CPU version, etc.)
System Type
Serial number
Application Software
Hardware ID
Backup File Name
Date of Factory Settings
Serviceplatform
information
Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software/hardware.
Operating System
(e.g., Service Pack 4)
SLOT_CPU
(e.g., KONTRON)
Figure 7-1 System Setup - System Info page
7-2 Section 7-2 - Collect Vital System Information

7-2-1 Needed Data - in case of System crash or Errors

NOTICE In case of a system crash, or errors that are probably software bugs, provide as much detail information
!! NOTICE:
as possible before contacting the OLC (On-Line Center).
1.) Contact person (+ telephone number and/or e-mail address)

2.) Vital system data (see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-2)
- System Type
- System Serial number (also visible on label on the back of the system)
- Application Software version
- Backup Version (File Name)
- additional information (e.g., Hardware ID, SLOT_CPU version, etc.)
3.) Exact description of fault or error message (dump-file, see: Figure 7-6 on page 7-9)
- Address
- Module + (Address)
- Application Software version
- Memory Dump number (complete #)
4.) Press the ALT + D key on the alphanumeric keyboard to save/export
- a screenshot of the point in time when ALT + D was pressed,
- the current System state (as “Full Backup”) on demand, and
- logs and dump-files already stored on the D:\export folder
on the D:\export folder or on DVD/CD. (Operation see: Section 7-4-2-1 on page 7-6)
5.) If the bug or error is difficult to reproduce, record an Auto Tester file (ending at fault occurrence).
(Operation see: Section 7-7 "How to use the Auto Tester program" on page 7-20)

Section 7-3
Check Points Voltages
7-3-1 How to check power
Open the locking, flap the service lid on the

back of theVoluson® 730Expert upwards, and
check the status of the Diagnostic LED´s.
(+15V) LED 1 LED 6 (+3.3V)

(-15V) LED 2 LED 5 (+5V)
(Fan) LED 3 LED 4 (+12V)
In case of problems, check the above voltages

with a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) to Ground.
LED 1, 2 and 5 LED 4

ECG connector AUX Supply (= GEM Power connector) Additionally check 59V/DC
on Backpanel of GEF-Box on Backpanel of GEF-Box (Power connection-cable
from CPN to GEF)
Pin 4
1 8 (+5V)
15 9
Pin 1
(+12V)
Location of fuses on CPE;
see: Section 5-11-3-1 on page 5-61
Pin 15 Pin 13 Pin 11 DVM
(+5V) (+15V) (-15V)
LED 6 LED orange (at CPN80-81 only)

Footswitch connector on Power Supply Module (CPN) visual check for 59V:
(Pin 2 and 3 = +3.3V ; Pin 1 = GND) orange LED (at CPN80-81 power supply) is lightening
CPN6
CPN80-81 1
1
3 2 3 2
Figure 7-2 Diagnostic LED´s and corresponding voltage check points
7-4 Section 7-3 - Check Points Voltages

Section 7-4
Screen Captures and Logs
There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the
screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center.
This is accomplished by saving the image(s):
A.) to SonoView and export them (as jpg, bmp or tiff ) to DVD/CD+(R)W or MO-disk
B.) as jpg and bmp to D:\export by pressing the ALT + P key on the alphanumeric keyboard
C.) creates one snapshot (Alt-D.bmp) + “Full Backup” of the System state (fullbackup -> fb1) saved on
D:\export by pressing the ALT + D key on the alpha-numeric keyboard.
Figure 7-3 D:\export
NOTE: (For further details about ALT + D , see: Section 7-4-2 "Export Log’s and System Data" on page 7-5.)
7-4-1 Capturing a screen

The following is the generic process to capture any screen from the scanner.
1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.

2.) Press the SAVE key and save the image to Sonoview.
3.) Select the stored image(s) in Sonoview (Exam List) and export the image(s) to DVD/CD+(R)W or
or optional MO-Disk (jpg, bmp or tiff).
7-4-2 Export Log’s and System Data

There are two possibilities to export system data (and log´s):
1.) by pressing the ALT + D key to save a snapshot and “Full Backup” of the System state;
2.) via the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA button in the System Setup SERVICE page;

7-4-2-1 Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key)
ALT + D uses “Full Backup” to gather data from the system. In addition it creates one screenshot
(Alt-D.bmp) of the point in time when ALT + D was pressed.
The main use is when R&D or OLC need detailed information about the system (e.g., when
experiencing strange behaviour or when the problem should be investigated by R&D).
It is not intended to replace or enhance the existing Full Backup functionality.
Data can be stored on the hard disk (D:\export\fullbackup\fb1), or you can export them to DVD/CD
(including the D:\export folder, which contains logs and dump-files; for details see: Section 7-4-2-2-1).
NOTE: Successive ALT + D keystrokes overwrite existing snapshots at destination HDD.
1.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard. simultaneously.
Figure 7-4 select destination for “System state” backup
2.) Select the destination of the “System state” backup among HDD or DVD/CD.
3.) Select the NEXT button to start the backup process.
After saving the data, the Voluson® 730Expert reboots and the application starts again.
Table 7-2 List of Data covered by “Full Backup” (fb1) via ALT + D
Name and Contents Location
Patient, study, measure (for report), image archive D:\images\dataManagerData\tables\V730.mdb
Images itself D:\images\Sonoview\Y2xx\Dxx\Exn\Ixxx
User settings D:\UserSettings\...
Programs Programs.mdb
UserProbe3D_4D UserProg3D_4D.mdb
System settings SystemSettings.mdb
Application settings ApplicationSettings.mdb
DICOM settings D:\images\Sonoview\DICOM\Device.mdb
7-6 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures and Logs

Table 7-2 List of Data covered by “Full Backup” (fb1) via ALT + D
Name and Contents Location
Measure Setup settings D:\measure\*.*
Windows settings Registry and Netsh
IP
DNS
Gateway
Netmask
Computer Name
Service Information D:\Service\v730_srv.mdb
User gray curve D:\UserSettings\UserGrayPoints.txt
Options SYSTEM\Kretz\PermanentKey / SYSTEM\Kretz\DemoKey
V730 settings Registry
1 SYSTEM\Kretz\BackupFilename
2 SYSTEM\Kretz\Language
3 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\*
4 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\AETitle
5 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\RetryInterval
6 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\RetryCount
7 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\StationName
8 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\Email
9 SOFTWARE\Kretz\C550\OCP\OCPServer\1.0\baud
12 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\DateFormat
13 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\PidDicomOptions
14 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\TimeFormat
15 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapPassword
16 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapReconnect
17 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapRemoteName
18 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapUserName
10 SYSTEM\Kretz\OCPTouchPanel\Scheme\*
11 SYSTEM\Kretz\OCPTouchPanel\Scheme\Scheme
Serviceplatform uses iipadmin backup

7-4-2-2 Export Log´s and System Data (via Service Page)

1.) Touch UTILITIES, then SYSTEM SETUP.
5.) Select the SERVICE page on the screen.
6.) Click the SERVICE TOOLS button on the Service window to get access to the “Service Tools” page.
Export System Data
7.) Click on the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA... button, to export dump-files (see: Section 7-4-2-2-1), text
files, the Event Log File, the full Service Database and information about probes, boards, software,
options and service actions to DVD/CD Drive (or the optional MO drive).
7-8 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures and Logs

7-4-2-2-1 Dump-file
Every time an error message like Figure 7-6 is produced, a dump-file and a text file containing the
error dump and the error message are created in D:\export. Up to 20 dump files are stored there.
important
dump-file
informations
Figure 7-6 system has encountered a problem
NOTE: To deposit this screen as an image file on D:\export, press ALT + P.

For more details see: Section 7-4 "Screen Captures and Logs" on page 7-5.
After clicking on OK the system reboots automatically.

Section 7-5
Virtual Console Observation
7-5-1 General
This tool offers the possibility to view the entire customer´s desktop and operation system.
Using the tool a remote service technician or the OnLine Center can access and modify all PC settings
and programs on the customer´s PC.
The customer has to enable this “Disruptive Mode” feature by confirming YES, before a GE Service FE
can access the customer´s PC remotely.
Figure 7-7 Disruptive Mode Notification
NOTE: Only GE Service personal has access to this feature. A password is required.
All actions and changes should be documented.
Figure 7-8 Disruptive Mode Utility - Disabled
7-10 Section 7-5 - Virtual Console Observation

Section 7-5 Virtual Console Observation (cont’d)

1.) The customer has to enable this “Disruptive Mode” feature by confirming YES.
NOTE: If the customer has not enabled “Disruptive Mode”, a warning message is displayed.
Figure 7-9 Virtual Console Observation “ Warning”
2.) After “Disruptive Mode” is enabled by the customer, “Virtual Console Observation” can be activated
by selecting the VCO Tool under the Scanner Utilities folder and then click on the START button.
Figure 7-10 Virtual Console Observation “Activation”
3.) If “Virtual Console Observation” has been activated successfully, the following display is shown to
the customer and the operator:
Figure 7-11 Virtual Console Observation “Stop”
4.) To terminate “Virtual Console Observation” click on the STOP button.

7-5-2 Use of “Virtual Console Observation”

After “Virtual Console Observation” is established (see prior section), the PC which should be observed,
can be accessed through any browser, i.e. “Netscape Navigator” or “MS Internet Explorer”.
You have to use an open connection or to connect to the customer´s PC by entering his TCP/IP address
followed by the port number 5800.
For Example:
If the customer has the IP address 1.2.3.4 enter the following string:
http://1.2.3.4:5800/
If the location has been found in the net, the following dialog appears:
Enter the password: IlinQ01 (Capitol "I" [eye] lowercase "l" [ell] i - n - Q - 0 - 1)
Figure 7-12 VNC Authentication
Within the browser the Service technician can operate on the customer´s PC using the mouse and the
keyboard.
NOTE: To reduce the transmission time the colors are reduced.
Figure 7-13 Virtual Console Observation is running
7-12 Section 7-5 - Virtual Console Observation

Section 7-6
Common Diagnostics
As described in Chapter 5: Section 5-15 "Service Home Page" on page 5-70, the service platform uses
a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.
A service dongle (part number 066E0703) is required to access areas proprietary to GE.
“Common Diagnostics” is the main category under the “GEMS Service Home Page” heading of
Diagnostics.
Figure 7-14 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their
respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.
Figure 7-14 GEMS Ultrasound Service Home Page - Common Diagnostics
7-6-1 Utilities
Provides two selections:
7-6-1-1 Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite,
this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation.
7-6-1-2 System Shutdown

Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System.
Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.
After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel
the request.

7-6-2 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests)
7-6-2-1 CPU Tests

• CPU Test (All) - This diagnostic performs a battery of tests on your CPU to ensure it is working
properly. The following tests are a complete list of the tests performed on the PC's CPU.
• CPU: Registers - The CPU registers are tested using the default test patterns defined above. On
32 bit CPUs, the extended registers are also checked.
If errors are detected, the failed registers are listed.
• CPU: Arithimetics - Tests the proper function of arithmetic commands ADC, ADD, DEC, DIV, IDIV,
IMUL, INC, MUL, SBB and SUB with 16 and 32-bit operands.
If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed.
• CPU: String Operations - Tests the proper operation of string commands LODS, MOVS, SCAS
and STOS with 8, 16 and 32-bit operands.
If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed.
• CPU: Logical Operations - Tests the proper operation of logical operations AND, NOT, OR and
XOR with 16 and 32-bit operands.
If errors are detected, the failed operands are listed.
• CPU: Math Registers - Tests coprocessor register stack, pointers and commands FLDLZ, FLDPI,
FLDLN2, FLDLG2, FLDL2T, FLDL2E and FLD1.
If errors are detected, the failed steps and commands are listed.
• CPU: Math Commands - Tests coprocessor commands FBLD/FBSTP, FLD/FST, FXCH, FCOM,
FICOM, FTST, FXAM and FUCOM.
If errors are detected, the failed instructions are listed.
• CPU: Math Arithimetics -
• CPU: Transcendental - Tests coprocessor transcendental commands F2XM1, FPATAN, FPTAN,
FYL2X, FYL2XP1, FCOS, FSIN and FSINCOS.
If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed.
• CPU: MMX Arithmetic - Tests MMX commands PADD, PSUB, PMUL and PMADD.
• CPU: MMX Logical - Tests MMX commands PAND, PANDN, POR and PXOR.
• CPU: MMX Shift - Tests MMX commands PSLL and PSRL.
• CPU: MMX Data Transfer - Tests MMX commands MOVD and MOVQ.
• CPU: MMX Misc. - Tests MMX commands PCMPEQ, PCMPGT, PACKSS, PACKUS, PUNPCK
and PUNPCK.
7-14 Section 7-6 - Common Diagnostics

7-6-2-2 Hard Drive Tests

• Hard Drive Test (All) - The Hard Drive test examines your hard disk drive using a series of tests
to ensure that your drive can perform its functions.
The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the hard disk controller and the drive
mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked.
NOTE: The hard drive test can take over ten minutes.
• Hard Drive: Linear Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one
track at a time.
• Hard Drive: Random Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times.
• Hard Drive: Funnel Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved in a funnel fashion, i.e., from the first
track on the drive to the last, then to the second track, then to the second to last track, then to the
third track, and so on.
• Hard Drive: Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the hard disk drive.
7-6-2-2-1 S.M.A.R.T. HDD Status - Reporting tool

S.M.A.R.T. (Self Monitoring And Reporting Tech) is a piece of software, which is present on most
modern hard disks that continuously gathers data about the hard disk´s performance and
operations, such as hour meter, temperature, read/write failures, etc.
The manufacturer of the harddisk limits these measurements to certain thresholds. When these
thresholds are met (e.g., due to old age or excessively high temperatures), the S.M.A.R.T. software
concludes that the harddisk is very likely to fail within the next 24 hours.
On Voluson® 730Expert, we retrieve S.M.A.R.T. data and present a warning if failure is indicated.
• Status: - Retreives S.M.A.R.T. data from the hard disk.

The top of the page shows the most important things, the rest is for reference / R&D.
Figure 7-15 S.M.A.R.T. - HDD Status
• Start Long Selftest: - wait 37 minutes for test to complete

Result and status can be checked by selecting Status.
• Start Short Selftest: - wait 2 minutes for test to complete
Result and status can be checked by selecting Status.
• Stop Selftest: - aborts any running self test
7-6-2-3 Memory Tests

• Memory Test (All) - Eighteen test patterns are used to test memory locations. If errors are
detected, the address of the block the error was detected in is shown. During testing, these
diagnostics will also look out for parity errors and other exceptions. These will be added to the Test
Log as errors if encountered.
• Memory: Pattern Test - PC-Doctor uses several test patterns to test as much memory as possible.
• Memory: Parity Test - This test checks for parity errors on the memory bus during intensive string
transfer operations. If an error is detected, the address of the failed block is displayed.
7-6-2-4 CD/DVD Drive Test

• DVD/CD-ROM Test (All) - The CD-ROM/DVD test examines the CD-ROM/DVD drive to make sure
it is working properly. You may use either a data CD-ROM disk or a DVD disk for these tests. You
cannot use an audio CD, such as a regular commercial music CD, with this test.
NOTE: The PC is sometimes slow in recognizing a newly inserted CD-ROM/DVD disk.

It is best to wait a few seconds after inserting a disk into the drive before you run any tests.
There are two types of CD-ROM/DVD tests:
1.) Seek Tests: Ensures the drive can access all locations on a disk, and
2.) Read Tests: Ensures the drive can read all the data.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk
in a linear fashion, starting from the first to the last.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Random Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD
disk randomly.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Funnel Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk
in a funnel fashion, starting from the first then moving to the last, then, at the next pass starting from
the second location then moving to the next to the last, and so on
• DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD in a linear fashion, starting
from the start to the end.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Random Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD randomly.
7-6-2-5 Video Test

• Video Test (All) - This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the
video memory with 18 patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see
these tests being performed on your monitor.
You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key.
The following tests are performed on your monitor:
• Video: Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one
pattern at a time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color.
• Video: Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These
tests will appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various
sizes and colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed.
• Video: Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video
device driver and video controller.

7-6-2-6 USB Test

• USB Test (All)
• USB Configuration Test
• USB Devices Test
7-6-2-7 PCI Board Configuration Test

A bus is a set of circuits, wires or connectors which connect the various components of your system.
A PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus is a fast standard bus which is common in Pentium
systems. Various tests are run on the PCI bus in order to ensure it is working up to speed.
The motherboard is scanned to verify the configuration space and to make sure the diagnostics can
communicate with the board.
7-6-2-8 SCSI Device Test

no SCSI Hardware used on Voluson® 730Expert
7-6-2-9 AGP Video Card Test
7-6-2-10 Network Test

7-6-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests)
7-6-3-1 Keyboard Test

1.) Double-click Keyboard Test from the PC Diagnostics interactive tests menu.
2.) Click the EXECUTE button.
A keyboard layout is displayed on which you can see the keys of your keyboard.
Figure 7-16 PCDR - Keyboard Test
3.) Press each key on your keyboard once and make sure that the corresponding keys on-screen are
removed from view. If a key on-screen is not removed, that key may be damaged and you may have
to have your keyboard repaired or replaced.
4.) To reset the keyboard, click the RESET KEYS button; to exit the test, click CLOSE.
7-6-3-2 Audio Test

1.) Double-click Audio Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu.
Figure 7-17 PCDR - Audio Test
2.) To test the WAV sound reproduction click LEFT CHANNEL, RIGHT CHANNEL, or BOTH
CHANNELS to test your external speakers. You should hear a guitar chord.
3.) To test MIDI sound reproduction click the BOTH CHANNELS button under MIDI.
You should hear a few seconds of recorded music (external speakers only).
4.) Click on the BEEP button. You should hear a low "beep" from your PC.
If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the MORE INFO button in the Audio Test dialog box for
information about possible causes and solutions.

7-6-3-3 Monitor Test

Double-click Monitor Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu.
Figure 7-18 PCDR - Monitor Test
The monitor test dialog box presents you with three options:
• Combination Test - Checks the monitor for alignment, color depth, and monitor resolution.
It will put four cross-hairs in each corner, RGB (Red Green Blue) spectrum arrays and horizontal
and vertical alignment bars on the screen.
NOTE: In most cases, you will choose the Combination Test.
• Solid Color Test - The solid color test is for laptops and LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel display.
This test displays solid color screens to allow you to make sure all color pixels are operating
correctly.
• VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) Test Patterns - The VESA test patterns
checks luminance, geometry, and focus.
The VESA tests are designed for professional measurement use.

Section 7-7
How to use the Auto Tester program
1.) Touch UTILITIES and SYSTEM SETUP on the Touch Panel.
5.) Select the SERVICE page on the screen.
Start Auto Tester
7.) Activate the “Auto Tester” program by clicking START.
7-20 Section 7-7 - How to use the Auto Tester program

Section 7-7 How to use the Auto Tester program (cont’d)

The following message box appears.
Pause
key on the
right upper corner
of the keyboard
Figure 7-20 Message Box
8.) Click OK.

9.) Press the PAUSE key on the keyboard.
The Auto Tester window appears, see: Figure 7-21 below.
“Record”
icon
“Accumulate mouse
moves” function has
to be turned OFF
(no check mark)
Figure 7-21 Start Auto Tester
NOTICE Please check status of the “Accumulate mouse moves” function. It has to be turned OFF.
!! NOTICE:
i.e., no check mark visible!
10.)Activate the “Auto Tester” program by clicking the “Record” icon on the displayed screen.
11.)Start scanning.
You can scan normally and everything will be recorded to the program (up to several hours.)
NOTE: It is important that you are recording the processes where the errors normally occur.
12.)Stop the program by pressing the PAUSE key on the right upper corner of the keyboard.

Section 7-7 How to use the Auto Tester program (cont’d)

The following screen will appear.
“DVD/CD Burn”
icon
Figure 7-22 Auto Tester Finished
13.)Insert an empty DVD/CD+(R)W in the Drive and select the “DVD/CD Burn” icon.
14.)Enter a Filename.
Figure 7-23 Enter a Filename
15.)After clicking OK, the following message boxes will appear.
Figure 7-24 CD Burn Process
16.)After the DVD/CD write is finished click the OK button and close the “Auto Tester” program.
7-22 Section 7-7 - How to use the Auto Tester program

Section 7-8
How to repair Databases (*.mdb)
A small database repair tool can be found on the System DVD (see: Table 9-13 on page 9-18).
NOTICE The System DVD can be found on the rear cover plate, inside the Voluson® 730Expert;
!! NOTICE:
see: Figure 3-6 on page 3-8.
This \dbutil\CheckDB.exe tool opens and compacts all relevant databases on D:\ [User].
This is a last remedial action (when experiencing database problems), before overwriting the database
with empty files.
CAUTION Before starting this tool, all programs that access the databases MUST be closed!
!! CAUTION:
As soon as the dongle is detected, the login window pops up. Remove the dongle.
3.) Press CTRL + SHIFT + ESC simultaneously to open the Windows Task Manager.
4.) Switch to the PROCESSES tab.
Processes tab
sort by name
select process
(e.g., UISApp.exe)
End Process button
Figure 7-25 Windows Task Manager - Processes tab
5.) Click on the “Image Name” column to sort the “Processes” by name.
6.) Select “UISApp.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
7.) Select “SonoView.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
8.) Select “Transfer.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
9.) Select “DataManager.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
NOTE: Confirm warning messages with YES.

Section 7-8 How to repair Databases (*.mdb) (cont’d)

10.)After terminating all processes mentioned above, press CTRL + ESC to open windows start menu.
11.)Select the Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard.
12.)Select “My Computer” -> F:\dbutil and double-click the “CheckDB.exe” application.
Figure 7-26 double-click “CheckDB.exe”
It reports on the actions it performs. This can be valuable information for the technicians.
Check that all databases (.mdb) are repaired (see:Figure 7-27).
Figure 7-27 Report repairing Databases
13.)In case of any failures, please make a screenshot (press ALT + PRTSC, open program “Paint” and
save it to D:\export), print out or write down the error message and then close the program by
pressing ENTER.
14.)Close all open windows (e.g., Windows Explorer).
15.)Restart the system (turn on and off the system).
7-24 Section 7-8 - How to repair Databases (*.mdb)

Section 7-9
How to delete the Service Database
ENABLE.
As soon as you have entered the password, the “GEMS Service Home Page” is displayed.
4.) Press the ALT and F4 key again to close the ultrasound application.
The “blue” system background appears on the screen.
5.) Press CTRL and ESC key simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
6.) Open the Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard.
Figure 7-28 Windows Explorer
7.) Change to drive D:\Service and delete all files and the “arc” folder.
8.) Close the Windows Explorer and restart the system.

Section 7-10
Hardware Tests
1.) On the Touch Panel, press UTILITIES. The Utilities menu appears.
2.) Touch SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the setup desktop and then select the SERVICE page.
rear of the system. As soon as the dongle is detected, the login window pops up.
4.) Enter the “Standard Ge Revolving” password (changes every six months) and then click ENABLE.
5.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard simultaneously to switch between “GEMS Service Home
Page - Netscape” and “Kretz UISApp” ( = Ultrasound Application).
6.) Click the SERVICE TOOLS button in the Service window to get access to the “Service Tools” page.
Hardware Test
7.) Click the HARDWARE TEST... button. The “Hardware Test Dialog” appears on the screen.
Beamformer Test
Front-End Test current
BM Test system device
Temperature
CRS Test
PW-Doppler Test
BF-SelfDiagnostic
Figure 7-30 Hardware Test Dialog
WARNING
WARNING It doesn’t matter if there is an error message after a test application – these are special
!! WARNING:
test conditions – Restart the system.
7-26 Section 7-10 - Hardware Tests

Section 7-10 Hardware Tests (cont’d)

8.) Select the desired test button.
Table 7-3 below outlines Voluson® 730Expert Hardware Tests described in the sub-sections.
Table 7-3 Hardware Tests

7-10-1 Beamformer Tests 7-27
7-10-1-1 Summation Bus Test 7-28
7-10-1-2 Asic Select / Apertur Min 7-32
7-10-2 Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic 7-33
7-10-3 Front-End Test 7-33
7-10-4 “Geräte” Temperature 7-33
7-10-5 BM Test 7-34
7-10-5-1 Pattern Generator 7-34
7-10-5-2 Transmitter Power Test 7-35
7-10-6 CRS Test 7-38
7-10-6-1 RAM Test 7-38
7-10-6-2 Analog Test 7-38
7-10-7 PW-Doppler Test 7-38
7-10-1 Beamformer Tests

• Summation Bus Test on page 7-28
• Asic Select / Apertur Min on page 7-32

7-10-1-1 Summation Bus Test

Discovery of short-circuits and open lines at the “Summationbus” of the 32 BF-Sub boards (CPD, CPR).
At test mode an offset will be fed in to the „Summation-bus“ of the beamformer, which enables to test
function of data lines from the first CPD Sub-board to the end of the „Summenbus“ on the CRS-board.
Test result: The test result is a good/bad distinction.

In case of error, the pins, which are creating the problem, are shown in the Status result field.
NOTICE This test is working with linear probes like SP6-12, RSP5-12,...only.
!! NOTICE:Ther
Before starting the test a linear probe must be selected!
If no Linear Probe is available, it is possible to simulate a probe.
Enable “Extended Access” (see: Section 5-14-3 on page 5-68) and then press the CTRL + P key
repeatedly until a linear probe is visible in the “Probe/Program Selection” menu on the Touch Panel.
Note: After performing the Summation Bus Test with a fictive probe, please restart the system.
1.) Select the BF TEST button in the Hardware Test Dialog window (see: Figure 7-30 on page 7-26).
The “Beamformer Test” Dialog appears.
Test Start
Summenbus Test field
Arrow buttons
Summation Bus Test

Result
Status
Figure 7-31 Beamformer Test (after Testbit 0)
In the "Summenbus Test" field 5 different tests can be selected using the two ARROW buttons < , > .
The offset is produced on the CRS board, fed in via pins B10, B11, B12, B13 at the plug A from the
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
• Testbit: 0 - no offset on the "Summationbus"

• Testbit: 1 - offset on B 13 plug A
2.) After selecting the desired testbit press the button TEST START.
The test signal is running now over the whole "Summation-bus" to the CRS and is there evaluated.
NOTE: At Test 0 there is no offset used on the "Summation-bus" (test of short-circuits).

7-10-1-1 Summation Bus Test (cont’d)

3.) After completion use the right ARROW button to select Testbit 1 and start the test again.
The line on Pin B13 plug A at the CRS plate becomes high now (3.3V).
Figure 7-32 Testbit 1
4.) Now repeat this test with Testbit 2.

The line on Pin B12 plug A at the CRS plate becomes high (3.3V).


5.) Repeat the test with Testbit 3.
6.) Perform the last test with Testbit 4.

If the tests 0 to 4 are OK, it is clear that whole "Summation bus" works correct.
NOTE: If there are some failures the beamformer CPR-Board has to be changed.

Signal
CPR Summation Bus
16
CRS
Beamformer
CRS
Testbit 0-4
Figure 7-36 Block diagram Beamformer

7-10-1-2 Asic Select / Apertur Min
Purpose of 1.) Detecting of missing Elements on probe.

this test:
2.) Localizing of defective CPD Sub Boards, which are typically shown as dark Ultrasound lines.
Defective CPD's are found by means of deactivation sending and receiving element on CPD's (the
whole TX/RX sub board is switched off).
Asic Select
field
Asic Load
button
Not for use

in the field buttons for faster
selection
Apertur Min B-Mode and C-Mode sliders to

button increase Ultrasound image information
especially for Apertur Min
Figure 7-37 Beamformer Test
7-10-1-3 Check probes for missing elements

1.) Select the probe which should be tested and apply to phantom or body.
2.) Activate the APERTUR MIN button.
The System uses just 1 Tx and 1 Rx Channels per Ultrasound Line and the missing elements can easily
be detected as dark shadows (shots with very low intensity).
NOTICE “Aperture Min” Ultrasound images have less image information.

!! NOTICE:
Ultrasound image information can be increased with the B-Mode and C-Mode sliders.
7-10-1-4 Check probes for missing elements

1.) Select the probe which should be tested and apply to phantom or body.
The System uses just 1 Tx and 1 Rx Channels per Ultrasound Line and the missing elements can easily
be detected as dark shadows (shots with very low intensity).
NOTICE “Aperture Min” Ultrasound images have less image information.

!! NOTICE:
Ultrasound image information can be increased with the B-Mode and C-Mode sliders.

7-10-1-4-1 Check Transmitter/Receiver Sub boards (CPD)

1.) Use any probe and start 2D-Mode.
The System uses just 1 Tx and 1 Rx Channels per Ultrasound Line.
NOTE: The numbers indicated in the “Asic Select” field correspond to the position numbers of the CPD's
printed on the CPR.
Remove/Set check marks in the “Asic Select” field to deactivate/activate the 32 CPD's.
3.) Click ASIC LOAD button.

The CPD's will be switched off/on according to the numbers selected before.
Now you will see the deactivated Channels, as black Ultrasound Shots.
This makes possible to find out which CPD is defective.

In case there was a bad area (darker…shortcut, or brighter…open line) you can see which of the
deactivated areas = deactivated CPD's correspond to the bad area.
NOTE: The buttons SELECT ALL and DESELECT ALL can be used for faster selection.
NOTE: Use buttons BWD (backward) and FWD (forward) to select and load CPD´s one by one.
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPR
CRS
H-Data Bus
Figure 7-38 Block diagram CPD test
7-10-2 Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic

This test is out of date, and no longer useful on Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) systems.
7-10-3 Front-End Test

Not ready for use in the field.
7-10-4 “Geräte” Temperature

Shows temperature of the CPP-board.
To display the current system device temperature, select the UPDATE button.

7-10-5 BM Test
This page contains:
• Pattern Generator part; see: Section 7-10-5-1 on page 7-34

• Transmitter Power test; see: Section 7-10-5-2 on page 7-35
- TX Discharge; see: Section 7-10-5-2-1 on page 7-35
- TX Power voltage Measurement; see: Section 7-10-5-2-2 on page 7-36
NOTE: APERTURE MIN Test should be used in the Beamformer test menu.
see: Section 7-10-1-2 "Asic Select / Apertur Min" on page 7-32.
7-10-5-1 Pattern Generator

This test can help to find out where image problems are caused from. (FrontEnd or BackEnd
processing)
1.) Connect a probe and then press the FREEZE key to “run” the probe (Write mode).
2.) Select the PATTERN GEN button (Pattern Generator) in the BM Test Dialog window.
The pattern data’s are fed in the CRS board. If pattern is shown correctly, this means that the whole
BackEnd digital scan converter part from CRS to CKV is ok.
Figure 7-39 Pattern Generator and TX-Discharge values

7-10-5-2 Transmitter Power Test

CPP board generates TX Supply voltages, separately for B-Mode (TXPow1 10....90V dependent on
Acoustic power setting) and Doppler Modes like PW, CFM, PD (TXPow2).
If supply power for TX pulse generator is down because of defect, there is no high voltage output
transmission on CPR beamformer (or if too low the ultrasound penetration depth is reduced because of
reduced TX Output Amplitude).
These 2 DC power sources are measured on CRS board by means of 2 separate A/D converters
(1x B-Mode, 1x Doppler Mode).
CPP Power CRS Signal Processing Board

Secondary Board
Tx_POW_1 A
10-90V D
59V from CPN Primary
Power supply
Tx_POW_2
A
10-90V
(only BT03) D
FPGA
CPR Beamformer
Board
Transmitter part TX
Figure 7-40 TX Powertest - Blockdiagram
There are two methods to check TX Power Supplies:
7-10-5-2-1 TX Discharge
TX Discharging is necessary for fast switching between B-Modes and Doppler.
When activating the one TX mode (e.g., for B-Mode) the previous TX voltage (e.g., Doppler) should
be switched off to avoid artefacts.
Result of this test: check if the TX voltage is available on CPP and if the discharge circuit on CPP
is effective, means the switch down time is fast enough.
1.) Click on the TX-DISCHARGE button in the BM Test Dialog window.

The TXPow1 and 2 are set to 80V, then discharging-slope steepness is measured.
The values of the TX1 and TX2 should be > 0.45 Volt/milliSec (see: Figure 7-39 on page 7-34).
If this test fails: replace CPP board (damaged discharge circuit),

if still fails (in rare cases) replace CRS board (damaged control unit)
NOTE: If the Switching time between B-Mode and Doppler-Modes is very slow, this could be an indication
for bad discharging circuit on CPP as the Mode change is only possible if the deactivated TX supply
voltage reaches value below 5V.

7-10-5-2-2 TX Power voltage Measurement
Result of this test: value of DC supply voltage TXPow 1 (active and used in B-Modes) and TXPow2
(only active in CFM, PW or PD Doppler Modes) produced on CPP board.
These voltages could theoretically be set between 0 and 90V, dependent on used probe, system
settings and selected Power, controlled by CRS board.
Test procedure:
1.) Run an AB2-7 probe.
NOTE: If no AB2-7 Probe is available, it is possible to simulate a probe.

Enable “Extended Access” (see: Section 5-14-3 on page 5-68) and then press CTRL + P
repeatedly until AB2-7 probe is visible in the “Probe/Program Selection” menu on the Touch Panel.
2.) Select Application [Abdomen], Settings [Default].
CAUTION The resulting voltages are dependent on program settings and give different result if you
!! CAUTION:
choose a different application or program setting.
3.) Make sure that probe is really in “Run” mode (otherwise test result is 0).
Screen is updated...at least you can see noise which is moving when TGC and Gain is set to
maximum, and PWR display for B-Mode is at 100%.
4.) Select the TX_PWR_VOLTAGE button in the BM Test Dialog window.
5.) Compare reading of TX_PWR (see: Figure 7-41) with Table 7-4 values for B (2D) Mode.
6.) Activate the CFM Mode by pressing on the C knob on the control panel.
7.) Select the TX_PWR_VOLTAGE button again.
8.) Compare reading of TX_PWR (see: Figure 7-41) with Table 7-4 values for CFM (C) Mode.
typical reading at
B (2D) Mode
typical reading at
CFM (C) Mode
Figure 7-41 Typical reading of TX_PWR using AB2-7 probe
Table 7-4 Typical TX-PWR values of AB2-7 probe
Probe Application Settings Mode TX_Pwr 1 (at 100% PWR) TX_Pwr2 (at 100% PWR)
AB2-7 Abdomen Default B (2D) Mode 52V (BT04) / 68.8V (BT05/BT08) 0V
AB2-7 Abdomen Default CFM (C) Mode 57V (BT04) / 49.1V (BT05/BT08) 24V (BT04) / 22.8V (BT05/BT08)
NOTE: The resulting measurements should show values as specified in Table 7-4 (Tolerance +/- 10V).

If this test fails: replace CPP board in case that one single TX Supply is out of tolerance or down,
if still fails (in rare cases) replace CRS board (damaged control unit)
NOTICE If TX Power readout is 0 for both TX_PWR1 and TX_PWR2:

!! NOTICE:
Make sure that the TX Power off was not forced by defective beamformer board CPR.
see: Section 7-13-4-1 "How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply" on page 7-52.
Table 7-5 Fuses on CPP-Board
Fuse Description of Fuse
F3 +TX_PWR 2 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
F4 -TX_PWR 2 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
F12 +TX_PWR 1 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
F13 -TX_PWR 1 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
Figure 7-42 Fuses on CPP-Board

7-10-6 CRS Test

Click the CRS TEST button in the Hardware Test Dialog window (see: Figure 7-30 on page 7-26).
• RAM Test; see: Section 7-10-6-1 on page 7-38

• Analog Test; see: Section 7-10-6-2 on page 7-38
7-10-6-1 RAM Test

1.) To test all RAM’s which are located on the CRS board, select the RAM TEST button in the CRS
Test Dialog window.
Result of all tests should be “no errors detected” or “Passed” ; see: Figure 7-43.
If this test fails: replace CRS board (damaged RAM‘s)
7-10-6-2 Analog Test

There are several DACs to generate the control signals for all motors driven volume probes which are
tested with this function. The “Motor sin-cos-generator part test” is used in case of problems with driving
the motors of volume probes (e.g., during volume acquisition, volume sweep, positioning of arrays
within volume probe, etc.).
1.) Select the ANALOG TEST button in the CRS Test Dialog window.
Result of all tests should be “O.K.” ; see: Figure 7-43.
Test concept:
- DSP loads the DA converters with test signal

- then the output of these DACS (for Reference voltage DAC, Sin2, COS2 and Sin3) is
measured by means of sensing resistors and ADC.
- finally digital input is compared with output results
Actually only the following values can be measured in all cases and give correct results:
DAC REF1, SIN2, COS2 and SIN3
If this test fails: replace CRS board
NOTE: Replace the CRS only, if one of the above mentioned Motorcontrol outputs are listed to be not ok.
Figure 7-43 CRS Test Dialog
7-10-7 PW-Doppler Test

NOTE: These tests are no more functional on (BT04) systems, since hardware parts were transferred and
handled via SBC (PC) software.

Section 7-11
Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan
7-11-1 Booting without using the Utrasound Hardware
If the low-level ultrasound hardware is failing, the application can not be initialized correctly.
Consequently, proper boot-up of the system is prevented.
By steadily pressing the H key on the alphanumeric keyboard during startup, the application can be
started, even if the ultrasound-hardware is broken.
The hardware is not initialized; the application simply does not get ultrasound data into process.
However, one can use SonoView to save images and to gather system information by saving a “Full
Backup”. The remote service capabilities are also present.
1.) Power On / Boot Up the system as described in Section 3-6-2 on page 3-26.
2.) As soon as the “boot” message appears on the screen (before the “Starting Windows” bar starts
running), press the H key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
Keep the H key pressed during complete startup (~ 2 minutes). Following message appears:
Figure 7-44 H Key pressed during startup
3.) Click on CONTINUE. The “Probe Selection” menu appears on the Touch Panel.
4.) Press the FREEZE key. The application starts, but does not show any Ultrasound information.
5.) Backup all images via SonoView, see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40.
6.) Save a “Full Backup” as described in Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35, or press the ALT + D key to
gather detailed information and data from the system, see: Section 7-4-2-1 on page 7-6.
7.) Touch UTILITIES , SYSTEM SETUP, select the SYSTEM INFO page and click REBOOT MACHINE.
Figure 7-45 Reboot Machine

7-11-1 Booting without using the Utrasound Hardware (cont’d)
8.) As soon as the “boot” message appears on the screen (before the “Starting Windows” bar starts
running), press SHIFT + M and then ENTER on the keyboard.
The Memory Test in LINUX starts automatically. (For more details see: Section 5-18-9 on page 5-109.)
If after one cycle (about 2.5 hours), no error messages are listed, it can be assumed that the SBC
(PC-board) including power supply is working properly.
7-11-2 Minimum boards and connections necessary to boot up to certain levels
SBC
(i)
(a)
(c) (d) (e)
CKV
CPE
(b) (g)
(f)
(h)
Figure 7-46 minimum connections to boot up to certain levels
7-40 Section 7-11 - Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan

Table 7-6 Troubleshooting in case of boot problems
Minimum boot If booting up,

Components connected Comment
up to it means:
Minimum Boards and Connections:

Power: CPN [Main Power Module], CPP [Power Supply Secondary Board]
Backend PC: SBC board, CPE rear panel [Extension Board]
(Frontend: CPU [Probe Connector Board] (too much effort to remove)) If Power is ok (check CPE
Motherboards: CPK, CPM rear panel LEDs light up), Power ok;
See a BIOS
Cables: mains power cable (h), standby switch cable (f), cable from CPN [59 V] (e) Backend PC comes up to Monitor ok;
("blue pregnant
Monitor: Power cable (g) and VGA (use SBC´s VGA out) (i) woman") screen show screen, BIOS entry PC minimum boot in
Keyboard (a): ( DEL key) possible, error BIOS ok
• IBASE SBC boards: "no bootdisk found"
use standard PS2 Adapter + any external PC-keyboard (to SBC´s PS2)
• Kontron SBC boards:
no PS2 Adapter, connect just any external PC-keyboard (to SBC´s PS2)
BIOS finds boot disk,

Windows is started with
See WIN 2k boot,
"blue man" graphic. Error
User interface cannot
message can be quitted
be found. HDD boot ok;
and UIS application is
1 After 6 connect If LINUX Mem test
add HDD and cables (HDD power, HDD data) started. Windows can be
console attempts, (SHIFT+M) is ok, PC
operated via external
"OCP connection can be stated as ok.
keyboard.
failed" message
(Use dongle to start
appears.
global service desktop for
common PC diagnostics)
same as above,
add VGA card for GEU Touch Panel LCD screen System runs now also in
2 see also Touch Panel 2nd VGA ok
connect VGA cable for GEU UI Displ. to VGA card (b) 2 graphics cards mode
Display graphic (blue)
see UISApp. Boot, User interface works,

3 add GEU user interface Power/Serial (console) cable (d), disconnect external see Touch Panel Systems responds to
UI communication ok
keyboard and use GEU PS2 cable (Mouse/Keyboard) instead (a) display with key user actions (except run
graphics probe)
User interface works,

complete boot up, Systems responds to
4 BF interface fault user actions, after
add CRS (Signal Processing Board) CRS initialization ok
window pops up (can simulating probe and
be cancelled) start run mode BF error
appears
as above, if starting
Service Mode-HW tests - CKV VGA part for
add CKV (Video Manager Board) + plug TMDS (digital video) cable on CKV CRS Tests give accurate SBC video ok;
5 unplug VGA cable on SBC, connect the Main Monitor VGA cable now to CKV´s complete boot up results (trustable), If CRS Test results
VGA plug (c) selecting too many scan ok-
parameters may cause CRS ok and CKV ok
UIS hangs
same as above, no BF
6 error at probe simulation CPR does not stop
add CPR (Beamformer Board) + CPZ (Cover Board) complete boot up
mode, all tests possible, boot
no hangs
CPR ok
7 ready to scan and to Probes run normal in 2D, Probes + Input ok;
add Probe one by one (try different plugs); see also: Section 7-11-3 on page 7-42
see echoes 3D and 4D If 3D/4D runs- motor
power on CPP ok
Also Peripherals are

8 full usage with drives,
add peripherals, ext. cables etc. ok and do not cause
printers, video etc.
the boot problem
For reference see: Figure 7-46: minimum connections to boot up to certain levels on page 7-40 and
Figure 7-47: cable- minimum configuration (e.g., IBASE PC-Board installed) on page 7-42

7-11-3 Minimum Configuration to Scan

Following cables must be connected to scan; see: Figure 7-47
a.) PS2 (connector for Mouse/Keyboard)

* PS2 Adapter is ONLY used, when the currently installed PC-Board is an IBASE Standard Board Computer.
If the PC-Board is a Kontron SBC, the PS2 cable (a) has to be connected directly to the PC-part of the GEF-box.
b.) UI Disp. (connector for User Interface Display)
c.) VGA (Monitor)
d.) Console
e.) CPN (Primary Power Supply)
f.) Standby switch
g.) Monitor (Power Supply)
f g
PS2 *
Adapter
b
a
e
c d
Figure 7-47 cable- minimum configuration (e.g., IBASE PC-Board installed)
Connect mains power cable to the system and to an appropriate mains power outlet.
Connect a probe, boot up the system and start an User program.
7-42 Section 7-11 - Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan

Section 7-12
User Interface Troubleshooting
7-12-1 Touch Panel Display
Only +12V are needed to show Voluson® 730Expert´s Touch Panel Display on the User Interface (UIF).
To perform troubleshooting of the Touch Panel Display refer to Section 7-13-3 "No Touch Panel Display"
on page 7-49.
7-12-2 Control Console Test

ENABLE
4.) Start a probe.
5.) Touch UTILITIES, then SYSTEM SETUP and select the SERVICE page.
6.) In the displayed window, select the SERVICE TOOLS button.
The “Service Tools” window appears on the screen; see: Figure 7-48.
Console Test
Figure 7-48 Service Tools

7-12-2 Control Console Test (cont’d)
7.) Click the CONSOLE TEST button to display the “Console Test” window.
Figure 7-49 Console Test
Task Actions and expected Results
Touch the LED TEST key on the Touch Panel, or select this button on the screen.
LED Test Each LED will be switched on, first to 50% and then to 100%.
The CLEAR LED´S key on the Touch Panel or on the screen sets all LED´s off.
Turn all TGC-sliders from left to right.

Slider Test
Slider position on the screen should change correctly.
Encoder Test Swivel the encoders (digipots) left and right and check the screen display of the encoders.
Select the BEEPER TEST button on the screen or touch it on the Touch Panel.
Beeper Test
The User Interface (UIF) has to beep.
Trackball Test Check the movement of the mouse cursor.
8.) Exit the Testprogramm with CLOSE and afterward select EXIT.
7-44 Section 7-12 - User Interface Troubleshooting

Section 7-13
Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions
7-13-1 System does not Power On / Boot Up
System doesn't boot
YES
Is the scanner pluged

in?
Make sure the

NO
Scanner isn't
plugged into + These three condidtions should be the first items checked if
emergency power YES the scanner doesn't boot up.
(red outlet)
+ If all three conditions are present, the scanner should be in
astandby mode with the ON/OFF switch illuminated with amber
Is there AC at the wall
color.
outlet?
+ Follow the flow chart to determine the reason the scanner
YES
doesn't boot up
NO
Is the circuit breaker on
YES
+ Check if the power switch above the mains plug of the
Primary Power Supply isn't switched off.
Do the fan's start + Check the connections to and from the Power Supply
NO
run?
+ Check the power of the cable which connects the
Power Supply with the GEF module.
YES
Touch Panel
NO
shows Picture ?
YES
perform "Touchpanel (UIF)" Troubleshooting
see: Section 7-13-3 "No Touch Panel Display"

Go on to the next page
Figure 7-50 System does not boot up

7-13-1 System does not Power On / Boot Up (cont’d)
System doesn't boot
Is the boot procedure

visible on the main NO
monitor?
YES perform "No Boot Procedure Visible Troubleshooting"
see: Section 7-13-2 "No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor"
Is the HDD recognized NO

from PC?
+ check BIOS settings

+ check cable connections to HDD
+ check the noise of HDD (typical or no)
YES + replace HDD
Any error message at the

YES
end of boot procedure?
verify the message with the "Error Message Table"

NO
"Connect Console"
YES
message appears
+ Check RS-232 connector and cable from SBC to CPE board

NO
+ Check if the Console is connected to CPE board
Figure 7-51 System does not boot up (cont´d)
7-46 Section 7-13 - Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions

7-13-1 System does not Power On / Boot Up (cont’d)
System doesn't boot
YES
"OCP connection failed"
message appears
+ check cable connections to UIF

NO + replace UIF
System is on and ready

for use
Figure 7-52 System does not boot up (cont’d)

7-13-2 No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor
Background NO go on with
on Touchpanel Display power check
YES
NO
Cable connections to monitor o.k.? Fix the cables
YES
VHS Output o.k.? NO Replace

(Printer) CKV-Board
YES
NO
Monitor o.k.? Replace Monitor
YES
LED´s
Voltages o.k. NO Replace
(+5V,+15V,-15V,+12V,+3,3V) CPP-Board
Section 7-3
YES
Remove CKV-Board
Connect Monitor YES Replace
to SBC Disp. CKV-Board
Bootprocedure visible ?
NO
Replace
PC-board
Figure 7-53 No Boot procedure - Troubleshooting

7-13-3 No Touch Panel Display
Touchpanel Display
blank
YES
Wait up to end
of boot procedure.
YES System is on
The system will make five
and ready for use.
attempts to reset UIF.
Function OK?
NO
Touchpanel NO System is on
Display still blank. and ready for use.
YES
Check cable NO
connections to GEF. Fix the Cables.
Connections OK?
YES
Check +12V NO
Checkpoints of Voltages Replace CPP-Board.
see: Section 7-3
Figure 7-54 Touch Panel Display - Troubleshooting

7-13-3 No Touch Panel Display (cont’d)
Touchpanel Display
blank
YES
Check Graphic Restore

card (UI Disp): C:\System
Connect main monitor to NO partition YES System is on
VGA output (UI Disp) see: Section 5-18-5-5 and ready for use.
Monitor shows Touch Ok now ?
Panel graphic?
YES NO
Replace GEU Replace VGA card for

(User Interface). Touch Panel Display.
System is on Touch Panel Display ok.

and ready for use. System is on
and ready for use.
Figure 7-55 Touch Panel Display - Troubleshooting (cont’d)

7-13-4 No Echo visible in Ultrasound field
No Echo visible in Ultrasound field

(only noise), or Remark: “Pumping echo” effect is
strong reduction of US-penetration sometimes very difficult to recognize,
sometimes often just a very short flash
every 10-20 sec, which can be made
better visible in cine mode or M-Mode.
Please refer also to detailed instruction
“pumping echo”
(echo go on and off all “Pumping echo” effect
see: Section 7-13-4-1
10-20 sec ) or constant
loss of echo?
Replace defective CPR BF-board
Constant (one of the 32 CPD subprints activates
echo loss overcurrent protection TX power on
CPP switches off for some seconds)
Check other probes YES

ok?
NO Replace defective Probe
Probe runs normal on YES

other inputs?
Connect probe on all plug positions.

NO If problem is only on one socket
replace CPU (Probe input board)
Check Gain and TGC

NO
knobs, if respond normal
(or run console test)
ok?
Replace defective Hardkeyboard on

YES GEU user interface
Peform
HWTest- BM test
NO
a)TX discharge>0.45V/ms
b)TX Power 1(B-Mode)
ok?
If still not OK replace
Replace CPP CPR BF-board
YES
(Power Secondary Board) (TX Power shut down
circuit defective)
Perform HW test -
NO
CRS Test - RAM Test
ok?
YES Replace CRS board
Replace CPR beamformer board
Figure 7-56 No Echo visible - Troubleshooting

7-13-4 No Echo visible in Ultrasound field (cont’d)
7-13-4-1 How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply
Symptom: No Ultrasound image (just noise and nearly no ultrasound information), or just "pumping echoes"
(echo only short time visible).
Figure 7-57 image is just dark - no ultrasound information
Reason: The CPP TX Power will be switched off if the CPR beamformer summation bus current exceeds a
specific value. The TX power is switched off for approx.10-20 seconds. After that time, power is
activated again. If problem still persists it will switch off again. The time between switch offs depends
on current (higher current = faster switch off). Maybe no ultrasound visible on screen, and after 10-20
seconds a short flash (maybe just some shots) is visible. This effect is difficult to see.
(see: Figure 7-58, which appears approx. all 15 seconds, the other time it is just dark like Figure 7-57)
Figure 7-58 short flash which appears approx. all 15 seconds

7-13-4-1 How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply (cont’d)
If the forced US-power off problem persists can be diagnosed as follows:
1.) Start any probe and then activate the M Mode by pressing the M MODE digipot on the control panel.
2.) Activate M Mode by pressing the right or left trackball key.
3.) Rotate M MODE digipot (“Gain” -> maximum) and move all TGC slide potentiometers to the right.
4.) Switch sweep SPEED to slow (6.5 seconds shown on screen).
5.) Select minimum M Mode DEPTH.
If CPR forces a TX Power shutdown on CPP, it looks like dark M Mode information with just noise.
After approx. 10-20 seconds (after about 2-3 scrolled screens of M Mode) you should see some shots
with echoes (for a short time); see: Figure 7-59.
Figure 7-59 shots with echoes in M Mode image
This symptom is typically related to the CPR beamformer only.
Corrective Replace the CPR board.

Action:

7-13-5 Bad B-Image Quality
Bad IQ (B-Image Quality)

Noisy image, focus bad, dark
shadows along US- lines, reduced
IQ performance
Monitor adjustment ok? NO

Attention: Monitor needs
time to heat up!
Set
Monitor Brightness and contrast,
YES
eventually switch off/on to start
degaussing.

ok?
Replace defective Probe, be careful ,

NO maybe it is a bad system setting only
related to specific probe types!

other inputs?

NO If problem is only on one socket
replace CPU (Probe input board)
Check Gain and TGC NO

knobs, if respond normal
(or run console test)
ok?
Replace defective Hardkey board on

YES GEU user interface
Save customer
Backup of Application YES
settings, then load factory backup
from D:\UserSettings\
FactoryDefault\
IQ ok? It was just a “bad” user program
setting. Inform customer about and
NO
ensure acceptance of changed image
quality
Figure 7-60 Bad B-Image Quality - Troubleshooting

7-13-8 Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality (cont’d)
Bad IQ (B-Image Quality)

Noisy image, focus bad, dark
shadows along US- lines, reduced
IQ performance
Peform
HWTest- BM test
a)TX discharge>0.45V/ms NO
b)TX Power 1(B-Mode)
ok?

Replace CPP
YES CRS board
(Power Secondary Board)
(wrong TX ctrl of CPP)
Perform HW test - NO
BF test - Summation bus
test +Aperture min test
ok?
YES Replace CPR beamformer board
Perform HW test -
NO
CRS Test - RAM Test
ok?
System is on and ready for use
Figure 7-61 Bad B-Image Quality - Troubleshooting (cont’d)
NOTICE Rating of Image Quality (IQ) problems is always difficult. Therefore it is recommended to use phantoms
!! NOTICE:
which give comparable results (see also:Section 10-6 "Using a Phantom" on page 10-14).
FE´s should “know their body” if used for judgment!

7-13-6 Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-patterns
Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-

patterns, no us- echo visible, or just us-
echo in background mixed with patterns.
see: Figure 7-63
Perform HW test -
NO
test
ok?
Replace defective CPR BF-board

YES
(Summation bus problem)
Perform HW test -
NO
CRS Test - RAM Test
ok?
Replace CKV Videomanager board

YES
Figure 7-62 Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-pattern - Troubleshooting
Figure 7-63 gray-pattern in Ultrasound field

7-13-7 Noise disturbs the Image
Noise is shown in Image.
Is there any electrical YES

devices that affect the
Scanner?
NO Keep the Scanner away from those

electrical devices.
use another wallsocket
Check probes.
Figure 7-64 Noise disturbs the Image - Troubleshooting

7-13-8 Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality
CFM and/or PW-Doppler

Quality bad
(Sensitivity bad, noisy CFM or
PW-Doppler, artefacts…)
NO
B-Mode ok?
Refer to B-Mode Troubleshooting tree

YES see: Section 7-13-8 and/or
Section 7-13-6

ok?

Save customer
Backup of Application
YES
settings, then load factory backup
from D:\UserSettings\
FactoryDefault\
IQ ok? It was just a “bad” user program
setting. Inform customer about and
NO ensure acceptance of changed image
quality
Peform
HWTest- BM test
NO
TX discharge>0.45V/ms
TX Pwr2 (CFM-Mode)
ok?
Replace CPP
CRS board
YES (Power Secondary Board)
(wrong TX ctrl of CPP)
Perform HW test -
NO
ok?
Replace CRS board
Figure 7-65 Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality - Troubleshooting

7-13-9 Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality
Continuous Wave (CW) -

Doppler Quality bad
(Sensitivity bad, noisy,
artefacts…)
YES
Check other CW probes YES

ok?

Check Voltages NO
+ - 15V, +5V
ok?
Replace CPP
YES (Power Secondary Board)
Perform HW test -
NO
ok?
Replace CRW board (CW-Doppler)
IF STILL NOT OK
Replace CRS board
Figure 7-66 Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality - Troubleshooting

7-13-10 Unable to record Volumes (no Volume sweep)
Remark: For checks use always only

Unable to record Volumes at 3D/4D
one single Probe connected to avoid
(No Volume sweep)
interactions between probes!
Check probe contacts YES

plug in again.
Probe now ok?
Problem was just contact problem,

NO System is ready for use

other inputs?

If problem is only on one socket
NO replace CPU (Probe input board)
Try another Volume YES

probe, ok?
Replace defective Probe

NO
Peform CRS Analogtest. YES

see: Section 7-10-6-2
Error visible?
NO Replace CRS (Motor control board)
Replace CPP board

(Motor power board)
Figure 7-67 Volume drive - Troubleshooting

7-13-11 Trackball
The trackball is low sensitive!
Does the trackball move at YES

all?
NO Remove the ball from the Trackball unit,

and clean it.
Replace the trackball unit.
Figure 7-68 Trackball - Troubleshooting

7-13-12 System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown
System has been switched off
system switched off

System starts with the Primary Power (CPY
No automatically in approx. Yes
shut down procedure inside) Supply is defekt
3min.
Yes No
Check the Standby-switch and the cable.

System is down
If ok, Primary Power Supply is defekt.
Figure 7-69 Power Off / Shutdown - Troubleshooting

7-13-13 No Audio Output on Loudspeakers
No Audio Output on
Loudspeakers at
Doppler Mode
VTR OUT at
CPE-Rear panel has signal:
(Use Line OUT cable, NO
connect it from VTR OUT to any Replace CRS-board.
Notebook Line IN .)
Notebook can record
signal?
YES
Measure
Speakers resistance.
Use Multimeter to check the
YES
CPE - GEU (User Interface) 25 pin
Console cable -> should be ~ 8 Ohm YES
Replace CPE-board.
Speaker left: pin 12 to pin 13
(or pin 22 to pin 23)
Speaker right: pin 10 to pin 11
(or pin 24 to pin 25)
Impedance ok?
NO
Replace Speaker.
Check cables.
Figure 7-70 No Audio Output - Troubleshooting

7-13-14 No ECG line or ECG signal
NO ECG line possible

or
no ECG line signal
ECG hard key

responds and can be NO
activated?
(key lights up if
pressed)
Run Service page-Service tools-
console test to double check the key
YES function. If it is sure that key is
defective, replace the GEU
Hardkeyboard
Check contacts of
Patient cable on ECG Module box, NO
and ECG cable connected to GEF
box-ECG input
ok?
YES Reconnect cables (just contact

problem), or replace defective cable.
Disconnect the ECG plug NO

on rearpanel of GEF box, measure
on ECG plug +5V, +- 15V
Voltage ok?
If still problem with
Replace CPP voltages
YES (Power Secondary Board) Replace CPE Rearpanel
(solder tracks def?)
Replace ECG module located in GEM

drive box
IF STILL NOT OK
Replace CRS board
Figure 7-71 No ECG line or ECG signal - Troubleshooting

7-13-15 Monitor Troubleshooting
Fault symptom Check these items
Check the power cord is properly connected.
CPN6 only: Check the Power Switch of Peripherals (F2) on back of system is set to
the “ON” position.
CPN80-81 only: Check the AC output voltage fused by F3 on back of system.

No image
Check the video cable is properly connected.
Check no pins of the video cable are bent.
Check if video is present on backplane.
Color is not uniform Turn ON the power to activate the Auto-Degauss function.
Check for presence of magnetic sources near the monitor.

Colored streaks appear in image
Eliminate the sources and then degauss the monitor.
Adjust the picture location, picture size, picture rotation or pincushion distortion.
Screen image is not centered or sized
Some video modes do not fill the screen to the edge of the monitor.
properly
There is no single answer to solve the problem.
This phenomenon may occur on higher refresh rates (vertical frequency).
Adjust the picture contrast and picture brightness.

Some SVGA cards having an excessive video output level will cause a fuzzy picture
Picture is fuzzy at the maximum contrast level.
Turn ON the power to activate the Auto-Degauss function.
Video test patterns are not clear,

Replace the monitor as described in Section 8-14 on page 8-52.
bright, parallel or square
NOTICE The monitor should automatically degauss itself each time power is applied if you wait at least 10
!! NOTICE:
seconds before you turn power back ON.
For further details refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.

7-13-16 Unable to Record to VCR
Unable to record to VCR!
Is the VCR properly NO

connected?
YES Check that all signal, and power

supply cable connections to the VCR
unit are OK.
Is the VCR tape put into NO

the device?
YES Put the tape into the device and

rewind it.
Is recording unable even NO

by manual operation?
YES - Check the signal cable connections

between VCR and Internal I/O.
Video Output of System NO

o.k. ?
YES
Replace CKV
Replace VCR
Figure 7-72 VCR - Troubleshooting

7-13-17 Printer Troubleshooting
Unable to use Printer(s)!
Is the printer(s) properly NO

connected?
YES Check that all signal, and power

supply cable connections between
Printer and Scanner are OK.
Are there print papers left? NO
YES Insert the printer papers.
Is proper configuration for NO

the Print key(s) set?
Configure the Print key(s).
See next page.
Figure 7-73 Printer - Troubleshooting

7-13-17 Printer Troubleshooting (cont’d)
Still unable to use the Printer(s)!
Is printing unavailable
NO
even by manual
operation?
YES Check the signal cables between

GEF and Backpanel.
Still no image on the print YES

out
NO
Printer o.k.
Replace the Printer YES

Video Output of System o.k.?
NO
Replace CKV
Figure 7-74 Printer Troubleshooting (cont’d)

7-13-18 DVD/CD+(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive)

1.) Insert an empty DVD/CD+(R)W into the Drive.
2.) Enter “Sonoview” by pressing the SONOVIEW key on the control panel; see Figure 7-75.
3.) Click the “Open” icon to display the list of exams.
4.) Select exam(s) and backup them to DVD/CD+(R)W.
5.) Choose “DVD/CD” Drive.
6.) The images, which you have choosen during backup should be visible.
3. After Backup,
choose DVD/CD
1. Press Sonoview key 2. Click “Open” icon (resp. MO)
and backup exams
Figure 7-75 To backup exams to DVD/CD+(R)W resp. MO-Disk
NOTICE In case of any problems, check status of the Diagnostic LED´s and voltages of the AUX Supply
!! NOTICE:
connector (= Disk Drive Module power connector) on the backpanel of the GEF-Box;
see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-4
7-13-19 MOD Troubleshooting

1.) Insert an empty MO into the Drive.
2.) Enter “Sonoview” by pressing the SONOVIEW key on the control panel; see Figure 7-75.
3.) Click the “Open” icon to display the list of exams.
4.) Select exam(s) and backup them to MO.
5.) Choose “MO” Drive.
6.) The images, which you have chosen during backup should be visible.
NOTICE In case of any problems, check status of the Diagnostic LED´s and voltages of the AUX Supply
!! NOTICE:
connector (= Disk Drive Module power connector) on the backpanel of the GEF-Box;
see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-4

7-13-20 Network Troubleshooting
7-13-20-1 No Connection to the Network at All

1.) Check that the network cable between the scanner and the wall network is connected and well
seated in both ends. (Use a network cable that is known to be OK.)
2.) Check the cable between the network-connector on the Back Panel to the LAN-connector
on the GEF.
3.) Connect a network cable between your Scanner and your PC. Try to ping from the Scanner to the
IP address on the PC. If OK, the hardware connection inside the Scanner is OK.
7-13-20-2 GE (InSite) remote service connection

The customer gets visual information about the network status.
The network status is defined as follows:
BLACK - Cable disconnected or no network signal on a connected cable.
GRAY - Cable connected to a network. Does not imply proper network settings.
BLUE - One of the following processes is active: in.telnet.exe, in.ftpd.exe or WinVNC.exe.

These processes are used when remote access is active, so they are used as an indicator.
NOTE: The status is checked every 10 seconds, regardless whether you‘re in read or write mode.
7-13-20-3 Enhanced Version

3.) Press CTRL and ESC keys simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
4.) Open “Network and Dial-up Connections” using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard and check if
status of the “Local Area Connection” is Enabled. (see: Figure 7-76)
NOTE: Network cable connection necessary!
Figure 7-76 Network and Dial-up Connections - Enabled

7-13-20-3 Enhanced Version (cont’d)
5.) Open “Command Prompt (DOS window) in the Windows Start Menu.
(For access, see: Section 5-17 on page 5-83).
6.) Enter ipconfig to see IP Address and Subnet Mask of the system.
7.) Check if address is ok.
8.) If address is correct, make a ping to the own IP Address (e.g., ping 3.249.6.103).
enter ipconfig
check IP Address
make ping to own

IP Address
Figure 7-77 IP Address of the System
9.) If no reply, update the network driver:

a.) Select Start menu “Settings” –> “Network and Dial-up Connections”. (see Figure 7-76)
b.) Select the “Local Area Connection” and press the upper trackball key to call up ‘Properties’.
c.) Click the CONFIGURE button, select the DRIVER page and click the UPDATE DRIVER button.
Driver page
Configure
button
Update Driver
button
Figure 7-78 Local Area Connection Properties - Update Driver

7-13-20-3 Enhanced Version (cont’d)
10.)If still no reply, delete Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and install again.
CAUTION Before uninstalling, print out or write down all the informations shown in the “Internet Protocol
!! CAUTION:
(TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page.
A.) Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click the PROPERTIES button.
B.) If “Use the following IP address” is selected, print out or write down all the informations shown in
the displayed dialog page.
print dialog page

or write down
all informations
Properties
button
Install
button Uninstall
button
Figure 7-79 call up TCP/IP Internet Protocol Properties
C.) Click the UNINSTALL button, read the displayed message box and afterwards confirm with OK.
NOTE: Restart the system, otherwise Installation of the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is impossible.
D.) Select Start menu “Settings” –> “Network and Dial-up Connections” again. (see Figure 7-76)
E.) Select the “Local Area Connection” and press the upper trackball key to call up ‘Properties’.
F.) Click the INSTALL button. In the displayed dialog box select “Protocol” and click the ADD button.
G.) Choose “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and confirm with OK.
H.) After successfully installation (will take about 30 seconds), select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and
click the PROPERTIES button.
I.) Enter all the information which you have wrote down or printed. Otherwise select “Obtain an IP
address automatically”.
J.) Confirm with OK and close all windows.

Section 7-14
Error Messages
7-14-1 To debug Error messages
Following solutions to debug error messages are listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-7 Solutions to debug error messages

• restart the system Press the Standby switch left below the Control Panel once.
Wait at least 10 seconds, then press the Standby switch again to restart the system
• delete database open the Windows explorer, change to drive D:\ and delete the mentioned files
• remove backup Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
(delete all files in folder
d:\UserSettings) and
load it (complete)
• load backup (complete) Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
• reinstall UISAPP Section 8-2 "Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure" on page 8-5
• check secondary voltage Section 7-3-1 "How to check power" on page 7-4
• replace Hard disk (HDD) Section 8-51-5 "Hard disk - Removal Procedure" on page 8-140
• replace CW-board Section 8-48-8 "Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board" on page 8-120
• replace CPU-board Section 8-48-10 "Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board" on page 8-122
• replace CPP-board Section 8-48-3 "Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board" on page 8-115
• replace CRS-board Section 8-48-4 "Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board" on page 8-116
• perform linux- Section 5-18-9 "Memory Check in LINUX" on page 5-109
memorycheck
• replace SBC (PC board) Section 8-49-6 "Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570)" on page 8-131 or
Section 8-49-7 "Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422)" on
page 8-134
• contact online center Section 7-2-1 "Needed Data - in case of System crash or Errors" on page 7-3, then call the
OLC should contact R&D local OnLine Center. Your local OLC should contact Kretz OLC to communicate with R&D.
Table 7-8 Error Messages
Error Messages Reason 1st Action level 2nd Action level 3rd Action level
" place for DatabaseName " is missing. NLS-database was not Reinstall the latest software
By default english is loaded. found version
1.) remove backup

3D B_RxLines exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
2.) reinstall UISAPP
1.) remove backup

3D B-O_Frames exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) remove backup

3D C_RxLines exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

3D C-O_Frames exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) delete database

invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\UserProg3D
3D ProbeApplData field count mismatch
in database table _4D.mdb
2.) load backup (complete)
1.) delete database

invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\UserProg3D
3D UserPrograms field count mismatch
in database table _4D.mdb
The probe connected is 1.) restart the system

Disconnect and reconnect
a V530-probe and is not 2.) try another probe 1.) check secondary voltage
530-Probe connected on……….. the probe. If error remains
supported by the If it works, then replace 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
don't use such a probe.
system. the probe
AcousticUnitType not supported by Acoustic Unit Type not

restart the system reinstall UISAPP
BF_Interface: found
One of the Measure-

Any One of the Interface in reinstall the latest software
DLLs is corrupt or not
MeasureInterface.DLL fails version
the correct version.
1.) delete database

invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\Application
Application setting field count mismatch
in database table Settings.mdb
1.) delete database

Application setting Version field count invalid number of tables d:\UserSettings\Application
mismatch in database Settings.mdb
1.) remove backup

Array bounds exceeded Array bounds exceeded restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
The software tries to

Try another probe.
Attempt to read Probe-ID from an invalid read from an invalid 1.) check secondary voltage
restart system If it works, then replace
probe connector. (non existent) probe 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
connector the probe.
(Save 3DCine 1.) check the connection and

Sequence to DVD/CD) power cable
AVI Save function fails
DVD/CD-Writer don't 2.) restart the system and try
react,…. again
1.) remove backup

Data of user settings out Press ok and save this user-
B_Enhance Out Of Range d:\UserSettings) and load
of limit setting once again it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Data of user settings out Press ok and save this user- d:\UserSettings) and load
B_Gain Out Of Range
of limit setting once again
it (complete)
7-74 Section 7-14 - Error Messages

1.) remove backup

B_Reject Out Of Range d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
B_TxFocus - not calculated and focus data error=>

B_SHOT_PART_ON focusdata not calculated
Backup error while verifying. Checksum mismatch repeat backup
check storage destination for

Full Backup(e.g., DVD/CD
Error during writing of not empty, insufficient rights
Backup error while writing.
backup data on target Network drive, write
protection on MO or USB-
drive)
1.) remove backup

Data of user settings out press ok and save this user- d:\UserSettings) and load
BC Ensemble Out Of Range
of limit setting once again it (complete)
remove backup (delete all

files in folder
BC lines_per_sequenz < 1 data error with CFM restart the system
d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

BC_Dynamic Out Of Range d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
2.)reinstall UISAPP
1.) remove backup

BC_Gain Out Of Range d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

files in folder
BC_Lines: BC_LineDensity out of limit data error restart the system
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

BCMC_Balance Out Of Range d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

bCP_ConvertParameters failed see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

bCP_ProcessIQEnsemblePacket failed see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
1.) perform linux-

bCP_ProcessIQMModePacket failed see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
1.) restart the system,

2.) remove backup
Data of user settings out press ok and save this user-
B-DynContrast Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)


data error on init BM files in folder
BF: can't set BM RxApod restart the system
RxApodisation d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

data error on init CFM files in folder
BF: can't set C RxApod restart the system
RxApodisation d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

data error on init pw- files in folder
BF: can't set D RxApod restart the system
doppler RxApodisation d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
binary file not found Binary file not found restart the system reinstall UISAPP
Binary path not set binary path isn't correct restart the system reinstall UISAPP

BM_Resample: overrun files in folder
data error restart the system
SampleLengthOnLineMem d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) check secondary voltage

Cannot create instance restart the system reinstall UISAPP

the probe. If error remain
Not a V730Pro, Try another probe.
Cannot read a valid Probe-ID (xxx) check if programmed Probe- 1.) check secondary voltage
V730Expert or V530 If it works, then replace
from…………. ID of the probe is correct and 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
probe. the probe.
fits to the probe. Could be
hardware malfunction.
Try another probe.

Cannot write Probe-ID into EEPROM on 1.) check secondary voltage
EEprom error for service only If it works, then replace
left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

Cannot write RotatingAngleCorr into 1.) check secondary voltage
EEPROM on left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

Cannot write RotatingShiftCorr into 1.) check secondary voltage
EEPROM on left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.

Try another probe.

Cannot write SNO into EEPROM on left 1.) check secondary voltage
probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

Cannot write Start Date into EEPROM on 1.) check secondary voltage
left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Medium (Hard disk,

DVD/CD-ROM or MO- Load volume files from other
Cannot import volume data to 3D_DLL
Disk) with stored volume storage medium.
files is corrupt.
Can't create hardware configuration index

Can't create file restart the system reinstall UISAPP
file in D:\\SERVICE
check if connection of 1.) check secondary voltage

Can't detect PCI 9054 hardware error on CKV restart the system
CKV correct. 2.) replace CKV board
use a new DVD/CD+R to

Can't import session maybe the disk is closed
write data to DVD/CD
Binary file (*.hd1) not

Can't open file: …… restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found
can't open MotCtrl RS232 Serial No connection to Motor- 1.) check secondary voltage
connection Control 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
write debug data to file press button save before

Can't open: \\P a t h \CPPSettings.txt for service only
isn't possible Load.

Can't open: \\P a t h \einzels.bin for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \initcpf1.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \initcpf2.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \initmid.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \intenmea.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \trans2.bin for service only
Can't open:
"resampcoef.bin" or
Can't open: ……. restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"resampcoef3d.bin" or
"resampcoef4d.bin"

Can't open: "trans1.bin"

or "trans2.bin" or
Can't open: ……. "trans5.bin" or restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"trans3.bin" or
"trans4.bin" or "lfifo.bin"
Can't open: "einzels.bin"

Can't open: ……. or "deintStd.bin" or restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"deintApMin%02d.bin"
replace HDD
read debug data to file 1.) restart the system Section 8-51 "Replacement
Can't open: c:\mid\trans2.bin for service only
isn't possible 2.) reinstall UISAPP of the Hard disk (HDD)" on
page 8-140
Can't open:
Can't open:
C:\V730\Distribution\Hardware\patterndat. restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"patterndat.bin"
bin
File Delete file

"c:\v730\Distribution\Ha uninstall and reinstall "c:\v730\Distribution\Hardw
can't write XilinxFiles.ini restart the system
rdware\XilinxFiles.ini" is UISAPP are\XilinxFiles.ini" and
corrupt restart the system
write progress fails or

CD write error use a new DVD/CD-R
can't start
1.) perform linux-

Cine2D_CtrlBlock::vSetState: value of
see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
m_GIP_eCineType undefined!!
1.) perform linux-

Cine2D_CtrlBlock::vSetState: value of
m_pGIP_eR_W_Mode undefined!!
restart the system

Windows2000 system
Check connection from V730
Communication thread is dead! has some resource check VCR check secondary voltage
to VCR, VCR has power and
problems
is on.
ConManager - RC_ConstructGOPs:
not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP replace SBC (PC-board)
Memory allocation failed

CPF Hardware not found CPF hardware not found restart the system reinstall UISAPP
2.) replace board CRS
1.) remove backup and

CPS_InterfaceToHW::vSet_VOL_MODE --
see error message restart the system load it (complete)
incorrect value for ColorDMA_Active

incorrect value for EndOfFrameInt

incorrect value for LongLineMemFIFO

incorrect value for LongLineMemFIFO

incorrect value for Mode_4D
1.) perform linux-

CtrlMvGrpRepresentations::isInWriteMode
not supported for mode nr xx

CW Doppler data error

CW quant TxFreq out of range => tx frequency out of restart the system reinstall UISAPP
range

2.) remove backup
CW_BaseLinePos Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
CW_Gain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
pencil probe + CW-Hardware

CW-hardware doesn't support hardware problem not available, restart the check secondary voltage replace CW board
system

data error "CW-prf is files in folder
CW-HW-PRF == 0 restart the system
zero" d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

data error "CW-Tx files in folder
CW-TxFrequency == 0 restart the system
frequency is zero" d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) search file

File "ConfIndexFile" is "D:\Service\Load_HW.log"
D:\\SERVICE\\ConfIndexFile is corrupt restart the system reinstall UISAPP
corrupt and delete it
2.) restart the system

2.) remove backup
Datatype misalignment Datatype misalignment restart the system (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
check storage destination for

Full Backup(e.g., DVD/CD
Backup data could not not empty, insufficient rights
Delete error
be deleted on target Network drive, write
protection on MO or USB-
drive)

Data of user settings out Press ok and save this user- 2.) remove backup
Density Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DFE::Block with openInput data error restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
it (complete)
connect the service dongle,

Backup data was made enter the GE revolving
on another system with password and try again.
Different software error
different software (see: 8-9-3-7 "Restoring
version. various “Full Backup” data"
on page 8-32)
use a new DVD/CD+R for

Disc full! disk is full
writing data to DVD/CD

1.) remove backup

CreateRectRgnIndirect
Display:Rect Region fails restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
function failed
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Division by zero Division by zero restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

done is low! FPGA not loaded restart the system reinstall UISAPP 2.) replace board CKV
3.) replace board CRS
Backup data was made

with a software version load appropriate backup for
Downgrade error
higher than the installed installed version
version
Driver parameters are NOT set for a non-production driver

production use, ask ki\n(pci9054.sys) reinstall software. If problem
is installed on the OLC should contact R&D
persists contact online center
return value = xx system
Driver SG RAM CHECK \n(pci9054.sys) replace CKV board. If

Hardware problem or problem persists re-install
return value = xx incorrect version of OLC should contact R&D
wrong xilinx file software. If problem persists
fmv.bin or board CPS defective
contact online center
Driver version mismatch (pci9054.sys)

current version= xx. wrong driver version has
reinstall software. If problem
xx needed version= xx. been installed or driver OLC should contact R&D
persists contact online center
xx copy ...distribution\\driver\\pci9054.sys update has failed.
to c:\\winnt\\system32\\drivers and restart
1.) remove backup

DSP - Gamma Corr - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - HilbertCoeff - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - Low Pass Coeff - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - SetFFT_Para - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - SetWMF_Koeff - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP/MSE:Hanning-Window Load Data d:\UserSettings) and load
FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system replace CRS board
Timeout
it (complete)


2.) remove backup
DynContrast Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
ECG_InterfaceToHW::vLookupForNew 1.) remove backup and

Samples() allocating expanded buffer [xx] see error message restart the system load it (complete)
for TimeStamps failed!! 2.) reinstall UISAPP
Electronic user manual not installed. user Manual not Install User Manual, try it
Please install. installed again
1.) remove backup

End Bandwidth too big Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

End ET too big Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

End frequency too big Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
Enhance Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
Ensemble Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
register Data Manager by

calling
Error attaching Patient data to Data unregistered Data C:\v730\distribution\mainsys
Manager. Manager \datamanger\bin\datamanag
er.exe /REGSERVER and
restart the system

calling
Error attaching SonoImage data to Data unregistered Data C:\v730\distribution\mainsys
restart the system

calling
Error attaching Study data to Data unregistered Data C:\v730\distribution\mainsys
restart the system
1.) delete user defined tables

in the “Measure Setup” (see:
user defined tables are Chapter 18 of the Basic User
Error Getting Item
not compatible Manual for Voluson®
730Expert

can not create image try to store again, restart the

Error in CreateCineImage
cine system
Binary file (Fir_Coef.*)

Error in File: …. restart the system reinstall UISAPP
not found
TxChannel for B not

Error in Select Tx-channel for B-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
TxChannel for C not

Error in Select Tx-channel for C-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
TxChannel for CW not

Error in Select Tx-channel for CW-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
TxChannel for PW not

Error in Select Tx-channel for PW-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
CPC hardware not 1.) check secondary voltage

Error no HW present ..... on CPC restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found 2.) replace CRS board

Error no HW present ..... on CPF CPF hardware not found restart the system reinstall UISAPP
2.) replace CRS board
CPG hardware not 1.) check secondary voltage

Error no HW present ..... CPG restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found 2.) replace CRS board
CPS hardware not 1.) check secondary voltage

Error no HW present ..... CPS restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found 2.) replace CKV board
1.) remove backup

Error not enough time for BC shot! data error with CFM restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
Mot-Control DSP error

Error on LoadBootMem Page: xx, Addr: xx restart the system reinstall UISAPP replace CRS board
on Load bootmemory
Check connection from US

VCR not properly
ERROR_MSG_INIT_FAILED machine to VCR, VCR has check VCR check secondary voltage
connected or turned off
power and is on.
VCR communication Check VCR cables and try

ERROR_MSG_NO_ACK check VCR check secondary voltage
error again
VCR: No cassette in Put cassette into drive of

ERROR_MSG_NO_CASSETTE check VCR check secondary voltage
drive! VCR
Check VCR cables,

ERROR_MSG_NO_RESPONSE VCR time-out error check VCR check secondary voltage
casette,... and try again
Remove cassette from VCR

VCR: Write protected
ERROR_MSG_WRITE_PROTECTED and put writable cassette into check VCR check secondary voltage
cassette!
drive of VCR.
1.) remove backup

Execute privileged
Execute privileged instruction restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
instruction
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
FallSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

Medium (Harddisk,
DVD/CD or MO-Disk) Load volume files from other
File Could not CRC Check
with stored volume files storage medium.
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File CRC Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File CRC Missing
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Data Missing
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Datalength Not Consistent
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Decompress Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Decompress method Unknown
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File End Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Execute Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Memory Missing
is corrupt.
check the registry entry

(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\
Path for Volume file in
SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\So
the registry not found
File not Found noView\3d\FileName).
when you load a Volume
from Sonoview If the key doesn't exist create
the entry or reinstall the
software
restart the system, install

File not Found can't import Volume file
latest software version
Medium (Harddisk,
File Not Found
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Pos
is corrupt.

Medium (Harddisk,
File Read Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Type Unknown
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Volume size not consistent
is corrupt.
1.) remove backup

FLT: Denormal operand FLT: Denormal operand restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Divide by zero FLT: Divide by zero restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Invalid operation FLT: Invalid operation restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Stack overflow FLT: Stack overflow restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Underflow FLT: Underflow restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

FrameUp - TempBuffer: Memory allocation
not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
failed
GeoDescription3D_TissueCF::operator=: 1.) perform linux-

handed over argument is not of same type, see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
dynamic cast failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

GeoDescriptionMotion Constructor: memorycheck
see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP
unknown mode Parameter handed over
GeoDescriptionMotion::operator=: handed 1.) perform linux-

over argument is not of same type, dynamic see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
cast failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
GeoDescriptionPWMode::operator=: 1.) perform linux-

1.) perform linux-

GeoDescriptionTissueCF Constructor: memorycheck
unknown mode Parameter handed over

GeoDescriptionTissueCF::operator=: 1.) perform linux-

Check the Directory -> if the

The file Worklist.dll is
file is available restart the
corrupt or is not
GetProcAddress fails in WorkList.DLL machine and try again.
available in
\\v730\Distribution\Bin\ Otherwise reinstall the
software.
pencil probe + CW-Hardware

Hardware doesn't support CW-mode hardware problem not available, restart the check secondary voltage replace CW board
system
hardware error on
[LMV/FMV] = CKV,
hardware error on....... restart the system check secondary voltage 2.) replace board
[CRW] = CRW,
other = CRS (see reason)
disconnect all connected

HardwareRelatedSoftware_Windows in probes and connect they
data error reinstall UISAPP
write have different ProbeAcousticUnitIDs anew, if not ok restart the
system
disconnect all connected

HardwareRelatedSoftware_Windows in probes and connect they
data error reinstall UISAPP
write have different ProbeScanFuncIDs anew, if not ok restart the
system
1.) remove backup

IBegrenzer.cpp Bshots TxMultiFocus Error in probe data =>
restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
problem Focusdata
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

IBegrenzer.cpp Mshots TxMultiFocus Error in probe data =>
problem Focusdata
it (complete)
In 3D Full Screen
Change to another format
In the 3D Image Measure is not allowed Measurements are not
than 3D Full screen mode
allowed
This functionality is only

enabled in Debug-
incorrect VersionByte, xx of xx cycles OK versions and only used contact online center OLC should contact R&D
for testing ECG-
peripherals
One of the Measure-

Initialize function fails in Reinstall the latest software
DLLs is corrupt or not
MeasureInterface.DLL version
Try another probe.

Invalid Start Date left probe connector (A). data error for service only If it works, then replace
2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
iSetVideoSource(eVideoIntern) function video source can't be 1.) check secondary voltage

reboot the system reinstall UISAPP
fails changed 2.) replace CRS board
iSetVideoSource(eVideoIntern) function Restore back from the system will restart itself 1.) check secondary voltage
reinstall UISAPP
fails external video is failing by pressing OK 2.) replace CRS board

2.) remove backup
LineFilt Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
d:\Usersettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) remove backup

LP_KoefBlock: SamplePRF too big restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
=> prf out of range
it (complete)

M_Gain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
of limit setting once again.
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
M_Reject Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC Ensemble Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC_Balance Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC_BaseLinePos Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC_Dynamic Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC_FallSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC_Gain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC_RiseSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
M-DynContrast Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
One of the Measure-

Reinstall the latest software
MeasureInterface.DLL not loaded DLLs is corrupt or not
version.

1.) perform linux-

Memory access contact online center
Memory access violation restart the system memorycheck
violation (OLC should contact R&D)
1.) perform linux-

memory allocation error not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck

files in folder
missing BCMCPW_TxFocusData Probe data error restart the system
it (complete)

files in folder
missing BM_TxFocusData Probe data error restart the system
it (complete)

files in folder
missing CW_TxFocusData Probe data error restart the system
it (complete)

missing ProbeAcousticUnit - files in folder
Probe data error restart the system
wrong ProbeAcousticUnitID d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

Missing ProbeAcousticUnit, files in folder
wrong ProbeAcousticUnitID. d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

missing ProbeGeneral data - files in folder
wrong ProbeID d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

missing ProbeScanFunc - files in folder
wrong ProbeScanFuncID d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
remove backup (delete all 1.) check secondary voltage

No replay from Motor- files in folder
MotCtrl RS232 communication timeout restart the system 2.)replace CRS board
Control d:\Usersettings) and load
it (complete) 3.) replace SBC (PC-board)
Confirm the message by

From the volume probe pressing the OK button.
comes a reference Disconnect and reconnect 1.) check probe
position signal, this is the active probe and use it 2.) perform CRS-test
MotCtrl: No Referenzposition signal! missing. It could be that again. If again the message (see: Section 7-10-6-2 replace CPP board
the scanhead is not in appears usually, the probe "Analog Test" on page 7-
the usual symmetrical itself has an defect, so you 38)
position should contact technical
support
1.) perform linux-

MotionColor-DSC 1st:Memory allocation
failed
1.) perform linux-

MotionColor-DSC 2nd:Memory allocation
failed
1.) perform linux-

Motion-DSC:Memory allocation failed not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck

The MotCtrl software

will not be installed via look into the System Setup to
the V730 setup process see the current MotCtrl
MoveVolumeAxis only supported by Real
(as there are proms on version and contact service
Time-probes!
the board itself) new to get needed proms and
V730 Releases may instructions
require a newer version
The MotCtrl software

will not be installed via look into the System Setup to
the V730 setup process see the current MotCtrl
MoveVolumeAxis only supported by
(as there are proms on version and contact service
RealTime-probes (RRE) !
the board itself) new to get needed proms and
V730 Releases may instructions
require a newer version
check the connection and the

DVD/CD-Writer does Power cable - plug the cable
No CD Writer found
not react. off and on and try again.
(restart the system)
insert disk, if fails again

CDR found no disk in
No disc in drive reboot and try again (with
drive
another disk)
Try another probe.

No Probe connected on left probe 1.) check secondary voltage
data error for service only If it works, then replace
connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Try another probe.

connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
1.) remove backup

Not enough memory for
data error for service only d:\Usersettings) and load
Display_kAkustFensterTemp
it (complete)
Not enough space on

select another destination to
Not enough space destination to hold the
save the Full Backup
backup data
Check the cables from the

console and restart (system
Console is not must be switched off).
OCP connection failed. replace User Interface GEU
connected or defective, Check the registry settings check secondary voltage
Press OK and please switch POWER OFF (see: Section 8-22 on page
or the registry settings for the OCPServer (HKEY_ (12V on GEF´s rear side)
and ON again... 8-67)
are wrong. LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTE
M\Kretz\ConsoleType = AID,
RAFIcolor, or RAFI630)
The
OpenProcessToken
function can not open
OpenProcessToken failed 2.) reinstall the latest
the access token
associated with a software version
process.
1.) remove backup

Overflow Overflow restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)


2.) remove backup
Persistence Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

files in folder
Persistence coeff page index too big Data out of limit restart the system
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

pGetActualUnitBuffer failed,
RepresentationManager is not initialized
To set the Volume Axis

Biopsy Position fails. plug off and on the probe and Try another probe.
Please plug off and on probe and try again (Scanner is to strong try again, plug on a different If it works, then replace
2.) replace board CRS, CPU
coupled, bad probe probe connector. the probe.
connection,..)
register ActiveXControls->
start
Please register the C550_NLS.dll unregistered ActiveX c:\v730\Distribution\RegFiles
component. Control \OCXUnReg.bat, then start
c:\V730\Distribution\RegFile
s\OCXReg.bat and restart
start
Please re-register the user interface control unregistered ActiveX c:\v730\Distribution\RegFiles
file. Control \OCXUnReg.bat, then start
1.) run
"c:\v730\distribution\bin\
maxmem1.exe /uninstall"
and reboot the system
boot.ini or entries in 1.) perform linux-
2.) run
PlxMemCheck ERROR registry for pci9054 restart the system memorycheck
"c:\v730\distribution\bin\
incorrect 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
maxmem1.exe /install"
and reboot the system, if
this doesn’t help :
1.) perform linux-

pNextUnitCompleted failed,
RepresentationManager is not initialized
1.) remove backup

PRF_GeneratorBoundary: BBC Ensemble
data error restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
Limitation out of limit
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PRF_GeneratorBoundary: BBCPW
data error restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
Ensemble Limitation out of limit
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Probe Scan Function Not Supplied Probe data error restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) Disconnect and

reconnect the probe.
The probe connected If error remain check if Try another probe.
Probe with Probe-ID xxx not 1.) check secondary voltage
isn't supported by the programmed Probe-ID of the If it works, then replace
supported……………….. 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
system. probe is correct and fits to the the probe.
probe.
Probe-ID xxx on left probe connector (A) Try another probe.

written, but this Probe-ID is not supported Probe data error for service only If it works, then replace
by the system. 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
the probe.
Probe-ID xxx on left probe connector (B) Try another probe.

the probe.
Probe-ID xxx on left probe connector (C) Try another probe.

the probe.
1.) Disconnect and

The software reads reconnect the probe.
probe data from probe
Probe-ID valid, but Flexible-EEPROM- If error remain check if Try another probe.
EEPROM which 1.) check secondary voltage
Datamodel not implemented yet. programmed Probe-ID of the If it works, then replace
indicate a datamodel 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
On……….. probe is correct and fits to the the probe.
which may be used in
probe.
the future

2.) remove backup
PW_BaseLinePos Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PW_BurstCalcBlock: UserProgApplication data error Application
out of range index out of range
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PW_CW_FFT_FactBlock: (delete all files in folder
DSC_ScrollX_Zoom darf nicht kleiner als PW doppler data error restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
eins sein! it (complete)

2.) remove backup
PW_Dynamic Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
PW_Reject Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

PWCW-DSC:Memory allocation failed not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck

Data of user settings out press ok and save this user- 2.) remove backup
PWGain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
Registry entry is not found for NLs NLS-database was not reinstall the latest software
databases.By default english is loaded. found version

1.) perform linux-

ReplayCtrlInterface::vReconnect failed,
selected movie group unknown
1.) perform linux-

ReplayCtrlInterface::vRunAcquisition
failed, selected movie group unknown
ReplayCtrlInterface::vSetForAllRepMngrs 1.) perform linux-

Params failed, selected movie group see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
unknown 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RepresentationManager returned NULL
write position
RepresentationManager: 1.) perform linux-

NextChunkGenerated failed, number bytes see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
written!=UnitSize 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
RepresentationManager::vCreate: 1.) perform linux-

Dimension unknown, arguments of see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
vSetReplayParams() incorrect!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RepresentationManager::vCreate: Nr. Dim
0 incorrect, see vSetReplayParams() call
1.) perform linux-

1.) perform linux-

RepresentationManager::vResizeBufferLe 1.) perform linux-

ngth caused exception, replay buffer is not see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
empty!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
Error while reading the

backup data. Try again or load another
Restore error
Backup data are backup.
probably damaged.

2.) remove backup
RiseSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
RT_4DTissueFilterBlock:: Storage Error, 1.) perform linux-

no dynamic memory for filter operations see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
available!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
RT_4DTissueFilterBlock:: storage needed 1.) perform linux-

for one filtered volume differs from see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
available Unitsize within replay buffer!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::bDllLineFilter call
failed!!
1.) perform linux-

RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::bDllLineFrameFil memorycheck
ter call failed!!

1.) perform linux-

RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::DMA Block size
and calculated frame size differs!!
1.) perform linux-

RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock Constructor:
Memory allocation failed
RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock::vCheckIQDataS 1.) perform linux-

izeAndUpdateTables: Memory allocation see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
failed 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock::vDebugDrawIQ
DataCurve: Memory allocation failed
RT_ConnectionMngr::vAssembleRTSet: 1.) perform linux-

no RT_TissueFilterBlock found for see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
TISSUE3D Blocks 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_ECG_Block::bStart ECGInterface
failed!!
1.) perform linux-

RT_MColorFilterBlock::RT_MColorFilterBl
ock: Memory allocation failed
1.) perform linux-

RT_MColorFilterBlock::vCheckIQDataSize
AndUpdateBuffer: Memory allocation failed
1.) perform linux-

RT_MColorFilterBlock::vDebugDrawIQDat
aCurve: Memory allocation failed
RT_MotionMBlock::execute caused
1.) perform linux-
exception:: Addr from DMA= xx,
ReplayBuffAddr= xx, (Line+Header)Size=
xx, blockLength= xx, value i= xx!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_PWorCW_Block : replay buffer size
smaller than expected
RT_PWorCW_Block::execute caused
1.) perform linux-
exception:: Addr from DMA= xx,
ReplayBuffAddr= xx, (Line+Header)Size=
xx, blockLength= xx, line index= xx!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
RT_PWorCW_Block::execute: Error, 1.) perform linux-

length of DMA block 2 [xx] is not alligned to see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
linesize!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) remove backup

Start Bandwidth too small Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Start ET too small Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) remove backup

Start frequency too small Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
attempt to supply DMA contact online center and

channel 0 with illegal supply scenario how it
StartDMA_0 incorrect mode OLC should contact R&D
parameters (software happened (sequence of
programming error) actions)
STOP: c0000218 (Registry File Failure)

The registry cannot load the hive (file) or its Restore HDD (C:\) ; see:
log or alternate. hive file corrupt Section 5-18-5-5 "Restore"
It is corrupt, absent, or not writable. on page 5-89
Beginning dump of physical memory.
1.) perform linux-

StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage
for B & CF Mode available
1.) perform linux-

for ECG available
1.) perform linux-

for M Mode available
1.) perform linux-

for MC or PW Mode available
System detected severe error, please call can't load UCS Interface 1.) check secondary voltage
technical support. for V730Pro 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
System detected severe error.

Some components like Touch Panel can't create UIS 1.) check secondary voltage
server may not be registered. Please Interface for V730 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
register touch panel server and restart.
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Biopsy Table field count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
mismatch in database table Settings.mdb
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Bodymark Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
count mismatch in database table Settings.mdb
1.) delete database

SystemSettings General Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Misc Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Perineal Biopsy Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Peripheral Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System

1.) delete database

SystemSettings Probe Data Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Raster Biopsy Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Rectal Biopsy Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings service Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
delete database
SystemSettings Text Table Count invalid number of fields
d:\UserSettings\System
mismatch in database table
Settings.mdb

The Database Corrupted, System try to files in folder
broken database
repair. d:\UserSettings) and load it
(complete)
Version update for 1.) remove backup

UserProgramm (delete all files in folder
The Database UserPrograms Corrupted database fails. restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
(load new Backup, it (complete)
reinstall the software) 2.) reinstall UISAPP
close registry, restart the

The Date format not stored properly can't write registry value
system and try again

The Handle Unregistered can't write registry value

The Registry not closed can't close registry reinstall UISAPP
Invoke “GEMS Service

Home Page”
if possible,
(see: Section 5-14-3 on
• save “Full Backup”
page 5-68), select
(see: Section 4-5-3 on page
The System detected a problem with your Diagnostics - PC
4-35) to “DVD/CD”,
harddisk. Please do not reboot or shut Diagnostics - Non- If S.M.A.R.T. HDD Status
“Network”, or “Other drive”
down the machine! HDD is about to fail Interactive Tests - Hard test result failed, replace the
(including images)
Please contact your service department as Drive Tests - SMART - hard disk (HDD)
• if not currently done, save
soon as possilbe. Start Long Selftest (wait
all images via Sonoview
about 40 minutes for test
(see: Section 4-5-6 on page
to complete). Afterwards
4-40)
check result by selecting
SMART - Status
delete database
The SystemSettings Database is
d:\UserSettings\SystemSetti
corrupted. All the data will be lost, please broken database
ngs.mdb, please load it new
load it from Backup
from backup
restart the system and try

The time format not stored properly can't write registry value
again
The UserPrograms Database is corrupted. database will be deleted,

All the data will be lost, please load it from broken database please load it new from
Backup backup

1.) restart 3D (go to 2D)

Thickness mismatch xx - GIP xx 3D VCI
this functionality is only

enabled in Debug-
contact online center
Timeout, xx of xx cycles OK versions and only used
(OLC should contact R&D)
for testing ECG-
peripherals
1.) remove backup

UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() has an wrong current image format is d:\UserSettings) and load
restart the system
ImageType wrong
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

change from B to BBC (delete all files in folder
UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() will change from
mode (wrong image restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
eB_Wnd to wrong ImageType
format) it (complete)
1.) remove backup

change from BBC to B (delete all files in folder
UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() will change from
mode (wrong image restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
eBBC_Wnd to wrong ImageType
format) it (complete)
1.) remove backup

UI_Manager::vDestroyWnd: dynamic cast Can't create MMC
restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
to UI_MMC_Wnd* failed Window
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

UI_Manager::vDestroyWnd: dynamic cast Can't create PW
restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
to UI_PW_Wnd* failed Window
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

HRS_Execute doesn't
UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
correct work it (complete)
1.) remove backup

HRS_Execute doesn't
UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
correct work
it (complete)
for any reason the same

1.) remove backup
or any other thread
enters the execution of
UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
the acquisition software
it (complete)
before the current
execution has finished 2.) reinstall UISAPP
start
unregistered ActiveX c:\v730\Distribution\RegFiles
Unable to complete the initialization! Controls, can"t load \OCXUnReg.bat,
Hardware then start
can't load
reinstall the latest software
Unable to Load NLS data. c:\v730\Distribution\
version
OCX\C550_NLS.dll
Save to Sonoview does

Unable to save... restart the system
not work

Program for DICOM Make sure that Transfer.exe

Unable to send... Transfer (Transfer.exe) is running and is listed in the
is not running Autostart folder
1.) remove backup

undefined CW ADC_Clk-Teiler restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
=> ADC-clk out of range
it (complete)

the probe.
The software reads If error remain check if Try another probe.
Unhandled Probe-EEPROM data type 1.) check secondary voltage
invalid probe data from programmed Probe-ID of the If it works, then replace
on………. 2.) replace board CRS, CPU
probe EEPROM probe is correct and fits to the the probe.
probe. Could be hardware
malfunction.
Medium (Hard disk,

Unknown Error
is corrupt.
unknown Xilinx-Version FPGA Type is unknown restart the system reinstall UISAPP check secondary voltage
DVD/CD is corrupt or
unrecordable disc in drive try again with another disk
last session failed,…

files in folder
Unsupported color mode data error restart the system
it (complete)
1.) delete database

UserPrograms B_BC Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch BBC table mdb
1.) delete database

invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
UserPrograms B_Table Count mismatch
B table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms CFM_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch CFM table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms CW_Table Count mismatch
CW table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms General Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch General table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms M_Table Count mismatch
M table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms MCFM_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch M table mdb

1.) delete database

UserPrograms Power_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch POWER table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms PW_Table Count mismatch
PW table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms Tissue_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch TISSUE table mdb
there is a type mismatch 1.) perform linux-

varSetScannerSpecificData() unknown
in the interface between restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
type!
PC and MotCtrl board 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
Error while checking

backup data. Try again or load another
Verify error
Backup data are backup.
probably damaged.
ViewerConMngr::vAssembleCF_DFE:
1.) perform linux-
attempt to get ECG_Consumer_2D- or
ECG_Draw_2D-Block from ECGViewer
Objects failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
ViewerConMngr::vAssembleM_DFE:
1.) perform linux-
ECG_Draw_2D-Block or ECG-CalcHR-
Block from ECGViewer Objects failed!!
ViewerConMngr::vAssembleTissueDFE :
1.) perform linux-
ECG_Draw_2D-Block from ECGViewer
Objects failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)

Volume_dB Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PW Doppler data error
WMF_KoefBlock: SamplePRF too big restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
=> prf out of range
it (complete)
Check the Directory -> if the 1.) remove backup

The file Worklist.dll is
file is available restart the (delete all files in folder
corrupt or is not
WorkList.DLL not loaded machine and try again. d:\Usersettings) and load
available in
Otherwise reinstall the it (complete)
\\v730\Distribution\Bin\
software. 2.) reinstall UISAPP
1.) perform linux-

XTD - pucBackScaledBImage: Memory
allocation failed
1.) perform linux-

XTD - pucDSCBImage: Memory allocation
failed
1.) perform linux-

XTDTrackballCtrlState::No frame to
trackball position found, internal failure!!


Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems.
NOTICE The Manpower, time and Tools indicated in the Sub-sections include all requirements from
!! NOTICE:
Preparations to Installation Procedures.
NOTE: When tightening screws, do not overtighten or use excessive force.
NOTE: Use the ESD-kit during replacing Boards and Prom´s.

g
WARNING
WARNING Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to
!! WARNING:
taking the necessary ESD precautions:
1.) Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the

advised ESD connection point located on the rear of the
scanner (to the right of the power connector).
2.) Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic

sensitive equipment.
CAUTION Functional and/or Leakage Current tests based upon the FRU being replaced (see: Section 8-58
!! CAUTION:
"Functional Checks after FRU replacement (Debrief Guidelines)" on page 8-165) have to be
performed after replacement procedures.
WARNING
WARNING No covers or panels should be removed from the system (high-voltage risk).
!! WARNING:
Service and repairs must only be performed by authorized personal.
Attempting do-it-yourself repairs invalidate warranty and are an infringement to
regulations and are inadmissible acc. to IEC 60601-1.
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) must not be disposed as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected separately.
Please contact the manufacturer or other authorized disposal company for information
concerning the decommission of your equipment.
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-1


8-1 Overview 8-1
8-2 Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure 8-5
8-3 User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure 8-12
8-4 Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure 8-12
8-5 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure 8-13
8-6 Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure 8-15
8-7 Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade 8-18
8-8 Replacement or Activation of Options 8-19
8-9 Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System 8-21
8-10 Replacement of Covers 8-38
8-10-1 Replacement of the Rear Cover 8-38
8-10-2 Replacement of the Top Cover 8-39
8-10-3 Replacement of the Side Panel (left) 8-40
8-10-4 Replacement of the Side Panel (right) 8-43
8-10-5 Replacement of the Door for Probe Cables 8-45
8-10-6 Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel) 8-46
8-11 Replacement of the Guide for Probe cables 8-48
8-12 Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES) 8-49
8-13 Replacement of the Standby Switch 8-50
8-14 Replacement of the Monitor 8-52
8-15 Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) 8-54
8-16 Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing 8-56
8-17 Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly 8-58
8-18 Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp 8-59
8-19 Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate 8-60
8-20 Replacement of Wheels 8-61
8-20-1 Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO £ A10643) 8-61
8-20-2 Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO Š A10644) 8-63
8-20-3 Replacement of the Front Wheel 8-64
8-21 Replacement of the Foot Rest 8-66
8-22 Replacement of User Interface (GEU) 8-67
8-23 Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU 8-70
8-24 Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU) 8-71
8-25 Replacement of the Probe Holder 8-75

8-25-1 Replacement of the Probe Holder (SNO £ A10643) 8-75
8-25-2 Replacement of the Probe Holder (SNO Š A10644) 8-76
8-26 Replacement of the Front Handle 8-77
8-27 Replacement of the Trackball 8-78
8-28 Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring 8-79
8-29 Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls 8-79
8-30 Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard 8-80
8-31 Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s) 8-81
8-32 Replacement of the Hardkeys 8-84
8-33 Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console 8-86
8-34 Replacement of the Gel holder (PHG1) 8-87
8-35 Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM) 8-88
8-36 Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive 8-89
8-37 Replacement of the MO-Drive 8-91
8-38 Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board 8-93
8-39 Replacement of the Fan (inside module GEM) 8-94
8-40 Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN) 8-95
8-41 Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board 8-101
8-42 Replacement of CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80-81 only) 8-104
8-43 Replacement of the Mains Power Switch (F1 - KTZ207733) 8-105
8-44 Replacement of the Mains Power Input Connector (KTZ207574) 8-106
8-45 Replacement of Mains Switch & Input Connector (KTZ209340) 8-107
8-46 Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN) 8-108
8-47 Removement of the GEF-Box 8-109
8-48 Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards 8-113
8-48-3 Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board 8-115
8-48-4 Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board 8-116
8-48-5 Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board 8-117
8-48-6 Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board 8-118
8-48-7 Replacement of CPD - Sub-board on CPR 8-119
8-48-8 Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board 8-120
8-48-9 Replacement of CPK - Motherboard 8-121
8-48-10 Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board 8-122
8-49 Replacement of the BackEnd Boards 8-125
8-49-3 Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board 8-127

8-49-4 Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board 8-129
8-49-5 Replacement of the CPM - PC-Motherboard 8-130
8-49-6 Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) 8-131
8-49-7 Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) 8-134
8-49-8 Replacement of the VGA graphic card 8-138
8-50 Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board 8-139
8-51 Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD) 8-140
8-52 Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) 8-148
8-53 Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (single) 8-151
8-54 Hardware Check 8-151
8-55 Reassembly the System 8-152
8-56 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) 8-156
8-57 Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date 8-157
8-57-1 Mounting/Replacing the DVR (DVD Recorder) 8-158
8-57-2 Mounting/Replacing of ECG Module (MAN6) 8-161
8-57-3 Mounting/Replacing the Global Modem 8-162
8-58 Functional Checks after FRU replacement (Debrief Guidelines) 8-165
NOTICE Following tools are required to perform the replacement of all the renewal parts.
!! NOTICE:F
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2 slotted screwdriver or blade of a knife soldering iron (only CPD-board)
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, blank CD-RW or DVD+(R)W

edge cutter (small)
stubby (length ~ 30mm) blank MO-Disk (optional)
Flat wrench 7, 8, 10, 13, 14 and 17 knife System DVD
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 scissors Service dongle
Socket wrench 5.5 universal pliers and tweezers Electric Safety Analyzer
Torx screwdriver T25x100 ESD-kit key removal tool

8-1-2 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
and ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items what were saturated and/or dripping
with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient
care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purpose and must be transported as a hazardous
material.
Section 8-2
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure
8-2-1 Introduction
NOTICE It is possible to update the Ultrasound Application Software via the UPDATE button in the System Setup
!! NOTICE:
SERVICE page; see: Section 8-2-5 on page 8-9.
There are two possibilities to update the Ultrasound Application Software:
1.) via the UPDATE button in the System Setup SERVICE page; see: Section 8-2-5 on page 8-9
2.) via Linux (Restore function); see: Section 8-2-6 on page 8-11
8-2-2 Manpower
One Person, 20 min.
8-2-3 Tools
Ultrasound Multipurpose Phantom (if available)
System DVD
NOTICE The System DVD can be found on the rear cover plate, inside the Voluson® 730Expert;
!! NOTICE:
8-2-4 Preparations
Before performing the Software Update/Upgrade:
A.) make sure that all system functions are working correct; see: Table 8-2
B.) check the current Software Version and installed Options

Table 8-2 System Functional Checks
Mode Task Expected Results
Connect an abdominal probe (AB or RAB), press the PROBE key, select the
“Abdomen” -Application and start the “Default” -Program.
2D Mode regular and homogenous 2D
Record a 2D image of the Phantom or the Liver.
Quality image
If there is no abdominal probe, record a 2D image of the Phantom or the Thyroid
using a small parts probe (SP6-12 or SP4-10) and corresponding program.
no disturbances in the 2D image

Receiver Use the FREQUENCY control below the Touch Panel to switch the Receiver
during changing the Receiver
Frequency Frequency range (penet./norm/resol.).
Frequency
Start the “Abdomen” -Program, adjust the M Cursor (vessel or hole of the Phantom) the M Cursor agree with Vessel
M Mode and activate the M Mode. Touch the SPEED key to change the M Mode sweep or hole of the Phantom
speed. After FREEZE, move the TRACKBALL to recall the stored sequence. Cine loop is displayed
continuous Volume Acquisition

Volume Start the Volume acquisition using a Real Time 4D probe (RAB2-5, RAB4-8P or (without any “jumps”) and
Mode RIC5-9). smooth echo shape with clear
defined image edge
Triplex Start the “Abdomen” -Program and switch on the CFM- and the PW Mode. Adjust no disturbances in the 2D/Color
Mode the Doppler Cursor and press the right trackball key to activate the Triplex-Mode. and the Doppler image
8-6 Section 8-2 - Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure


2.) Touch SYSTEM SETUP in the Utilities menu.
3.) Select the SYSTEM INFO page on the System Setup desktop screen to see which Software/Hardware
version is installed in the unit.
currently installed
Software version
Figure 8-1 Version check
4.) Select the OPTION page on the System Setup desktop screen to see which Options are installed.
D = Demo
(Option is activated for demo and expires
on the date shown in the “Valid” column)
I = Inactive
(Option is not activated)
P = Permanent
(Option is permanently activated [purchased])
Figure 8-2 Option page
NOTICE Please print out the OPTION page or write down the “Permanent Key”!
!! NOTICE:


5.) Select the NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen.
a.) Click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button in the NETWORK page.
Figure 8-3 DICOM Configuration
NOTICE Please print out the “DICOM Configuration” dialog page or write down the DICOM designations
!! NOTICE:
(AE Title, Station name, Retry Count, Retry Interval).
b.) Click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button in the NETWORK page.
NOTE:
This example shows
fictive numbers!
NOTICE Please print out the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page or write down the IP settings.
!! NOTICE:

8-2-5 Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page)

1.) Insert the System DVD into the drive.
2.) Touch UTILITIES and SYSTEM SETUP on the Touch Panel.
Service Tools
button
UIS button

8-2-5 Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) (cont’d)

8.) Click on the UIS button for updating the Ultrasound Application Software.
9.) Confirm the following message with YES.
Figure 8-7 Update UIS message
10.)A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.
Figure 8-8 Install Shield Wizard - Extracting Files
11.)Click the NEXT button In the “Welcome to Kretz V730 Software Installation” window.
Figure 8-9 Welcome to ... Software Installation
The contents of the Software package are being extracted.

8-2-5 Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) (cont’d)

12.)Complete the Software installation with the FINISH key.
Figure 8-10 V730 Software Setup
The system restarts automatically.
13.)If desired, load the appropriate factory settings; see Section 8-3 on page 8-12
or the full backup; see: Section 8-4 on page 8-12.
14.)If necessary, update the Service Software (SSW) as described in Section 8-5 on page 8-13.
15.)Afterwards update the Electronic User Manual (EUM) as described in Section 8-6 on page 8-15.
16.)Perform Software and Functional checks as described in Section 8-7 on page 8-18.
8-2-6 Software - Installation Procedure (via LINUX - Restore C)

This function takes the image stored on the “System DVD” to replace the existing image of the “C”
partition. Additionally the (R:) Rescue image of (C:) is replaced by the “DVD image”.
The System “C:” image contains:
• Windows 2000 with latest Patches

• Ultrasound Application Software [UIS]
• Application Settings [Backup]
• Electronic User Manual [EUM]
NOTICE Data on the D: (User) partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient Data and
!! NOTICE:
If System DVD is available, perform Restore function as described in Section 5-18-6-2 on page 5-92.
If No System DVD available, perform Restore function as described in Section 5-18-5-5 on page 5-89.

Section 8-3
User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure
8-3-1 Introduction
The User Settings contains:
• Application Settings
• User Programs
• Auto Text
• 3D/4D Programs
8-3-2 Loading Procedure

see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
Section 8-4
Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure
8-4-1 Introduction
The Full Backup contains following data:
• Patient demographic and exam data (database containing the patient data and measurements)
• SonoView image data (NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk, DVD/CD or MOD)
• User Settings (databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings.)
• Image transfer settings (DICOM settings e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.)
• Measure Setup Settings (user specific measure settings)
• V730 settings (general settings such as language, time/date format and the enabled options)
• Windows Network Settings (network settings including the computer name)
• Service Platform (state of the service platform)
• VP (additional system data)
8-4-2 Loading Procedure

see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-37
8-12 Section 8-3 - User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure
Section 8-5
Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure
8-5-1 Manpower
One Person, 10 min.
8-5-2 Tools
System DVD or Upgrade CD
8-5-3 Upgrade Procedure

1.) Insert the System DVD or Upgrade-CD into the drive.
6.) Touch the SYSTEM SETUP key to invoke the setup desktop on the screen.
SSW button
9.) Click on the SSW button for updating the Service Platform Software.

Section 8-5 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)

10.)Select the DVD/CD DRIVE button.
11.)Browse for the install.bat file and click OK.
Figure 8-12 Browse for Folder
12.)Confirm the following message with YES.
Figure 8-13 Update SSW message
13.)A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.
Figure 8-14 Install Shield Wizard - Extracting Files
14.)Press any key to continue to finish Service Platform installation procedure.

15.)Close the SERVICE page with EXIT and close the “System Setup” with SAVE & EXIT.
8-14 Section 8-5 - Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure

Section 8-6
Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure
8-6-1 Manpower
One Person, 15 min.
8-6-2 Tools
System DVD or Upgrade CD
8-6-3 Preparations
1.) Restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE The electronic user manual (EUM) must never be opened (by pressing the F1 key on the keyboard)
!! NOTICE:
after last restart! Even if closed again before installing the new EUM.
2.) Insert the System DVD or Upgrade-CD into the drive.

EUM button

8-6-4 EUM - Upgrade Procedure

1.) Click the EUM button. The “Update Software” dialog appears.
2.) Select the DVD/CD DRIVE button.
3.) Browse for the EUMSetup_en_V730Expert.exe file and click OK.
Figure 8-16 Browse for Folder
4.) Confirm the following message with YES to proceed the update.
Figure 8-17 Update Package
The contents of this package are being extracted.
5.) Confirm the following warning message with OK to proceed the update.
Figure 8-18 confirm warning message
6.) Confirm the “Maintenance Complete” message: «InstallShield Wizard has finished performing
maintenance operations on V730 Expert User Manual with the FINISH button.
8-16 Section 8-6 - Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure

8-6-4 EUM - Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)

7.) Click the EUM button again to install the new EUM.
8.) Select the MO DRIVE or the DVD/CD DRIVE button, depending on the storage medium you use.
9.) Browse for the EUMSetup_en_V730Expert.exe file again and click OK.
10.)Confirm the following message with YES to proceed the update.
The contents of this package are being extracted.
11.)Follow the instructions of the “InstallShield Wizard” (confirm the message with NEXT ).
12.)After successfully installation of the Electronic User Manual, click FINISH to exit the wizard.l
Figure 8-19 Complete Installation
13.)Close the SERVICE page with EXIT and close the “System Setup” with SAVE & EXIT.
14.)Restart the system (turn off and on the system).
15.)After rebooting the system, fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box
and click OK.
16.)Press the F1 key on the keyboard to invoke the electronic user manual.
17.)Move the cursor down to the bottom of the screen. The Windows taskbar must not appear!
see: Section 6-11 "Hide Windows Taskbar" on page 6-15.
18.)Press the EXIT key to exit the EUM.
BT-Version:
BT Version: If desired, change the EUM Language as described in Section 3-8-1-4 on page 3-57.
Changing the EUM Language is only possible at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW5.x.x).

Section 8-7
Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Touch Panel once to display the Utilities menu.
2.) Select SYSTEM SETUP from the Utilities menu.
3.) Select SYSTEM INFO to see which Software/Hardware version is installed in the unit.
System Type
Serial number
Application Software
Hardware ID
Backup File Name
Date of Factory Settings
EUM Version
Serviceplatform
information
Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software/hardware.
Operating System Information

(e.g., Service Pack 4)
SLOT_CPU
(e.g., KONTRON)
Figure 8-20 System Setup - System Info page
4.) Verify the correct settings of the OPTION page; see: Figure 8-2 on page 8-7.
If necessary, customize the settings according to the printout.
5.) Check and (if necessary) match the NETWORK page settings according to the printout:
• “DICOM Configuration” dialog page; see: Figure 8-3 on page 8-8
• “Network Configuration” dialog page; see: Figure 8-4 on page 8-8
6.) Restart the system and perform basic functional checks to ensure system is functioning normally;
see: Table 8-2.
8-18 Section 8-7 - Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade
Section 8-8
Replacement or Activation of Options
BT-Version:
BT Version: Some Software Options may be considered standard (freeware), or are only available at systems that
were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).
For more detailed description of Software Options and Application Packages (BT08 only), refer to:
Section 5-2-4 "Description of Software Options" on page 5-17.
Following Options are available:
BT04 BT05 BT08

Software Options (SW4.x.x) (SW5.x.x) (SW5.4.0 - onwards)
Real Time 4D X X X
DICOM X X X
Real Time 4D Biopsy X X X
VOCAL II X X X
XTD View (Extended View) X X X
STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) X X X
CrossBeam-CRI (XBeam Compound Resolution Imaging) X * *
B-Flow X X x*
VCI (Volume Contrast Imaging) X X x*
Contrast (Coded Contrast Imaging) X X X
SRI (Speckle Reduction Imaging) X (SRI) X (SRI II) X (SRI II)
Inversion X * *
Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging (T.U.I.) X X
SonoVCAD Heart (Computer Assisted Heart Diagnosis Package) X
X = Software option is available for this system.
* = Standard (freeware) at systems with BT05/BT08 software (SW5.x.x ) installed, or systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 via upgrade ki.
x* = Standard (freeware) at systems upgraded to BT08 (SW5.4.0 or higher) via Upgrade kit.
A Software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate this feature! It remains optional and can be obtained via sales order.
NOTE: Additional option fields are not yet implemented in the Voluson® 730Expert.
8-8-1 Operation for activating Options

3.) Select the OPTION page where you can see which options are installed in the system.

8-8-1 Operation for activating Options (cont’d)
D = Demo
(Option is activated for demo and expires
on the date shown in the “Valid” column)
I = Inactive
(Option is not activated)
P = Permanent
(Option is permanently activated [purchased])
Figure 8-21 Option page in the System Setup
8-8-1-1 Operation for installing a “Demo Key” or a “Permanent Key”:

1.) Position the cursor inside the input field desired and press the right/left trackball key.
2.) If one exists, clear/edit the current key code.
3.) Enter the encrypted serial code with the keyboard and click on SUBMIT. (Code will be checked.)
4.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button.
NOTE: After activating a key code, restart (turn off and on) the Voluson® 730Expert system.
8-20 Section 8-8 - Replacement or Activation of Options

Section 8-9
Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System
8-9-1 Introduction
NOTICE It is possible to backup Sonoview Image data to a Mapped Network Drive (Z:\)
!! NOTICE:
There are three possibilities to transfer the Patient Database and Images from System-to-System:
• using a cross-over network cable; see: Section 8-9-2 on page 8-21

• using “Full Backup” function of the System Setup BACKUP page; see: Section 8-9-3 on page 8-29
• via “Network” Drive in Sonoview; see: Section 8-9-4 on page 8-34
WARNING
WARNING Please make sure that the server you are connecting to is trustworthy and reliable.
!! WARNING:
For details, contact your local system administrator. If you backup Sonoview data to
this server, all the patients’ demographic data will be copied to this server!
8-9-2 Transfer of Patient Database and Images using cross-over network cable
8-9-2-1 Introduction
This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system to
another system.
from ("old" System) -> to ("new" System)
Voluson® 730,
Voluson® 730 -> Voluson® 730Expert (BT02, BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Pro (BT02, BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT02, BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Expert (BT02) ->
Voluson® 730Expert (BT02, BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT02) ->
Voluson® 730Expert (BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT03, BT04 or BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT04 or BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT04 or BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT04 or BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT04 or BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Expert (BT05/BT08) ->
Voluson® 730Pro (BT05/BT08)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT05/BT08)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT05/BT08) ->
Voluson® 730Pro (BT05/BT08)
8-9-2-2 Manpower
One Person, time depends on amount of stored images

8-9-2-3 Tools
• cross-over network cable (DO NOT use a hub)
• DVD/CD or MOD
8-9-2-4 Preparations
NOTICE If there were already some images stored on the “new” System, and it is desired to keep them, backup
!! NOTICE:
the exams to DVD/CD or MOD using Sonoview (see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40).
Restoring of backed-up exams (after complete transfer of databases from old to new system) gives the
opportunity to merge the old (transferred) image data on HDD with the new one on DVD/CD or MOD.
1.) Set up direct connection between both systems using a cross-over network cable.
NOTE: Do NOT use a hub.
2.) Start both systems.

3.) Enter Utilities menu, System Setup:
a.) Open the DICOM respectively NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen.
Click on the NETWORK CONFIG button and print out the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties" dialog page or write down the IP settings.
NOTE: The following example shows fictional numbers!
a)
write down IP settings
b)
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
b.) Only if you are sure to have noted the IP settings in the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties"
dialog page, select "Obtain an IP address automatically" on both systems.
NOTE: You must reconfigure the TCP/IP Settings back to the originally recorded values from step a.) after
transferring the patient database and images.
4.) Close the Ultrasound Application (Ctrl + F8 and/or GE Dongle) by pressing ALT + F4.
5.) Press CTRL + ESC simultaneously and open the Windows Explorer.
8-22 Section 8-9 - Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System
8-9-2-5 Operation ("new" System)

1.) On the “new” system, select drive USER (D:) and delete the complete "Images" folder by pressing
SHIFT + DEL.
Figure 8-23 delete "Images" folder of “new” system
2.) "Confirm Folder Delete" message with YES.

3.) Using the upper trackball key, click on drive USER (D:), choose "Sharing", select "Share this folder",
Share name: D$, Comment (= empty), and then click on APPLY.
Figure 8-24 USER (D:) Properties

8-9-2-5 Operation ("new" System) (cont’d)
4.) Press the CTRL + ESC key on the “new” system simultaneously, select "Settings" –> "Control
Panel" and then double click "System".
Figure 8-25 check computer name of “new” system
5.) Invoke NETWORK IDENTIFICATION and check the "Full Computer Name" (see: Figure 8-25).
It must be the serial number as shown on the label on back of the system (e.g., A07009).
NOTE: If the Computer Name is not the same than the system´s serial number you have to change it; see:
Section 8-9-2-6 "Changing the Computer Name ("new" System)" on page 8-25.
8-9-2-6 Changing the Computer Name ("new" System)
NOTE: If the Computer name is identically with the system´s serial number, continue with
a.) Click on the PROPERTIES button.

b.) Enter the system serial number (see label on back of system) in the field Computer name.
Figure 8-26 enter System Serial number (e.g., A07009)
c.) Click the OK button.

d.) A message about non standard character will appear - confirm with YES.
e.) Close all windows.
f.) Confirm the following message box with YES to restart the system.
Figure 8-27 System Settings Change

8-9-2-7 Operation ("old" System)

1.) On the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transferred, select:
"Tools" –> "Map Network Drive".
2.) In the field "Folder" enter the information of the system (= "new" system), that should receive data
and images.
Example: If the system serial number as well as computer name of the "new" system is A07009, please enter:
\\A07009\d$
enter information of "new" system
Figure 8-28 Map Network Drive on “old” system and enter information of "new" system
3.) Close the following window.
Figure 8-29 close window
8-9-2-7 Operation ("old" System) (cont’d)
4.) Using the upper trackball key, click on the "Images" folder on drive USER:(D:) of the “old” system
and select Copy.
Figure 8-30 copy "Images" folder from USER (D:)
5.) Change to the mapped drive d$ on ’A07009’ (G:), press the upper trackball key and select Paste.
Figure 8-31 paste "Images" folder into drive G:

8-9-2-7 Operation ("old" System) (cont’d)
6.) After successfully copying all files, select "Tools" –> "Disconnect Network Drive".
Figure 8-32 Disconnect Network Drive
8-9-2-8 After the Transfer of the Database (from “old” to “new” system)
1.) On the “new” system, enter Utilities menu, System Setup.
- Open the DICOM respectively NETWORK page, click on the NETWORK CONFIG button,
select "Use the following IP address:" (see: Figure 8-22 on page 8-22) and enter the IP
settings according to the printout.
2.) If desired, restore the backed-up exams into the “new” system. This gives the opportunity to merge
the old (transferred) image data on HDD with the new one on DVD/CD or MOD.
CAUTION Patient data on different systems are only distinguished by the patient Identification (ID) field!
!! CAUTION:
If the default auto-generated ID was not used, please make sure that the Identification (ID) is
unique on BOTH systems for the same patient, before you restore the backed-up exams!
CAUTION Old “Measure Setup” settings CANNOT be recovered!

!! CAUTION:
However, measurement results are still visible.
8-9-3 Transfer of Patient Database and Images using “Full Backup” function
This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system
(= “old” system) to another system (= “new” system) using the “Full Backup” function.
NOTICE Both systems MUST be capable of the “Full Backup” function.

!! NOTICE:
This means that both systems have to be:
• a BT04, BT05 or a BT08
• a BT03, with at least Software Version 3.1.x installed and/or
• a BT02, with at least Software Version 2.2.x installed
NOTICE By means of the implementation of the “Full Backup” function, it is not only possible to restore Patient
!! NOTICE:
Database and Sonoview Images.
Furthermore, most of the system presets and configurations can be loaded in the same manner
(see: Section 8-9-3-7 "Restoring various “Full Backup” data" on page 8-32).
Restoring “Full Backup” data to a different machine is restricted to field engineers.
CAUTION Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible.
!! CAUTION:
Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup
was created on is prohibited.
8-9-3-2 Manpower
8-9-3-3 Tools
• Service Dongle
• Mapped Network Drive Z:
(see: Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-65)
• Any other drive connected to the system (e.g., an external USB-hard disk)
NOTICE If there were already some images stored on the “new” System, and it is desired to keep them,
!! NOTICE:
backup the exams to DVD/CD, MOD or mapped Network drive using Sonoview
(see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40).
Restoring those exams (after complete transfer of databases from old to new system) gives the
opportunity to merge old (transferred) image data on HDD with new one on DVD/CD, MOD or Network.
8-9-3-5 Save “Full Backup” data (including all images) of the “old” system
1.) Save a “Full Backup” of the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transfered to:
a.) destination “Network Drive” (including all images) or
b.) destination “Other Drive” (including all images)
see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-35

8-9-3-6 Load “Full Backup” data (including all images) into “new” system
1.) Connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle, enter the “GE Revolving” password ENABLE.
3.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive data and images, touch UTILITIES on the
Touch Panel.
5.) Select the BACKUP page (see: Figure 4-24) and click the LOAD button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
select backup
click Next
Figure 8-33 Full Backup Load
6.) Choose the Destination on which you have stored the “Full Backup” data of the “old” system
(e.g., Network Drive).
7.) Click on the backup to be restored (additional information is displayed in the table).
8.) Select the NEXT button. The following window will be displayed.
select data to
be restored
into
“new” system
Figure 8-34 Select Data to be restored into the “new” system
9.) Select “Patient demographic and exam data“ and “Sonoview image data” and then click on NEXT.
8-9-3-6 Load “Full Backup” data (including all images) into “new” system (cont’d)
10.)Confirm the message “Start Restore Backup now” with YES.

The following warning messages appear.
Figure 8-35 Warning messages
WARNING
WARNING When clicking “YES”, the current data on the system will be permanently replaced by
!! WARNING:
the data on the backup and can not be restored!
11.)If in doubt, verify that you have selected the correct “Full Backup” by clicking NO.
Otherwise confirm these warning messages with YES.
12.)Confirm the message “Restore successfully completed .....” with yes to reboot the system.

8-9-3-7 Restoring various “Full Backup” data
WARNING
WARNING Always backup any data before an upgrade; see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35.
!! WARNING:
The “Full Backup” loading procedure replaces (overwrites) ALL the existing data on the
local hard drive of the system!
CAUTION There are circumstances where it is not possible to load (restore) all the data.
!! CAUTION:
Following steps specify these restrictions:
1.) Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible.
Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was
created on is prohibited.
2.) Options can only be restored on the same Voluson® 730Expert system within the same major
software version.
3.) When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x), User Settings, Options and State of the Service Platform will not be
restored.
4.) The field engineer (service mode, activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore data to a
different machine, if and only if the software version on this system is equal or higher than the
version in the backup.
5.) The field engineer (service mode, activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore all data;
in consideration of the rules mentioned in Table 8-3.
1.) Save a “Full Backup” of the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transfered to
as described in Section 8-9-3-5 on page 8-29.
2.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive “Full Backup” data,
perform step 1.) to step 8.) as described in Section 8-9-3-6 on page 8-30.
3.) Select data to be restored (in CONSIDERATION of Rules in Table 8-3) and then click on NEXT.
select data to
be restored
into the system
Figure 8-36 Select Data to be restored into the system
WARNING
WARNING Rules and Instructions - mentioned in Table 8-3 - HAVE TO BE strictly observed!
!! WARNING:
DO NOT restore “Patient demographic and exam data (NO images!)” to a different
system. (ID´s could be mixed and images might be assigned to a not matching patient!)
8-9-3-7 Restoring various “Full Backup” data (cont’d)
Table 8-3 Full Backup Load - Rules that have to be followed

onto same onto different
Data to be restored Rules and Instruction which HAVE TO BE observed!
system system
Patient demographic yes NOT DO NOT restore these data to a different system.
and exam data recommended ID‘s could be mixed and images might be assigned to a not
(NO images!) except to a “new” matching patient.
(or follow-up) These data MUST ONLY be restored into an absolutely “virgin”
systems at same system. To ensure this, delete all patients as described in
customer/clinic Section 5-16-4-6 on page 5-78 before starting the “Full Backup
only Load” procedure!
Sonoview image data yes ONLY at same Before starting the “Full Backup Load” procedure, backup all
customer/clinic images on the target system via Sonoview
(see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40).
Patient Data and Sonoview images on the system will be
permanently replaced by the data on the backup and can not
be restored.
User settings yes yes User Programs and System Settings on the system will be
replaced by the data on the backup and can not be restored.
Even if accessible, these data MUST NOT be restored, when
loading a backup into a system with a software version that has
a higher major number (2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x)!
Image transfer settings yes only at same After loading procedure, check and match AE title and Station
(DICOM) customer/clinic Names in the “DICOM Configuration” window of the System
Setup NETWORK page.
Measure setup settings yes yes, but Even if accessible, these data MUST NOT be restored, when
NOT from BT02 loading a backup from a BT02 or BT03 system (software
or BT03 system version that has a major number 2.x.x or 3.x.x) into a BT04
(2.x.x or 3.x.x) (software 4.x.x) or BT05/08 (software 5.x.x) system!
V730 settings yes usually not Before starting the “Full Backup Load” procedure, print out the
System Setup OPTION page (Figure 8-21) of the target system.
(Option “Key” codes will be deleted and have to be reentered
after loading procedure.)
Restoring is impossible, when loading a backup into a system
with a software version that has a higher major number
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x).
Windows Network yes NOT Network TCP/IP settings and Computer Name on the system
settings recommended will be replaced by data on the backup.
(These settings MUST be unique within same network.)
Serviceplatform yes never Restoring is impossible, when loading a backup into a system
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x).
VP yes not applicable Restoring is impossible, when loading a backup into a system
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x).
4.) Perform step 10.) to step 12.) as described in Section 8-9-3-6 on page 8-30.

8-9-4 Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview
This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system
(= “old” system) to another system (= “new” system) via “Network” drive in Sonoview.
Thus in addition, the patient database and images can be shared between different systems within the
same network.
NOTICE Both systems MUST be capable to BACKUP the Sonoview exams to the mapped network drive (Z:\).
!! NOTICE:• •
This means that both systems have to be:
• a BT04, BT05 or a BT08
• a BT03, with at least Software Version 3.1.x installed and/or
• a BT02, with at least Software Version 2.2.x installed
8-9-4-2 Manpower
8-9-4-3 Tools
• Mapped Network Drive Z: (see: Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-65)
8-9-4-4 Backup all Exams of the “old” system

1.) On the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transferred, press the SONOVIEW
key on the Control panel.
2.) Click on the OPEN icon on the upper left side of the screen and verify that “Drive HDD” is selected.
3.) Using the TRACKBALL, and the right trackball key SET, select the first exam of the list.
4.) To select all available exams, click on SELECT TO END and then on the BACKUP button.
Select
Sonoview Open to End
key button button
“Drive HDD”
all exams are selected
Backup Close
button button
Figure 8-37 Step 1.) to 5.)
5.) In the “Backup” window select the destination NET.

6.) After finishing the backup, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
NOTICE If you select to delete the exams after finishing the backup, they will be absolutely deleted from the hard
!! NOTICE:
disk of the ultrasound scanner Voluson® 730Expert!
8-9-4-4 Backup all Exams of the “old” system (cont’d)

7.) Click on the close button and then select the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the screen.
8.) In the displayed window click on the CHANGE BACKUP FOLDER ON NETWORK DRIVE button.
The first line in the dialog (see: Figure 8-38) displays the name (e.g., serial number A09008) of the
“Backup Folder” used for storing data on, and reading data from the network drive.
Name of the
Backup Folder on
Network Drive
Figure 8-38 Backup Folder on Network Drive
9.) Notice this name of the “old” system´s Backup Folder (e.g., A09008) and then click CANCEL.
8-9-4-5 Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system
1.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive data and images, press the SONOVIEW key
on the control panel.
2.) Select the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the screen.
3.) In the displayed window click on the CHANGE BACKUP FOLDER ON NETWORK DRIVE button.
Sonoview
key
Settings
icon
Change Backup Folder on Network Drive
4.) Choose folder of the “old” system (e.g., A09008) from the drop-down list and click on RENAME.
choose folder of Rename

“old” system button
e.g., A09008
Figure 8-40 Select folder of “old” system and rename it

8-9-4-5 Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system (cont’d)
NOTICE The folder which is selected to be renamed (e.g., A09008, that contains the backup data from a different
!! NOTICE:
system - in this case the backup data of the “old” system), it is not copied, but simply renamed.
Thus, the same data can be shared between two systems by renaming the respective backup folders
to the serial number of the accessing system (in this case the “new” system).
5.) Close the “Settings” window with the OK button.

6.) Click on the OPEN icon on the upper left side of the screen and choose “Drive Network”.
7.) Using the TRACKBALL, and the right trackball key SET, select the first exam of the list.
8.) To select all available exams, click on the SELECT TO END button.
9.) Click on the BACKUP / RESTORE button.
Select
Open to End
button button
“Drive Network”
all exams are selected
Backup / Restore Close

button button
10.)In the “Backup / Restore” window click on the RESTORE button.
NOTICE If an exam is about to be restored that already exists on the hard disk of the “new” system, a dialog
!! NOTICE:
shows the Patient Name and Patient ID and asks for the action to be taken.
Figure 8-42 Identical exam already exists
8-9-4-5 Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system (cont’d)
11.)Select the desired action:

The exam on the hard disk is replaced with the exam in the backup.
Yes
The system will ask again if another identical exam is found during the restore process.
Yes to all All identical exams are replaced without further notice.
The exam on the hard disk is not replaced by the exam in the backup.
No
The system will ask again if another identical exam is found during the restore process.
No to all No identical exams are replaced with the exams in the backup.
12.)After finishing the restore, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
NOTICE If you select to delete the exams after finishing the restore, they will be absolutely deleted from the
!! NOTICE:
network drive!

Section 8-10
Replacement of Covers
8-10-1 Replacement of the Rear Cover
8-10-1-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-10-1-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 2
slotted screwdriver or blade of a knife
1.) Power Off/Shutdown the system; see: Section 4-3-2 on page 4-3.
8-10-1-4 Rear Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove both plastic caps, washers and screws on the back of the system.
2.) When the cover is loose on top, pull the rear cover out and move upwards.
plastic caps; screws and washers

Figure 8-43 remove rear cover plate
3.) Turn the rear cover 30° and disconnect the GND ground-cable from the back of the rear cover.
GND ground cable
Figure 8-44 GND ground cable
4.) Remove the rear cover.
8-10-1-5 Rear Cover - Installation Procedure

1.) Plug in the earth cable on the rear cover.
2.) Put the rear cover on the two bolts of the trolley.
3.) Press on the rear cover on the trolley, fasten the 2 screws and cover them with the plastic caps.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-10-1: Replacement of the Rear Cover - Functional Tests.
8-38 Section 8-10 - Replacement of Covers

8-10-2 Replacement of the Top Cover
8-10-2-1 Manpower
One person, 1 hour 30 min.
8-10-2-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2
Flat wrench 10
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 3
2.) Remove the monitor; see: Section 8-14-4 on page 8-52.
3.) Remove monitor mounting plate; see: Section 8-19-4 on page 8-60.
4.) Remove User Interface; see: Section 8-22-4 on page 8-67.
8-10-2-4 Top Cover of Trolley - Removal Procedure

1.) Under the top cover of trolley go in with the screwdriver 2 in one of the two gaps of the rear side and
raise the top cover that you can go with the fingers under the cover and raise it out of the clips.
Figure 8-45 remove Top Cover
8-10-2-5 Top Cover of Trolley - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the top cover from front side, push in the top cover into the trolley starting from front side to
the rear side.
2.) Install the user interface, the monitor mounting plate and the monitor;
as described in Section 8-22-5 on page 8-69.
3.) Perform: FRU 8-10-2: Replacement of the Top Cover - Functional Tests.

8-10-3 Replacement of the Side Panel (left)

NOTICE The left side panel (KTZ208762) is used in serial production SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only.
!! NOTICE:
If your system´s SNO is greater/equal ≥ A10644 please use Side panel Kit (KTZ154735);
see: Section 8-10-6 "Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel)" on page 8-46.
8-10-3-1 Manpower
One person, 4 hours 10 min.
8-10-3-2 Tools
Flat wrench 8 and 10
Philips screwdriver 1, stubby (length ~30mm)
2.) Remove the rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1 on page 8-38.
6.) Remove the top cover of the trolley; see: Section 8-10-2 on page 8-39.
7.) Remove the GEF-Box of boards; see: Section 8-47 on page 8-109.
8.) Remove the Standby switch; see: Section 8-13-4 on page 8-50.
8-10-3-4 Side Panel (left) - Removal Procedure

1.) Loose the 6 screws of the metal plate with column.
Figure 8-46 loose 6 screws
2.) Remove the plate and column.

8-10-3-4 Side Panel (left) - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Loose the 2 screws of the upper front cross strut of the frame and remove it.
4.) Loose the 5 screws of the basket of peripheral devices (4 placed in the below shelf and 1 below the
lower cover).


5.) Lift the basket of peripheral devices and of the frame.
Figure 8-49 remove basket, loose nuts and then remove left side panel
6.) Loose the 4 nuts and one screw of the wall and remove the left side panel (see image above).
8-10-3-5 Side Panel (left) - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new side panel on the left side of the trolley.
2.) Screw on the 4 nuts and the one screw of the wall.
3.) Install the basket of peripheral devices from above and fix it with the 5 screws.
4.) Screw on the upper front cross strut on the frame.
5.) Install plate with column and fasten the 6 screws.
6.) Install top cover of the trolley as described in Section 8-10-2-5 on page 8-39.
8.) Reassembly the system as described in Section 8-55 on page 8-152.
9.) Perform: FRU 8-10-3: Replacement of the Side Panel (left) - Functional Tests.

8-10-4 Replacement of the Side Panel (right)

NOTICE The right side panel (KTZ208763) is used in serial production SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only.
!! NOTICE:
If your system´s SNO is greater/equal ≥ A10644 please use Side panel Kit (KTZ154735);
see: Section 8-10-6 "Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel)" on page 8-46.
8-10-4-1 Manpower
8-10-4-2 Tools
7.) Remove the GEF-Box of boards; see: Section 8-47 on page 8-109.
8-10-4-4 Side Panel (right) - Removal Procedure

1.) Loose the 6 screws of the metal plate with column; see: Figure 8-46.
2.) Remove the plate and column.
3.) Loose the 2 screws of the upper front cross strut of the frame; see: Figure 8-47.
4.) Loose the 5 screws of the basket of peripheral devices (4 placed in the below shelf and 1below the
lower cover); see: Figure 8-48.
5.) Lift the basket of peripheral devices and of the frame; see: Figure 8-49.

8-10-4 Replacement of the Side Panel (right) (cont’d)

6.) Loose the 5 nuts and remove the right side panel.
Figure 8-50 remove right side panel
8-10-4-5 Side Panel (right) - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new side panel on the right side of the trolley.
2.) Screw on the 5 nuts.
3.) Install the basket of peripheral devices from above and fix it with the 5 screws.
4.) Screw on the upper front cross strut on the frame.
5.) Install plate with column and fasten the 6 screws.
6.) Install top cover of the trolley as described in Section 8-10-2-5 on page 8-39.
9.) Perform: FRU 8-10-4: Replacement of the Side Panel (right) - Functional Tests.

8-10-5 Replacement of the Door for Probe Cables

NOTICE The Door for probe cables (KTZ208737) is used in serial production SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only.
!! NOTICE:
8-10-5-1 Manpower
One person, 3 min.
8-10-5-2 Tools
none
none
8-10-5-4 Door for Probe Cables - Removal Procedure

1.) Open the door until 45°.
Figure 8-51 open the door and remove it
2.) Lift the door and remove it from the hinges.
8-10-5-5 Door for Probe Cables - Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new probe cables door in the two hinges.
2.) Perform: FRU 8-10-5: Replacement of the Door for Probe Cables - Functional Tests.

8-10-6 Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel)
NOTICE This side panel kit (KTZ154735) is used in serial production SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 only.
!! NOTICE:
If your system´s SNO is less/equal ≤ A10643 please use Side panel left (KTZ208762:
Section 8-10-3 "Replacement of the Side Panel (left)" on page 8-40) and Side panel right (KTZ208763:
Section 8-10-4 "Replacement of the Side Panel (right)" on page 8-43).
8-10-6-1 Manpower
One person, 40 min. (20 min. / side panel)
8-10-6-2 Tools
8-10-6-4 Side Panel Kit- Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the ground cables (on both sides), open the cable clamps and then remove them from the
frame; see: Figure below.
step 1.)
step 2.)
Figure 8-52 remove ground cable and rubber caps (e.g., left side panel)
2.) Remove the 8 rubber caps of the side panels (4 on each side); see: Figure above.

3.) Loose the 4 screws on the left side.

4.) Carefully lift the panel to open the cable clamps and to remove the cables.
step 3.)
loose 4 screws step 4.)
open cable clamps
and remove cables
Figure 8-53 loose 4 screws and open cable clamps (e.g., left side panel)
5.) Disconnect the Standby switch cables and then remove the left side panel.
disconnect standby switch
remove side panel

(e.g., left side panel)
Figure 8-54 disconnect standby switch and remove the left side panel
6.) Remove the Standby switch; see: Section 8-13-4 on page 8-50.
7.) Loose the 4 screws on the right side, carefully lift the panel, open the cable clamps and remove the
cables. Afterwards remove the side panel.

8-10-6-5 Side Panel Kit - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the Standy switch into the new left side panel.
2.) Place the side panel on the left side of the trolley, reconnect the standby switch cables and fasten
all cables with the cable clamps on the left side panel.
3.) Screw on the 4 screws and then cover them with the 4 rubber caps.
4.) Place the right side panel on the right side of the trolley and fasten all cables with the cable clamps
on the right side panel.
5.) Screw on the 4 screws and then cover them with the 4 rubber caps.
6.) Connect and screw on the ground cable.
7.) Mount the rear cover as described in Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-38.
8.) Perform: FRU 8-10-6: Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel) - Functional Tests.
Section 8-11
Replacement of the Guide for Probe cables
NOTICE The Guide for probe cables (KTZ154736) is optional.
!! NOTICE:
It can be mounted on system with SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 only.
8-11-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-11-2 Tools
8-11-3 Preparations
8-11-4 Guide for Probe cables - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the 4 rubber caps on the right side panel.
2.) Loose the 4 screws on the right side.
3.) Carefully lift the right panel to unscrew the 4 screws which fix the cable guide.
4 screws
Figure 8-55 remove guide for probe cables (4 screws on right side panel)
4.) Remove the cable guide.
8-11-5 Guide for Probe cables - Installation Procedure

1.) Fix the new cable guide with the 4 screws.
2.) Place the right side panel, screw on the 4 screws and then cover them with the 4 rubber caps.
3.) Perform: FRU 8-11: Replacement of the Guide for Probe cables - Functional Tests.
8-48 Section 8-11 - Replacement of the Guide for Probe cables
Section 8-12
Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES)
8-12-1 Manpower
One person, 40 min.
8-12-2 Tools
8-12-3 Preparations
8-12-4 Connection Panel - Removal Procedure

1.) Open the two cable clamps on both side panels and basket of the boards (GEF).
2.) Unplug all cables of the connection panel from the GEF.
3.) Loose the 4 screws and remove the connection panel (2 on each side of the GES).
Figure 8-56 loose 4 screws (2 on each side of GES)
8-12-5 Connection Panel - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new connection panel and fix it with the 4 screws.
2.) Connect all the cables.
3.) Fix all cables in the cable clamps.
4.) Mount the rear cover as described Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-38.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-12: Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES) - Functional Tests.

Section 8-13
Replacement of the Standby Switch
8-13-1 Manpower
One person, 40 min.
8-13-2 Tools
8-13-3 Preparations
8-13-4 Standby Switch - Removal Procedure

1.) Open the cable clamps on the right side panel.
2.) Loose the switch cable on the power supply by hand.
Figure 8-57 disconnect the Standby switch cable
3.) Loose the switch with the screwdriver from the left side panel.
Figure 8-58 remove Standby switch
4.) Remove the switch and pull out the cable.
8-50 Section 8-13 - Replacement of the Standby Switch

8-13-5 Standby Switch - Installation Procedure

1.) Thread the cable through the hole in the side panel and connect it on the power supply.
to Primary Power Supply

6 3 white CPN
black
5 2
4 1
a
7 8 red
Figure 8-59 Standby Switch wiring (for reference only)
2.) Fix the cables in the two cable clamps on the right side panel.
3.) Clip in the Standby switch.
4.) Mount the rear cover as described Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-38.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-13: Replacement of the Standby Switch - Functional Tests.

Section 8-14
Replacement of the Monitor
8-14-1 Manpower
Two person, 20 min.
8-14-2 Tools
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 5 and 8
8-14-3 Preparations
8-14-4 Monitor - Removal Procedure

1.) Take off the monitor base cover; see: Figure 8-60.
2.) Disconnect the power cable and the signal cable.
monitor base cover

Figure 8-60 remove monitor base cover and disconnect cables
3.) Unscrew the stop screw and the 4 screws of the monitor base.
1 stop screw
Figure 8-61 unscrew the 5 screws that fix the monitor
8-52 Section 8-14 - Replacement of the Monitor

8-14-4 Monitor - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Two persons are required to remove the monitor (incl. monitor base).
monitor +
monitor base
Figure 8-62 remove monitor + monitor base
5.) Pull off the monitor base from the monitor pin.
6.) Carefully thread the cables through the monitor base.
pull off the monitor base
thread cables through the

hole of the monitor base
Figure 8-63 pull off monitor base
8-14-5 Monitor - Installation Procedure

1.) Thread the power cable and the signal cable through the hole of the monitor base.
2.) Mount the monitor base on the new monitor.
3.) Place the monitor (incl. monitor base) on the monitor plate.
4.) Screw on the monitor base with the 4 screws and then fasten the stop screw.
5.) Plug in the power cable and the signal cable.
6.) Fix the monitor base cover.
7.) Perform Monitor adjustments as described in Section 6-3 on page 6-2.
8.) Perform: FRU 8-14: Replacement of the Monitor - Functional Tests.

Section 8-15
Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover)
8-15-1 Manpower
One person, approximately 15 minutes/cover
8-15-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, stubby (length ~30mm)
8-15-3 Preparations
8-15-4 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Removal Procedure
• Right monitor cover; see: Section 8-15-4-1 on page 8-54
• Top monitor cover, see: Section 8-15-4-2 on page 8-55
• Left monitor cover, see: Section 8-15-4-3 on page 8-55
• Installation of Monitor housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover); see: Section 8-15-5 on page 8-55.
8-15-4-1 Right Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws (a, b) from the right monitor cover.
2.) Use the stubby screwdriver to remove the screw (c) on the bottom.
3.) Remove the right monitor cover by pulling backwards.
b d
f c
a e
Figure 8-64 remove screws from the right monitor cover
8-54 Section 8-15 - Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover)
8-15-4-2 Top Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the right monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-1 on page 8-54.
2.) Slide the top monitor cover to right side and remove it.
slide the top monitor cover

to right side and remove it
Figure 8-65 remove top monitor cover
8-15-4-3 Left Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws (d, e ; Figure 8-64) from the left monitor cover.
2.) Use the stubby screwdriver and unscrew the 2 screws, which fixes the cover of the task lamp.
Figure 8-66 remove cover of the task lamp
3.) Use the stubby screwdriver to remove the screw (f ; Figure 8-64) on the bottom.
4.) Remove the left monitor cover by pulling backwards.
8-15-5 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Installation Procedure
1.) If necessary, mount the cover of the task lamp and fix the 2 screws (Figure 8-66).
2.) If necessary, mount the (new) left monitor cover and the fix the 3 screws (a, b, c ; Figure 8-64)
3.) If necessary, mount the (new) top monitor cover.
4.) If necessary, mount the (new) right monitor cover and fix the 3 screws (d, e, f ; Figure 8-64).
5.) Perform: FRU 8-15: Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Functional
Tests.

Section 8-16
Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing
8-16-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-16-2 Tools
8-16-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the top monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-2 on page 8-55.
4.) Remove the left monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-3 on page 8-55.
8-16-4 Monitor Front Housing - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 4 screws (2 on the left side and 2 on the right side of the monitor).
Figure 8-67 remove monitor front cover
2.) Pull the monitor cover to the front.

3.) Disconnect the cable from the monitor switch assembly.
disconnect cable
from monitor switch
assembly
Figure 8-68 disconnect cable from monitor switch assembly
8-56 Section 8-16 - Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing

8-16-4 Monitor Front Housing - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the monitor switch assembly.
Figure 8-69 remove monitor switch assembly
5.) If required, remove the cover of the task lamp (see: Figure 8-66 on page 8-55).
8-16-5 Monitor Front Housing - Installation Procedure

1.) If necessary, mount the cover of the task lamp and fix it with the 2 screws.
2.) Screw on the monitor switch assembly on the new front monitor cover.
3.) Reconnect the cable to the monitor switch assembly.
4.) Mount the front monitor cover.
5.) Fix the 4 screws (2 on each side of the monitor).
6.) Mount the monitor housing as described in Section 8-15-5 on page 8-55.
7.) Perform: FRU 8-16: Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing - Functional Tests.

Section 8-17
Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly
8-17-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-17-2 Tools
8-17-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the top monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-2 on page 8-55.
4.) Remove the left monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-3 on page 8-55.
5.) Remove the front monitor cover as described in Section 8-16-4 on page 8-56.
8-17-4 Monitor Switch Assembly - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws (1 + 2) and remove the monitor switch assembly.
2
1
Figure 8-6 Monitor
Figure 8-70 remove monitor base cover and disconnect cables
8-17-5 Monitor Switch Assembly - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw on the new Monitor Switch Assembly, reconnect the cable and mount the complete monitor
housing as described in Section 8-16-5 on page 8-57.
2.) Perform: FRU 8-17: Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly - Functional Tests.
8-58 Section 8-17 - Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly

Section 8-18
Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp
8-18-1 Manpower
One person, 15 min.
8-18-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, stubby (length ~30mm)
8-18-3 Preparations
8-18-4 Task Lamp - Removal Procedure

1.) Use the stubby screwdriver and unscrew the 2 screws, which fixes the cover of the task lamp.
task lamp
Figure 8-71 remove cover of the task lamp
2.) Screw out the task lamp and remove it.
8-18-5 Task Lamp - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw in the new task lamp into the lamp socket.
2.) Mount the cover of the task lamp and fix it with the 2 screws.

Section 8-19
Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate
8-19-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-19-2 Tools
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 3, 4, 5 and 8
8-19-3 Preparations
8-19-4 Monitor Mounting Plate - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the screw of the monitor plate.
2.) Pull the cables through the hole of the monitor mounting plate, then remove the plate.
3.) On the bottom side loosen screw and washer to remove the earth cable.
Figure 8-72 remove monitor mounting plate
8-19-5 Monitor Plate - Installation Procedure

1.) Fasten the earth cable with washer and screw on the bottom side of the monitor mounting plate.
2.) Thread the monitor cables through the hole of the new monitor mounting plate.
3.) Put the monitor mounting plate in position of the flange and fasten the screw.
4.) Install the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-53.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-19: Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate - Functional Tests.
8-60 Section 8-19 - Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate

Section 8-20
Replacement of Wheels
NOTICE Replacement of the wheels depends on the used trolley (GW), which is coupled to the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson® 730Expert serial number (SNO).
• GW130: SNO is less/equal ≤ A10643, see: Section 8-20-1 on page 8-61
• GW140: SNO is greater/equal ≥ A10644, see: Section 8-20-2 on page 8-63
8-20-1 Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO ≤ A10643)
8-20-1-1 Manpower
8-20-1-2 Tools
1.) Check systems serial number at back of the Voluson® 730Expert. It has to be less/equal ≤ A10643.
4.) Remove the monitor mounting plate; see: Section 8-19-4 on page 8-60.
5.) Remove the user interface - GEU; see: Section 8-22 on page 8-67.
8.) Remove the GEF - basket of the boards; see: Section 8-47 on page 8-109.
9.) Remove the main power module - CPN; see: Section 8-40 on page 8-95.
8-20-1-4 Rear wheel - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the metal plate with the column (6 screws); see: Figure 8-46 on page 8-40.
2.) Loosen screws and remove the upper front cross strut of the frame; see: Figure 8-47 on page 8-41.
3.) Loosen the 5 screws of the basket of peripheral devices; see: Figure 8-48 on page 8-41.
4.) Remove the basket of peripheral devices; see: Figure 8-49 on page 8-42.
5.) Unscrew all nuts of the side cover and remove the side cover.
Figure 8-73 remove nuts of side cover

8-20-2-4 Rear wheel - Removal Procedure (cont’d)
6.) Unscrew the nut of the screw from the wheel.
Figure 8-74 loose the nut
7.) Remove the wheel.
8-20-1-5 Rear wheel - Installation Procedure

1.) Put the wheel between the two steel panel and fix the wheel with screw and nut.
2.) Screw on the side cover with the nuts.
3.) Assemble the basket of peripheral devices in the trolley and fix them with the 4 screws.
4.) Fix the upper front cross strut with the frame and basket of peripheral devices.
5.) Fix the metal plate with the column and thread the cables through the column.
6.) Fix the top cover of the trolley as described in Section 8-10-2-5 on page 8-39.
7.) Mount the User Interface as described in Section 8-22-5 on page 8-69.
8.) Install the power supply (CPN) as described in Section 8-40-6 on page 8-100.
10.)Mount the monitor mounting plate as described in Section 8-19-5 on page 8-60.
11.)Fix the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-53.
12.)Reassembly the system as described in Section 8-55 on page 8-152.
13.)Perform: FRU 8-20-1: Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO £ A10643) - Functional Tests.
8-62 Section 8-20 - Replacement of Wheels

8-20-2 Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO ≥ A10644)
8-20-2-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-20-2-2 Tools
Flat wrench 13
1.) Check systems serial number at back of the Voluson® 730Expert. It has to be greater/equal
≥ A10644.
4.) If necessary, disconnect the Standby switch cable, see: Figure 8-57 on page 8-50.
5.) Remove the left/right side panel(s); see: Section 8-10-3-4 on page 8-40.
8-20-2-4 Rear wheel - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the nut of the screw from the wheel.
Figure 8-75 loose the nut
2.) Remove the wheel.
8-20-2-5 Rear wheel - Installation Procedure

1.) Put the wheel between the two steel panels and fix the wheel with screw and nut.
2.) Mount the side panel(s), screw on the screws and cover them with the rubber caps.
3.) Connect and screw on the ground cable.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-20-2: Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO Š A10644) - Functional Tests.

8-20-3 Replacement of the Front Wheel
8-20-3-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-20-3-2 Tools
Flat wrench 17
2.) Remove the foot rest; see: Section 8-21 on page 8-66.
8-20-3-4 Front wheel - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the lower cover (4 screws).
lower cover
Figure 8-76 remove lower cover
8-64 Section 8-20 - Replacement of Wheels

8-20-3-4 Front wheel - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

2.) Loose the nut and remove down the wheel through the hole.
Figure 8-77 front wheel removal
8-20-3-5 Front wheel - Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new wheel (from the bottom side) in the frame.
2.) Fix the wheel with the nut.
3.) Mount the lower cover and fasten it with the 4 screws.
4.) Install the foot rest as described in Section 8-21-5 on page 8-66.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-20-3: Replacement of the Front Wheel - Functional Tests.

Section 8-21
Replacement of the Foot Rest
8-21-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-21-2 Tools
8-21-3 Preparations
8-21-4 Foot rest - Removal Procedure

2.) Flap the foot rest upwards.
3.) Unscrew the 4 screws in the upper line.
4.) Remove the foot rest.
Figure 8-78 foot rest removal
8-21-5 Foot rest - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new foot rest on the hinges.
2.) Screw on the 4 screws on the foot rest.
3.) Perform: FRU 8-21: Replacement of the Foot Rest - Functional Tests.
8-66 Section 8-21 - Replacement of the Foot Rest

Section 8-22
Replacement of User Interface (GEU)
8-22-1 Manpower
8-22-2 Tools
8-22-3 Preparations
4.) Remove rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1 on page 8-38.
8-22-4 User Interface - Removal Procedure

1.) Unlock the transport locking lever of the control console.
locking lever
the control console
Figure 8-79 locking lever under Control Console
2.) Disconnect both earth cables which are screwed on the left and right side panel (one is connected
to GEU and the other one the monitor table).
Figure 8-80 earth cables

8-22-4 User Interface - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Disconnect the SUB-D plug from the KVR1 Y-cable, unplug the UI Disp. cable and the PS2 cable
(keyboard, trackball) on the rear side of the board basket (GEF - PC-side) and pull them out through
the column.
earth cables
SUB-D cable
Figure 8-81 User Interface
4.) Remove the GEU inclusive the earth cable and pull it out through the column.
Figure 8-82 remove User Interface
8-68 Section 8-22 - Replacement of User Interface (GEU)

8-22-4 User Interface - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

5.) Swap the bolt, metal plate and the earth cables to the new GEU.
bolt plastic sleeves
metal plate
earth cable
Figure 8-83 swap bolt, metal plate and earth cables
8-22-5 User Interface - Installation Procedure

1.) Lock the transport locking lever (see: Figure 8-79) of the control console.
2.) Push the new user interface on the system until the stopper at the column.
(If the UI doesn’t fit, swap the “old” plastic sleeves to the new GEU.)
3.) Thread the cables through the column and connect them.
4.) Mount the rear cover.
5.) Mount the monitor mounting plate as described in Section 8-19-5 on page 8-60.
6.) Fix the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-53.
7.) Perform: FRU 8-22: Replacement of User Interface (GEU) - Functional Tests.

Section 8-23
Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU
8-23-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-23-2 Tools
8-23-3 Preparations
8-23-4 Distance Rod - Removal Procedure

1.) Using the flat wrench, turn the distance rod out of the GEU.
Figure 8-84 remove the distance rod on the GEU
8-23-5 Distance Rod - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw the new distance rod into the GEU.
2.) Mount the monitor mounting plate as described in Section 8-19-5 on page 8-60.
3.) Fix the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-53.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-23: Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU - Functional Tests.
8-70 Section 8-23 - Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU

Section 8-24
Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU)
8-24-1 Manpower
One person, 4 hours
8-24-2 Tools
slotted screwdriver
Socket wrench 5.5
Flat wrench 7, 10 and 14
Torx screwdriver T25x100
Hammer and piece of wood
8-24-3 Preparations
5.) Remove the user interface; see: Section 8-22-4 on page 8-67.
8-24-4 Bottom Housing - Removal Procedure

1.) At systems with SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644: Remove the probe holder from the bottom housing.
2.) Place the user interface backwards on a soft ground (e.g., soft foam plastic).
3.) Unscrew the 8 screws and then remove the bottom housing.
Figure 8-85 remove 8 screws on back of UI
4.) At systems with SNO less/equal ≤ A10643: Remove the probe holder from the bottom housing.

8-24-4 Bottom Housing - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

5.) Place the bottom housing backward on a soft ground. (The top housing put aside).
6.) Unscrew the 6 Torx screws (see: Figure 8-93 on page 8-77) and then remove the front handle.
7.) Unscrew the 13 screws and remove the EMC-shield.
globe joint and tension spring
EMC-shield
lock-mechanic
Figure 8-86 unscrew EMC-shield
8.) Using a slotted screwdriver, remove the retaining ring from the globe joint.
step 8.)
step 7.)
Figure 8-87 remove globe joint
9.) Remove the top globe joint from the bottom globe joint.
8-72 Section 8-24 - Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU)

10.)Using a slotted screwdriver, remove the tension spring from the bolt.
Figure 8-88 remove tension spring from bolt
11.)Unscrew the 2 screws from the lock-mechanic and remove it from the bottom housing.
Figure 8-89 remove lock-mechanic
12.)Remove the bolt, bottom globe joint and tension spring from the locking lever and then remove the
locking lever from the bottom housing of the user interface.
globe joint
bolt
tension spring
Figure 8-90 remove parts and then remove locking lever


13.)Remove the 2 plastic sleeves (with help of a piece of wood and hammer).
plastic sleeves
Figure 8-91 remove plastic sleeves
8-24-5 Bottom Housing - Installation Procedure

1.) Take the new GEU bottom housing and install the 2 plastic sleeves.
2.) Install the locking lever and then fix the bolt, the bottom globe joint and the tension spring on the
locking lever (see: Figure 8-90 on page 8-73).
3.) Mount the lock-mechanic and fix it with the 2 screws.
4.) Reattach the tension spring to the bolt.
5.) Fix the top globe joint together with the bottom globe joint on the locking lever and install the
retaining ring on the globe joint.
6.) Place the EMC-shield on the bottom housing of the GEU and fasten it with the 13 screws.
7.) At systems with SNO less/equal ≤ A10643: Place the probe holder on the bottom housing.
8.) Mount the upper housing on the bottom housing and fasten the 8 screws.
9.) Install the user interface, monitor plate and monitor as described in Section 8-22-5 on page 8-69.
10.)At systems with SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644: Mount the probe holder on the bottom housing.
11.)Perform: FRU 8-24: Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU) - Functional
Tests.
8-74 Section 8-24 - Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU)
Section 8-25
Replacement of the Probe Holder
NOTICE Replacement of the probe holder depends on the used trolley (GW), which is coupled to the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson® 730Expert serial number (SNO).
• GW130: SNO is less/equal ≤ A10643, see: Section 8-25-1 on page 8-75
• GW140: SNO is greater/equal ≥ A10644, see: Section 8-25-2 on page 8-76
8-25-1 Replacement of the Probe Holder (SNO ≤ A10643)
8-25-1-1 Manpower
One person, 2 hours
8-25-1-2 Tools
Flat wrench 10
8-25-1-4 Probe Holder - Removal Procedure

1.) Place the User Interface backwards on a soft ground (e.g., soft foam plastic) and unscrew the
8 screws (see: Figure 8-85 on page 8-71).
2.) Remove the bottom housing.
3.) Remove the probe holder.
Figure 8-92 remove probe holder

8-25-1-5 Probe Holder - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new probe holder on the bottom housing.
8-25-2 Replacement of the Probe Holder (SNO ≥ A10644)
8-25-2-1 Manpower
One person, 1 min.
8-25-2-2 Probe Holder - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the probe holder from the bottom housing of the User Interface.
2.) Place the new probe holder on the bottom housing.
8-76 Section 8-25 - Replacement of the Probe Holder

Section 8-26
Replacement of the Front Handle
8-26-1 Manpower
8-26-2 Tools
Flat wrench 10
8-26-3 Preparations
6.) Remove the bottom housing; see: Section 8-25-1-4 on page 8-75.
8-26-4 Front Handle - Removal Procedure

1.) Place the bottom housing backwards on a soft ground (e.g., soft foam plastic).
2.) Unscrew the 6 screws.
3 screws
3 screws
Figure 8-93 remove the 6 screws
3.) Remove the handle.
8-26-5 Front Handle - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new handle on the bottom housing and screw on the 6 screws.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-26: Replacement of the Front Handle - Functional Tests.

Section 8-27
Replacement of the Trackball
8-27-1 Manpower
One person, 3 hours
8-27-2 Tools
8-27-3 Preparations
8-27-4 Trackball - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the 2 cables and loosen the 2 screw-nuts.
disconnect the cables and

loosen the screw-nuts
(indicated with white arrows)
Figure 8-94 disconnect cables and loosen screws
2.) Remove the trackball kit.
8-27-5 Trackball Kit - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new trackball kit, fasten the 2 screw-nuts and connect the 2 cables.
3.) Install the User Interface, the monitor mounting plate and the monitor;
4.) Perform: FRU 8-27: Replacement of the Trackball - Functional Tests.
8-78 Section 8-27 - Replacement of the Trackball

Section 8-28
Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring
8-28-1 Manpower
One person, 5 min.
8-28-2 Trackball top fixation ring - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the fixation ring by turning it counterclockwise.
rotate clockwise to rotate counterclockwise

mount the fixing ring to remove the fixing ring
Figure 8-95 Trackball with top fixation ring
2.) Mount the fixation ring by turning it clockwise.

3.) Perform: FRU 8-28: Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring - Functional Tests.
Section 8-29
Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls
8-29-1 Manpower
One person, 5 min.
8-29-2 Tools
small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers
8-29-3 Cap and/or Spring - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the cap (for Rotation digipots or for Slider-potentiometer TGC).
2.) Mount the cap (for Rotation digipots or for Slider-potentiometer TGC).
3.) Perform: FRU 8-29: Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls - Functional Tests.

Section 8-30
Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard
NOTICE Pay attention to combination of alpha-numeric keybd. and Hardkey boards (GEU80 or GEU90 version)!
!! NOTICE:
i.e.: The alpha-numeric keyboard must only be used in combination with appropriate Hardkey board!
• GEU80 boards: KTZ208212 + KTZ208262 • GEU90 boards: KTZ300101 + KTZ300099
8-30-1 Manpower
One person, 3 hours
8-30-2 Tools
8-30-3 Preparations
8-30-4 Keyboard - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all cables, unscrew the 14 screws and then remove the alpha-numeric keyboard.
Figure 8-96 remove keyboard (14 screws)
8-30-5 Keyboard - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new keyboard, screw on the 14 screws and connect all the cables.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-30: Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard - Functional Tests.
8-80 Section 8-30 - Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard

Section 8-31
Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s)
NOTICE Pay attention to combination of Hardkey boards and alpha-numeric keybd. (GEU80 or GEU90 version)!
!! NOTICE:
i.e.: Hardkey board(s) must only be used in combination with appropriate alpha-numeric keyboard!
• GEU80 boards: KTZ208262 + KTZ208212 • GEU90 boards: KTZ300099 + KTZ300101
8-31-1 Manpower
8-31-2 Tools
Socket wrench 5.5
edge cutter (small)
8-31-3 Preparations
5.) Remove the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
8-31-4 Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the red and black loudspeaker cables.
2.) Unscrew the screw which fixes the loudspeaker cables.
3.) Disconnect all the other cables.
Figure 8-97 disconnect all the cables

8-31-4 Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Unscrew the 27 screws (+ 1screw that fixes also the ground cable) of the large board (Part A).
this screw
fixes also the
ground cable
Figure 8-98 unscrew 28 screws
5.) Remove the large board.
NOTICE Pay attention that the buttons below the boards (Part A and Part B) do not fall out of the support.
!! NOTICE:
In case they do, place them on the correct position (refer to Figure 8-102 on page 8-85).
6.) Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the “little” board.

(Only if it is also necessary to replace the small board Part B.)
large board
(Part A)
small board
(Part B)
“little” board
Figure 8-99 remove boards
8-82 Section 8-31 - Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s)

8-31-4 Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

7.) Unscrew the 8 screws of the small board (Part B).
Figure 8-100 unscrew 8 screws
8.) Remove the small board.
8-31-5 Hardkey Board(s) - Installation Procedure

1.) Separate the new board (into Part A and Part B) by means of an edge cutter.
2.) Place the small board (Part B) and fasten the 8 screws.
3.) Screw on the “little board” with 2 screws.
4.) Place the large board (Part A) and fasten the 27 screws (+ 1 screw that also fixes the ground cable).
5.) Connect all the cables.
6.) Connect the loudspeaker cables and fasten the screw to fix them.
8.) Mount the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
10.)If you have replaced the large board (Part A), perform Touch Panel Calibration as described in
Section 8-31-5-1.
11.)Perform: FRU 8-31: Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s) - Functional Tests.
8-31-5-1 Touch Panel Calibration

After replacement of the large board (Part A) the Touch Panel Calibration has to be performed.
1.) Power On/Boot Up the system; see: Section 3-6-2 on page 3-26.
NOTICE Do NOT touch the Touch Panel.

!! NOTICE:
Otherwise, a warning message appears that can not be erased without restart of the system.
2.) After Startup, perform Touch Panel Calibration with help of the keyboard (CTRL + ALT + T);
See ”2. If Touch Panel does not respond:” on page 6-8.

Section 8-32
Replacement of the Hardkeys
8-32-1 Manpower
8-32-2 Tools
Socket wrench 5.5
edge cutter (small)
8-32-3 Preparations
5.) Remove the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
8.) Remove the hardkey boards (Part A + Part B) as described in Section 8-31-4 on page 8-81.
8-32-4 Hardkeys - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the hardkeys (plastic buttons).
plastic buttons
Figure 8-101 remove hardkeys (plastic buttons)
8-32-5 Hardkeys - Installation Procedure

1.) Put the plastic buttons from the keytop kit in the correct position (see: Figure 8-102 on page 8-85).
2.) Place the small board (Part B), fasten the 8 screws, fix the “little board” with 2 screws and then
fasten the large board (Part A) with 27 screws (+ 1 screw that fixes ground cable);
see: Figure 8-99.
3.) Connect all the cables and the loudspeaker cables and fasten the screw to fix them.
5.) Mount the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
6.) Install the user interface, monitor mounting plate and the monitor; see: Section 8-22-5 on page 8-69.
7.) Perform: FRU 8-32: Replacement of the Hardkeys - Functional Tests.
8-84 Section 8-32 - Replacement of the Hardkeys

8-32-5 Hardkeys - Installation Procedure (cont’d)
MIRROR VIEW
of Control Console!
Figure 8-102 MIRROR VIEW of Control Console (for Reference only)

Section 8-33
Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console
8-33-1 Manpower
One person, 3 hours
8-33-2 Tools
Flat wrench 10
8-33-3 Preparations
8-33-4 Loudspeaker - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the 3 screws and disconnect the black and red cable.
disconnect
the cables
loosen the
3 screws
Figure 8-103 loosen screws and disconnect cables
2.) Remove the Loudspeaker.
8-33-5 Loudspeaker - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new Loudspeaker, screw on the 3 screws and connect the 2 cables.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-33: Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console - Functional Tests.
8-86 Section 8-33 - Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console

Section 8-34
Replacement of the Gel holder (PHG1)
8-34-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-34-2 Tools
8-34-3 Preparations
8-34-4 Gel holder - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the gel holder bowl.
2.) Loosen the 4 screws below the control panel (3 torx; 1 cross-notched screw).
slot for gel holder bowl
1 cross-notched screw
3 torx screws
Figure 8-104 remove gel holder support
3.) Remove the gel holder support.
8-34-5 Gel holder - Installation Procedure

1.) Fasten the new gel holder support with the 4 screws (3 torx; 1 cross-notched screw).
2.) Insert the gel holder into the slot of the support.
3.) Perform: FRU 8-34: Replacement of the Gel holder (PHG1) - Functional Tests.

Section 8-35
Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM)
8-35-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-35-2 Tools
8-35-3 Preparations
8-35-4 Disk Drive Module - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 4 screws below the shelf.
2.) Pull the Disk Drive Module in front so that you can reach the cables on the rear
3.) Unscrew the 2 screws, remove the cable protection and then unplug the cables.
screws
step 1 step 3
Figure 8-105 disk drive module (GEM)
4.) Remove the disk drive module.
8-35-5 Disk Drive Module - Installation Procedure

1.) Move the module in the above shelf of the unit.
2.) Plug in the cables on the rear side of the disk drive module.
3.) Screw on the module with the 4 screws.
4.) Boot up the system, press CTRL + ESC key simultaneously to display Windows start menu.
5.) Use the “Arrow” keys to open Windows Explorer, select “My Computer” and check drive letters.
The drive letters SHOULD be: C: System , D: User , E: Removable Disk (only visible if the optional
MOD-drive is installed), F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive) , R: Rescue
NOTE: If they are not assigned this way, reboot the system and then check again.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-35: Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM) - Functional Tests.
8-88 Section 8-35 - Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM)

Section 8-36
Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive
8-36-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-36-2 Tools
8-36-3 Preparations
2.) Remove the disk drive module (GEM); see: Section 8-35-4 on page 8-88.
8-36-4 DVD+(R)W-Drive - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 6 screws (3 on each side).
2.) Afterwards pull the cover of the disk drive module (GEM) forward to remove it.
screen
(or ECG-module)
Figure 8-106 unscrew screws and remove cover
NOTICE If the GEM contains the optional ECG-module (MAN6), you have to remove it before replacing
!! NOTICE:
the DVD+(R)W-drive; see: 8-57-2 on page 8-161.

8-36-4 DVD+(R)W-Drive - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Disconnect the DVD+(R)W-drive cables.
disconnect
DVD+(R)W-drive
cables
Figure 8-107 disconnect DVD+(R)W cables
4.) Unscrew the 8 screws (4 on each side) and remove the DVD+(R)W-drive.
8 screws for ECG

(4 on each side)
8 screws for DVD+(R)W

(4 on each side)
4 screws for MO
(2 on each side)
Figure 8-108 If available, remove ECG prior to DVD+(R)W-drive
8-90 Section 8-36 - Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive

8-36-5 DVD+(R)W-Drive - Installation Procedure

1.) Check the Jumper settings.
DVD- Drive
Figure 8-109 DVD-Drive - Jumper setting
2.) Place the new DVD+(R)W-drive and fasten the screws.

3.) Connect the DVD+(R)W cables. (In case of ECG-module, install it.)
4.) Push back the cover of the GEM and screw on the 6 screws.
5.) Install the disk drive module (GEM) as described in Section 8-35-5 on page 8-88.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-36: Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive - Functional Tests.
Section 8-37
Replacement of the MO-Drive
8-37-1 Manpower
One person, 80 min.
8-37-2 Tools
8-37-3 Preparations
2.) Remove the Disk Drive Module (GEM); see: Section 8-35-4 on page 8-88.
3.) Remove the DVD+(R)W-drive; see: Section 8-36-4 on page 8-89.

8-37-4 MO-Drive - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the MO-drive cables.
2.) Unscrew the 4 screws (2 on each side), see: Figure 8-108 on page 8-90 and remove the MO-drive.
disconnect
MO-drive cables
Figure 8-110 disconnect MO cables
8-37-5 MO-Drive - Installation Procedure

1.) Check Jumper settings.
MOD-Drive
Figure 8-111 Jumper settings on MO-drive
NOTE: If the optional MO-drive is installed subsequently, the jumper on the CRB-board has to be removed; see:
Section 8-38-5 "CRB - Jumper Setting" on page 8-93.
2.) Place the new MO-drive and fasten the screws.

3.) Connect the MO-drive cables.
4.) Install the DVD+(R)W drive as described in Section 8-36-5 on page 8-91.
5.) Install the Disk Drive Module (GEM) as described in Section 8-35-5 on page 8-88.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-37: Replacement of the MO-Drive - Functional Tests.
8-92 Section 8-37 - Replacement of the MO-Drive

Section 8-38
Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board
8-38-1 Manpower
One person, 90 min.
8-38-2 Tools
8-38-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the DVD+(R)W drive; see: Section 8-36-4 on page 8-89.
4.) Remove the MO-Drive; see: Section 8-37-4 on page 8-92.
8-38-4 CRB - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables.
2.) Unscrew the 6 screws (see: Figure 8-112) which fasten the CRB board and remove the defect
board.
jumper
(on Pos. U5)
3 screws
3 screws
Figure 8-112 CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board
8-38-5 CRB - Jumper Setting

NOTICE GEM Box WITHOUT MO-Drive installed: The jumper on Position U5 (see: Figure 8-112) MUST be set.
!! NOTICE:
GEM Box WITH MO-Drive installed: The jumper on Position U5 (see: Figure 8-112) should NOT be set.
8-38-6 CRB - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CRB-board, fasten the 6 screws and reconnect all the cables.
2.) Install the MO-drive as described in Section 8-37-5 on page 8-92.
3.) Install the DVD+(R)W drive as described in Section 8-36-5 on page 8-91.
4.) Install the Disk Drive Module (GEM) as described in Section 8-35-5 on page 8-88.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-38: Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board - Functional Tests.

Section 8-39
Replacement of the Fan (inside module GEM)
8-39-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-39-2 Tools
8-39-3 Preparations
8-39-4 Fan - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 6 screws (3 on each side); see: Figure 8-106 on page 8-89.
3.) Loosen the 4 screws on the back of the GEM, remove the fan and disconnect the fan cable.
disconnect
the fan cable
Figure 8-113 loosen screws, remove fan and disconnect cable
8-39-5 Fan - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new fan and screw on the 4 screws on back of GEM.
2.) Connect the fan cable.
3.) Cover the GEM as described in Section 8-36-5 on page 8-91.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-39: Replacement of the Fan (inside module GEM) - Functional Tests.
8-94 Section 8-39 - Replacement of the Fan (inside module GEM)

Section 8-40
Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN)
8-40-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-40-2 Tools
8-40-3 Preparations
2.) Remove rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1-4 on page 8-38.
3.) Disconnect main power cable and earth cables.
earth cables
mains power cable
Figure 8-114 remove cables
4.) Disconnect the Standby switch cable (see: Figure 8-57 on page 8-50).
5.) Loose the 2 screws and pull out the Power supply (CPN).
Figure 8-115 remove CPN


6.) Remove the cover of the new CPN by loosening screws:
• at CPN6: 18 screws (12 on the top and 3 on each side)
• at CPN80-81: 3 screws (3 on the top)
CPN80-81
CPN6
Figure 8-116 unscrew screws
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting of mains input voltage is for 230V.

!! CAUTION: Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with other voltage (110V,
130V,...
Further procedures depend the Main Power Module (CPN) that has to be installed:
• Voltage Specific Modifications at CPN6, see: Section 8-40-4 on page 8-97

• Voltage Specific Modifications at CPN80-81, see: Section 8-40-5 on page 8-99
8-96 Section 8-40 - Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN)

8-40-4 Voltage Modifications at CPN6 (KTZ195905)
8-40-4-1 Change mains input voltage

1.) Set connections on CCF board as shown in information Table 8-4.
set wire bridge

between H21 and Hxx as
shown in table below
Figure 8-117 CCF board connections
Table 8-4 CCF Board Information Table
CCF Connectors, set the wire bridge between H21 and Hxx as shown below
Mains Voltage H19 H22 H23 H25 H21

240V X X
230V X X
220V X
130V X X
110V X X
100V X X
2.) Set “Mains-Voltage-Indicator” on the back of power supply (CPN) in accordance to input voltage
level (loosen the screw and rotate the indicator to show up the correct value).
Allen screw indicator shows input

voltage level (e.g., 230V)
Figure 8-118 Mains-Voltage-Indicator

8-40-4-2 Auxiliary voltage output for peripherals
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting for peripherals voltage output is for 230V.
!! CAUTION: Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with 115V.
1.) Choose auxiliary output

- for 115V use connection H5 to H4
H5 H7
H7
H5
H4 H4
Figure 8-119 CPY board - auxiliary output setting
2.) Install the Main Power Module as described in Section 8-40-6 on page 8-100.

8-40-5 Voltage Modifications at CPN80-81 (KTZ207486)
8-40-5-1 Change mains input voltage

1.) Set wire bridge connections on CCF board as shown in information Table 8-5.
set wire bridge between

xxxV and SEL connector
(e.g., 230V)
SEL
110V 130V 230V 240V
Figure 8-120 CCF board connections
Table 8-5 CCF Board Information Table
CCF Connectors
Mains Voltage 110V 130V 230V 240V SEL

100V - 115V
130V
230V
240V
2.) Set “Mains-Voltage-Indicator” on the back of power supply (CPN) in accordance to input voltage
level (loosen the screw and rotate the indicator to show up the correct value).
indicator shows input

Allen screw voltage level (e.g., 230V)
Figure 8-121 Mains-Voltage-Indicator

8-40-5-2 Auxiliary voltage output for peripherals
!! CAUTION: Stan
1.) Choose auxiliary output for 230V (see left image), or for 115V (see right image)
Standard
230V 115V
Figure 8-122 CPY board - auxiliary output setting
8-40-5-3 Exchange Fuse (F3) at CPN80-81
CAUTION Standard (factory) fuse protection is for 230V (= 1.6 Ampere).

!! CAUTION:
If you use it with 115V (needs 3.2 Ampere), the Fuse (F3) MUST be exchanged!
1.) Using a slotted screwdriver unscrew the cover for fuse protection (F3) and exchange the fuse.
(The fuse 3.2A for 115V can be found inside the CPN, see: Figure 8-123.)
exchange fuse (F3)

fuse inside
CPN module
Part numbers of fuses, see:

Table 9-8 on page 9-12
Figure 8-123 if you use 115V: exchange fuse 1.6V (= 230V) by fuse 3.2V (= 115V)
8-40-6 Power Supply - Installation Procedure

1.) Cover the CPN and fasten the screw (18 at CPN6 ; 3 at CPN80-81).
2.) Put the Power supply on the slides and slide it into the trolley.
3.) Fix the power supply with the two screws.
4.) Install the earth cable on the basket and trolley; see: Figure 8-135 on page 8-111.
WARNING
WARNING Please make sure that all the protective earth connections and GND-cables are
!! WARNING:
properly fixed!
5.) Install the switch cable on the power supply.
6.) Mount the rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-38.
7.) Plug in the main power cable.
8.) Perform: FRU 8-40: Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN) - Functional Tests.

Section 8-41
Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board
8-41-1 Manpower
8-41-2 Tools
8-41-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN); as described in Section 8-40 on page 8-95.
2.) Remove the cover of the CPN (see: Figure 8-116 on page 8-96).
Further replacement procedures depend on the installed Main Power Module (CPN):
• CPN6 with CPY3.P3 (KTZ195471) is installed, see: Section 8-41-4 on page 8-101
• CPN80-81 with CPY80.P1 (KTZ209338) is installed, see: Section 8-41-6 on page 8-103
8-41-4 CPY3.P3 (KTZ195471) Power Switch - Removal Procedure

NOTE: The CPY3.P3 Power Switch board is only used at CPN6 (KTZ195905).
1.) Disconnect all the cables.
NOTE: Keep in mind and mark all the removed cables! Don’t mix up colored cables.
screw
screw
Figure 8-124 disconnect all cables and mark them

8-41-4 CPY3.P3 (KTZ195471) Power Switch - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

2.) Unscrew the 7 screws; see: Figure 8-124 and Figure 8-125.
Figure 8-125 remove screws
3.) Remove the CPY-Board.
8-41-5 CPY3.P3 (KTZ195471) Power Switch - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CPY-Board.
2.) Screw on the 7 screws.
3.) Connect all the cables (don’t mix up cables).
4.) Choose auxiliary output (see: Figure 8-119 on page 8-98)
!! CAUTION: Stan

5.) Install the Main Power Module (CPN) as described in Section 8-40-6 on page 8-100.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-41: Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board - Functional Tests.
8-102 Section 8-41 - Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board

8-41-6 CPY80.P1 (KTZ209338) Power Switch - Removal Procedure

NOTE: The CPY80.P1 Power Switch board is only used at CPN80-81 (KTZ207486).
1.) Disconnect all the cables and unscrew the 6 screws.
screws
Figure 8-126 disconnect all cables (mark them) and unscrew the screws
2.) Remove the CPY-Board.
8-41-7 CPY80.P1 (KTZ209338) Power Switch - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CPY-Board.
2.) Screw on the 6 screws.
3.) Connect all the cables (don’t exchange the cables).
4.) Choose auxiliary output (see: Figure 8-122 on page 8-100)
!! CAUTION: Stan
6.) Perform: FRU 8-41: Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board - Functional Tests.

Section 8-42
Replacement of CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80-81 only)
8-42-1 Manpower
8-42-2 Tools
8-42-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN); as described in Section 8-40 on page 8-95.
8-42-4 CCF-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables and unscrew the 9 screws and then remove the CCF-board.
screws
Figure 8-127 disconnect all cables (mark them) and unscrew the screws
8-42-5 CCF-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CCF-Board and screw on the 9 screws.
2.) Connect all the cables (don’t mix up cables).
3.) Choose mains voltage input (see: Figure 8-120 on page 8-99)
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting of mains input voltage is for 230V.

!! CAUTION: Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with other voltage.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-42: Replacement of CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80-81 only) - Functional
Tests.
8-104 Section 8-42 - Replacement of CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80-81 only)
Section 8-43
Replacement of the Mains Power Switch (F1 - KTZ207733)
NOTE: Mains Power Switch F1 (Item No.: 403) is only used at CPN6 (KTZ195905).
8-43-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-43-2 Tools
slotted screwdriver or universal pliers
8-43-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN) as described in Section 8-40 on page 8-95.
8-43-4 Mains Power Switch - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the Mains Power Switch.
clips that
fasten the disconnect
mains power the (F1) Mains
switch module Power Switch
Figure 8-128 remove the Mains Switch (F1)
2.) Using the slotted screwdriver or an universal pliers press against the 4 clips (2 on each side) of the
mains power switch module and remove it.
8-43-5 Mains Power Switch - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Mains Power Switch module and connect the 4 cables as shown in Figure 8-128.
2.) Cover the CPN and fasten the 18 screws.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-43: Replacement of the Mains Power Switch (F1 - KTZ207733) - Functional Tests.

Section 8-44
Replacement of the Mains Power Input Connector (KTZ207574)
NOTE: Power Connector (Item No.: 404) is only used at CPN6 (KTZ195905).
8-44-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-44-2 Tools
8-44-3 Preparations
8-44-4 Mains Power Connector - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the two screws of the pull-out protection and disconnect the Mains Power cable.
loosen the 2 screws
disconnect the Mains Power Connector
Figure 8-129 remove the Mains Power Input Connector
2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Connector (black-, white-, and earth cable) and remove it.
8-44-5 Mains Power Connector - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Mains Power Connector and connect the 3 cables as shown in Figure 8-129.
2.) Plug in the Mains Power cable, montage the pull-out protection and fasten the 2 screws.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-44: Replacement of the Mains Power Input Connector (KTZ207574) - Functional
Tests.
8-106 Section 8-44 - Replacement of the Mains Power Input Connector (KTZ207574)
Section 8-45
Replacement of Mains Switch & Input Connector (KTZ209340)
NOTE: Power Switch and Input Connector (Item No.: 408) is only used at CPN80-81 (KTZ207486).
8-45-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-45-2 Tools
8-45-3 Preparations
8-45-4 Power Switch + Input Connector - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the two screws of the pull-out protection and disconnect the Mains Power cable.
3.) unscrew
screws
1.) loosen the 2 screws
2.) remove cables from the 4.) remove wire bridges and
connector/switch module mount them on new module
Figure 8-130 remove the Connector/Switch module
2.) Disconnect the connector/switch module (black-, white-, and earth cable).
3.) Unscrew the 2 screws and then remove the module.
4.) Remove the wire bridges from the old connector/switch module and mount them on the new one.
8-45-5 Power Switch + Input Connector - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Mains Power Switch and Input Connector module and fasten the 2 screws.
2.) Connect the 3 cables as shown in Figure 8-130.
3.) Plug in the Mains Power cable, mount the pull-out protection and fasten the 2 screws.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-45: Replacement of Mains Switch & Input Connector (KTZ209340) - Funct. Tests.

Section 8-46
Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN)
8-46-1 Manpower
One person, 1 hour
8-46-2 Tools
8-46-3 Preparations
8-46-4 Fan for Primary Power Supply - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the 4 screws on the front of the CPN to remove the grid.
fan cable inside CPN Fan

grid which covers the fan
Figure 8-131 remove the Fan of the Main Power Module (CPN)
2.) Disconnect the fan cable inside the CPN.

3.) Remove the fan.
8-46-5 Fan for Primary Power Supply - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new fan, cover it with the grid and fasten the 4 screws.
2.) Connect the fan cable as shown in Figure 8-131.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-46: Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN) - Functional
Tests.
8-108 Section 8-46 - Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN)
Section 8-47
Removement of the GEF-Box
8-47-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min. (for removal procedure)
8-47-2 Tools
8-47-3 Preparations
2.) Remove rear cover and ground cable; see: Section 8-10-1 on page 8-38.
8-47-4 GEF-Box - Removal Procedure

1.) Open all the cable clamps and remove the cables.
Figure 8-132 cable clamps
2.) Disconnect all the cables from the GEF-box.
NOTE: Mark all the connectors of the rear-side as a reference for cable routing purposes at reassembly the
GEF.

8-47-4 GEF-Box - Removal Procedure (cont’d)
Figure 8-133 wiring of GEF-Box
3.) Disconnect the Standby switch from the CPN (Primary Power Supply).
disconnect
Standby switch
from CPN
Figure 8-134 Standby switch on CPN
8-110 Section 8-47 - Removement of the GEF-Box


4.) Fix all cables on the side walls and remove the earth cable.
remove the
earth cable
power cable
in the slot
Figure 8-135 remove cables
NOTE: Make sure that the power cable is located in the predetermined slot of the power supply - CPN.
5.) Unscrew the 2 screws from the GEF-box and pull out the GEF-Box.
screws to
remove the
GEF-Box
Figure 8-136 remove the GEF-Box
NOTE: Avoid damage (snap off) and crushing the cables.
NOTE: Mark all the connectors of the PC-part as a reference for cable routing purposes at reassembly the GEF.

Figure 8-137 wiring of the PC-Part
6.) Disconnect the cables from the PC-part.

7.) Remove the GEF-Box.
8-47-5 GEF-Box - Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables to perform the Hardware-Upgrade check as
described in Section 8-54 "Hardware Check" on page 8-151.
CAUTION After replacement procedure of the complete Main Board Chassis (GEF), following steps have
!! CAUTION:
to be performed prior to reassembling the system!
3.) Re-program the Serial Number as described in Section 8-49-3-6 "Serial Number - Re-programming
Procedure" on page 8-128.
4.) Customize the Hard disk and load the proper User Settings (Backup) for Voluson® 730Expert;
see: Section 8-51-8 "Customizing the Universal Hard disk" on page 8-147.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-47: Removement of the GEF-Box - Functional Tests.
8-112 Section 8-47 - Removement of the GEF-Box

Section 8-48
Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards
To perform the replacement of the different FrontEnd-components see:
• Section 8-48-3 "Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board" on page 8-115
• Section 8-48-4 "Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board" on page 8-116
• Section 8-48-5 "Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board" on page 8-117
• Section 8-48-6 "Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board" on page 8-118
• Section 8-48-7 "Replacement of CPD - Sub-board on CPR" on page 8-119
• Section 8-48-8 "Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board" on page 8-120
• Section 8-48-9 "Replacement of CPK - Motherboard" on page 8-121
• Section 8-48-10 "Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board" on page 8-122
WARNING
WARNING Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD
!! WARNING:
precautions:
1.) Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection
point located on the rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector).
8-48-1 Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as described in Section 4-3-2 on page 4-3.
3.) Remove the GEF-box as described in Section 8-47-4 on page 8-109.

8-48-2 Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the cover of the GEF-box by loosening 11 screws (2 different screwdrivers required!) and
open the GEF-box.
The black arrows

indicate 4 countersunk
head screws.
Therefore use the
Philips 1 screw-driver.
For the white arrows

use the Philips 2
screw-driver.
Figure 8-138 GEF-Box
If mounted, remove the shielding

to replace the CPP-Board.
Note: not mounted at BT04 system
Figure 8-139 GEF-Box; arrangement of the boards
NOTICE If the shielding is mounted, you have to remove it before replacing the CPP-Board.
!! NOTICE:
8-114 Section 8-48 - Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards

8-48-3 Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board
8-48-3-1 Manpower
One person, 70 min.
8-48-3-2 Tools
4.) Open the GEF-box as described in Section 8-48-2 "Replacement Procedure" on page 8-114.
8-48-3-4 CPP - Removal Procedure

1.) If mounted, remove the shielding (see: Figure 8-139) which covers the CPP-Board.
2.) Remove the defect CPP-Board.
8-48-3-5 CPP - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the new board.
described in Section 8-54 on page 8-151.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-48-3: Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board - Functional Tests.

8-48-4 Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board
8-48-4-1 Manpower
One person, 70 min.
8-48-4-2 Tools
8-48-4-4 CRS - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the defect CRS-Board.
8-48-4-5 CRS - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the new board.
4.) Perform: FRU 8-48-4: Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board - Functional Tests.

8-48-5 Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board
8-48-5-1 Manpower
One person, 70 min.
8-48-5-2 Tools
8-48-5-4 CPZ - Removal Procedure

1.) Screw in the screws on the left and right side till the lid print (CPZ - cover board) lifts slightly.
2.) Remove the CPZ.
Figure 8-140 GEF with lid print (CPZ)
8-48-5-5 CPZ - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the new lid print (CPZ - cover board).
2.) Screw on the screws on the left and right side till the CPZ sinks slightly.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-48-5: Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board - Functional Tests.

8-48-6 Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board
8-48-6-1 Manpower
One person, 75 min.
8-48-6-2 Tools
5.) Remove the CPZ - cover board; see: Section 8-48-5-4 on page 8-117.
8-48-6-4 CPR - Removal Procedure

1.) After removing the lid print (CPZ), pull out the CPR - Beamformer Board.
Figure 8-141 location of CPR
8-48-6-5 CPR - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Beamformer Board (CPR).
2.) Install the CPZ as described in Section 8-48-5-5 on page 8-117.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-48-6: Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board - Functional Tests.

8-48-7 Replacement of CPD - Sub-board on CPR
8-48-7-1 Manpower
8-48-7-2 Tools
soldering iron
1.) Perform the preparations as described in Section 8-48-1 "Preparations" on page 8-113.
4.) Remove the CPR - Beamformer board, see: Section 8-48-6-4 on page 8-118.
8-48-7-4 CPD - Removal Procedure

1.) Desolder the defect CPD-Board(s) on the back of the CPR-Beamformer board (3 soldering points).
Figure 8-142 desolder CPD-Board
8-48-7-5 CPD - Installation Procedure

1.) Plug in the new CPD-Board properly and fix it in position by soldering.
2.) Insert the CPR-Beamformer board into the GEF-box.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-48-7: Replacement of CPD - Sub-board on CPR - Functional Tests.

8-48-8 Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board
8-48-8-1 Manpower
One person, 80 min.
8-48-8-2 Tools
8-48-8-4 CRW - Removal Procedure

1.) After removing the lid print (CPZ), pull out the CRW - CW-Doppler Board.
8-48-8-5 CRW - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CW-Doppler Board.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-48-8: Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board - Functional Tests.

8-48-9 Replacement of CPK - Motherboard
8-48-9-1 Manpower
8-48-9-2 Tools
8-48-9-4 CPK-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the CPU-Board as described in Section 8-48-10-4 on page 8-122.
2.) Remove all boards (FrontEnd, BackEnd as well as the CPP-Power Supply Board).
3.) Disconnect fan cables from S1 and S2.
4.) Unscrew 21 Philips screws to remove CPK.
Figure 8-143 CPK mounted
8-48-9-5 CPK-Board - Installation Procedure
NOTE: Don’t forget to equip the isolation washers before mounting the new board.
1.) Screw in 21 Philips screws.

2.) Connect the fan cables S1 and S2.
3.) Reinsert all the boards.
4.) Follow the reassembly instructions as described in Section 8-48-10-5 on page 8-124.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-48-9: Replacement of CPK - Motherboard - Functional Tests.

8-48-10 Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board
8-48-10-1 Manpower
8-48-10-2 Tools
WARNING
!! WARNING:
precautions:
8-48-10-4 CPU-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove Front-Bottom-Jacket–Plate.
Therefore unscrew:
• 8 screws on the right side (PC-side),

• 8 screws on the left side
Right Side (PC-side) Left Side
Figure 8-144 left and right side of the GEF-Box

8-48-10-4 CPU-Board - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

• 3 screws on the bottom side and
• 18 screws on the front side (probe holder bracket).
Bottom Side Front Side
Figure 8-145 bottom and front side of the GEF-Box
2.) Screw in the screws on the left and right side till the lid print (CPZ - cover board) lifts slightly.
3.) Remove the CPZ.
Figure 8-146 GEF with lid print (CPZ)

8-48-10-4 CPU-Board - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Unscrew 9 Philips screws to remove CPU - Probe Connector Board.
Figure 8-147 CPU mounted
8-48-10-5 CPU-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the CPU-Board and fasten the 9 Philips screws.
2.) Reinsert the lid print (CPZ - cover board).
3.) Screw on the screws on the left and right side till the CPZ sinks slightly.
4.) Montage the Front-Bottom-Jacket–Plate by fasten 8 screws on the right side (PC-side), 8 screws
on the left side, 3 screws on the bottom side and 18 screws on the front side (probe holder bracket).
5.) Perform: FRU 8-48-10: Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board - Functional Tests.

Section 8-49
Replacement of the BackEnd Boards
To perform the replacement of the different BackEnd-components see:
• Section 8-49-3 "Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board" on page 8-127
• Section 8-49-4 "Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board" on page 8-129
• Section 8-49-5 "Replacement of the CPM - PC-Motherboard" on page 8-130
• Section 8-49-6 "Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570)" on page 8-131
• Section 8-49-7 "Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422)" on page 8-
134
• Section 8-49-8 "Replacement of the VGA graphic card" on page 8-138
8-49-1 Preparations
3.) Remove the GEF-box as described in Section 8-47 on page 8-109.
8-49-2 Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the aluminum plate by loosening the 14 screws (Philips 2 screwdriver).
NOTICE For replacement of the PC-Board removing the aluminum plate is not necessary.
!! NOTICE:
Figure 8-148 remove the aluminum plate

8-49-2 Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
WARNING
!! WARNING:
precautions:
2.) Remove the necessary PC-components:

a.) CPE - Extension Board
b.) CKV - Video manager Board
c.) VGA graphic card
d.) PC-Board (Single Board Computer)
e.) all the cables from the PC-Board (Single Board Computer)
f.) TMDS cable
g.) Power-cable for the hard disk
h.) ATX 12 power supply cable
f
g
d h
Figure 8-149 remove components of the PC-part
8-126 Section 8-49 - Replacement of the BackEnd Boards

8-49-3 Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board
8-49-3-1 Manpower
8-49-3-2 Tools
1.) Touch UTILITIES and SYSTEM SETUP on the Touch Panel to invoke the setup desktop.
2.) Select the OPTION page.
NOTICE Please print out the OPTION page or write down codes which are shown in the “Key” fields
!! NOTICE:
(see: Figure 8-2: Option page on page 8-7).
7.) Follow the instructions as described in Section 8-49-2 "Replacement Procedure" on page 8-125.
8-49-3-4 CKV-Board - Removal Procedure
NOTE: Keep in mind all the removed parts and cables (especially memorize connection and polarity of the
TMDS cable)! If necessary, label or mark them.
1.) Loosen the screw which fixes the CKV-Video manager board. For location see Figure 8-149.
2.) Remove the CKV board.
8-49-3-5 CKV-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CKV-Video manager board and tighten the screw.
NOTE: Verify that you have inserted the CKV-board into the appropriate slot of the CPM-board.
2.) Perform the Hardware check as described in Section 8-54 on page 8-151.
3.) Fasten the 14 screws of the aluminum connector plate; see: Figure 8-148.
5.) Re-programm the serial number as described in Section 8-49-3-6 on page 8-128.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-49-3: Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board - Functional Tests.

8-49-3-6 Serial Number - Re-programming Procedure
NOTICE To re-program the System Serial Number, contact the On Line Center to get the necessary
!! NOTICE:
Serial Number code and “Permanent Key” !!!
Before calling OLC please prepare the following data:

• Hardware ID number
- Therefore, touch the UTILITIES key on the Touch Panel, select the SYSTEM SETUP key,
open the SYSTEM INFO page and write down the “Hardware ID” number.
Hardware ID number
Figure 8-150 System Info page
To program the System SNO, touch UTILITIES, SYSTEM SETUP and then select the OPTION page.
enter Serial Number Key
enter Permantent Key
Figure 8-151 Option page
To correct SNO of unit to A0XXXX you first have to enter a code (calculated from OLC) in the field
reserved for Serial Number (22 letters) instead of the old SNO. Then press ENTER.
NOTE: If the previous mentioned step was done correctly, the system will show the correct SNO.
The "Permanent Key" need to be reentered again to keep prior installed options!
DO NOT reboot the system before you have changed the serial number successfully!

8-49-4 Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board
8-49-4-1 Manpower
8-49-4-2 Tools
8-49-4-4 CPE-Board - Removal Procedure
1.) Loosen the screw which fixes the CPE-Extension board. For location see Figure 8-149.
2.) Remove the CPE board.
8-49-4-5 CPE-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CPE-Extension board and tighten the screw.
3.) Fasten the 14 screws of the aluminum connector plate; see: Figure 8-148.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-49-4: Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board - Functional Tests.

8-49-5 Replacement of the CPM - PC-Motherboard
8-49-5-1 Manpower
8-49-5-2 Tools
8-49-5-4 CPM-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables and remove all components of the PC-part (each board is fixed with a
screw). For their location see Figure 8-149.
1.) Loosen the 10 screws which fixes the CPM-Motherboard.

2.) Remove the CPM board.
Figure 8-152 replace CPM-Board
8-49-5-5 CPM-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CPM-Motherboard and tighten the 10 screws.
2.) Reinsert all the boards (in reverse order) and connect the cables; see Figure 8-149.
4.) Fasten the 14 screws of the aluminum connector plate; see Figure 8-148.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-49-5: Replacement of the CPM - PC-Motherboard - Functional Tests.
8-49-6 Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570)

NOTICE If the currently installed PC-Board is a Kontron Standard Board Computer (KTZ209332; Item No.:
!! NOTICE:
576), replacement of the Audio Adapter (Item No.: 701), the USB for PC-slots (Item No.: 724) and the
TMDS cable (Item No.: 727) is necessary. Additionally the PS2 Adapter (Item No.: 703) has to be used.
All these replacement parts are included in the SBC-Set (KTZ208570; Item No.: 575).
After the installation the system “C:” image MUST be loaded from System DVD!
* The currently installed Single Board Computer (PC-Board) is shown in the System Setup - System Info page;
see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-2, SLOT_CPU: IBASE or KONTRON
8-49-6-1 Manpower
One person, 85 min.
8-49-6-2 Tools
System DVD (in case that different SBC-version was installed)
8-49-6-4 PC-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables from the PC-board. For location see Figure 8-149.
TMDS cable and the USB cables)! If necessary, label or mark them.
KVS2
cable
parallel cable IDE cable ATX 12 cable Fan

TMDS cable USB cables
Figure 8-153 PC-board
2.) Loosen the screw which fixes the PC-board.

3.) Remove the PC-board.

8-49-6-5 PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new PC-Board and tighten the screw.
2.) Connect the fan to the Fan 1 connector on the PC-board.
Figure 8-154 Connector Location (SBC - IBASE IB820)
3.) Connect the power supply ATX 12 cable (from S3 on CPK-board) to the J1 connector.
4.) Connect the TMDS cable (from J3000 on CKV-board) to the J16 connector.
NOTICE If Kontron SBC-Board (KTZ209332) was installed, exchanging of the Audio Adapter (Pos. XS12), the
!! NOTICE:
USB PC-Slots (Pos. XS11 + XS14) and the TMDS cable is required! (see:Figure 8-155 on page 8-133)

8-49-6-5 PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) - Installation Procedure (cont’d)
CAUTION Pay attention to polarity when connecting the TMDS cable and the USB-cables!
!! CAUTION:
5.) Connect the USB-cables from Pos. XS11 to the J18 connector:
• cable from connector 1 -> Pin 1-4 ; cable from connector 2 -> Pin 5-8
6.) Connect the USB-cables from Pos. XS14 to the J19 connector:
• cable from connector 1 -> Pin 1-4 ; cable from connector 2 -> Pin 5-8
Figure 8-155 Connection of USB-cables (SBC - IBASE IB820)
7.) Connect the cable for Audio (XS12 - Mic and Line IN) to the J10 connector.
8.) Connect the serial cable from the parallel serial Adapter slot (XS13) to COM2 connector (J6).
9.) Connect the parallel cable from parallel serial Adapter slot (XS13) to PC-Boards J3 connector.
10.)Connect the IDE cable from the Hard disk to the IDE1 (Primary IDE) connector.
11.)Connect the KVS2 cable from CPE-Board (S5) to COM1 connector (J5).
12.)Connect the PS2 Adapter between SBC connector J23 and PS2 cable for User Interface.
13.)Connect the cable from the CPE-Board (Audio Sound IN) to the “Line Out” from the PC-Module.
14.)Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-179) and the mains power cable.
15.)Perform BIOS Settings for PC-Board as described in Section 8-49-7-6 on page 8-137.
CAUTION If Kontron SBC-Board was installed before, “Restore C:\ image” from System DVD MUST be
!! CAUTION:
done (see: Section 5-18-6-2 on page 5-92 or Installation Manual KTI105954).
16.)Perform the Hardware check as described in Section 8-54 on page 8-151.

18.)Perform: FRU 8-49-6: Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) - Functional Tests.
8-49-7 Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422)

NOTICE If the currently installed PC-Board is an IBASE Standard Board Computer (KTZ208570; Item No.: 575),
!! NOTICE:
replacement of the Audio Adapter (Item No.: 701), the USB for PC-slots (Item No.: 724) and the TMDS
cable (Item No.: 727) is necessary. All these replacement parts are included in the SBC-Set
(KTZ209332; Item No.: 576 respectively KTZ300422; Item No.: 577).
Additionally the PS2 Adapter (Item No.: 703) has to be removed.
After the installation the “Restore C:\ image” MUST be loaded from the System DVD!
• SW 4.0.7 (BT04) / SW 5.4.0 (BT05/08) or higher when installing SBC BT03/04 K2 (KTZ300422)
8-49-7-1 Manpower
One person, 85 min.
8-49-7-2 Tools
System DVD (in case that different SBC-version was installed)
8-49-7-4 PC-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables from the PC-board. For location see Figure 8-149.
NOTE: Keep in mind all the removed parts and cables! If necessary, label or mark them.
Audio
cable
parallel cable IDE cable TMDS cable ATX 12 cable Fan

USB cables
Figure 8-156 PC-board
2.) Loosen the screw which fixes the PC-board and then remove the PC-board.

8-49-7-5 PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) - Install. Proced.
1.) Insert the new PC-Board and tighten the screw.

2.) Connect the fan to the CPU FAN connector on the PC-board.
Figure 8-157 Connector Locations (SBC - Kontron)
3.) Connect the power supply ATX 12 cable (from S3 on CPK-board) to the PW2 connector.
4.) Connect the “big” connector of TMDS cable (from J3000 on CKV-board) to the DVI connector.
NOTICE If IBASE SBC-Board (KTZ208570) was installed, exchanging of the Audio Adapter (Pos. XS12), the
!! NOTICE:
USB PC-Slots (Pos. XS11 + XS14) and the TMDS cable is required! (see:Figure 8-158 on page 8-136)
Additionally the PS2 Adapter has to be removed (only used with IBASE SBC-Board IB820).

8-49-7-5 PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) - Install. Proced. (cont’d)

5.) Connect the USB-cables from Pos. XS11 to the USB2 connector.
6.) Connect the USB-cables from Pos. XS14 to the USB1 connector.
Figure 8-158 Connection of USB-cables (SBC - Kontron)
7.) Connect the cable for Audio (XS12 - Mic and Line IN) to the J2 connector.
8.) Connect the serial cable from the parallel serial Adapter slot (XS13) to the COM2 connector.
9.) Connect the parallel cable from parallel serial Adapter slot (XS13) to PC-Boards LPT1 connector.
10.)Connect the IDE cable from the Hard disk to the IDE1 (Primary IDE) connector.
11.)Connect the KVS2 cable from CPE-Board (S5) to the COM1 connector.
12.)Connect the PS2 cable for User Interface directly to the J4 connector.
NOTICE DO NOT use the PS2 Adapter between SBC connector J4 and the PS2 cable! (Otherwise the system
!! NOTICE:D
can boot up.) This adapter is ONLY used with the IBASE SBC-Board (KTZ208570).
13.)Connect the cable from the CPE-Board (Audio Sound IN) to the “Line Out” from the PC-Module.
14.)Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-179) and the mains power cable.
15.)Perform BIOS Settings for PC-Board as described in Section 8-49-7-6 on page 8-137.
CAUTION If IBASE SBC-Board was installed before, “Restore C:\ image” from System DVD MUST be done!
!! CAUTION:
• SW 4.0.7 (BT04) / SW 5.4.0 (BT05/08) or higher when installing SBC BT03/04 K2 (KTZ300422)
Operation see: Section 5-18-6-2 on page 5-92 or Installation Manual KTI105954.
16.)Perform the Hardware check as described in Section 8-54 on page 8-151.

18.)Perform: FRU 8-49-7: Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) -
Funct. Tests.

8-49-7-6 BIOS Settings for PC-Board

1.) Switch on system and press the DEL key immediately to enter the BIOS Setup.
2.) Enter the Bios Password: Rudi (case sensitive) and then press ENTER.
Standard CMOS
Features
Load GE-xxx Settings

where xxx stands for the
last valid version
Figure 8-159 BIOS - main menu
General operation and selection in BIOS and LINUX menu is done with:
• the alphanumeric keyboard
• the “Arrow” keys (right, left, up, down) and
• the “Enter” key on the keyboard
3.) Select “Load GE-xxx Settings” (xxx stands for the last valid version) and then press ENTER.
4.) Confirm the message with Y key and then press ENTER.
5.) Invoke “Standard CMOS Features” and press ENTER.
6.) Check Date and Time (if necessary correct them) and then press ESC.
7.) Press the DELETE ARROW key (= F10) on the alphanumeric keyboard to save and exit.
8.) Confirm the message with the Y key and then press ENTER.
The system restarts automatically.

8-49-8 Replacement of the VGA graphic card
8-49-8-1 Manpower
One person, 75 min.
8-49-8-2 Tools
8-49-8-4 VGA graphic card - Removal Procedure
1.) Loosen the screw which fixes the VGA graphic card. For location see Figure 8-149.
2.) Remove the VGA graphic card.
8-49-8-5 VGA graphic card - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new VGA graphic card and tighten the screw.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-49-8: Replacement of the VGA graphic card - Functional Tests.

Section 8-50
Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board
8-50-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-50-2 Tools
slotted screwdriver
8-50-3 Preparations
8-50-4 Lithium Battery - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables of the hard disk, unscrew 1 screw (see: Figure 8-161 on page 8-140) and
then turn the GEF-box to the left.
2.) Unscrew 2 screws (black arrows; see: Figure 8-162 on page 8-141) and move the HDD with
aluminum plate to the right.
3.) Remove the Lithium Battery using a slotted screwdriver.
Lithium Battery
Figure 8-160 Lithium Battery on PC-Board
8-50-5 Lithium Battery - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Lithium Battery.
2.) Move the HDD with aluminum plate to the left and fix it with the 3 screws.
3.) Connect all the cables to the hard disk.
4.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-179) and the mains power cable.
5.) Perform BIOS Settings for PC-Board as described in Section 8-49-7-6 on page 8-137.
8.) Perform: FRU 8-50: Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board - Functional Tests.

Section 8-51
Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD)
8-51-1 Introduction
With SN79009 a new universal Hard disk was introduced (KTZ196003). This HDD (Maxtor or Western
Digital hard drive) will replace (KTZ208800) and can be used on all Voluson 730 series. For creating a
complete Voluson® 730Expert (BT04 or BT05/08) HDD a System DVD (see: Table 9-13) is required.
8-51-2 Manpower
8-51-3 Tools
System DVD (see: Table 9-13 on page 9-18)
Service Dongle
8-51-4 Preparations
2.) Disconnect all external USB-devices (e.g., USB printer).
8-51-5 Hard disk - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables of the hard disk.
2.) Unscrew 1 screw and then turn the GEF-box to the left.
unscrew 1 screw
disconnect cables
of the hard disk
Figure 8-161 Hard disk
8-140 Section 8-51 - Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD)

8-51-5 Hard disk - Removal Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Unscrew 2 screws (black arrows) and move the HDD with aluminum plate to the right.
4.) Unscrew the 4 screws (white arrows) on the aluminum plate which fix the hard disk.
Figure 8-162 remove screws
5.) Remove the defect hard disk.
8-51-6 Universal Hard disk - Installation Procedure

1.) Check Jumper setting of the new hard disk drive.
NOTICE Jumper setting depend on used hard disk drive (Maxtor or Western Digital).
!! NOTICE:
MAXTOR WESTERN DIGITAL

1 jumper (left) no jumper
Figure 8-163 HDD Jumper setting
2.) Reinsert the new hard disk and screw on the 4 screws.
3.) Move the HDD with aluminum plate to the left and fix it with the 3 screws.
4.) Connect all the cables to the hard disk.
6.) Connect the Mains Power cable and mount the pull-out protection (see: Figure 4-1 on page 4-2).
7.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet.
8.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
9.) The system boots up and the “V730 Hard disk Configuration” menu appear (see: Figure 8-164).

8-51-7 Configure the Universal Hard disk
1.) In the displayed “V730 Hard disk Configuration” menu select [Change].
Change
Exit/Reboot
Figure 8-164 V730 Hard disk Configuration menu
2.) Insert the appropriate System DVD into the system´s DVD drive (see: Table 9-13 on page 9-18).
3.) After the LED of the drive stops flashing, press ENTER to mount CD and to start the procedure.
4.) Recovering will take some time. Please wait....
Figure 8-165 copying C: image
5.) When Hard disk is activated, press ENTER to reboot the system.
Figure 8-166 Press Enter to reboot the system

8-51-7 Configure the Universal Hard disk (cont’d)
!! NOTICE:
6.) Wait until “check disk” is finished and the “DOS” box (Figure 8-167) and the “System Settings
7.) Click onto the “DOS” box. The “DOS” window becomes active
click onto the

“DOS” window
8.) Press the S key on the keyboard to set the name of the computer. The “DOS” box proceeds:
9.) Press the C key on the keyboard to continue without activating the UIS.

11.)After restart, press the CTRL and ESC key simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
12.)Open Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys, select “My Computer” and check the drive letters.
C: System
D: User
E: Removable Disk (only visible if the optional MOD-drive is installed)
F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive)
R: Rescue

13.)If the “DOS” box is not still open, press the CTRL + ESC keys simultaneously to open the Windows
Start menu and then select “Activate UISApp”.
14.)When the “DOS” box is open, press the A key to activate the Ultrasound Application Software [UIS].
BT-Version:


15.)Skip the BT warning with CONTINUE.
Figure 8-173 skip BT warning with Continue
16.)Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box and then confirm with OK.
choose “Repair”
enter “Name of Technician”

(your name)
enter “Description”:
HDD replacement
17.)If the “Keep Masterkey” dialog appears, select REMOVE.

19.)Perform: FRU 8-51: Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD) - Functional Tests.

8-51-8 Customizing the Universal Hard disk

NOTICE In case that “Full Backup” is NOT available, contact to OLC will be necessary to get “Permanent key”.
!! NOTICE:
Before calling OLC, please prepare the following data:
• Needed option
1.) If not currently done, restart system with new HDD and boot up completely.
5.) Connect a probe and start any user program.
6.) Touch UTILITIES -> SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the System Setup desktop.
7.) Select the BACKUP page to load the appropriate User Settings.
NOTE: Reloading the User Settings only (Application Settings) from “D:\User Settings\ FactoryDefault\”
should ONLY be performed, if:
• no “Full Backup” is available (for the same system)
see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)"
NOTE: Reloading a “Full Backup” into the Voluson® 730Expert system is ONLY possible, if:
• “Full Backup” was saved (on the same system) before replacing the hard disk
see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)"
NOTE: If you have reloaded the “Full Backup”, step 8.) to step 12.) as well as step 15.) to step 17.)
in this section can be omitted.
8.) Select the OPTION page and enter the “Permanent Key” (from OLC) as described in Section 8-8
"Replacement or Activation of Options" on page 8-19.
9.) Select the GENERAL page and check and match the settings (e.g., Date/Time, Clinic Name, etc.).
10.)Select the USER SETTINGS page and match the settings (Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc.).
11.)Select the SERVICE page and match the Video Norm Standard (PAL/NTSC) and Video out (VHS2).
12.)Select the NETWORK page.
a.) click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button and check and match the DICOM
parameters.
b.) click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button and adjust the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties.
13.)Click the SAVE&EXIT button to store settings and exit the System Setup desktop screen.
14.)Reconnect the external devices, install all the printers and adjust the printer settings as described
in Section 3-7 "Printer Installation" on page 3-30. Afterwards check and match system settings in
the PERIPHERALS page (assignment of Remote PRINT keys, etc.).
15.)Touch UTILITIES -> MEASURE SETUP to invoke the Measure Setup desktop.
16.)Check and match settings of the MEASURE & CALC, the APPLICATION PARAMETERS and the
GLOBAL PARAMETERS page.
17.)Click the CLOSE button to store settings and exit the Measure Setup desktop screen.
NOTICE Save any presets, configurations and application settings to HDD and/or DVD or MO disk, to have the
!! NOTICE:
“Full Backup” available for next time.
Operation see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" .

Section 8-52
Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (2 fan)
8-52-1 Manpower
8-52-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 2 (long shaft)
8-52-3 Preparations
8-52-4 Fan for GEF (2 fan) - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the CKV-, and the CPE- board (for location see: Figure 8-149 on page 8-126).
2.) Unplug the fan connector from the CPK -Motherboard.
fan connector
Figure 8-175 unplug fan connector
3.) Loose, but do not remove the 4 screws using a long screwdriver and remove the fan box.
Figure 8-176 remove fan box
8-148 Section 8-52 - Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (2 fan)

8-52-5 Fan for GEF (2 fan) - Installation Procedure

1.) Install the fan box and fix it with the 4 screws.
2.) Plug on the connector of the fan on the CPK -Motherboard.
3.) Install the CKV-, and the CPE-board.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-52: Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) - Functional Tests.
Section 8-53
Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (single)
8-53-1 Manpower
8-53-2 Tools
8-53-3 Preparations
8-53-4 Fan for GEF (single) - Removal Procedure

1.) Unplug the fan connector from the CPK -Motherboard.
2.) Unscrew the 6 screws and remove the plate with the fan.
unplug the fan connector
Figure 8-177 remove the aluminum plate with the fan

8-53-4 Fan for GEF (single) - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Unscrew the 4 screws on the back of the fan and remove the fan from the aluminum plate.
grid which covers

the fan
Figure 8-178 unscrew the screws
4.) Loosen the 4 screws on to remove the grid from the fan.
8-53-5 Fan for GEF (single) - Installation Procedure

1.) Cover the new fan with the grid and fasten the 4 screws.
2.) Screw on the fan with the 4 screws on the aluminum plate.
3.) Install the fan box and fix it with the 6 screws.
4.) Plug on the connector of the fan on the CPK -Motherboard.
7.) Perform: FRU 8-53: Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (single) - Functional Tests.
8-150 Section 8-53 - Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (single)

Section 8-54
Hardware Check
8-54-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-54-2 Preparations
1.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-179) to perform the Hardware check:
a.) PS2 (connector for Mouse/Keyboard)
* PS2 Adapter is ONLY used, when the currently installed PC-Board is an IBASE Standard Board Computer.
If the PC-Board is a Kontron SBC, the PS2 cable [a] has to be connected directly to the PC-part of the GEF-box.
b.) UI Disp. (connector for User Interface Display)
c.) VGA (Monitor)
d.) Console
e.) CPN (Primary Power Supply)
f.) Standby switch
g.) Monitor (Power Supply)
f g
*
PS2
Adapter
b
a
e
c d
Figure 8-179 cable- minimum configuration (e.g., IBASE PC-Board installed)
2.) Connect the Mains Power cable and mount the pull-out protection (see: Figure 4-1 on page 4-2).
3.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet and switch ON the Circuit Breaker.
4.) Connect a probe.
5.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel to boot up the System.
6.) Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box and click OK.
7.) Start an User Program.
NOTE: Before system-reassembling (Section 8-55 on page 8-152), remove all cables from the GEF-box.

Section 8-55
Reassembly the System
1.) Remove all cables from the GEF-box.
NOTE: If the shielding was installed before the service, and you have changed the CPP-Board,
you have to cover it again with the shielding; see Figure 8-180.
Shielding
(CPP-Board)
Shielding must not
cover this plate!!!
Figure 8-180 GEF-Box without cover
2.) Cover the GEF-box.

3.) Fasten the 11 screws. (Don’t exchange them.)
The black arrows

indicate 4 countersunk
head screws.
Therefore use the
Philips 1 screw-driver.
For the white arrows

use the Philips 2
screw-driver.
Figure 8-181 GEF-Box
8-152 Section 8-55 - Reassembly the System

Section 8-55 Reassembly the System (cont’d)

1.) Insert the new GEF-box partly into the system and connect all the cables to the PC-part.
Figure 8-182 Connectors on PC-part of the GEF
1 USB-GEM Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM
2 Parallel Port Parallel port for PC-Line Printer
3 Audio MIC = Connector for Microphone ; Line-OUT = Connector for Sound card
4 USB USB port connectors
5 LAN1 Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
6 UI Disp. Connector for User Interface Display
7 USB USB port connector
8 RS-232 Connector for Global Modem
9 VGA no function
10 PS2 Connector for Mouse / Keyboard
*** --------- no function

Section 8-55 Reassembly the System (cont’d)

2.) After connection of all the cables to the PC-part push the GEF up to the back stop.
NOTE: Avoid damage (snap off) and crushing the cables.
3.) Fasten the 2 screws from the GEF-box.

4.) Connect all cables on the rear-side and tighten the connector-screws.
Figure 8-183 Connectors on the Main Module of the GEF
1 VGA1 Connector for the internal color video monitor
2 VGA2 Connector for an external color monitor
3 RGB Output for color video printer
6 VHS 1 Video 1 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC
7 VHS 2 Video 2 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, FCC
8 VHS Video IN: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL / CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC / FCC
9 S-VHS S-VHS IN
10 Audio IN Sound Audio IN R/L Sound
11 Remote BW Printer Remote control for BW Printer
12 AUX Supply Power Supply for Module GEM
13 Console Connector for Console
14 CPN Connector for Power Supply (CPN) input
15 Lamp Connector for external lamp
16 RS232-3 Remote control for Video Recorder
17 ECG Connector for MAN (ECG-preamplifier)
8-154 Section 8-55 - Reassembly the System

Diagnostic LED´s (for voltage check)

18 ---------------
1 = +15V ; 2 = -15V ; 3 = Fan ; 4 = +12V ; 5 = +5V ; 6 = +3.3V
19 Audio OUT / VTR Audio OUT / R/L Video Recorder
20 Audio IN / VTR Audio IN / R/L Video Recorder
5.) Lay the cables and fix them with the cable clips like shown in the Figure below.
Figure 8-184 wiring of GEF-Box
6.) Install the earth cable on the basket of the trolley; see: Figure 8-135 on page 8-111.
WARNING
WARNING Please make sure that all the protective earth connections and GND-cables are
!! WARNING:
properly fixed!
7.) Connect the GND ground-cable at the rear-cover;
see: Figure 8-44: GND ground cable on page 8-38.
8.) Mount the rear cover, fasten the 2 screws and cover them with the plastic caps;
see: Figure 8-43: remove rear cover plate on page 8-38.

Section 8-56
Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)
NOTICE Table 9-13 on page 9-18 shows the available Key Cap Kits.
!! NOTICE:
Keys to be removed depend on the (special native) language kit.
8-56-1 Manpower
One person, 30 minutes
8-56-2 Tools
Use the removal tool which is part of the key cap kits, a commercial key removal tool, or a small-sized
slotted screwdriver or tweezers.
8-56-3 Preparations
8-56-4 Key Caps - Removal Procedure

1.) Carefully place the removal tool or a small flat screwdriver between the key cap you wish to remove
and its neighboring key cap (as shown in Figure 8-185 below).
2.) Gently lift the key cap, until it is completely loosened from its base.
3.) Remove the key cap.
Figure 8-185 removal tool in place
8-56-5 Key Caps - Installation Procedure

1.) Carefully place the appropriate key cap in positionon the keyboard, taking care to place the plastic
alignment pin in the correct position so that the key cap is the right way up and reads correctly.
2.) Push the key cap down until it snaps into position.
3.) Power On/Boot Up the system; see: Section 4-3-1 on page 4-2.
4.) Setup the Keyboard Language Layout as described in Section 6-7 on page 6-9 and then type with
the keyboard to check the function of each key.
5.) Perform: FRU 8-56: Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) - Functional Tests.
8-156 Section 8-56 - Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)
Section 8-57
Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date
NOTICE Normally auxiliary devices and peripherals come pre-installed with the Voluson® 730Expert system.
!! NOTICE:
Table 8-6 below outlines how to replace optional peripherals, or how to mount them at a later date
Table 8-6 replacing/mounting optional peripherals

8-57-1 Mounting/Replacing the DVR (DVD Recorder) 8-158
8-57-2 Mounting/Replacing of ECG Module (MAN6) 8-161
8-57-3 Mounting/Replacing the Global Modem 8-162
WARNING
WARNING After each installation, the leakage currents have to be measured according to
!! WARNING:
IEC 60601-1 respectively UL 60601-1.

8-57-1 Mounting/Replacing the DVR (DVD Recorder)

BT Version: The DVD Recorder (Sony DVO-1000MD) is only applicable if the system is upgraded to BT05/BT08
(SW5.x.x installed).
NOTICE Only one recording device - DVR (DVD Recorder) or VCR (VideoCassette Recorder) - can be
!! NOTICE:
connected at a time to the Voluson® 730Expert. Not both together.
8-57-1-1 Manpower
One person, 30 - 50 minutes (depending on auxiliary device)
8-57-1-2 Tools
Velcro Tape
NOTICE Following steps describe, how to install the DVD recorder (if it was not mounted before).
!! NOTICE:
8-57-1-3 Cable routing

1.) Perform preparations as described in Section 3-5-1 on page 3-8.
NOTICE Regardless whether other peripherals are installed, the DVD Recorder needs to be put on the lower
!! NOTICE:
shelf of the Voluson® 730Expert, for easy access to the DVD tray.
2.) If not already in position, swap cables from the lower hole with cables from the top hole
(refer to Figure 8-186 below). i.e.: Thread DVD recorder cables (2x S-VHS cable, 4x Audio cable,
1x Power cord,) through holes in the rear wall to the lower shelf of the Voluson® 730Expert.
Front View: BEFORE swapping cables Rear View
Swap cables
from the lower
hole with cables
from top hole.
Finally:
DVD cables
have to be
thread through
lower hole.
Thread DVD cables through LOWER

(left) hole in the rear wall of the system.
Figure 8-186 Swap cables
8-158 Section 8-57 - Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date
8-57-1-3 Cable routing (cont’d)

3.) If necessary, change the RS-232 cable.
NOTICE The old style RS-232 cable (9pin to 25pin) was used with VCR’s.
!! NOTICE:
The new style cable (9pin to 9pin) is needed for the DVD recorder.
a.) Unplug old RS-232 cable on rear side of device.

b.) Pull out the cable from the front side of the device. (The rear plug is smaller than the front plug.)
c.) Plug in provided RS-232 cable and put it through the lower, left hole.
Figure 8-187 Old and new RS-232 cable
8-57-1-4 Installation Procedure

1.) Plug all required cables on the rear side of the DVC Recorder.
For connection scheme refer to Figure 3-14 on page 3-15)..
2x S-VHS
4x Audio
Power cord
RS-232
Figure 8-188 DVD recorder cables and RS-232 cable
2.) Place the DVD recorder in the lower shelf of the Voluson® 730Expert system.
NOTE: Do not place the DVR on the cables.

8-57-1-4 Installation Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Fit the DVD recorder by wrapping the Velcro tape around the recorder and through the slots on the
board of the shelf and fasten it on the bottom side (see: Figure 8-189 below).
1 2
Fitting
Velcro tape
through slots
Fastened Velcro tape
Figure 8-189 Fastening Velcro tape
4.) After finishing the installation of the DVR, mount the rear cover plate.
5.) Press the power ON switch on the DVD recorder.
6.) Power ON/Boot up the system as described in Section 3-6-2 on page 3-26.
7.) Adjust the DVD Recorder settings as described in Section 3-5-7-1 on page 3-16.
8.) Check and if necessary change the Video Norm, see: Section 3-8-1-6 on page 3-58.
9.) Check and if necessary change the Recorder Type, see: Section 3-7-6 on page 3-55.
10.)Measure leakage currents according to IEC 60601-1 respectively UL 60601-1.
11.)Perform: FRU 8-57-1: Mounting/Replacing the DVR (DVD Recorder) - Functional Tests.
8-57-2 Mounting/Replacing of ECG Module (MAN6)
8-57-2-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-57-2-2 Tools
2.) Remove the Disk Drive module (GEM) from the trolley; see Section 8-35 on page 8-88.
8-57-2-4 ECG Module - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 6 screws (3 on each side).
Figure 8-190 GEM-box inclusive optional ECG module (MAN6) and optional MO-Drive
3.) Unscrew the 8 screws (4 on each side), see: Figure 8-108 on page 8-90 and remove the ECG-
module.
8-57-2-5 ECG Module - Installation Procedure

1.) Mount the new ECG preamplifier module (MAN6) with the 8 screws.
The front of the ECG must be even with the other drives.
2.) Lead the cable through the cable recess. Press the cable protection ring into the recess.
3.) Push back the cover of the GEM and screw on the six screws.
5.) Connect ECG connecting cable to the marked plug on the rear side of Voluson® 730Expert.
6.) Perform: FRU 8-57-2: Mounting/Replacing of ECG Module (MAN6) - Functional Tests.

8-57-3 Mounting/Replacing the Global Modem
8-57-3-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-57-3-2 Tools
Scissors
8-57-3-4 Global Modem - Removal Procedure

1.) Unplug all the cables from the modem and the power adapter.
power adapter
on modem
output cable AC
from power cable
power adapter
RS232 cable
phone cable
global modem
GEF-box
Figure 8-191 Modem location and connection
2.) Remove the modem (located on the top of the GEF-box).
8-57-3-5 Global Modem - Installation Procedure

1.) Remove the phone cable, modem, power adapter and velcro from the modem kit.
Figure 8-192 contents of the modem kit
2.) Cut the Velcro strip into six (6) squares.
NOTE: The easiest way to install velcro is to put both parts of the velcro together, cut the 6 squares, peel the
backing off one side of the “mated pair”, stick on the hardware, peel the other backing off and then stick
that hardware with both parts of velcro to whatever it is to be attached to.
This way, the alignment is perfect. Doing it separately is more difficult.
3.) Place two mated squares on the bottom of the power adapter and four mated squares on the bottom
of the modem in the approximate locations shown in Figure 8-193.
Figure 8-193 Stick on Velcro squares
4.) On the top of the modem, place two squares of velcro to match up with the squares on the bottom
of the power adapter as shown in Figure 8-193.
NOTE: For best alignment, place the power converter with the two mated velcro squares on the top of the
modem, ensure they stick. Separate the modem and converter separating the velcro squares.

8-57-3-5 Global Modem - Installation Procedure (cont’d)

5.) Attach the RS232 cable (1), the phone cable (2) and the output cable from the power adapter (3) to
the modem as shown in Figure 8-194.
RS232 cable (1)
output cable from

power adapter (3)
phone cable (2)
Figure 8-194 Modem Connection
6.) Check to ensure that the modem power switch is sent to the ON position as shown in Figure 8-195.
Power Switch
Figure 8-195 Modem Power Switch
7.) Place and secure the modem on to the four Velcro squares installed on the top of the GEF-box.
8.) Plug the AC power into the power adapter and mount the power adapter, with the two velcro
squares, on top of the modem; see: Figure 8-191: Modem location and connection on page 8-162.
For further connection details see: Section 3-5-5 "Global Modem Connection" on page 3-12.
NOTE: If the optional Global Modem is installed subsequently, checkout and configuration of the modem has
to be performed.
Section 8-58
Functional Checks after FRU replacement (Debrief Guidelines)
1.) Perform required Functional and/or Leakage Current tests based upon the FRU being replaced.
2.) Clarify the scripts to debrief a Service Dispatch using your pole's dispatch tool.
Use this script in the Service Comments when debriefing a Service Dispatch.
For a replaced FRU, use the following debrief script:
Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3, Section [fill in appropriate section].
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
And, if testing leaking current, use the following text.
Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3, Section [fill in appropriate section].
Leakage Current meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
FRU 8-2: Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure
see Functional and/or

Debrief Script
Section Leakage Current Test
8-7 Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-2.
Table 8-2 System Functional Checks Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
FRU 8-3: User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure

go to Section 4-5-2 on page 4-33
FRU 8-4: Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure
go to Section 4-5-4 on page 4-37
FRU 8-5: Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure

N/A
FRU 8-6: Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure

invoke EUM by pressing the F1 key
FRU 8-7: Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade

Debrief Script
Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Table 8-2 System Functional Checks Section 8-7.
FRU 8-8: Replacement or Activation of Options

Debrief Script
Table 8-2 System Functional Checks Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-8.
functional checks depend on activated option Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.

FRU 8-9: Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System

N/A
FRU 8-10: Replacement of Covers - Functional Tests

see sub-sections
FRU 8-10-1: Replacement of the Rear Cover - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
Table 8-2 System Functional Checks Section 8-10-1.
FRU 8-10-2: Replacement of the Top Cover - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-10-3: Replacement of the Side Panel (left) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-3-1 Power On / Boot Up Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
FRU 8-10-4: Replacement of the Side Panel (right) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-10-5: Replacement of the Door for Probe Cables - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
8-166 Section 8-58 - Functional Checks after FRU replacement (Debrief Guidelines)
FRU 8-10-6: Replacement of the Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-11: Replacement of the Guide for Probe cables - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-12: Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-13: Replacement of the Standby Switch - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-14: Replacement of the Monitor - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
6-3 Monitor Adjustment Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-14.
FRU 8-15: Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script

FRU 8-16: Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-17: Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
6-3 Monitor Adjustment Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-17.
FRU 8-18: Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp - Functional Tests

N/A
FRU 8-19: Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-20: Replacement of Wheels - Functional Tests

see sub-sections
FRU 8-20-1: Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO £ A10643) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-8-2 Brakes and Direction Locks Section 8-20-1.
FRU 8-20-2: Replacement of the Rear Wheel (SNO Š A10644) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-20-3: Replacement of the Front Wheel - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-21: Replacement of the Foot Rest - Functional Tests

N/A
FRU 8-22: Replacement of User Interface (GEU) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-8-1 Rotation of the Control Console Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
7-12-2 Control Console Test Section 8-22.
FRU 8-23: Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-24: Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
6-4 Control Console, Transport Lock Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-24.
FRU 8-25: Replacement of the Probe Holder - Functional Tests

N/A
FRU 8-26: Replacement of the Front Handle - Functional Tests

Debrief Script

FRU 8-27: Replacement of the Trackball - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
7-12-2 Control Console Test Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-27.
FRU 8-28: Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-29: Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
Section 8-29.
FRU 8-30: Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
6-7 Modification of Keyboard Layout Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
FRU 8-31: Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
Section 8-31.
FRU 8-32: Replacement of the Hardkeys - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
Section 8-32.
FRU 8-33: Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-4-4 Spectral Doppler Mode Checks Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-33.
FRU 8-34: Replacement of the Gel holder (PHG1) - Functional Tests

N/A
FRU 8-35: Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
7-13-19 MOD Troubleshooting Section 8-35.
FRU 8-36: Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
7-13-18 DVD/CD+(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive) Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-36.
FRU 8-37: Replacement of the MO-Drive - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-4-12 Using the optional MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)

FRU 8-38: Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-39: Replacement of the Fan (inside module GEM) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-40: Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
10-7-4 Grounding Continuity Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-40. Leakage Current meets allowable limits.
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
FRU 8-41: Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-42: Replacement of CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80-81 only) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-43: Replacement of the Mains Power Switch (F1 - KTZ207733) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-44: Replacement of the Mains Power Input Connector (KTZ207574) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-45: Replacement of Mains Switch & Input Connector (KTZ209340) - Funct. Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-46: Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-47: Removement of the GEF-Box - Functional Tests

Debrief Script

FRU 8-48: Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards - Functional Tests

see sub-sections
FRU 8-48-3: Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-48-4: Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-48-5: Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-48-6: Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
7-10-1-2 Asic Select / Apertur Min Section 8-48-6.
FRU 8-48-7: Replacement of CPD - Sub-board on CPR - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
7-10-1-2 Asic Select / Apertur Min Section 8-48-7.
FRU 8-48-8: Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-4-4 Spectral Doppler Mode Checks Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-48-8.
FRU 8-48-9: Replacement of CPK - Motherboard - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-48-10: Replacement of CPU - Probe Connector Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
4-4-10 Probe/Connectors Usage Proprietary Service Manual, Direction KTI105937, Rev 3,
Section 8-48-10.
FRU 8-49: Replacement of the BackEnd Boards - Functional Tests
see sub-sections
FRU 8-49-3: Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-49-4: Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script

FRU 8-49-5: Replacement of the CPM - PC-Motherboard - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-49-6: Replacement of the PC-Board “IBASE” (KTZ208570) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-49-7: Replacement of the PC-Board “Kontron” (KTZ209332 or KTZ300422) - Funct. Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-49-8: Replacement of the VGA graphic card - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-50: Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-51: Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-52: Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-53: Replacement of the Fan for GEF-box (single) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
FRU 8-54: Hardware Check

N/A
FRU 8-55: Reassembly the System

N/A
FRU 8-56: Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
6-7 Modification of Keyboard Layout
FRU 8-57: Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date
see sub-sections
FRU 8-57-1: Mounting/Replacing the DVR (DVD Recorder) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Section 8-57-1. Leakage Current meets allowable limits.
4-7-1 ECG Check Out Section 8-57-1.

FRU 8-57-2: Mounting/Replacing of ECG Module (MAN6) - Functional Tests

Debrief Script
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Section 8-57-2. Leakage Current meets allowable limits.
4-7-1 ECG Check Out Section 8-57-2.
Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
Section 9-1
Overview
This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the Voluson® 730Expert (BT04) and
Voluson® 730Expert systems that were upgraded to BT05 or BT08 (with BT04 Hardware installed).

9-1 Overview 9-1
9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-2
9-3 Parts List Groups 9-3
9-4 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware 9-4
9-5 User Interface (GEU Top Console) 9-7
9-6 Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts 9-9
9-7 Disk Drives (GEM) 9-10
9-8 Main Power Module (CPN) 9-11
9-9 Main Board Module (GEF) 9-13
9-9-1 FrontEnd (US-Part) 9-14
9-9-2 BackEnd Processor (PC-Part) 9-16
9-10 Options and Upgrades 9-18
9-11 Miscellaneous Cables 9-21
9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories 9-28
9-13 Probes 9-32
9-13-1 2D-Probes 9-32
9-13-2 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes 9-34
9-13-3 CW-Pencil Probes 9-36
9-14 Biopsy Needle Guides 9-37
9-15 Compatibility (Overview) 9-39
Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-1

Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
• CKV - Video Converter Board
• CPD - Sub-Board on Beamformer (CPR)
• CPE - Motherboard Extension (Backpanel I/O-Card)
• CPK - Motherboard of GEF-Module
• CPM - PC-Motherboard
• CPN - Primary Power Supply Module
• CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage
• CPR - Beamformer Motherboard
• CPU - Probe Connector Board
• CPY - Power Switch Board
• CPZ - Cover Board
• CRB - USB to IDE Converter Board
• CRS - Signal Processing Board
• CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional)
• EUM - Electronic User Manual
• FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub
• FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)
• GEF - Main Board Module (Ultrasound (FrontEnd) and PC-Boards (Backend Processor)
• GEM - Disk Drive module (with or without MO-Drive and MAN)
• GES - I/O-Interface (User accessible)
• GEU - User interface: Keyboard, Touch Panel, EL-Display, TGC Unit
• GW - Console housing (except GEU and GEM)
• HDD - Hard Disk Drive
• MAN - ECG module
• MOD - Magneto Optical Disk
• SBC - Single Board Computer (PC-Board)
• SSW - Service Software (Service Platform)
• UIS - Ultrasound Application Software
9-2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations

Section 9-3
Parts List Groups
Figure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-2 Mechanical and user accessible parts
Item Part Group Name Table Number Description
Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware Table 9-3 on page 9-5
100- GW -Console housing (except GEU and GEM)
• Housing (GW) + add.Console Hardware cont´d Table 9-4 on page 9-6
200- User Interface (GEU Top Console) Table 9-5 on page 9-8 User interface: Keyboard, Touch Panel, EL-Display, TGC
250- Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts Table 9-6 on page 9-9 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
300- Disk Drives (GEM) Table 9-7 on page 9-10 GEM - Disk Drive module (with or without MAN)
400- Main Power Module (CPN) Table 9-8 on page 9-11 CPN - Primary power module
500- Main Board Module (GEF) Table 9-9 on page 9-13 GEF - Main Board Module
510- • FrontEnd (US-Part) Table 9-10 on page 9-14 Ultrasound (FrontEnd)
• FrontEnd (US-Part) cont´d Table 9-11 on page 9-15
570- • Back Processor (PC-Part) Table 9-12 on page 9-17 PC-Boards (Backend Processor)
600- Options and Upgrades Table 9-13 on page 9-18
700- Miscellaneous Cables Table 9-14 on page 9-21
Optional Peripherals and Accessories Table 9-15 on page 9-29

800- Printers, Video Recorder, ECG-Module (MAN), etc.
• Optional Peripherals and Access. cont´d Table 9-16 on page 9-30
System Manuals Table 9-17 on page 9-31
Probes
900- • 2D curved array Transducers Table 9-18 on page 9-32
910- • 2D linear- and phased array Transducers Table 9-19 on page 9-33
920- • Real-Time 4D Volume Probes Table 9-20 on page 9-34
930- • Real-Time 4D Volume Probes cont´d Table 9-21 on page 9-35
940- • CW-Pencil Probes Table 9-22 on page 9-36
950 Biopsy Needle Guides Table 9-23 on page 9-38

Section 9-4
Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware
GW130 GW140
SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644
101 114
112
103
102
115
108 120
117 118
113
106
116
104
105
107 119
109
111 110
Figure 9-2 Housing (GW)
9-4 Section 9-4 - Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware

Table 9-3 Housing (GW)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty FRU
101 Rear Handle for Trolley (≤ A10643) KTZ220031 Rear Handle for Trolley (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643) 1 1
102 Rear Metal Cover Plate (≤ A10643) KTZ154699 Rear metal cover plate complete (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643) 1 2
Side Panel left side panel left complete (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643)
103 KTZ208762 1 2
(SNO ≤ A10643) Compatibility: (only used at GW130 - KTZ154695)
Side Panel right side panel right complete (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643)
104 KTZ208763 1 2
(SNO ≤ A10643) Compatibility: (only used at GW130 - KTZ154695)
Through this door the side-panel-right can be opened to place the

Door for Probe cables
105 KTZ208737 probe-cables within the housing (SNO less/equal 1 1
(SNO ≤ A10643) ≤ A10643), (only used at GW130 - KTZ154695)
Cable Guide for Probes Cable Guide for Probes (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643)
106 KTZ14M787 4 1
(SNO ≤ A10643) (only used at GW130 - KTZ154695)
107 Foot rest (SNO ≤ A10643) KTZ207126 Foot rest (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643) 1 1
Housing with wheels, backpanel with connectors

108 GW130 Trolley Voluson® 730Expert KTZ154695 and cables (SNO less/equal ≤ A10643) 1 2
(SNO ≤ A10643)
(can be replaced by GW140 - KTZ154734)
109 Blind Cap for Wheels KTZ14M871 Cover for the rear wheels 2 1
110 Rear Wheel (Ø175 mm x 32) KTZ211081 Rear wheel non-steerable 2 1
111 Steerable Wheel KTZ211080 Front wheel steerable 2 1
112 Blind Cap for rear screws KTZ208109 covers housing screws to make them invisible 2 1
113 Monitor Mounting Plate KTZ134110 Monitor mounting plate 1 1

Voluson® 730Expert
Rear Handle for Trolley, silver Rear Handle for Trolley, silver colored
114 KTZ134468 1 1
(SNO ≥ A10644) (SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644), (can replace KTZ220031)
Rear Metal Cover Plate Rear metal cover plate complete

115 KTZ154728 1 2
Guide for Probe cables - optional (SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644)

Guide for Probe cables - optional
116 KTZ154736 includes 4 hooks and mounting rail; 1 1
(SNO ≥ A10644)
(only used at GW140 - KTZ154734)
Side panel Kit (left and right side panel);

117 Side panel Kit (left and right) KTZ154735 used in serial production SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 1 2
(SNO ≥ A10644)
Compatibility: (only used at GW140 - KTZ154734)
Cap Rubber (set includes 8 pieces)

Cap Rubber (8 pcs.)
118 KTZ154737 used in serial production SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 8 1
(SNO ≥ A10644) (only used at GW140 - KTZ154734)
Foot rest, silver Foot rest, silver colored

119 KTZ134467 1 1
Housing with wheels, backpanel with connectors

and cables; used in serial production SNO greater/equal
GW140 Trolley Voluson® 730Expert
120 KTZ154734 ≥ A10644; (can replace GW130 - KTZ154695) 1 2
(SNO ≥ A10644)
Notice: Guide for Probe cables (KTZ154736) is optional and has
to be ordered separately!

Section 9-4 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware (cont’d)
124
127
125
126
128
129
130
8 pieces
each
Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware
Table 9-4 Additional Console Hardware
External Rear Panel with electrical Signal- and Supply-

124 GES8 I/O Connection Panel KTZ195901 Connection-Cables to the V730-Main-Unit (internal) 1 1
Rear-Panel.
125 Hinge for Foot rest KTZ220018 Hinge for Foot rest 2 1
126 Top Cover of Trolley KTZ208119 Top Cover of Trolley 1 1
127 Standby Switch 24V/15A KTZ207125 Standby Switch left below the control panel 1 1
Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable Pull-out protection for Mains Power cable
128 KTZ14B667 1 1
(CPN6) (only used at CPN6 - KTZ195905)
129 KTZ154717 1 1
(CPN80-81) incl. screws (only used at CPN80-81 - KTZ207486)
“odds and ends” side panels mounting kit incl.

sockets, lock washers, screws and rubber caps
130 Side Panels Mounting Kit KTZ280046 - 1
(8 pieces. each)
9-6 Section 9-4 - Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware

Section 9-5
User Interface (GEU Top Console)
201
202
203 204 205

206 207 208
209 210
211
214
212 213
215 218
216 217
219
Figure 9-4 User Interface (GEU)

Table 9-5 User Interface (GEU)

Voluson® 730Expert Front Handle
201 Front Handle User Interface KTZ220039 1 1
(only used with GEU80 - KTZ154693)
Voluson® 730Expert Front Handle, silver colored

202 Front Handle User Interface KTZ209344 1 1
(can replace KTZ220039)
right hand Probe holder part

203 Probe Holder Kit V730 KTZ207105 1 1
(only used with GEU80 - KTZ154693)
right hand Probe holder part, removable

204 Probe Holder Kit V730, removable KTZ209346 1 1
(can replace KTZ207105)
generates X-Y-Coordinates of Trackball-Movements like

205 Trackball Kit V730 KTZ208264 1 1
moving a PC-Mouse
206 Trackball top fixation ring KTZ208256 Trackball for top fixation ring 1 1
207 KTZ214798 Caps for Rotation digipots 8 1

Caps for Rotation digipots (8 pcs.)
(set includes 8 pieces with premounted brackets)
Caps for TGC Slide-pot.

208 Caps for TGC Slide-pot. (8 pcs.) KTZ214818 8 1
(set includes 8 pieces with premounted brackets)
Alpha-numeric keyboard for Voluson® 730Expert English

Alpha-numeric keyboard
209 KTZ208212 Compatibility: can be replaced by KTZ300101, if the Hardkey 1 1
V730Expert - GEU80 (English)
boards are also exchanged
Alpha-numeric keyboard for Voluson® 730Expert English

(check if special key cap kit is needed;
210 Alpha-numeric keyboard KTZ300101 see: Table 9-13 on page 9-18) 1 1
V730Expert - GEU90 (English) Compatibility: Can replace KTZ208212, but this board can
only be used in combination with Hardkey board KTZ300099.
i.e.: It is recommended to order and exchange both boards!
211 Keytop Kit Voluson® 730Expert KTZ207558 Keytop Kit Voluson® 730Expert 1 1
Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson® 730Expert

Hardkey Board(s) (large board - Part A ; small board - Part B)
212 KTZ208262 1 1
Voluson® 730Expert - GEU80 Compatibility: can be replaced by KTZ300099, if the
alpha-numeric keyboard is also exchanged
Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson® 730Expert

(large board - Part A ; small board - Part B)
Hardkey Board(s) Compatibility: Can replace KTZ208262, but this board(s) can
213 KTZ300099 1 1
Voluson® 730Expert - GEU90 only be used in combination with alpha-numeric keyboard.
KTZ300101. i.e.: It is highly recommended to order and
exchange both boards!
Gel holder (PHG1) complete

214 KTZ154666 Gel holder complete PHG1 1 1
Voluson® 730Expert
GEU80 User Interface keyboard, trackball, display, special knobs, switches

215 KTZ154693 1 1
Voluson® 730Expert (can be replaced by GEU90 - KTZ154731)
GEU90 User Interface keyboard, trackball, display, special knobs, switches

216 KTZ154731 1 1
Voluson® 730Expert (can replace GEU80 - KTZ154693)
217 Bottom housing of GEU, painted KTZ214799 Bottom housing of GEU, painted, without interior 1 1
218 Loudspeaker for Top Console KTZ208132 Loudspeaker on GEU User Interface 2 1
219 Distance Rod for GEU KTZ14B596 Distance Rod for GEU 1 1
9-8 Section 9-5 - User Interface (GEU Top Console)

Section 9-6
Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts
251
252
250
253
254
257
256
255
Figure 9-5 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
Table 9-6 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
250 Color Monitor 15” Painted KTZ212115 AY-15CUI Color Image Monitor, lacquered 1 1
Monitor Foot Cover

251 Monitor Base Cover KTZ134365 1 1
used in serial production SNO less/equal ≤ A10643
Monitor Base Cover, silver colored; used in serial production

252 Monitor Base Cover, silver KTZ134474 1 1
SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 (can replace KTZ134365)
Monitor Mounting Set (fixing part for Monitor)

253 Monitor Mounting Set KTZ154713 1 1
only used with ANY Monitor (KTZ212115)
254 Set Monitor Front Housing KTZ208445 Set Monitor Front Housing (incl. cover of task lamp) 1 1
255 Set Monitor Housing KTZ208446 Set Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and top cover) 1 1
256 Monitor Switch Assembly 2300008 Common part with L5 and L3 1 1
257 Task Lamp 2317347 Common part with L5 and L3 1 1

Section 9-7
Disk Drives (GEM)
301 302 305 306 307 308
303
304
309
Figure 9-6 Disk Drives (GEM)
Table 9-7 Disk Drives (GEM)
301 Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W KTZ207256 DVD+(R)W Writer internal (no own cabinet) 1 1
DVD+(R)W Writer internal (no own cabinet);

302 Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W KTZ207257 1 1
can replace KTZ207256; (SW4.0.3 or higher is required)
303 Fan axial 62 x 62 x 14 mm KTZ207602 Fan for Air-Cooling of GEM (SCSI-Drive-Module) 1 1
Magneto-Optical-Drive 1.3GB internal

304 Disk Drive IDE MOD 1.3GB internal KTZ207269 1 1
(no own cabinet)
305 GEM10-10A MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W KTZ195887 MO-Drive and DVD+(R)W 1 2
MO-Drive and DVD+(R)W; can replace GEM10 -

306 GEM11-11B MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W KTZ196000 1 2
KTZ195887; (SW4.0.3 or higher is required)
307 GEM 20A DVD+(R)W KTZ195962 DVD+(R)W (without MO-Drive) 1 2
DVD+(R)W (without MO-Drive); can replace GEM20 -

308 GEM 21-21B DVD+(R)W KTZ196001 1 2
KTZ195962; (SW4.0.3 or higher is required)
309 CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board KTZ195891 CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board 1 1
9-10 Section 9-7 - Disk Drives (GEM)

Section 9-8
Main Power Module (CPN)
401
402
406
403
404
407
405
414 415
408
410 411 412

409
413
Figure 9-7 Main Power Module (CPN)

Table 9-8 Main Power Module (CPN)
CPN6 Power Supply Module

401 CPN6 Power Supply Module KTZ195905 1 1
(can be replaced by CPN80-81 - KTZ207486)
Board to switch on and shut down Ultrasound System

402 CPY3.P3 Power Switch KTZ195471 1 1
(only used with CPN6)
Mains Power Switch (F1) therm. protected 16A 2 Pol.

403 Mains Power switch (F1) KTZ207733 1 1
(only used at CPN6)
Mains Power Input connector

404 Mains Power Input connector KTZ207574 1 1
(only used at CPN6)
CPN80 Power Supply Module

405 CPN80-81 Power Supply Module KTZ207486 1 1
(can replace CPN6 - KTZ195905)
Board to switch on and shut down Ultrasound System

406 CPY80.P1 Power Switch KTZ209338 1 1
(only used with CPN80-81 - KTZ207486)
Power Primary Board

407 CCF100.P1 Power Primary Board KTZ209339 1 1
(only used with CPN80-81 - KTZ207486)
Mains Power Switch and Input Connector

408 Mains Power switch and Input connector KTZ209340 1 1
(only used at CPN80-81 - KTZ207486)
Electric Current Overflow Protection GEF

409 Fuse 10 Ampere 6.3 x 32 KTZ208239 4 1
(only used at CPN6)
used at primary and secondary side

410 Fuses 16 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KTZ209341 3 1
fuse for auxiliary power output at 110V setting

411 Fuses 3.2 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KTZ209342 1 1
fuse for auxiliary power output at 230V setting

412 Fuses 1.6 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KTZ209343 1 1
413 KVN2 - Fan for Primary Power Supply KTZ195440 KVN2 - Fan for Primary Power Supply (CPN) 1 1
414 KTZ14B667 1 1
(CPN6) (only used at CPN6 - KTZ195905)
415 KTZ154717 1 1
(CPN80-81) incl. screws (only used at CPN80-81 - KTZ207486)
9-12 Section 9-8 - Main Power Module (CPN)

Section 9-9
Main Board Module (GEF)
502
501
Figure 9-8 Main Board Module (GEF)
Table 9-9 Main Board Module (GEF)
501 Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) KTZ154678 Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) 1 1
502 Fan for GEF-box (single) KTZ154679 Fan for GEF-box (single) 1 1

9-9-1 FrontEnd (US-Part)
511
512
513
517
514
515
516
518
Figure 9-9 FrontEnd (US-Part)
Table 9-10 FrontEnd (US-Part)
511 CPR81.P11 Beam former Board KTZ195904 Beam former Board 1 1
Beam former Board

512 CPR82.P12 Beam former Board KTZ196024 1
(can replace CPR81 - KTZ195904)
electrical signal connection between CPU, CPR and CW-

513 CPZ50-50a.P3 Cover board KTZ195592 1 1
Board; contains Relays for Signal to CW-Board.
Signal Processing Board - obsolete, please order

514 CRS4.P3 Signal Processing Board KTZ195998 1 1
CRS4d (KTZ196080) or CRS5 (KTZ196074)
515 CRS4d.P3 Signal Processing Board KTZ196080 Signal Processing Board (replaces CRS4 - KTZ195998) 1 1
Signal Processing Board; can replace CRS4

516 CRS5.P3 Signal Processing Board KTZ196074 1 1
(KTZ195998) or CRS4d (KTZ196080)
517 CRW2e.P2 CW Doppler Board KTZ195723 CW-Doppler Board 1 1
518 CRW3.P2 CW Doppler Board KTZ196086 CW-Doppler Board (can replace CRW2 - KTZ195723) 1 1
9-14 Section 9-9 - Main Board Module (GEF)

9-9-1 FrontEnd (US-Part) (cont’d)
519
518
520
Figure 9-10 FrontEnd (US-Part) cont´d
Table 9-11 FrontEnd (US-Part) cont´d
Electrical Signal- and Supply-Connection for all

518 CPK80c.P5 Motherboard V730 KTZ207456 1 1
boards including PC-Motherboard (CPM)
519 CPP81-82.P3 Power Supply Board KTZ207274 Power Supply Board Output Power: 900 W 1 1
520 CPU5.P5 Module Board (BYM) KTZ195636 Probe Connector Board, Module Board 1 1

9-9-2 BackEnd Processor (PC-Part)
571
573
574
572
575
578
576
577
579
Figure 9-11 Back Processor (PC-Part)
9-16 Section 9-9 - Main Board Module (GEF)

Table 9-12 Back Processor (PC-Part)
571 CKV81.P6 Video management Board KTZ207418 PC-Video converter Board 1 1
572 CPE80.P5 Motherboard - Extension KTZ195902 Motherboard Extension 1 1
electrical Signal- and Supply-Connection between all

573 CPM3.P2 Motherboard KTZ195699 1 1
PC-Plug-In-Boards
Universal Hard disk for all Voluson 730 Universal Hard disk
574 KTZ196003 1 1
(V730, V730Expert and V730Pro) systems System/Boot DVD (see: Table 9-13) is required
Standard Single Board-PC (IBASE IB820), Pentium-IV

575 SBC BT03/´04 * KTZ208570 replaced by KTZ209332 or 1 1
KTZ300422 (requires SW 4.0.7 / 5.4.0 or higher)
Standard Single Board-PC (Kontron), Pentium-IV

can replace KTZ208570, but system “C:” image
576 SBC BT03/´04 K * KTZ209332 1 1
MUST be loaded! In this case, System/Boot DVD
(see: Table 9-13) is required
Standard Single Board-PC (Kontron 2), Pentium-IV

(SW 4.0.7 / 5.4.0 or higher is required)
can replace KTZ208570 and KTZ209332
577 SBC BT´03/´04 K2 * KTZ300422 Notice: If IBASE (KTZ209332) is replaced, the system 1 1
“C:” image MUST be loaded!
In this case, System/Boot DVD (SW 4.0.7 / 5.4.0 or
higher, see: Table 9-13) is required
578 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) KTZ208791 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) for SBC-Board 1 1
VGA graphic card for User Interface VGA Graphic card for UI Display (GEU)
579 KTZ207170 1 1
Display BayView; Matrox (second source)

Section 9-10
Options and Upgrades
Table 9-13 Options and Upgrades

bootable DVD for System HDD recovery (SW4.0.7)
System/Boot DVD BT04 (SW 4.0.7)
Contents: updated Linux rescue partition,
601 Note: KTZ196354 System C: Image (Windows 2000, newest MSPatches, 1 1
Refer to SN79009, which is the best Kontron2 SBC supplied, UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database
source for the latest revision. Repair Tool, etc.
bootable DVD for System HDD recovery (SW5.3.0)

System/Boot DVD BT05 (SW 5.3.0)
Contents: Contents: updated Linux rescue partition,
System/Boot DVD BT05/BT08 bootable DVD for System HDD recovery (SW5.4.0)
(SW 5.4.0) Contents: Contents: updated Linux rescue partition,
604 Voluson® 730Expert BT04 -> BT05 H48651KC BT05 Upgrade kit (incl. System DVD, Manuals, etc.) - N
Upgrade Kit
Voluson® 730Expert BT04 -> BT08

605 H48671DG BT08 Upgrade kit (incl. System DVD, Manuals, etc.) - N
Upgrade Kit
H48631P (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

606 Real Time 4D Biopsy - N
H48651EJ (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
H48631R (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

607 Real Time 4D - N
H48651EK (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
H48651DC (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

608 VOCAL II - Volume Calculation - N
H48651EL (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging encrypted Software Option string (password) which is
H38631T (BT04)
609 specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system - N
BT Version: H48651ES (BT05 only)
BT-Version: This feature is standard at BT08 systems (SW5.4.x).
H48631V (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

610 Interface for DICOM 3 standard - N
H48651EN (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
CRI - Compound Resolution Imaging encrypted Software Option string (password) which is
611 H48631W (BT04 only) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert system (BT04 only) - N
BT-Version:
BT Version: This feature is standard at BT05/BT08 systems (SW5.x.x).
STIC H48631W (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

612 - N
(Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) H48651ER (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
B-Flow encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

H48641A (BT04)
613 specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system - N
BT Version: H48651ES (BT05 only)
BT-Version: This feature is standard at BT08 systems (SW5.4.x).
H48641B (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

614 XTD View (Extended View) - N
H48651ET (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

615 SRI - Speckle Reduction Imaging H48651DD (BT04 only) - N
specific for each Voluson® 730Expert system (BT04 only)
SRI II - Speckle Reduction Imaging encrypted Software Option string (password), specific for
616 H48651EW (BT05/08) each Voluson® 730Expert system (BT05/08 only) - N
BT-Version:
BT Version: Only available at systems upgraded to BT05/08 (SW5.x.x).
9-18 Section 9-10 - Options and Upgrades

Table 9-13 Options and Upgrades
Coded Contrast Imaging - H48631Y (BT04) encrypted Software Option string (password) which is
617 - N
Contrast Media H48651EY (BT05/08) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system
Inversion encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

618 H48651DE (BT04 only) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert system (BT04 only) - N
BT-Version:
BT Version: This feature is standard at BT05/BT08 systems (SW5.x.x).
TUI - Tomographic Ultrasound encrypted Software Option string (password) specific for
619 Imaging H48651FA (BT05/08) each Voluson® 730Expert system (BT05/08 only) - N
BT Version: Only available at systems upgraded to BT05/08 (SW5.x.x).
BT-Version:
SonoVCAD Heart - Computer encrypted Software Option string (password) which is

620 Assisted Heart Diagnosis Package H48651DH (BT08 only) specific for each Voluson® 730Expert system (BT08 only) - N
BT Version: This feature is only applicable at BT08 systems (SW5.4.x).
BT-Version:
encrypted Application Package string (password) which is

621 Fetal Echo Package (BT08 only) H48661KP - N

622 Gyn Package (BT08 only) H48661KR - N

623 Breast Package (BT08 only) H48661KS - N
H46631J (BT04) stand alone PC-Software which can be used to view and
624 4D View PC Software H48651FB (BT05) work on data produced with Kretztechnik´s - N
H48651SZ (BT08) Voluson® 730Expert Ultrasound system
625 CW-Doppler Upgrade Kit H48641AA CW-Doppler Upgrade Kit incl. upgrade instructions - N
626 Key Cap Kit - French H48651JD kit includes special native language keys - N
627 Key Cap Kit - German H48651JE kit includes special native language keys - N
628 Key Cap Kit - Italian H48651JF kit includes special native language keys - N
KTZ154719
629 Key Cap Kit - Swedish kit includes special native language keys - N
H48651ED
KTZ154701
630 Key Cap Kit - Danish kit includes special native language keys - N
H48651EE
KTZ154718
631 Key Cap Kit - Norwegian kit includes special native language keys - N
H48651EF
KTZ154720
632 Key Cap Kit - Finnish kit includes special native language keys - N
H48651EG
KTZ154704
633 Key Cap Kit - Spanish kit includes special native language keys - N
H48651EH
NOTICE A sales order has to be obtained for item 604 - 628 (633)!
!! NOTICE:
Software Options (item 606 - 623): Once the order has been processed, the option string can be found
in the OKOS system and either entered by the customer, FE or Applications support.
BT-Version:(
BT Version: When it is desired to upgrade a Voluson® 730Expert BT04 system to BT05,
the Upgrade Kit (H48651KC) - providing all necessary components - MUST be ordered.
BT-Version:(
BT Version: When it is desired to upgrade a Voluson® 730Expert BT04 system to BT08,
the Upgrade Kit (H48671DG) - providing all necessary components - MUST be ordered.

Section 9-10 Options and Upgrades (cont’d)
BT-Version:
BT Version: "CrossBeam-CRI" and "Inversion" are optional at Voluson® 730Expert BT04 systems.
However, at BT05 or BT08 systems (SW5.x.x installed), or systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08
via upgrade kit, these features are standard.
BT-Version:Th
BT-Version:
BT-Version:
BT Version: "B-Flow" and "VCI" are optional at Voluson® 730Expert BT04 and BT05 systems. However, at systems
that were upgraded to BT08 (SW5.4.0 or higher) via upgrade kit, these features are standard.
A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate these features.
They remain optional and can be obtained via sales order.
BT-Version:
BT-Version:
BT Version: Application Packages are only available for systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.0 or higher).
For more details see: Table 5-2, “Software Options & Application Packages,” on page 5-17
9-20 Section 9-10 - Options and Upgrades

Section 9-11
Miscellaneous Cables
Table 9-14 Miscellaneous Cables
Set contains two adapters:

• Audio Adapter Line-IN/OUT
(used in combination with SBC-Board KTZ208570)
701 Audio Adapter KTZ208439 1 1

• Audio Adapter Line-IN/OUT
(used in combination with “KONTRON” SBC-Boards
KTZ209332 and/or KTZ300422)
Adapter Parallel port / serial COM1
702 Adapter slot parallel serial KTZ208148 1 1
Adapter for GEU PS2-cable

(only used in combination with SBC-Board KTZ208570)
703 Adapter Cable PS2 KTZ208137 1 1

12V/5V-Power Supply-Distributor-Cable (2x) for PC-

Component (yellow-black, red-black)
704 Cable HDD Y-Power KTZ212426 1 1
Power cable for Harddisk 4pin 230mm
705 Power Cable for Harddisk KTZ212401 1 1
HDD power connector to Pentium4 power connector
706 Cable ATX 12Volt KTZ212449 1 1
Cable from PC-Sound-StereoJack to External Rear

Panel
707 Cable Stereo Jack - Chinch KTZ212074 1 1
Data cable for IDE-Hard disk 40pin
708 Data Cable HDD ATA66/100 KTZ208147 1 1
9-22 Section 9-11 - Miscellaneous Cables

External Rear Panel with electrical Signal- and Supply-

Connection-Cables to the Voluson® 730Expert Main-
Unit (internal) Rear-Panel.
709 GES8 I/O Connection Panel KTZ195901 1 1
Electrical Power-Supply for Drives (5V/12V)
710 KGS10 Cable Power GEM-GEF KTZ195464 1 1
VCR -Remote Control Cable
711 KUG5 Remote Cable KTZ195606 1 1
electrical-Signal-Connection between CPS and

PIC_MG-Slot-CPU
713 KVS2 Cable Serial Interface KTZ195717 1 1
Cable from external rear Panel to the Voluson®

730Expert Main-Unit (internal) rear-Panel 1m
714 KVX1 Network Cable KTZ212016 1 1
Line cord for Supply from Main-Device to Sub-Devices
715 Monitor Power Connection Cable KTZ212116 1 1

Data Cable for (optional) Global Modem
716 Modem Data Cable KTZ212199 1 1
Power Connection Cable for (optional) Global Modem
717 Modem Power Connection Cable KTZ212032 1 1
Power Cord Europe 230V/240V
718 Power Cord Europe 230V KTZ212317 1 1
Power Cord Japan Hospital Grade
719 Power Cord Japan (Hosp. grade) KTZ212448 1 1

Power Cord United Kingdom 240V
720 Power Cord UK KTZ212441 1 1
Power Cord USA Hospital Grade
721 Power Cord USA (Hosp.grade) KTZ212402 1 1
Power Cord India
722 Power Cord India KTZ212452 1 1
Standby Switch Cables
723 Standby Switch Cable KTZ195514 1 1

Set contains two parts:

USB for PC-Slot, Connector on Backpanel.
Cables are connected to PC-Board.
Leads the USB-signals to the PC-Backpanel
724 USB to ICP CPU Board KTZ207029 2 1
USB for PC-Slot, Connector on Backpanel.

Cables are connected to PC-Board.
Leads the USB-signals to the PC-Backpanel
USB Cable from Disk Drive Module (GEM) to connector

“USB-GEM” on the PC-part of main board module (GEF)
USB Cable A to B
725 KTZ212125 1 1
(from GEM to PC-part on GEF)
VGA cable HD15-HD15
726 VGA cable HD15-HD15 KTZ212275 1 1

Set contains two cables:

Cable TMDS (Digital Video Cable from SBC to CKV)
727 Cable TMDS KTZ208600 1 1

(Digital Video cable from SBC to CKV)
Cable TMDS (Digital Video Cable from SBC to CKV)


Section 9-12
Optional Peripherals and Accessories
802
803
801
804
806 805
807
808
810
809
811
812
813
814
815
Figure 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories
9-28 Section 9-12 - Optional Peripherals and Accessories

Table 9-15 Optional Peripherals and Accessories
Analog B/W Video Printer KTZ211332

801 Analog B/W Video Printer NTSC/PAL - 1
(Sony UP-895MD) (H46801A)
802 PPP55 Connection Set KTZ195643 Connection Set UP-895MD - 1
Digital Color Printer KTZ211373

803 USB-Port - 1
(Sony UP-D23MD) (H46831B)
804 PZP60 Connection Set KTZ195776 Connection Set UP-D23MD - 1
Line Printer (Bluetooth) HP 5600 Series or KTZ211503 (Bluetooth Connection Set KTZ196002 is required)
805 - 1
Olivetti Job Jet 210 (license product of HP) (H46631L) obsolete - replaced by KTZ220510
Line Printer Bluetooth (USB-Port) without cartridge

Line Printer Bluetooth KTZ220510
806 (Bluetooth Connection Set KTZ196002 is required) - 1
(HP 5940) (H48651WE)
can be replaced by Canon printer KTZ300182
KTZ196002 Bluetooth Connection Set

807 Bluetooth Connection Set - 1
(H46631M) (HP 5600 + 5900 Series and Olivetti Job Jet 210 only)
Line Printer Bluetooth incl. Ink, Bluetooth Adapters

Line Printer Bluetooth KTZ300182
808 + power cable US and EU - 1
(Canon Pixma MP600 or MP610) (H48661MT)
(replaces HP printer KTZ211503 and KTZ220510)
KTZ280057 Line printer power cable set for US, EU and ROW (rest
809 Line Printer Destination Set - 1
(H48661MW) of world)
KTZ211317
810 Sony VCR SVO-9500 MD NTSC - 1
(H46801D)
KTZ211318
811 Sony VCR SVO-9500 MDP PAL - 1
(H46801C)
KTZ211368
812 Mitsubishi VCR HS-MD3000U NTSC (can replace Sony VCR SVO-9500 MD) - 1
(H46801D)
KTZ211369
813 Mitsubishi VCR HS-MD3000E PAL (can replace Sony VCR SVO-9500 MDP) - 1
(H46801C)
814 PRR50 Connection Set KTZ195492 Connection Set for VCR without remote control - 1
DVD Recorder (PAL/NTSC) incl. cable kit

DVD Recorder -PAL/NTSC KTZ154759
815 The DVD Recorder is only applicable if system were - 1
(Sony DVO-1000MD) (H48651ND)
upgraded to BT05/08 (SW5.x.x).
NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product!
BT Version: The DVD Recorder (Sony DVO-1000MD) is only applicable if system is upgraded to BT05/08 (SW5.x.x).

Section 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories (cont’d)
823
822
821
826
825
824
Figure 9-13 Optional Peripherals and Accessories cont´d
Table 9-16 Optional Peripherals and Accessories cont´d
KTZ195446
821 Foot switch (MFT7) Foot switch - 1
(H46681D)
KTZ154644 consists of ECG-preamplifier and patient connection

822 ECG-preamplifier (MAN 6) - 1
(H46681H) cable
2245794 Global Modem analog (Common Part with L9 and V7)

823 Global Modem (Analog) - 1
(H48641C) use modem cable: KTZ212199 + KTZ212032
KTZ195858 Converter from USB to RS-232 Serial Port

824 USB-RS232 Connection kit PRY - 1
(H46681S) (Connection Module - Report data)
contains blue, dark-gray, bright-gray and black

825 Touch-up Paint Set (gray-blue) KTZ154680 - 1
4x 2cl bottles incl. brush
Probe holder used for Real-time 4D endocavity

826 RIC-Holder KTZ225469 - 1
probes (RIC) during disinfection process
KTZ196204
DVD+RW Disk blank DVD+RW Disk (re-writable) -
(H48641D)
KTZ207077
MO Disk Media 1.3GB MO-Disk Media (Standard) - 1
(H46681M)
9-30 Section 9-12 - Optional Peripherals and Accessories

Table 9-17 System Manuals
Item Part Name Part Number Kretz # Description Qty FRU
Voluson® 730Expert Service Manual KTZ105936 KTI105936 1 N
Voluson® 730Expert
KTZ105937 KTI105937 1 N
Proprietary Service Manual
System User Manuals
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, English KTI105927 1 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, German H48631N KTI105956 1 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, French H48641MC KTI105958 1 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, Chinese H48651AR KTI105985 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, English H48651AJ KTI105828 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, German H48651AK KTI105929 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, Spanish H48651AL KTI105930 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, Portuguese H48651AM KTI105931 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, Italian H48651AN KTI105932 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, French H48651AP KTI105933 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, Chinese H48651AR KTI105934 1 N
Instruction Manual, Voluson® 730Expert, Japanese H48651AS KTI105935 1 N
Advanced Reference Manual

H48651DF KTI105951 1 N
Voluson® 730Expert, English
BT-Version:
BT Version: If your system was upgraded to BT05 or BT08, please ask your sales/service representative for
manuals belonging to these systems.

Section 9-13
Probes
9-13-1 2D-Probes
902
901 903
904
905
Figure 9-14 2D curved array Transducers
Table 9-18 2D curved array Transducers
KTZ195757 electronic broadband curved array transducer, frequency range of 2-7 MHz
901 AB2-7 - 1
(H46701T) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology, Pediatrics
902 AC2-5 - 1
(H46701U) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Pediatrics
903 4C-A (H46701AA) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology - 1
BT-Version:
BT Version: This probe is only applicable at system with BT05/08 software (SW5.x.x).
electronic endocavity broadband curved array transducer, frequency range

KTZ195386
904 IC5-9 of 5-9 MHz and a field-of-view of max. 150° - 1
(H46701F) Applications: Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology
electronic endocavity broadband curved array transducer, frequency range

5118195
905 IC5-9H of 5-9 MHz and a field-of-view of max. 150° - 1
(H40412LN)
Applications: Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology
9-32 Section 9-13 - Probes

9-13-1 2D-Probes (cont’d)
911 912
913
914 915
Figure 9-15 2D linear- and phased array Transducers
Table 9-19 2D linear- and phased array Transducers
KTZ195530 electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 4-10 MHz,
911 SP4-10 electronically steerable - 1
(H46701A)
Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 6-12 MHz,

KTZ195362
(H46701B) Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 10-16 MHz,

KTZ195531
(H46701C)
Applications: Small Parts, Orthopedics
KTZ195773 electronic broadband phased array transducer, frequency range of 2-5 MHz
914 PA2-5P - 1
(H46701V) Applications: Abdominal, Cardiology, Transcranial
KTZ195532 electronic broadband phased array transducer, frequency range of 6-8 MHz
915 PA6-8 - 1
(H46701J) Applications: Cardiology, Pediatrics/Neonatology

9-13-2 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
921 923
922 924 925
926
Figure 9-16 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Table 9-20 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency

KTZ156736
921 RAB2-5 range of 2-5MHz. - 1
(H46701M) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional Radiology

KTZ156767
922 RAB4-8P range of 4-8MHz. - 1
(H46701N)
Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology
KTZ156845 Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency

923 RAB2-5L range of 2-5MHz. - 1
(H48621X)
Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional Radiology

KTZ156846
924 RAB4-8L range of 4-8MHz. - 1
(H48621Z) Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology
Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer with a frequency

KTZ195763
925 RSP5-12 range of 5-12MHz and a scan width of 40 mm. - 1
(H46701W)
Applications: Small Parts, Periph.Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics
KTZ156965 Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer with a

frequency range of 6-16 MHz and a scan width of 40 mm.
926 RSP6-16 (H46701AB) - 1
Applications: Small Parts, Periph.Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics
BT-Version:
BT Version: This probe is only applicable at systems with BT05/08 software (SW5.x.x).

9-13-2 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes (cont’d)
931
934
932 935
933
Figure 9-17 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Table 9-21 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved array transducer with

KTZ195242
931 RIC5-9 a frequency range of 5-9MHz. - 1
(H46701R) Applications: Gynecology/Fertility, Obstetrics, Urology
Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved array transducer with

KTZ156920
932 RIC5-9H a frequency range of 5-9MHz. - 1
(H48651DA)
Applications: Gynecology/Fertility, Obstetrics, Urology
KTZ157094 Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved array transducer with

(H48661HJ) a frequency range of 5-9MHz.
933 RIC5-9W - 1
Applications: Gynecology/Fertility, Obstetrics, Urology
BT-Version:
BT Version: This probe is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (5.4.x or higher).
Real-time 4D Multi-Plane electronic broadband curved array transrectal

KTZ195534
934 RRE6-10 transducer with a frequency range of 6-10 MHz. - 1
(H46701S) Applications: Urology, Rectal wall
Real-time 4D neonatal broadband electronic curved array transducer with a

KTZ156936
935 RNA5-9 frequency range of 5-9MHz. - 1
(H48651DB)
Applications: Obstetrics, Pediatrics/Neonatology, Cardiology, Small Parts
BT Version: The probe “RIC5-9W” is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.x or higher).

9-13-3 CW-Pencil Probes
941 942
Figure 9-18 CW- Pencil Probes
Table 9-22 CW- Pencil Probes
KTZ195540 single element Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a
941 PCW4.0 nominal operating frequency of 4.0 MHz (no B-image) - 1
(H46701L)
Applications: Cardiology, Pediatrics
single element Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a

KTZ195538
942 SCW2.0 nominal operating frequency of 2.0 MHz (no B-image) - 1
(H46701K) Applications: Cardiology (suprasternal)

Section 9-14
Biopsy Needle Guides
950 951
956
955
952
953
954
957
960
959
958
962
963
961
966
964
965
Figure 9-19 Biopsy Needle Guides

Table 9-23 Biopsy Needle Guides
***** disposable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9H

950 E8385MJ - N
(disposable) needle diameter: < 1.65 mm
***** reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9H

951 H40412LN - N
(reusable) needle diameter: < 1.65 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9

952 PEC42 H46721F - N
needle diameter: < 1.8 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RIC5-9 / RIC5-9H / RIC5-9W

953 PEC63 H46721R - N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe SP6-12 / SP10-16

954 PEC64 H46721B - N
needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5 / RAB4-8P

955 PEC65 H46721M - N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16

956 PEC68 H46721P needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm - N
(can be replaced by PEC75)
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RRE6-10

957 PEC69 H46721S - N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe AB2-7

958 PEC71 H46721D - N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5L / RAB4-8L

959 PEC74 H48621Y - N
RAB Single- Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe RAB2-5-L / RAB4-8-L
960 H46701AE - N
angle bracket needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16

961 PEC75 H46721W needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm - N
(can replace PEC68)
RSP Single- Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16
962 H46701AD - N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RNA5-9

963 PEC76 H48651DG - N
RNA Single- Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe RNA5-9
964 H46701AF - N
3.5C Biopsy Starter Kit for probe AC2-5

965 3.5C Biopsy Kit E8385MG - N
needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide starter kit for probe 4C-A
4C Multi-angle E8385NA needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
966 - N
bracket BT Version: The probe for this biopsy guide is only applicable if system were upgraded to
BT05/08 (SW5.x.x).
BT-Version:
NOTICE A sales order has to be obtained for the Biopsy Needle Guides.
!! NOTICE:
9-38 Section 9-14 - Biopsy Needle Guides

Section 9-15
Compatibility (Overview)
• BAT = Battery
• CAB = Cable
• PCB = Printed Circuit Board
• PWS = Power Supply
• SPA = Spare part
• OPT = Option
NOTE: For Probe Compatibility List refer to Table 9-25 on page 9-45.
Table 9-24 Compatibility (Overview)
If replaceable by Can this part

Prime
Category Detailed Part Description successor, new replace old
Part number
compatible Part no. part?
BAT KTZ208791 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) N
CAB KTZ208137 Adapter Cable PS2 N
Audio Adapter for “IBASE” SBC-Board (KTZ208570)

CAB KTZ208439 N
Audio Adapter for “Kontron” SBC-Board (KTZ209332 and/or KTZ300422)
CAB KTZ212449 Cable ATX 12Volt N
CAB KTZ212426 Cable HDD Y-Power N
CAB KTZ212074 Cable Stereo Jack - Chinch N
Cable TMDS (Digital Video cable from SBC to CKV)

for “IBASE” SBC-Board (KTZ208570)
CAB KTZ208600 N
Cable TMDS (Digital Video cable from SBC to CKV)
for “Kontron” SBC-Board (KTZ209332 and/or KTZ300422)
CAB KTZ208147 Data cable HDD ATA66/100 N
CAB KTZ195464 KGS10 Cable Power GEM-GEF N
CAB KTZ195606 KUG5 remote cable N
CAB KTZ195473 KUR10 Cable Data SCSI N
CAB KTZ195717 KVS2 Cable Serial Interface N
CAB KTZ212016 KVX1 Network Cable N
CAB KTZ212199 Modem Data Cable N
CAB KTZ212032 Modem Power Connection Cable N
CAB KTZ212116 Monitor Power Connection Cable N
CAB KTZ212401 Power Cable for Hard disk N
CAB KTZ212317 Power Cord EUROPE 230V N
CAB KTZ212448 Power Cord JAPAN (Hosp. Grade) N
CAB KTZ212441 Power Cord UK N
CAB KTZ212402 Power Cord USA (Hosp. Grade) N


Prime
Part number
CAB KTZ212452 Power Cord India N
CAB KTZ195514 Standby Switch cable N
CAB KTZ2121125 USB Cable A to B (from GEM to PC-part on GEF) N
USB to ICP CPU Board ; for “IBASE” SBC-Board (KTZ208570)

CAB KTZ207029 USB to ICP CPU Board ; N
for “Kontron” SBC-Board (KTZ209332 and/or KTZ300422)
CAB KTZ212275 VGA cable HD15-HD15 N
PCB KTZ207273 CKV80.P5 Video management Board KTZ207418 N
PCB KTZ207418 CKV81.P6 Video management Board Y
PCB KTZ195902 CPE80.P5 Motherboard-Extension N
PCB KTZ207456 CPK80c.P5 Motherboard N
PCB KTZ195699 CPM3.P2 Motherboard N
PCB KTZ207274 CPP81-82.P3 Power Supply Board N
PCB KTZ195904 CPR81.P11 Beamformer Board KTZ196024 N
PCB KTZ196024 CPR82.P12 Beamformer Board Y
PCB KTZ195636 CPU5.P5 Module Board (BYM) N
PCB KTZ195471 CPY3.P3 Power Switch (only used with CPN6 - KTZ195905) N
PCB KTZ209338 CPY80.P1 Power Switch (only used with CPN80-81 - KTZ207486) N
PCB KTZ195891 CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board N
PCB KTZ195927 CRS2.P2 Signal Processing Board KTZ195977 N
PCB KTZ195977 CRS3.P2 Signal Processing Board KTZ195998 Y
KTZ196080
PCB KTZ195998 CRS4.P3 Signal Processing Board Y
KTZ196074
PCB KTZ196080 CRS4d.P3 Signal Processing Board KTZ196074 Y
PCB KTZ196074 CRS5.P3 Signal Processing Board Y
PCB KTZ195592 CPZ50-50a.P3 Cover Board N
PCB KTZ195723 CRW2e.P2 CW Doppler Board KTZ196086 N
PCB KTZ196086 CRW3.P2 CW Doppler Board Y
Y, but system
KTZ209332 “C:” image
PCB KTZ208570 SBC BT03/04 (IB820); Pentium IV
KTZ300422 MUST always
be loaded
Y, but system
SBC BT03/04 K (Kontron); Pentium IV KTZ208570 “C:” image
PCB KTZ209332
(recommended for use with CW-Doppler Board) KTZ300422 MUST always
be loaded
9-40 Section 9-15 - Compatibility (Overview)


Prime
Part number
Y, if IBASE
(KTZ208570) is
replaced, the
SBC BT´03/´04 K2 (Kontron); Pentium IV system “C:”
PCB KTZ300422
SW 4.0.7 (BT04) resp. SW 5.4.0 (BT05/08) or higher is required) image SW 4.0.7
/ SW 5.4.0 or
higher MUST be
loaded
PCB KTZ207170 VGA card for Touch Panel display N
PWS KTZ195905 CPN6 Primary Power Supply Module KTZ207486 N
PWS KTZ207486 CPN80-81 Primary Power Supply Module Y
SPA KTZ208148 Adapter slot parallel serial N
Alpha-numeric keyboard Voluson® 730Expert - GEU80

SPA KTZ208212 Pay attention to alpha-numeric keyboard and Hardkey board version! KTZ300101 N
This board must only be used in combination with KTZ208262
Alpha-numeric keyboard Voluson® 730Expert - GEU90

Y
SPA KTZ300101 Pay attention to alpha-numeric keyboard and Hardkey board version!
(compatibility!)
SPA KTZ208109 Blind Cap for rear screws N
SPA KTZ14M871 Blind Cap for Wheels N
SPA KTZ214799 Bottom housing of GEU, painted N
Cable Guide for Probes (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only)

SPA KTZ14M787 (only used at GW130 - KTZ154695) N
Caps Rubber (8 pcs.)

SPA KTZ154737 N
SPA KTZ214798 Caps for Rotation digipots incl. brackets (8 pcs.) N
SPA KTZ212818 Caps for TGC Slider-potentiometer incl. brackets (8 pcs.) N
SPA KTZ212115 Color Monitor 15" Voluson 730Expert/Pro N
SPA KTZ207256 Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W KTZ207257 N
Y, Software
SPA KTZ207257 Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W 4.0.3 or higher is
required
SPA KTZ207269 Disk Drive IDE MOD 1.3GB
SPA KTZ14B596 Distance Rod for GEU8 N
Door for Probe Cables (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only)

SPA KTZ208737 N
SPA KTZ207602 Fan axial 62x62x14mm N
SPA KTZ154678 Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) N
SPA KTZ154679 Fan for GEF-box (single) N
SPA KTZ195440 Fan for Primary Power Supply (KVN2) N
SPA KTZ207126 Foot rest (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only) KTZ134467 N


Prime
Part number
SPA KTZ134467 Foot rest, silver (SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644) Y
SPA KTZ220039 Front Handle User Interface (only used with GEU80 - KTZ154693) KTZ209344 N
SPA KTZ209344 Front Handle User Interface, silver Y
SPA KTZ208239 Fuse 10A, 6.3x32 (only used at CPN6 - KTZ195905) N
SPA KTZ209341 Fuse 16A, 6.3x32 (only used at CPN80-81 - KTZ207486) N
SPA KTZ209342 Fuse 3.2A, 6.3x32 (only used at CPN80-81 - KTZ207486) N
SPA KTZ209343 Fuse 1.6A, 6.3x32 (only used at CPN80-81 - KTZ207486) N
SPA KTZ154666 Gel Holder (PHG1) complete for Voluson® 730Expert N
SPA KTZ195887 GEM10-10A MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W KTZ196000 N
Y, Software
SPA KTZ196000 GEM11-11B MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W 4.0.3 or higher is
required
SPA KTZ195962 GEM20A DVD+(R)W KTZ196001 N
Y, Software
SPA KTZ196001 GEM21-21B DVD+(R)W 4.0.3 or higher is
required
SPA KTZ195901 GES8 I/O Connection Panel N
SPA KTZ154693 GEU80 User Interface Voluson® 730Expert KTZ154731 N
SPA KTZ154731 GEU90 User Interface Voluson® 730Expert Y
Guide for Probe cables - optional; (for SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 only)
SPA KTZ154736 (only used at GW140 - KTZ154734) N
SPA KTZ154695 GW130 Trolley Voluson® 730Expert KTZ154734 N
SPA KTZ154734 GW140 Trolley Voluson® 730Expert Y
Hard disk “Universal” for all Voluson 730 systems

SPA KTZ196003 N
(V730, V730Expert and V730Pro)
Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson® 730Expert - GEU80

SPA KTZ208262 Pay attention to alpha-numeric keyboard and Hardkey board version! KTZ300099 N
Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson® 730Expert - GEU90

Y
SPA KTZ300099 Pay attention to alpha-numeric keyboard and Hardkey board version!
(compatibility!)
SPA KTZ220018 Hinge for Foot rest N
SPA KTZ207558 Keytop Kit Voluson® 730Expert N
SPA KTZ208132 Loudspeaker for Top Console N
Mains Power Input connector

SPA KTZ207574 N
(only used at CPN6 - KTZ195905)
Mains Power Switch (F1) therm. protected 16A 2 Pol.

SPA KTZ207733 N
(only used at CPN6 - KTZ195905)
Mains Power Switch and Input Connector

SPA KTZ209340 N


Prime
Part number
SPA KTZ134365 Monitor Base Cover; SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 KTZ134474 N
SPA KTZ134474 Monitor Base Cover, silver colored; SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 Y
SPA KTZ208445 Monitor Front Housing (Set incl. cover of task lamp) N
SPA KTZ208446 Monitor Housing (Set incl. left-, right- and top cover) N
SPA KTZ154713 Monitor Mounting Set (only used with ANY Monitor - KTZ212115) N
SPA KTZ134110 Monitor Mounting Plate Voluson® 730Expert N
SPA 2300008 Monitor Switch Assembly (common part with L5 and L3) N
SPA KTZ207105 Probe Holder Kit (only used with GEU80 - KTZ154693) KTZ209346 N
SPA KTZ209346 Probe Holder Kit, removable Y
SPA KTZ14B667 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable (CPN6) N
SPA KTZ154717 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable (CPN80-81) incl. screws N
SPA KTZ220031 Rear Handle for Trolley (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only) KTZ134468 N
SPA KTZ134468 Rear Handle for Trolley, silver (SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644) Y
SPA KTZ154699 Rear Metal Cover Plate (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only) KTZ154728 N
SPA KTZ154728 Rear Metal Cover Plate complete (SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644) Y
SPA KTZ211081 Rear Wheel (Ø175 mm x 32) N
Side Panel left (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only)

SPA KTZ208762 N
Side Panel right (for SNO less/equal ≤ A10643 only)

SPA KTZ208763 N
Side Panel Kit (eft and right) incl. cable and plastic guide
SPA KTZ154735 (for SNO greater/equal ≥ A10644 only) N
SPA KTZ280046 Side Panels Mounting kit (only used at GW140 - KTZ154734) N
SPA KTZ207125 Standby Switch 24V/15A N
SPA KTZ211080 Steerable Wheel N
SPA 2317347 Task Lamp (common part with L5 and L3) N
SPA KTZ208119 Top Cover for Trolley N
SPA KTZ208264 Trackball Kit N
SPA KTZ208256 Trackball top fixation ring N
KTZ196052
KTZ196059
KTZ196070
OPT KTZ196046 System/Boot DVD SW4.0.0 (BT04) N
KTZ196084
KTZ196151
KTZ196354


Prime
Part number
KTZ196059
KTZ196070
OPT KTZ196052 System/Boot DVD SW4.0.1 (BT04) KTZ196084 Y
KTZ196151
KTZ196354
KTZ196070
KTZ196084
OPT KTZ196059 System/Boot DVD SW4.0.3 (BT04) Y
KTZ196151
KTZ196354
KTZ196084
KTZ196354
KTZ196151
KTZ196354
KTZ196144
KTZ196223
KTZ196308
OPT KTZ196075 System/Boot DVD SW5.0.1 (BT05) N
KTZ196313
KTZ196335
KTZ280060
KTZ196223
KTZ196308
KTZ196335
KTZ280060
KTZ196308
KTZ196313
KTZ196335
KTZ280060
KTZ196313
KTZ280060
KTZ196335
KTZ280060
OPT KTZ280060 System/Boot DVD SW5.4.0 (BT05/BT08) Y
NOTICE Pay attention to alpha-numeric keyboard and Hardkey board version! These boards MUST only be
!! NOTICE:
used in combination (KTZ208212 + KTZ208262 respectively KTZ300101 + KTZ300099).
i.e.: If a board has to be replaced, it might be possible that the matching board has to be exchanges too!
Therefore it is highly recommended to order and exchange both boards.

Section 9-15 Compatibility (Overview) (cont’d)
Table 9-25 Probe Compatibility (Overview)
Expert Expert Expert

Part Name Part Number H-Cat # Array Type
BT04 BT05 BT08
2D Curved Array Transducer

AB2-7 KTZ195757 H46701T Curved x x x
AC2-5 KTZ195784 H46701U Curved x x x
4C-A KTZ156952 H46701AA Curved x x
IC5-9 KTZ195386 H46701F Curved Transvag x x x
IC5-9H KTZ156920 H40422LL Curved Transvag x x x
2D Linear Array Transducer
SP4-10 KTZ195530 H46701A Linear x x x
SP6-12 KTZ195362 H46701B Linear x x x
SP10-16 KTZ195531 H46701C Linear x x x
2D Phased Array Transducer
PA2-5P KTZ195773 H46701V Phased x x x
PA6-8 KTZ195532 H46701J Phased x x x
CW Doppler (non-imaging) Pencil Probes
PCW 4.0 KTZ195540 H46701L Pencil x x x
SCW2.0 KTZ195538 H46701K Pencil x x x
Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
RAB2-5L KTZ156845 H48621X Curved x x x
RAB4-8L KTZ156846 H48621Z Curved x x x
RAB2-5 KTZ156736 H46701M Curved x x x
RAB4-8P KTZ156767 H46701N Curved x x x
RIC5-9 KTZ195242 H46701R Curved Transvag x x x
RIC5-9H KTZ156920 H48651DA Curved Transvag x x x
RIC5-9W KTZ157094 H48661HJ Curved Transvag x*
RRE6-10 KTZ195534 H46701S Curved Transrect x x x
RSP5-12 KTZ195763 H46701W Linear x x x
RSP6-16 KTZ156965 H46701AB Linear x x
RNA5-9 KTZ156936 H48651DB Curved Neonatal x x x
NOTE: requires Software 5.x.x (=BT05/08)

NOTE:* requires Software 5.4.0 or higher (=BT08)


Chapter 10
Care & Maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your Voluson® 730Expert system does not have any high
wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory.
However, some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and/or
inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the Voluson® 730Expert system and its peripherals.
These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance.
Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

10-1 Overview 10-1
10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2
10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2
10-4 Tools Required 10-5
10-5 System Maintenance 10-8
10-6 Using a Phantom 10-14
10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-14
10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-30
Ultrasound INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 10-31
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and
!! CAUTION:
even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,

!! DANGER:
AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND SWITCH OFF THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
(F1) BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER
IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION DO NOT operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place, to
!! CAUTION:
ensure optimal system performance and cooling.
When covers are removed, EMI may be present.
Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance 10-1
Section 10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see: page 10-31) provides the customer with
documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.
10-2-2 Quality Assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner.
The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or
appropriate designer.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period
so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and
maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for
a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3
Maintenance Task Schedule
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (see: page 10-3) specifies how often your Voluson®
730Expert should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the Voluson® 730Expert care & maintenance is performed
as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowlegde of your Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound
scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service.
Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule
assumes that you use your Voluson® 730Expert for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not
use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the
maintenance frequencies.
Abbreviations used in the Customer Care Schedule Table 10-2:
• D = Daily
• W = Weekly
• M = Monthly
• A = Annually
10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d)
Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Item Service at Indicated Time D W M A Notes
Clean the air filter grid with vacuum cleaner

Air Filter Grid from outside (left side of the system front • more frequently depending on
your environment
view).
Remove back panel and board chassis and

Air Filter Grid clean the housing from inside. (vacuum • more frequently depending on
your environment
cleaner and soft brush)
AC Mains Cable Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check weekly
Remove the Back Panel and check if all

cables are well seated and if there is no
Cables and Connectors mechanical damage visible; • also after corrective
maintenance
Check if they are fixed and well seated at the
correct position.
Clean alphanumerical keyboard, Functional Be careful not to get the cloth

User Interface
keys, Digital potentiometers, TGC-Shift
potentiometers. (vacuum cleaner, lukewarm
• too wet so that moisture does
not enter the loudspeakers,
soap water on a soft, damp cloth) TGC-Slider, or other keys!
Clean Top surface, Monitor, Touch Panel Be careful not to get the cloth
Monitor and Touch
Panel
and Probe holder with a fluid detergent in • too wet so that moisture does
warm water on a soft, damp cloth. not enter the entire system.
Clean and inspect the mechanical function

of wheels, casters, brakes and swivel locks
Mechanical parts as well as side door, foot rest, front and rear • Mobile Unit Check Daily
handle, and monitor holder.
Remove Dust and Coupling gel.
Control Panel
movement
Check Turn mechanism • Mobile Unit Check Daily
Trackball Check
Check proper operation
(Cursor movement X, Y direction)
• If failure occurs go to trackball
cleaning.
Remove top trackball cover; open the

Trackball Cleaning
trackball housing and take out the trackball.
Clean the X, Y axes of the trackball (soft
• Please record it in the systems
setup maintenance report
tissue and screwdriver shaft.
Power on the system. After complete boot

Error log process check the data in the Error log. after corrective maintenance
(Major for stuck keys at the user interface)
Check key operation (very important if after corrective maintenance

Key Operation
problems are recorded in error log) Use keyboard test software.
save the image filing data

Disk Drives
(Sonoview Data
Test Image filing (Sonoview) Import and
Export data capability (MO-, CD-RW Drive)
• • monthly or weekly on CD
depending on the number of
Backup)
examinations
Clean probes and probe cables and check

acoustic lens housing (cracks) and probe
Safe Probe Operation cables. In case of mechanical damage, • or before each use
don’t use them! Danger: Safety risk for
operator and patient.

Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Item Service at Indicated Time D W M A Notes
To detect air bubbles in filling liquid, shake

Probe Air bubbles the probe carefully and check abnormal
noise.
Probe connectors
Remove dust/dirt of all probe connectors.
Clean with vacuum cleaner if dust is visible.
•
Check actual software version and update if
recommended. Record version after the
update. Caution: Probe settings (Backup’s)
Software Version modified by the doctor need to be saved in • Also after corrective
maintenance.
advance. The new implemented backup’s
have to be modified manually following the
doctors need.
Enter data (Maintenance-/Upgrade-/Repair-

report to the Service database at the
Report to service
database
system. Note system configuration. • Also after corrective
maintenance.
The Data entry mask will appear
automatically after reboot the system.
System hour meter

Record the system hour meter value.
(only full hours)
• Also after corrective
maintenance.
Service database
Export System Status, System Data, Event
log to MO-Drive, or send it via Internet.
• Also after corrective
maintenance.
Also after corrective

Console Leakage
Current Checks
• maintenance or as required by
your facilities QA program.

Peripheral Leakage
Current Checks

Surface Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Endocavity Probe Also after corrective

Leakage •* maintenance or as required by
Current Checks your facilities QA program.

Measurement Accuracy
Checks
Check axial and lateral resolution (see Basic

User Manual Technical specifications).
Check Gain and TGC changes, vary the Also after corrective
Probe/Phantom Checks focus and check reaction on screen. Check • maintenance or as required by
deviation of brightness in the US-Image your facilities QA program.
(missing elements / probe cable defect).
Probe must be coupled as this test.
Functional Checks Check general functions and image Also after corrective
of all probes Section 10- appearance at human body with all • maintenance or as required by
5-2 on page 10-9 available Modes. your facilities QA program.
If you detected problems during the last test

Beamformer Test
Software
steps, perform Beamformer Test. • or in case of fault assumption
(Beamformer Self Test software)
* Twice a year is recommended.
10-4 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule

Section 10-4
Tools Required
10-4-1 Standard GE Tool Kit
The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the USA. Not all tools are required for PMs.
Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents
Tool ID Description Tool ID Description
9-45358 Pliers Retaining Ring 9-XL9971MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27mm
9-4078 Scribe 9-XL9972MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5mm
9-44572 Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16 9-XL9973MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2 mm
9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9974MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5mm
9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9975MM Xcelite-hex Blade 3mm
9-45385 Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch 9-XL9976MM Xcelite-hex Blade 4mm
9-45378 Pliers, Slip Joint 9-XL9977MM Xcelite-hex Blade 5mm
9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature 9-XL991CM Handle
9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature C2356E Screw starter - Kedman Quick Wedge
9-44776 Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc. BLBO Box - 18 Compartment
9-44601 Wrench, Adj., 4 inch DWL4283T Box - 5 Compartment
9-4151 Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby 9-41322 Pickup Tool, Claw type
9-41421 Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip 9-6757 6 pc Needle File Set
9-41594 Screwdriver, Blade 1/8 in. x 4 in. 9-9487 Utility Knife
9-41581 Screwdriver, Blade 3/16 in. x 4 in. 9-45341 Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch
9-39451 20' Steel Tape, locking Spring load 9-3001 Xacto Pen Knife
9-GH807 Ratchet, Offset, Slotted 9-HT62002 Solder Aid, Fork and Hook
68-412 Ratchet, Offset, Philips 9-4099 Mirror, Round, Telescoping
9-GH130 Tapered Reamer 9-GH3001 Steel Rule Decimal 6 inch
9-41584 Screwdriver, slotted 1/4 in.X 6 in. 9-GH300ME Steel Rule Metric 6 inch
9-4118 Screwdriver, Philips #2, Stubby 9-XL9920 Xcelite-hex Blade.050 inch
9-41293 Screwdriver, Philips #0 9-XL9921 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 inch
9-46677 Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric 9-XL9924 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 inch
9-34701 1/4 in. Standard.Socket set (19 pc) 9-XL9925 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 inch
9-43499 1/2 inch Socket 1/4 inch drive 9-XL9926 Xcelite-hex Blade 3/16 inch
9-4355 Flex Spinner 9-XL99764 Xcelite-hex Blade 7/64
9-43523 Breaker 9-XL99964 Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64
9-43531 6 inch Ext. 9-XLM60 Mini-screwdriver kit

Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents (Continued)
9-65283 Case 8.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2 in. Deep 9-45072 Pliers 6 inch Diagonal
9-46696 Hex Keys 9-XL100X Wire Stripper/Cutter 5 inch - 100X
9-39829 Torpedo Level, Magnetic 9-XL87CG Pliers - very fine needle nose-87CG
9-38461 Hammer, Ball Peen, 4 oz 9-WEWDT-07 Weller-Soldering-Replacement Tip(1)
9-4280 Universal Joint 1/4 inch 9-WS175-E Wiss - Surgical Scissors
9-WEW60P3 Weller - Soldering Iron, 3 wire KH174 Hemostat 5 inch Straight
9-WECT5B6 Weller - Soldering Iron Tip KH175 Hemostat 5 inch curved
9-WEWDP12 Weller - Desoldering Pump 9-Z9480121 Alignment tool (red)
93383 Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA Bat.)
9-GH408 Tweezers
21576 Brush - Bristle
9-4516 Pliers 4 1/4 inch Diagonal
Table 10-4 Overview of GE-2 Tool Kit Contents
GE-2 Sears Kit (#99034)
9-45381 Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 inch 9-44067 Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive
9-45092 Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 inch 9-42679 Socket 10MM Hex for 1/2 in. drive (2273333)
9-42882 Punch, Pin 3/32 inch 9-44262 Extension 10 inch for 1/2 in. drive (2273405)
9-42884 Punch, Pin 5/32 inch 9-4258 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch Adapter
9-42886 Punch, Pin 1/4 inch 9-34374 3/8 inch Metric Socket Set - 12 PT
9-42973 Cold Chisel 1/2 inch 9-44311 16mm Socket 12 pt.
9-GH77 Center Punch Automatic 9-33485 Metal Socket Tray
9-GH890 File Handle, Adj. 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray
9-31276 File, Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray
9-31277 File, Half Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-52068 Tap and Drill Set
9-31263 File, Flat Mill 8 inch 9-52722 #6 Tap
21045C Close Quarter Saw 9-52723 #8 Tap
9-44604 Wrench, Adj 10 inch High Speed Drill Set
9-41587 Screwdriver 5/16 inch x 8 inch #36 Drill
9-41586 Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 inch #29 Drill
9-GH19512 Countersink 1/2 inch 9-44046 3/8 inch Socket Set
9-44741 12 PC Combination Wrench Set
10-6 Section 10-4 - Tools Required

10-4-2 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment
10-4-2-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Table 10-5 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Tool Part Number Comments

Digital Volt Meter (DVM) minimum 5% accuracy, 3.5 digit and 200 Ohm range required
Electric Safety Analyzer DALE 600 46-285652G1 For 120V Unit
Electric Safety Analyzer DALE

46-328406G2 For 220V Units
600E
Leakage Current Ultrasound Kit 2113015 For 120V and 220V Units
46–194427P231 Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240
46–194427P279 V system
Anti Static Kit 46–194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap
46–194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap
46–194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord
46–194427P278 120V
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner
46–194427P279 230V
Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests
E7010GG 60 minute
SVHS VCR Cassette
E7010GF 120 minute
SVHS VCR Head Cleaner see VCR user manual for requirements
E8381AA blank 128 M disk

3.5” MOD MEDIA E8381AB blank 230 M disk
KTZ207077 blank 1.3 GB MO-disk
3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes
3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads
QIQ Phantom E8370RB RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS
CD-RW Media (minimum quad speed)
DVD+RW Disc Media blank H48641D blank 4,7GB DVD+RW disc
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Gloves
Screwdriver PH0
Screwdriver PH1
Screwdriver PH2

Section 10-5
System Maintenance
10-5-1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
Table 10-6 System Checks
Step Item Description

1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate.

2 Paperwork
Note all probes and system options.
3 Power up Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on.
Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.
5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and Touch Panel.
“Full Backup” all customer presets on Hard disk and/or DVD (see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup
6 Presets
(Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-35).
10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

10-5-2 Functional Checks (see also Chapter 4)

The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1 System Checks
1 B Mode Verify basic B Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
operation.
Verify basic M Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
2 M Mode
operation.
Verify basic CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that
3 C Mode
affect this mode of operation.
4 PD Mode Verify basic PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that
affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic Doppler Mode operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system
5 Doppler Modes
controls that affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic 3D Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
6 3D Mode
operation.
*Applicable Software Verify the basic operation of all optional modes .

7
Options Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.
8 Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.
9 Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions.
10 Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions.
Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area
11 Measurements calculation accuracy. Refer to the Basic User Manual, Chapter 13, for measurement accuracy
specifications.
NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system configuration and BT‘Version.
BT-Version:
BT Version: Some Software Options are only available at systems that were upgraded to BT05/BT08 (SW 5.x.x).

10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.
Refer to Table 3-8, “Approved Peripherals,” on page 3-59 for a list of approved peripherals.
Table 10-8 Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
2 DVD Recorder (BT05/08 only) Verify record capabilities of the DVD recorder. Clean heads and covers if necessary
3 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
Line Printer /
5 Verify hardcopy output of the Line or Bluetooth printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
Bluetooth Printer
6 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
7 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
DVD and/or Verify that the DVD-drive and/or optional MO-drive reads/writes properly
8
MO-Drive (export/recall image in Sonoview)
9 Modem Verify modem remote connection
10 ECG Verify basic operation with customer.
10-5-3 Input Power
10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection
Table 10-9 Mains Cable Inspection

1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.
2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that
3 Terminals
no strands may cause a short circuit.
4 Inlet Connector Inlet connector retainer is functional.
10-5-4 Cleaning
10-5-4-1 General Cleaning

Frequent and diligent cleaning of the Voluson® 730Expert ultrasound system reduces the risk of
spreading infection from person to person, and also helps to maintain a clean work environment.
Table 10-10 General Cleaning
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system.
1 Console Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
Caution: DO NOT allow any liquid to drip or seep into the system.
Monitor and Clean Top surface, Monitor and Touch Panel with a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth.
2
Touch Panel Caution: DO NOT spray any liquid directly onto the Covers, Monitor, keyboard, Touch Panel etc.

10-5-5 Physical Inspection
Table 10-11 Physical Checks

1 Labeling Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition.
2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.
3 Control Panel (Replace faulty components as required.)
Verify proper operation of Control Panel backlighting and TGC sliders.
Control Panel Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in acceptable direction. Ensure that
4
Movement it latches in position as required.
Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from
5 Wheels & Brakes moving, and release mechanism. Check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper
operation.
Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating.
6 Cables & Connectors
Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.
Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
7 Shielding & Covers
Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel key illuminations (flash once during system start-
up).
10 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel key illuminations (use keyboard test software).
11 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.
12 External Microphone Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test if available.
NOTICE There is no Microphone built in and released for Voluson® 730Expert.

!! NOTICE:
10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks

Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7.
View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1 View the Logs

1.) Review the system error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.

10-5-7 Probe Maintenance
10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks
Table 10-12 Probe Related Checks
1 Probes Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector
sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins.
2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
10-5-7-2 Basic Probe Care

The Basic User Manual provides a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and
disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. Review the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Expert for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and
equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
OK OK OK
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.
10-5-7-3 Basic Probe Cleaning

Refer to the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Expert for details on cleaning.
CAUTION Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s
!! CAUTION:
warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the Voluson® 730Expert
Basic User Manual and/or care card. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe
and/or Voluson® 730Expert system.
CAUTION Follow the Care Card instructions supplied with each probe (inside the transducer boxes)
!! CAUTION:
for disinfectants and gels that are compatible with the surface material of the probes.
CAUTION To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, when cleaning and handling probes,
!! CAUTION:
wear approved, non-allergenic disposable gloves.
NOTICE Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
!! NOTICE:
CAUTION
CAUTION:
Please be aware of the NEVER place or store a When disinfecting a probe, ensure
sensitive probe head. probe on its scan head! that there is sufficient space between
TAKE EXTREME CARE! the probe and the container bottom!

10-5-7-4 Disinfection by means of the RIC-Holder

Especially for Real-time 4D endocavity probes (RIC), it is necessary to take extreme care when
transporting the system with the probe attached, or during the disinfection process.
Inadequate handling may lead to dead elements, shocked head mechanics, etc.
The RIC-Holder (especially developed for RIC Real-time 4D endocavity probes) guarantees that the
sensitive probe head does not hit the bottom of the container during the disinfection procedure.
NOTE: Operation instructions are supplied with each RIC-Holder (KTZ225469).
To guarantee that the sensitive probe head does not hit the bottom of Endocavity Soaking Cup Kit
RIC-Holder Endocavity soaking cup kit is available at GE Accessory
the container, place the probe in the RIC Holder during the disinfection
(Order Nr. : E8385TA )
procedure.
OK
RIC-Holder
Disinfection fluid
RIC-Holder
Container

Section 10-6
Using a Phantom
Refer to the User Manual of the Phantom for information on using a phantom and quality assurance
tests. For measurement accuracy of the system review chapter 13.5 of the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Expert. To get comparable results, use Multi-purpose phantom, Model 539-05 from ATS
Laboratories Inc.
Section 10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1 Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC
60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of
cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer
to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.
WARNING
WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT
!! WARNING:
LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT
SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO
PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical
!! CAUTION:
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be
contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
!! CAUTION:
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures
before handling the equipment.
WARNING
WARNING Test the Voluson® 730Expert system, peripherals and probes for leakage current.
!! WARNING:
Excessive leakage current can cause FATAL INJURY OR DEATH.
High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for
electrical failure. DO NOT use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.
To minimize the risk of a probe causing electrical shock, the customer should observe the following
recommendations:
• DO NOT use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way

• Check probe leakage current:
* once a year on surface probes (or in accordance with your facilities QA program)
* once a year (twice a year is recommended) on endocavitary probes (or in accordance with
your facilities QA program)
* whenever probe damage is suspected
10-14 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom

10-7-2 GEHC Leakage Current Limits

The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment
Safety Standards. These limits are GEHC standards and in some cases are lower than the above
standards listed.
Table 10-13 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces
Country Normal Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral
USA N/A 0.3 mA 0.3 mA 0.3 mA
Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
Table 10-14 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface
and Cavity Probes
Normal
Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied
USA 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 5.0 mA
Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 5.0 mA
Table 10-15 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG
Connections
Normal
Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied
USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
NOTE: *Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to
determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.
The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site.
- Grounding Continuity
- Chassis Leakage Current
- Probe Leakage Current
- ECG Leakage Current
All measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer Model 600/600E built by Dale Technology
Corporation or equivalent device.

10-7-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet
tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported
to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester
The Dale 600 has self-contained lamps designed for testing the outlet wiring arrangement.
Plug the Dale 600 into each outlet to be tested comparing the lamp status.
.
Combination
of
Lights
CORRECT REVERSE OPEN OPEN HOT/GROUND

Condition POLARITY GROUND
WIRING HOT REVERSED
Figure 10-2 Dale 600 Outlet Test
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this
should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-16 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-4 Grounding Continuity

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
!! CAUTION:
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms.
Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1-1.
ACCESSIBLE METAL PARTS

Potential equilibrium connector
GROUND PIN
OHMMETER
Figure 10-3 Ground Continuity Test
CAUTION Lacquer is an isolation barrier! Resistor may be high-impedance!

!! CAUTION:
Measure only on blank parts, stated in Figure 10-3 above.
10-7-4-1 Meter Procedure

Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.
1.) Turn the Voluson® 730Expert unit OFF.

2.) Connect one of the Ohmmeter probes to the tested AC wall outlet (Ground pin).
3.) Using the other Ohmmeter probe, touch the exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Expert unit.
4.) Set the meter’s Function switch to the Resistance position.
5.) Set the meter's Polarity switch to the OFF (center) position.
6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.

10-7-4-2 Dale 600 - Ground Continuity

The Dale 600 measures line cord resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the meter’s
Chassis Cable clamp. Test the grounding continuity of the system to exposed metal parts in accordance
with the IEC 60601-1-1 procedure as above. Refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self
tests and operation. Record measured resistance of the grounding continuity. The ground wire
resistance should be less than 0.2 (Use any safety analyzer.)
Outlet Test
Lamps
Functions Normal
Selector Reverse
Polarity
Neutral
Open/Closed
Chassis
Cable
Clamp
Figure 10-4 Dale 600 Ground Continuity Test
10-7-4-2-1 Ground Continuity Testing Procedure with Dale 600 Meter

Follow these steps to test the Ground wire resistance.

2.) Plug the unit into the Dale 600 meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black
chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Expert unit.
4.) Set the meter’s Function switch to the Resistance position.
5.) Set the meter's Polarity switch to the OFF (center) position.
6.) Measure and record the Ground wire resistance.
This should be less than 0.2 Ohms.

10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
10-7-5-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal
parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power
line from the chassis.
The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be
made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest
reading.
DANGER Electric Shock Hazard.

!! DANGER:
When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, DO NOT not touch the unit!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
!! CAUTION:
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY
switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
10-7-5-2 Generic Procedure

The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from
accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF,
with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 60601-1 Clause 19 -
Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents
When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall
outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter.
This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will
be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is
shown in Table 10-13.

10-7-5-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure

When measuring system chassis currents with the Dale 600, always use the CHASSIS selection of the
external/chassis function switch. This requires the ground clip lead and changing the meters switches
in accordance with the IEC 60601-1.1. Refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self-test and
operation. Record the highest leakage current measured.
Follow these steps to test the unit for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Expert.
4.) Set the tester's “FUNCTION” switch to CHASSIS position.
Outlet Test
Lamps
Functions Normal
Selector Reverse
Polarity
Neutral
Open/Closed
Chassis
Cable
Clamp
Figure 10-6 Ground and Chassis Leakage Current Test
5.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points
6.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data on site.

10-7-5-4 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-13.
Record all data on the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-16 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Tester Neutral Test 1

Tester Polarity or Ground Probe Test 2 Test 3 Optional Optional
Unit Power Switch Switch Connector Wheel CRT Test 4 Test 5
Enter Name of tested peripheral here:
ON NORM OPEN
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REV OPEN
ON REV CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REV OPEN

OFF REV CLOSED
10-7-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground
10-7-6-1 Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads.
The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by
touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and
closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On.
For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the
worst case condition.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure
to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch.
Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
!! CAUTION:


Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and
reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead
switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Appliance power switch

(use both "off" and "on" positions) Patient lead selector switch (if any)
The connection is at service entrance (activated as required)
or on the supply side of a separately
Polarity reversing switch
derived system
(use both positions) Patient connected leads
Appliance
H (Black)
H
POWER
N
OUTLET
N (White)
Internal
G
circuitry Between each patient
lead and ground
G (Green)
Building Insulating surface

ground
Current meter
Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot
"open" and "closed" positions) N = Neutral (grounded)
G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-7 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads
10-7-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure

The Dale 600 provides five snap type ECG buttons for testing patient leads. Snap on all patient leads
to the meter and assure that the ground clip is connected to the system’s ground terminal. Select the
meter’s LEAD-GND function. Select and test each ECG lead positions (except “ALL”) of the LEAD
selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in “PATIENT LEAD LEAKAGE” table
in the “PM CHECKLIST”. Record the highest leakage current measured for each Power selection.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
!! CAUTION:
Follow these steps to test the ECG module for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Expert unit.
4.) Connect the patient leads to the corresponding snaps located at the upper front of the Dale 600/
600E. Lead nomenclature for this test is not important.

10-7-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d)
Figure 10-8 ECG Leakage Current Test
5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO GROUND position to measure the patient lead to
ground leakage current.
6.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the
power condition combinations.
Table 10-17 Testing Power Conditions
ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch

ON NORM CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF REVERSE OPEN

10-7-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d)

7.) Record the patient lead to ground leakage current measured on the data sheet.
8.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO LEAD position to measure the lead to lead leakage
current.
9.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the
10.)Record the lead to lead leakage current measured on the data sheet.
11.)Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD ISO position to measure the patient lead isolation
current.
12.)Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the
13.)Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST and read the isolation current. To apply the voltage to the
lead safely, the voltage is only applied when the rocker switch is depressed to ISO TEST.
14.)Record the patient lead isolation current measured on the data sheet.
10-7-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function
selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL)
on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the
highest leakage current measured.
10-7-7-1 Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests

NEUTRAL POLARITY
1.) Closed Normal

2.) Open Normal
3.) Closed Reversed
4.) Open Reversed
10-7-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function
selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to
ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
!! CAUTION:
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed.
NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous
tests.

10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all
data on the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-18 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
Maximum
Allowance Limit
AC Power GROUND
Source GROUND OPEN CLOSED
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test 115V 10uA 10uA
and
220/240V 500uA 10uA
Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test
Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
AC Power Maximum
Source Allowance Limit
115V 20uA
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test
220/240V 5mA
Table 10-20 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
Tester Tester Tester Lead Selector

ECG Polarity Ground
Power Switch Switch RL RA LA LL C
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF REVERSE OPEN

10-7-9 Probe Leakage Current Test
10-7-9-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who
is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.

Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and
reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst
case condition.
POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH

H (BLACK) PROBE
CONSOLE
POWER N (WHITE)
OUTLET
G (GREEN)
MOMENTARY
SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST
METER
Figure 10-9 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in
line voltage and test lead placement.
10-7-9-3 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter

The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter
utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins.
The probe's imaging area is immersed in a saline solution along with a grounding probe from the
meter to complete the current path. Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds a free
ion to the water, making it conductive. Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt or 1/2 gram salt per 1 liter of
water. If saline is not available, a mixture of 1 quart water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed
thoroughly, will substitute.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.
!! CAUTION:
Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Connect the probe for test with the meter's appropriate adapter.
4.) Plug the saline probe into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector.
5.) Plug the probe adapter into the meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”.

10-7-9-3 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter (cont’d)
Figure 10-10 Transducer Source Leakage Current Test
6.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position.

7.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath.
8.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half.
9.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-21 for every transducer.
11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Preventive Maintenance (PM) data or
corrective actions taken.
CAUTION Make sure not to immerse the probe into the liquid beyond the immersion level given in the
!! CAUTION:
picture below.

10-7-9-4 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure
Figure 10-11 Check Without Probe Adapter
Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the external probe into the meter's (Dale 600) “EXTERNAL” connector.
4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position.
5.) Connect the probe for test with the connector of the console.
6.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath.
CAUTION Make sure not to immerse the probe into the liquid beyond the immersion level.
!! CAUTION:
7.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half.
8.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
9.) Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-21 for every transducer.
10.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Preventive Maintenance (PM) data or
corrective actions taken.

10-7-9-5 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than values shown in Table 10-14 and Table 10-15.
Record all data on the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see: page 10-31).
CAUTION When the units power is ON, never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral. Be sure to turn
OFF power to the unit before switching them, using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL
switch. Failure to comply with this warning may cause damage to the unit!
!! CAUTION:
Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current
Transducer Tested:
Tester Power Polarity Tester GROUND or

Unit Power Switch NUETRAL Switch Measurement
ON NORM OPEN
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REV OPEN
ON REV CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED

OFF REV OPEN
OFF REV CLOSED

Section 10-8
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
10-8-1 Chassis Fails
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed,
or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or
owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used
instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are
reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and
the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-8-2 Probe Fails

• Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe
leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line
voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact
probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate
space on the check list.
• Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor
connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
10-8-3 Peripheral Fails

Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
10-8-3-1 Still Fails

If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones,
one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
10-8-4 New Unit

If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit
a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
10-8-5 ECG Fails

Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.
10-30 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

Customer Name: System ID: Dispatch Number / Date Performed: Warranty/Contract/HBS
System Type Model Number: Serial Number: Manufacture Date:
Probe 1: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number:
* Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING

OK? or Physical Inspection and Cleaning
Functional Check (if applicable) N/A (if applicable) Inspect Clean
B-Mode Function Console
M-Mode Function Monitor
Doppler Modes Functions Touch Panel
Color Modes Functions Air Filter
3D-Mode Function Probe Holders
Applicable Software Options External I/O
Applicable Hardware Options Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks
Control Panel Cables and Connectors
Monitor Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-RW, MOD, Printers)
Touch Panel
Measurement Accuracy
COMMENTS:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Max Value Value
Electrical Test Performed Allowed Measured OK? Comments
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)
System Ground Continuity
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Wheel
Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT
Patient Lead Source Leakage

(Lead to Ground)

(Lead to Lead)

(Isolation)
Peripheral 1 Leakage Current
Peripheral 1Ground Continuity
PROBES
Probe Number Max Value Max Value

(from previous page) Allowed Measured OK? Comments
Probe 1:
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Probe 9:
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.
Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________
10-32 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

INDEX
Numerics Block diagram
2D Mode Checks BackEnd Processor, 5-36
Functional Checks, 4-8 CKV - Video Converter Board, 5-38
4D Shift Control, 6-12 CPD - Beamformer Sub-board, 5-28
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-34
CPU + Beamformer (CPR), 5-27
A,B FrontEnd Processor, 5-26
Access (Extended) Motordriver on CPP, 5-35
Windows Start Menu, 5-83 Top Level Architecture, 5-10
Acoustic Noise Output, 2-5 Voluson 730Expert, 5-11
Activation of Options, 8-19 Voluson 730Expert Basic, 5-4
Additional Operating Modes Bluetooth Deskjet Printer
Functional Checks, 4-10 Installation Canon Pixma MP600/MP610, 3-35
Adjustment Installation HP 5600 Series, 3-35
DVD Recorder Settings, 3-16 Installation Olivetti Job Jet 210, 3-35
Keyboard Layout, 6-9 Bluetooth Printer
Monitor, 6-2 Connection Scheme, 3-22
Printer Settings, 3-51 Board Description
Trackball, 6-6 BackEnd, 5-39
Write Speed of DVD/CD Recorder, 4-30 FrontEnd, 5-27
Administration of Full Backup data, 4-36 Boot Up, 3-26, , 4-2
Air Flow Control, 5-67 Bottom Housing
Alpha-numeric Keyboard Replacement Procedure, 8-75
Replacement Procedure, 8-80 Bottom Housing of GEU
Archiving Images, 4-40 Replacement Procedure, 8-71
Asic Select / Apertur Min, 7-32
Auxiliary Devices
Connection Scheme, 3-8 C
B/W Video Printer Calculation Measurements
Connection Scheme, 3-19 Functional Checks, 4-25
BackEnd General remarks to perform, 4-25
Board Description, 5-39 CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80 only)
CKV - DMA-Controller/Video-Card, 5-39 Replacement Procedure, 8-104
CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card, 5-39 Cine
CPM - PC-Motherboard Card, 5-39 Functional Checks, 4-21
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-40 CKV - Video manager Board
Data Flow, 5-37 Replacement Procedure, 8-127
Hard Disk Drive, 5-39 Collecting System Information, 7-2
PCI VGA Card, 5-39 Color Flow Modes
SBC - Single Board Computer, 5-39 Functional Checks, 4-15
BackEnd Boards Common Diagnostics, 7-13
Replacement Procedure, 8-125 Compliance, 1-11
BackEnd Processor Connection
Theory, 5-36 External USB-Devices, 3-24
Backup Connection Panel (GES)
Patient Database and Images, 4-31 Replacement Procedure, 8-49
Beamformer Test Connection Scheme
Asic Select / Apertur Min, 7-32 Auxiliary Devices, 3-8
Summation Bus Test, 7-28 B/W Video Printer, 3-19
Before Recovering the Hard disk, 5-86 Bluetooth Printer, 3-22
Index I
Digital Color Printer, 3-21 in case of System crash or Errors, 7-3

DVD Recorder (DVR), 3-15 Daylight Saving Time (DST), 6-11
ECG, 3-11 Debrief Guidelines
Foot Switch, 3-10 Functional Checks after FRU replacement, 8-165
Global Modem, 3-12 Delete
Line Printer, 3-20 Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-39
S-VHS Video Recorder, 3-13 Diagnostics, 5-71
Connectivity Digital Color Printer
Worksheet, 3-66 Connection Scheme, 3-21
Contact Information, 1-11 Installation UP-D21MD, 3-33
Control Console Installation UP-D23MD, 3-33
Rotation, 5-65 Disable Windows Messenger Service, 6-13
Transport Lock, 6-5 Disconnection
Control Console Test, 7-43 External USB-Devices, 3-24
Control Panel, 4-4 Disk Drive Module (GEM)
CPD - Sub-board on CPR Replacement Procedure, 8-88
Replacement Procedure, 8-119 Distance Rod on GEU
CPE - Extension Board Replacement Procedure, 8-70
Replacement Procedure, 8-129 Door for Probe Cables
CPK - Motherboard Replacement Procedure, 8-45
Replacement Procedure, 8-121 Doppler Mode Checks
CPM - PC-Motherboard Functional Checks, 4-14
Replacement Procedure, 8-130 DVD Recorder (DVR)
CPN6-Module Connection Scheme, 3-15
Theory, 5-53 DVD Recorder Settings
CPN80-81 Module Adjustment, 3-16
Theory, 5-57 DVD+(R)W Drive
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board Replacement Procedure, 8-89
Replacement Procedure, 8-115 Theory, 5-52
CPR - Beamformer Board
Replacement Procedure, 8-118
CPU - Probe Connector Board E
Replacement Procedure, 8-122 ECG
CPY - Power Switch Board Connection Scheme, 3-11
Replacement Procedure, 8-101 Functional Checks, 4-42
CPZ - Cover Board Theory, 5-52
Replacement Procedure, 8-117 ECG Module (MAN6)
CRB - (USB to IDE) Converter Board Replacement Procedure, 8-161
Replacement Procedure, 8-93 Electrical
CRS - Signal Processing Board Requirements, 2-2
Replacement Procedure, 8-116 Electrical Safety, 1-8
CRS Test Electronic User Manual (EUM)
Analog Test, 7-38 Loading Procedure, 8-15
RAM Test, 7-38 Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-11
CRW - CW-Doppler Board EMC
Replacement Procedure, 8-120 Electromagnetic Compatibility, 1-10
Customer Assistance, 1-11 EMI Protection, 3-7
Error Messages, 7-73
External I/O
D Theory, 5-50
Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-9 External USB-Devices
Data Flow Connection, 3-24
BackEnd, 5-37 Disconnection, 3-24
Control Description, 5-12
Data needed
II -
F Required Equipment, 4-1

Fan Touch Panel, 4-5
Replacement Procedure, 8-94 Volume Modes, 4-17
Fan for GEF-box (2 fan) Fuses on CPE-Board
Replacement Procedure, 8-148 for Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-61
Fan for GEF-box (single)
Fax Driver Removal, 6-17 G
Foot Rest GEF Module
Replacement Procedure, 8-66 Main board Chassis, 5-25
Foot Switch GEF-Box
Connection, 5-21 Removement Procedure, 8-109
Connection Scheme, 3-10 Gel holder (PHG1)
Formatting Replacement Procedure, 8-87
Media, 4-29 General Cleaning, 10-10
Front Handle General Operation and Selection
Replacement Procedure, 8-77 in LINUX (and BIOS) menu, 5-85
Front Wheel Generic Measurements
Replacement Procedure, 8-64 Functional Checks, 4-22
FrontEnd Global Modem
Board Description, 5-27 Connection Scheme, 3-12
CPK - Motherboard of the GEF-Module, 5-29 LEDs, 5-22
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-34 Location in the Unit, 5-22
CPR - Beamformer Board, 5-27 Guide for Probe cables
CPU - Probe Connector Board, 5-27 Replacement Procedure, 8-48
CPZ - Cover Board, 5-29
CRS - Signal Processor Board, 5-30
CRW - CW Doppler Board, 5-29 H
FrontEnd Boards
Hard disk (HDD)
Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings)
Reporting tool (S.M.A.R.T), 7-15
Delete, 4-39
Hard Disk Drive, 5-39
Load, 4-37
Hardkey Board
Loading Procedure, 8-12
Restoring various Data, 8-32
Hardkeys
Save, 4-35
Transfer of Patient Database and Images, 8-29
Hardware Check, 8-151
Functional Checks, 4-1
Hardware Options, 5-21
2D Mode, 4-8
Hardware Test
Additional Operating Modes, 4-10
Beamformer SelfDiagnostic, 5-80, , 7-33
After FRU replacement (Debrief Guidelines), 8-165
Beamformer Test, 5-80, , 7-27
Brakes, 4-43
BM Test, 5-80, , 7-34
Calculation Measurements, 4-25
CRS Test, 7-38
Cine Mode, 4-21
Front-End Test, 5-80, , 7-33
Color Flow Modes, 4-15
Geraete Temperatur, 5-80, , 7-33
Control Panel, 4-4
PW-Doppler Test, 5-80, , 7-38
Doppler Modes, 4-14
Hardware Tests, 5-80
ECG Checkout, 4-42
Hazard Icons, 1-4
Generic Measurements, 4-22
Hide Windows Taskbar, 6-15
M Mode, 4-12
How to check power, 7-4
Mechanical, 4-43
How to check status of the Diagnostic LED´s, 7-4
MO-Drive, 4-28
How to delete the Service Database, 7-25
Monitor Display, 4-6
How to repair Databases (*.mdb), 7-23
Peripherals, 4-42
How to test if CPR forces CPP to Power off TX, 7-52
Probes/Connector Usage, 4-26
How to use the Auto Tester, 7-20
- III
Human Safety, 1-7 Functional Checks, 4-12

Main board Chassis
GEF Module, 5-25
I Main Power Connector
iLinq Interactive Platform, 5-69 Replacement Procedure, 8-106
Image Management Main Power Module (CPN)
Functional Checks, 4-27 Replacement Procedure, 8-95
Inrush Current, 2-3 Mains Power Switch (F1)
Installation Replacement Procedure, 8-105
Bluetooth Deskjet Printer, 3-35 Mains Power Switch and Input Connector
Digital Color Printer UP-D21MD, 3-33 Replacement Procedure, 8-107
Digital Color Printer UP-D23MD, 3-33 Maintenance System
Line Printer HP 990cxi, 3-31 LINUX, 5-85
Line Printer HP 995c, 3-31 Map Network Drive, 3-65
Internal I/O Mechanical Checks
Theory, 5-41 Control Console, 4-43
Mechanical Safety, 1-7
Media
Formatting, 4-29
K
Minimum Configuration
Key Caps
to boot up to certain levels, 7-40
to boot without using Ultrasound Hardware, 7-39
Keyboard Layout
to scan, 7-42
Adjustment, 6-9
Models Covered, 1-2
KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN)
MO-Drive
Theory, 5-52
L Monitor
Label Locations, 1-9 Adjustment, 6-2
Line Printer Replacement Procedure, 8-52
Connection Scheme, 3-20 Theory, 5-49
Installation HP 990cxi, 3-31 Monitor Display
Installation HP 995c, 3-31 Functional Checks, 4-6
LINUX Monitor Front Housing
Maintenance System, 5-85 Replacement Procedure, 8-56
Memory Check, 5-109 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover)
List of Abbreviations, 9-2 Replacement Procedure, 8-54
Lithium Battery on PC-Board Monitor Mounting Plate
Replacement Procedure, 8-139 Replacement Procedure, 8-60
Load Monitor Switch Assembly
Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-37 Replacement Procedure, 8-58
User Settings Only (Application Settings), 4-33
Loading Procedure
Electronic User Manual (EUM), 8-15
N
Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 8-12
Network IP Address Configuration, 3-64
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS), 8-5
User Settings Only (Application Settings), 8-12
Location of Software DVD (System DVD), 3-8
Loudspeaker for Top Console O
Replacement Procedure, 8-86 Options
Activation, 8-19
M
M Mode Checks
P
IV -
PC Diagnostics, 7-14 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4

Audio Test, 7-18 Regulatory, 6-1
CD/DVD Drive Test, 7-16 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates, 5-73
CPU Tests, 7-14 Replacement Procedures
Hard Drive Tests, 7-15 Alpha-numeric Keyboard, 8-80
Keyboard Test, 7-18 BackEnd Boards, 8-125
Memory Tests, 7-16 Bottom Housing, 8-75
Monitor Test, 7-19 Bottom Housing of GEU, 8-71
PCI Board Configuration Test, 7-17 CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80 only), 8-104
USB Test, 7-17 CKV - Video manager Board, 8-127
Video Test, 7-16 Connection Panel (GES), 8-49
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests), 7-18 CPD - Sub-board on CPR, 8-119
PC-Board "IBASE" (KTZ208570) CPE - Extension Board, 8-129
Replacement Procedure, 8-131 CPK - Motherboard, 8-121
PC-Board "Kontron 2" (KTZ300422) CPM - PC-Motherboard, 8-130
Replacement Procedure, 8-134 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 8-115
PC-Board "Kontron" (KTZ209332) CPR - Beamformer Board, 8-118
Replacement Procedure, 8-134 CPU - Probe Connector Board, 8-122
Peripherals CPY - Power Switch Board, 8-101
Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-51 CPZ - Cover Board, 8-117
Functional Checks, 4-42 CRB - (USB to IDE) Converter Board, 8-93
Physical Dimensions, 2-5 CRS - Signal Processing Board, 8-116
Power Distribution, 5-53 CRW - CW-Doppler Board, 8-120
CPN6 - Primary Power Supply, 5-53 Digipots and TGC Slide controls, 8-79
CPN80-81 Primary Power Supply, 5-57 Disk Drive Module (GEM), 8-88
Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-61 Distance Rod on GEU, 8-70
Power Off / Shutdown, 3-28, , 4-3 Door for Probe Cables, 8-45
Theory, 5-63 DVD+(R)W Drive, 8-89
Power On, 3-26, , 4-2 ECG Module (MAN6), 8-161
Power On/Boot Up Procedure, 5-62 Fan, 8-94
Power Requirements, 2-2 Fan for GEF-box (2 fan), 8-148
electrical, 2-2 Fan for GEF-box (single), 8-149
Power Stability Requirements, 2-3 Foot Rest, 8-66
Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6 Front Handle, 8-77
Printer Installation, 3-30 Front Wheel, 8-64
Printer Installation manually, 3-46 FrontEnd Boards, 8-113
Printer Remote Control Selection, 3-55 GEF-Box, 8-109
Printer Settings Gel holder (PHG1), 8-87
Adjustment, 3-51 Guide for Probe cables, 8-48
Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-12 Hard disk (HDD), 8-140
Probe Holder Hardkey Board, 8-81
Replacement Procedure, 8-75 Hardkeys, 8-84
Probes, 3-63 Key Caps (by special native language keys), 8-156
Disconnecting, 4-42 KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN), 8-108
Probes/Connector Usage Lithium Battery on PC-Board, 8-139
Functional Checks, 4-26 Loudspeaker for Top Console, 8-86
Product Icons, 1-5 Main Power Connector, 8-106
Main Power Module (CPN), 8-95
Mains Power Switch (F1), 8-105
R Mains Power Switch and Input Connector, 8-107
Rear Cover MO-Drive, 8-91
Replacement Procedure, 8-38 Monitor, 8-52
Rear Wheel Monitor Front Housing, 8-56
Replacement Procedure, 8-61, , 8-63 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover), 8-54
Reassembly the system, 8-152 Monitor Mounting Plate, 8-60
- V
Monitor Switch Assembly, 8-58 S-VHS Video Recorder

Monitor Task Lamp, 8-59 Connection Scheme, 3-13
Options, 8-19 System Components, 5-3
PC-Board "IBASE" (KTZ208570), 8-131 System Configuration
PC-Board "Kontron 2" (KTZ300422), 8-134 How to change Language, 3-57
PC-Board "Kontron" (KTZ209332), 8-134 How to change Touch Panel Scheme, 3-57
Probe Holder, 8-75 How to change Video Norm, 3-58
Rear Cover, 8-38 How to enter Date and Time, 3-57
Rear Wheel, 8-61, , 8-63 How to enter Hospital Name, 3-57
Side Panel (left and right), 8-46 System Maintenance, 10-8
Side Panel (left), 8-40 System Manufacturer, 1-12
Side Panel (right), 8-43 System Voltage Settings, 3-7
Standby Switch, 8-50
Top Cover, 8-39
Trackball, 8-78 T
Trackball top fixation ring, 8-79 Task Lamp
User Interface (GEU), 8-67 Replacement Procedure, 8-59
VGA graphic card, 8-138 Theory
Re-programming Serial Number, 8-128 General, 5-2
Restoring various "Full Backup" data, 8-32 Top Console
Returning/Shipping Theory, 5-44
Probes and Repair Parts, 1-10, , 8-5 Top Cover
Replacement Procedures, 8-39
Touch Panel
S Calibration, 6-7
S.M.A.R.T. (Reporting tool) Functional Checks, 4-5
Hard disk (HDD), 7-15 Trackball
Safety Considerations, 1-7 Adjustment, 6-6
Save Replacement Procedure, 8-78
Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-35 Transfer of Patient Database and Images
User Settings Only (Application Settings), 4-32 using "Full Backup" function, 8-29
Screen Captures, 7-5 using cross-over network cable, 8-21
Service Adjustments, 6-1 via Sonoview, 8-34
Service Platform Troubleshooting
Access/Security, 5-68 Boot up to certain levels, 7-40
Service Home Page, 5-70 DVD/CD+(R)W, 7-69
Service Page, 5-74 Error Messages, 7-73
Service Platform (SSW) MO-Drive, 7-69
Upgrade Procedure, 8-13 Monitor, 7-65
Sharing patient data and images Network, 7-70
between systems within the same network, 8-34 Screen Captures, 7-5
Shutdown Procedure, 3-28, , 4-3 User Interface, 7-43
Side Panel (left and right) Voltage Points, 7-4
Replacement Procedure, 8-46 Troubleshooting Trees
Side Panel (left) Bad B-Image Quality, 7-54
Replacement Procedure, 8-40 Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality, 7-58
Side Panel (right) Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality, 7-59
Replacement Procedure, 8-43 No Audio Output on Loudspeakers, 7-63
Software No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor, 7-48
Architecture, 5-23 No ECG line or ECG signal, 7-64
Data Location, 5-24 No Echo visible in Ultrasound field, 7-51
Software Options, 5-17 Noise disturbs the Image, 7-57
Standby Switch Printer, 7-67
Replacement Procedure, 8-50 System does not Power OFF/Shutdown, 7-62
Summation Bus Test, 7-28 System does not Power ON/Boot up, 7-45
VI -
Trackball, 7-61
Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-pattern, 7-56
Unable to Record to VCR, 7-66
Volume Drive (3D/4D), 7-60
U
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS)
Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4
Upgrade Procedure
Service Platform (SSW), 8-13
User Interface (GEU)
User Settings Only (Application Settings)
Utilities, 5-72
V
VGA graphic card
Video
Specifications, 3-62
Virtual Console Observation, 7-10
Voltage Settings, 3-7
Volume Modes
W
Warnings and Cautions, 1-7
Weight without Monitor and Peripherals, 2-5
What is EMC?, 1-10
Windows Start Menu
Access (Extended), 5-83
- VII
VIII -
© 2004 - 2008, General Electric Company.
GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
GE Medical Systems - Kretztechnik GmbH & Co OHG
Tiefenbach 15
A-4871 Zipf
Austria
www.gehealthcare.com

V730e BT04 PRP - Kti105937 - 3 - 00

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

V730e BT04 PRP - Kti105937 - 3 - 00

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

P R E L I M I N A R Y (MAY 27, 2008)

• Voluson® 730Expert systems with Serial number A10001 - A11999

ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

Part Number: KTI105937

• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM

• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

• KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

• TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

• ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ∆ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.

• EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHETŐ

• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

• TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.

• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.

• DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

• ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.

• ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA IŠLEISTAS TIK ANGLŲ KALBA.

• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.

• NINIEJSZY PODRĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĘZYKU

• ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.

• ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТСЯ

• TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRUČKA JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE.

• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.

• BU SERVİS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA İNGİLİZCE OLARAK SAĞLANMIŞTIR.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.

Revision Date Reason for change

List of Effected Pages

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Rev History/LOEP Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts

Chapter 5 - Components and

Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Index

Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10

General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

xii Table of Contents

Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Preparing for Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Connection of Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Table of Contents xiii

Completing the Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26

xiv Table of Contents

Network IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64

Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 66

Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24

Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41

Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43

Table of Contents xvii

XBeam CRI - CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging . . . . . . . 5 - 19

Main board Chassis GEF Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

Table of Contents xix

Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67

Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70

Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83